JP2020032207A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: First ball entry means and second ball entry means are provided at positions where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter. A first privilege is imparted based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a second privilege is imparted based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. Based on the satisfaction of a first condition, the game ball that has reached a specific area can enter the first ball entry means and variable means can be changed to a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. On the other hand, based on the satisfaction of a second condition different from the first condition, the variable means can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means by variable control means, and a game ball can enter second ball entry means. Thereby, the player's interest in the game can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 110

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, there is a need for further enhancement of interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which a game ball fired by the launching means can reach, and a game reaching the specific area A first privilege is provided at a position where a ball can enter, a second ball entry means, and a first privilege is given based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. A first privilege granting means, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, A game ball that has reached the region can enter the first ball entry means, and a first position where it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and it becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry means, A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the second ball entry means can enter the ball; Variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position based on establishment of a first condition and changing the variable means to the second position based on establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. Prepare.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other on the board. The variable means is disposed between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry. And a third position where it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the means. The variable control means sets the variable means to the third position based on satisfaction of the first condition. The position is changed from the third position to the first position, and the position is changed from the third position to the second position based on satisfaction of the second condition.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the first ball entry means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second ball entry means is provided. The means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the first position is such that a traveling direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is the second direction. The second position is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is the position where the third position is the specific position. This is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the region is likely to be different from the first direction and the second direction.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the variable means includes a first variable member capable of moving in and out on a board, and the first variable member. A second variable member that is different from the first variable member, wherein the first position is such that the first variable member protrudes to the near side in front view with respect to the board surface, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. Wherein the second position is such that the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member projects toward the near side of the board surface in front view, The first variable member constitutes a flow path capable of guiding a game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding from a board surface, and the second variable member includes: The game ball reaching the specific area by projecting with respect to the board It constitutes a flow path inducible into ball entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which the game ball fired by the launching means can reach, and a game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball. First ball entry means provided at a suitable position, a second ball entry means, and a first privilege grant that grants a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. Means, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and a game reaching the specific area. A first position at which a ball can enter the first ball entry means, and which is difficult to enter the second ball entry means; and a first position at which the ball becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry means; and A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means; Based on the establishment of the matter is varied to the first position, and a variable control means for variably to the second position based on the establishment of the different second condition from the first condition.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are separated from each other by a predetermined distance on the board surface. The variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with a case where the variable means is separately provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, and the first ball entry means. And a third position where it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the second ball entry means. The variable control means sets the variable means under the first condition. The third position is changed from the third position to the first position based on the establishment, and the third position is changed from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of the second condition.

  Accordingly, in a state where neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to enter the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit, so that either the first condition or the second condition is used. There is an effect that a game can be played in the expectation that will be established.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area. The second ball entry means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the first position is a game ball that has reached the specific area. Is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the second position is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction. The three positions are positions at which the advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be different from any of the first direction and the second direction.

  Thereby, in the first direction and the second direction, the possibility that the game ball that has reached the specific area in the state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied progresses is low, and the first direction and the second direction are different from the first area and the first direction. The configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration from the specific area to the second ball entry means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of any one of the first to fourth aspects, the variable means includes a first variable member capable of performing a retracting operation on a board surface, A first variable member different from the first variable member, wherein the first position is such that the first variable member protrudes to the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the second variable member The second position is such that the first variable member is buried in the panel surface, and the second variable member projects forward from the panel surface in front of the panel surface. Wherein the first variable member constitutes a flow path capable of guiding a game ball that has reached the specific area by projecting to a board surface to the first ball entry means, The second variable member reaches the specific area by projecting from the board surface. Is a game ball which constitutes a flow path capable directed to the second ball entrance means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball entry means that can enter the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three-symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third-symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the continuous transformation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of successful transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in case of successful transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when transformation failed in the continuous transformation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a transition effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows a temporal change of the effect mode of the development effect. FIG. (A), (b) is a figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production mode when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect was set is performed in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of a second random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the transformation effect selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the regulation content of the development effect mode selection table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a transformation setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart showing the process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effective period performed. It is a flowchart which shows the process in a success notification mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in a failure notification mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the transition effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation effect related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production mode in the case of the continuous display in which the maximum number of transformations was set to four in the second embodiment. It is. (A) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment. is there. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the transformation effect selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the sound lamp control in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the development effect form selection table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) shows the regulation of the period selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed production update processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 2 during an effective period performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed processing during a display period performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a transformation possibility determination table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a development effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an audio lamp according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the transformation possibility judgment table set in the ROM of the control device, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 14D is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of the non-pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio ramp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a process 4 during an effective period executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed transformation setting processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the search effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. (A) In the fifth embodiment, an effect when a variable display in which a continuous make-up effect is set is executed in a state where a player determined to have a low participation frequency in the continuous make-up effect is playing a game. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of an aspect, (b) is a state in which the player determined to have high participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect in the fifth embodiment is playing a game, It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production mode when the fluctuation | variation display which set the continuous transformation effect was performed. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the number of valid periods set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a table. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production update processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process performed in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process 5 during the valid period executed by the MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process in the notification mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 5 during the transition effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing tendency update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production | presentation mode of the transition production | presentation in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a case where the left specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment is in a state where a ball can enter, and (b) is a right specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment. It is the front perspective view which showed the case where it was in the ball possible state. (A) is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Rb in the sixth embodiment is arranged at the protruding position. (C) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is located at the protruding position. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st hit type selection table set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is main control in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the moving member in the modification of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the moving member in the modification of the sixth embodiment, and (c) is the sixth embodiment. It is a side view of the moving member in the modification of form, (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a flowing direction of a game ball in a state where a moving member and a left specific winning opening are close to each other in a modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a view showing a flowing direction of a game ball in a state where a moving member and a right specific winning opening are close to each other. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a winning combination prize device of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning exchange prize device on the XCIV-XCIV line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the right V release pattern is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player makes a left hit, and (b) and (c) show It is a figure showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the right V release pattern is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player makes a right hit. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection effect performed in the 1st round of the big hit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern of right V is set in 7th Embodiment, (b) is 7th Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a temporal change of a movable position of each movable member when an open pattern is set. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to a seventh embodiment. (B) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the specified content of (a), (c) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit related command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a closing command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sure change winning command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a movable member in the eighth embodiment. It is a side view when seen from the front view left side. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state where the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at an intermediate position, and (b) is a state where the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at a protruding position. It is the front perspective view which showed the state. (A) is a figure which shows a temporal change of the movable position when the movable member in 8th Embodiment is moved by the movable pattern A, (b) is a figure in which the movable member in 8th Embodiment is a movable pattern B FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a change with time in a movable position when the movable position is moved in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed the structure of the rotation member in the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed the falling path of the right-hitting game ball in the ninth embodiment for each movable position of the electric accessory. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. (B) is a second hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of (a), (c) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the electric accessory operation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the detour combination thing in a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the big hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state where the opening and closing door of the right variable winning apparatus in the eleventh embodiment is closed, and (b) is an opening and closing state of the opening and closing door of the right variable winning apparatus in the eleventh embodiment. It is the front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being performed. (A) is a sectional view showing a state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a sectional view of the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state which was completely closed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a temporal change in the state of the right specific winning opening when an open pattern allowing V winning is set in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is an eleventh embodiment. In the embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing a temporal change of the state of the right specific winning opening when an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult is set. It is a figure showing in more detail the state of an opening and closing door during one opening period in the case where an opening pattern in which a V prize was possible was set in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of a jackpot in which an open pattern in which a V winning is possible is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a probability change prize winning device in a modification of a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the state of the movable member in the big hit game in each modification of 7th Embodiment, and each flow-path distribution valve. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages of a “sand beach stage” and a “deep sea stage”. ing. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “sand beach stage” → “the deep sea stage” ”→“ Sandy stage ”→ ・ ・ ・ repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, a “sand beach stage” is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At a lower part of the lower plate 50 in a front view, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (second symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the ordinary entrance 67. Symbol). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to these jackpot types (Game value) is given to the player.

  Also, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display a special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has been hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It will be in an easy state. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). When the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed) as an added value after the jackpot. This high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next special symbol jackpot. On the other hand, after the “big hit B” is completed, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times as an added value.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (while the special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time reduction state", it is referred to as "normal symbol normal state", which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is a normal state (a state where the hit probability is lower than during the time reduction period).

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common, and after the end of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot, it becomes the “high probability state of the special symbol” Or "normal design time saving". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Further, as a normal symbol time-saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is increased, or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per normal symbol is increased. Is also good.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (spot jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and displays three symbol columns of, for example, left, middle, and right by controlling display contents by a display control device 114 described later. Is done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is constituted by ten types of special symbols imitating numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the game is over.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the activated line in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the main symbol composed of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to a “probable variation symbol”. When the “big hit A”, which is a 16R probability change big hit, occurs, the same combination of the probability change symbols may be stopped and displayed. A main symbol composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to a "normal symbol". When the "big hit B" which is the 16R normal big hit occurs, the same combination of the normal symbols is always stopped and displayed. In addition, even in a part of the case where "big hit A" is reached, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Thereby, even when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be expected that the big hit A has occurred.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and the The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character is combined with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol.

  A small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view. The small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the case where the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4 is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action in the main display area Dm, or a display effect such as an effect of urging the user to press the frame button 22. If you are. During the execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more intuitive effect. Further, during the execution of the display effect, by displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 simply, it is easy for the player to continue the variable display of the third symbol. Can understand.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol formed of a black circle is displayed. As described above, if a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The same number of suspended symbols displayed as the number of suspended balls displayed on the sub-display area Ds is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four, a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in accordance with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is displayed by a number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a continuous transformation effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a reach state occurs during the fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, the reach state indicates a state in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the main symbol having the same number, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed so that the player can recognize that there is a possibility that three identical symbols will be aligned, so that the player's expectation of the jackpot is improved. Can be.

  The continuous transformation effect is an effect that is performed after the reach state occurs to further improve the player's expectation of the jackpot, and the details of which will be described later, but the boys displayed in the main display area Dm. The character 811 (see FIG. 5A) transforms 0 to n times (n is a natural number of 1 or more) (the mode is changed) according to the passage of time or the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 by the player. ) Production. In this continuous transformation effect, basically, the larger the number of transformations of the character 811 is, the higher the expectation of the big hit becomes, and the character 811 may transform five times at the maximum.

  Note that the maximum number of transformations in one continuous make-up effect (the effect type of the continuous make-up effect) is determined before starting the continuous make-up effect. More specifically, one of five times is determined by a lottery using a transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. This continuous transformation production is completed when the transformation of the predetermined maximum number of times succeeds or the production time set for each production type of the continuous transformation production is reached before reaching the maximum number of times. You. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is determined by lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b. In other words, the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the type of the continuous transformation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The maximum number of transformations can be determined before starting the continuous transformation effect. I just need. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of continuous transformation effects may be set according to the number of changes after the end of the previous jackpot. In the case where the upper limit number is increased as the number of fluctuations increases, the player can feel a merit of continuing to deviate from the special symbol lottery. Even if a state in which the player keeps coming off (so-called addiction) occurs, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for the game. In addition, in the case where the upper limit number is increased as the number of times of change is smaller, when a jackpot is won at a short interval (a so-called extended state), a merit can be felt besides obtaining a prize ball. Can make the player more entertaining. Furthermore, if the upper limit number is increased in a specific range (for example, the range of the change number is 100 to 200), the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific range can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where a transformation development mode indicating that the continuous transformation effect is started (developing into a continuous transformation effect) is displayed. is there. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a boy character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and a horizontally long rectangular display area is provided above the character 811. HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, characters "continuous transformation chance" and characters "expected degree UP as the number of transformations increases" are displayed. The “continuous transformation chance” is a production name indicating a continuous transformation production. These characters displayed in the display region HR1 allow the player to easily understand that the continuous transformation chance (continuous transformation effect) is started. This transformation development mode is displayed for one second, and after one second, a continuous transformation effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 for simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol is formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm. Is done. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display is continued. The simplified display of the third symbol continues during the continuous transformation effect and the subsequent extended effect time.

  In the continuous make-up effect set after the display time of the make-up development mode has elapsed, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, a horizontally long display area HR2 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed on the left side of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and the frame button 22 is formed inside the display area HR2. The displayed image (PUSH button PB) is displayed. Below the push button PB inside the display area HR2, a hatched scroll bar SB whose length becomes shorter as time passes is displayed. The scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period for validating the operation on the frame button 22. In the present embodiment, since the operation valid period is set to 5 seconds, the length of the scroll bar SB becomes 0 over 5 seconds after the operation valid period starts. By displaying the scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the operation validity period.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the end of the operation validity period is displayed (suggested) by the length of the scroll bar SB. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as a number as it is, and the countdown may be performed as time elapses, so that the remaining valid operation period may be recognized by the player. Further, for example, the coloring of the PUSH button PB imitating the frame button 22 may be changed according to the remaining operation validity period, so that the remaining time is suggested to the player. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. When the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in yellow. When the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. The color may be displayed in orange, and when the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the push button PB may be displayed in red. Further, the remaining time until the operation validity period ends does not necessarily need to be indicated to the player. By omitting the suggestion display of the remaining time of the operation validity period, the display control can be simplified, so that the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the display area HR2, a balloon-type display area HR3 to which the character "Push is transformed!" By displaying the display contents of the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, the player is made aware that there is a possibility that the character 811 is transformed (the form of the character 811 is changed) by pressing the frame button 22. Can be.

  Further, a display area HR4 of a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape is formed on the lower right side of the display area HR3 to indicate the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in the present continuous transformation effect. In the display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the character "Transform × 0" is displayed. This character is updated according to the number of times the transformation has been successful. Specifically, when the character 811 succeeds in the transformation once, the character is updated to the character “transform × 1”, and when the character 811 succeeds twice, the character is updated to the character “transform × 2”. Similarly, when the number of transformations is three, the character is updated to “Transform × 3”. When the number of transformations is four, the character is updated to the character “Transform × 4”. When the number of times becomes five, the character is updated to the character “transform × 5 times”. By confirming the characters displayed in the display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of times of the transformation in this continuous transformation effect.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation validity period and the character 811 successfully transforms. is there. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, the display area HR2 is changed to an appearance as if the PUSH button PB has been pressed, and the operation valid period ends. . In addition, the aspect of the character 811 is changed to, for example, an aspect imitating an adventurer having a sword and a shield. Also, in the display area HR4, 1 is added to the character indicating the number of times of transformation and updated. FIG. 6A illustrates a case where the image is updated to “transform × 1”. The mode of notifying the success of the transformation (success notification mode) continues for one second, and after the success notification mode ends, the operation validity period is set again. Thereafter, the operation validity period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of transformations reaches the upper limit or the effect period elapses.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a case where the player has not pressed the frame button 22 within the set validity period and has successfully transformed. As shown in FIG. 6B, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the maximum number of times of transformation has not been reached, and the production time remains for a predetermined period or more (the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time). If it is determined that the period is equal to or longer than the lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed when the operation valid period has elapsed. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined lower limit time is defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b in association with the effect type (maximum number of transformations) of the continuous transformation effect.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period or when the frame button 22 is not pressed until the operation valid period has elapsed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time has not been reached. If the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, when all the transformations are executed after the elapse of the operation validity period, the effect period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production period is set to be the same. In other words, the operation validity period is set such that the total of the operation validity period for the upper limit number of times (and the production period of the success notification mode for the upper limit number of times) is longer than the production period of the continuous transformation effect.

  With such a configuration, if the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses by pressing the frame button 22 in each operation effective period set in one continuous transformation effect, the effect type It becomes impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each. Further, the shorter the period from when the operation valid period starts to when the frame button 22 is pressed, the earlier the start timing of the operation valid period that is set thereafter can be advanced. , Within the range of the upper limit. Therefore, a player who wants to perform the maximum number of transformations (performs as many transformations as possible) can positively press the frame button 22 during each operation validity period. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the success notification mode is changed to a mode different from that of the adventurer. The example of FIG. 7A illustrates a case where the character 811 has transformed into a form imitating a gunman when the number of transformations is the third. In the first embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared according to the number of transformations, such as a mode imitating a gunman and a mode imitating the adventurer described above.

  In the first embodiment, the mode when the transformation is successful is fixed according to the number of times of transformation, but is not limited to this. For example, each time the success notification mode is performed, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like. This makes it possible to diversify the variations of the continuous make-up effect, thereby improving the interest of the player in the continuous make-up effect. In addition, when the mode of the success notification mode is determined by lottery or the like, the mode that can be determined only in the case of the variable display that becomes a special symbol jackpot or the case that the variable display that becomes the special symbol big hit becomes easy to be determined It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a mode, a mode that is easily determined in the case of a variable display that deviates from a special symbol, or the like is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game during a continuous transformation effect, focusing not only on the number of transformations but also on the display mode of the character 811 when the transformation is successful.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a mode (failure notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has failed is displayed in the continuous transformation effect. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the transformation fails, the push button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed in a state of being split into two, and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. In addition, a display area HR5 in which a character "END ..." is displayed is displayed on the upper right side of the character 811. With these displays, it is possible to recognize that the continuous transformation effect has been completed (the number of transformations has been determined).

  In the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the process proceeds to an advanced effect for notifying whether or not a big hit has occurred. A plurality of types of advanced effects are provided, and one type of advanced effect is selected and executed according to the remaining fluctuation time and whether or not the current special symbol lottery is performed. Details of this development effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b).

  First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a display mode of a transition effect indicating transition from a continuous transformation effect to an advanced effect. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, an image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 glares is displayed in the main display area Dm, and “ The display area HR6 with the letters “VS” is displayed. In addition, in the display area HR1, a character "Defeat the enemy!" Is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the character 811 defeats the enemy (that is, the monster 812) and becomes a big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, the display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. In this display area, one or a plurality of stars indicating the degree of expectation of the development effect executed after the end of the transition effect is displayed. FIG. 8A illustrates a case where two star marks are displayed. The number of the stars is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect. Although illustration is omitted, the mode of the monster 812 is also changed in conjunction with the number of stars (that is, in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect). That is, the larger the number of stars, the weaker the appearance of the monster 812 (ie, the appearance that the character 811 is likely to win), and the smaller the number of stars, the stronger the appearance of the monster 812 ( That is, the character 811 is displayed in such a manner that the character 811 is likely to win. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the result of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) is linked to the subsequent advanced effect. Therefore, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the number of times of transformation (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) in the continuous transformation effect indicates the degree of expectation of winning.

  In the transition effect and the failure notification mode (see FIG. 7B), the length of the display period is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is because, while the production period of each advanced production is fixed (any of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds), the last stage after the continuous transformation production starts This is because the period required until the operation validity period ends varies depending on the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining fluctuation time is determined at the timing when the operation valid period ends (that is, the start timing of the failure notification mode), and the development effect of the longest production period executable with the remaining fluctuation time is selected. I do. Then, a failure notification mode and a transition effect are executed using a period of a difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect period of the selected advanced effect. As a result, variations in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, and thus the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start of the development effect and the production time of the development effect. This can be suppressed. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop despite the end of the development effect, or conversely, the effect period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation where the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, a display effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided. It should be noted that no matter how many seconds the transition effect is set for, during the period in which the transition effect is set, the mode shown in FIG. 8A is used so that the switching to the development effect is not unnatural. However, the configuration is such that no major change occurs. That is, the image illustrated in FIG. 8A is displayed as a still image, or the character 811 and the character 812 only change in a manner of periodically raising and lowering their shoulders in accordance with their own breathing and the like (FIG. 8A). Take no special action). Thereby, regardless of the execution period of the transition effect, the display mode at the time of switching to the development effect can be made equal, so that when switching from the transition effect to the development effect, it makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8 (b), a description will be given of a temporal change of the production mode of the extended production. Here, in the first embodiment, twelve types of hit development effects A to F and off-limit development effects A to F are provided as development effects. The winning and losing development effect A is a display effect with a rendering period of 30 seconds, and the winning and losing development effect B is a display effect with a rendering period of 33 seconds. Similarly, the hit and miss development effects C to F are configured as display effects of the effect periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the last operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, the development effect of the longest effect period not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first embodiment, data of a display effect (base effect) as a base for executing the extended effect is prepared. The base display effect (base effect) has a display period of 45 seconds, and the corresponding effect is executed by executing the effect from the beginning of the base display effect (base effect) or from the middle thereof. It is configured to be able to execute the development of the period. That is, the development effect is configured such that data of the development effect of each display period is generated by using data of one base effect, instead of preparing a separate effect for each effect period. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce data for executing the advanced effect, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the display mode is such that the character 811 is zoom-displayed for the first three seconds of the base effect. Then, in the next three seconds, an effect in which the character 811 attacks the monster 812 is executed. Next, a display mode in which the monster 812 as the enemy is zoom-displayed is displayed for 3 seconds, and thereafter, a display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for 3 seconds. Thereafter, a display mode in which the face of the character 811 and the face of the monster 812 are zoom-displayed is displayed for 3 seconds, and then the character 811 and the monster 812 violently attack and fight each other, and the battle is won or lost. An effect that informs (result) is displayed for 30 seconds. As described above, the base effect is roughly divided into five display modes for three seconds and one display mode for 30 seconds. By starting the display effect from the break position of any of these display modes, the advanced effect can be displayed without a sense of incongruity.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), when executing the hit and miss development effect A, by displaying a display mode for 30 seconds after the elapse of 15 seconds in the base effect, A development effect in which the effect period is 30 seconds is executed. Similarly, when the hit and miss development effect B is executed, a display mode for 33 seconds after the elapse of 12 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect C is executed, the base mode is displayed. The display mode for 36 seconds after the lapse of 9 seconds in the effect is displayed. In addition, when the hit and miss development effect D is executed, a display mode for 39 seconds after the lapse of 6 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect E is executed, the base effect is displayed. The display mode for 42 seconds after 3 seconds has elapsed is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of executing the hit-and-miss advanced effect F, the advanced effect for 45 seconds is executed by displaying the base effect from the beginning to the end.

  In addition, a plurality of display effects are prepared for the base effect, in addition to the above-described mode of battle with the monster 812. Which of the display effects is to be used to execute the extended effect is determined by lottery. In addition, in each of the original display effects, a mode for the big hit and a mode for the release are prepared.

  In the first embodiment, the base effect is configured to be divertable even after the execution of the continuous transformation effect. That is, after the reach state occurs, the base effect is executed directly or via another notice effect, without going through the continuous transformation effect, so that it is possible to inform whether or not a jackpot will be achieved. . Thereby, the versatility of the base effect can be enhanced, and the data required for executing the effect can be reduced. Also, in the case where the base effect is executed without going through the continuous transformation effect, the effect can be executed from the beginning of the base effect or from the middle thereof in accordance with the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed. This makes it possible to execute an effect using the base effect even for a variable display with different variable times.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a base effect for displaying an advanced effect is prepared, and a portion where the effect is well-divided is set in the base effect by the number of advanced effects. Each break point is set so that the remaining production time matches the production time of each development production. Thereby, it is possible to provide a natural-looking display effect over the effect time of each development effect. In addition, by configuring a development effect in which a plurality of production times are different from each other from a single original production mode, it is possible to compare with a case where separate production data is prepared for each type of development effect (production time). Thus, the data required for displaying each development effect can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of development effects having different effect times can be executed based on the base effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display effect in which the display mode is completely different may be performed in accordance with the effect time of the extended effect. With such a configuration, the development effects can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, a temporal change of the display mode when the continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect will be specifically described. 9 (a) and 9 (b), an example will be described in which a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is three is set. First, FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a time change of the effect mode when the player does not press the frame button 22 at all during the execution of the continuous change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of the variable effect (super reach) in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds. In the fluctuation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (see FIG. 4B). Then, at the point of time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach state occurs and the transformation development mode (see FIG. 5 (a)) suggesting to the player that the transformation to the continuous transformation effect is performed is performed for one second. Is displayed.

  After the display period of the transformation development effect has elapsed, an operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation is set. If the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation validity period continues for 5 seconds (until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change). Then, when the operation validity period has elapsed, the first success notification mode is displayed. This success notification mode continues for one second, and when one second elapses (17 seconds from the start of the change), the success notification mode ends, and the operation validity period corresponding to the second transformation is set. You. This second operation validity period also continues for 5 seconds (from 17 seconds to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation) unless the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, after the success notification mode for one second is set, the third operation validity period is set. The third operation validity period also continues for 5 seconds (from 23 seconds to 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) unless the frame button 22 is operated. Then, at the timing of 28 seconds (the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds) after the start of the fluctuation when the operation effective period ends, the remaining fluctuation time is small (the remaining fluctuation time is less than 38 seconds set as the lower limit value). ), And a failure notification mode for one second is set even if the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. That is, despite the fact that the upper limit number of transformations is set to three, the continuous transformation effect ends when the number of transformations is two.

  Note that conditions for determining whether or not a sufficient production time remains for setting the success notification mode are defined by a transformation production selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. Specifically, according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (that is, according to the effect type of the continuous transformation effect), the lower limit (threshold) of the remaining fluctuation time in which the success notification mode can be set is defined. I have. If the operation validity period ends with the remaining fluctuation time exceeding the lower limit, the success notification mode is set on condition that the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. On the other hand, if the operation valid period is ended after the remaining fluctuation time becomes less than the lower limit value, the failure notification mode is set regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9B, a continuous transformation effect in which the upper limit number of transformations is three is set, and the time elapse of the rendering mode when the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation validity period. The change will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the operation validity period corresponding to the first transformation, when a press on the frame button 22 of the player is detected at the time when one second elapses (12 seconds after the start of the change), The operation validity period is terminated, and the first success notification mode is displayed. When one second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses, an operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set (13 seconds after the start of the change). If the press on the frame button 22 is detected again at the time when one second elapses (14 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) in the second operation validity period, the operation validity period is similarly terminated and the second operation validity period is terminated. Is displayed. Then, when one second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses (15 seconds from the start of the change), the third operation validity period is set. If a press on the frame button 22 is detected when two seconds have elapsed since the start of the third operation validity period (17 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the remaining fluctuation time is sufficient (43 seconds). Since it remains, a third success notification mode is displayed. Thereafter, when the display period of the third success notification mode has elapsed, the fourth operation validity period is set. If the press on the frame button 22 is detected again at the time when 2 seconds have elapsed (at the time of 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation) in the fourth operation validity period, the upper limit of the number of times of the continuous makeover effect has already been obtained. Since the execution has been completed, a failure notification mode is set.

  The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition effect after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect. As described above, as the type of the development effect, the type of the effect time that is the longest within the range that does not exceed the remaining fluctuation time is selected. When the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, a maximum of 38 seconds can be used for the development effect, taking into account the failure notification mode and 2 seconds, which is the shortest display period of the transition effect. However, as described above, as the production time of the development effect, only six patterns of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds are prepared. Therefore, a development effect (development effect C) for 36 seconds, in which the effect period is shorter than 38 seconds, is set as the current development effect. Then, a difference of 4 seconds between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect period of the extended effect C of 36 seconds is set as the failure notification mode and the transition effect display period. Specifically, 4 seconds are equally divided, and 2 seconds are respectively set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect.

  As described above, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect is absorbed by the display period of the failure notification mode and the effect period of the transition effect. Even if the number is small, the timing of the fluctuation stop and the end timing of the development effect can be surely matched. As a result, variations in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, and thus the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start of the development effect and the production time of the development effect. This can be suppressed. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop despite the end of the development effect, or conversely, the effect period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation where the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, a display effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the failure notification mode is started in a state where the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, 2 seconds are set as the failure notification mode and the transition effect display time. . Then, after the end of the transition effect, the extended effect C in which the effect time is 36 seconds is executed. Thus, the timing at which the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped (the timing at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) and the end timing of the development effect can be exactly matched.

  As described above, when the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be shortened, and more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit of the number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can actively press the frame button 22, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are made variable so that the gap between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the advanced effect can be absorbed. , But is not limited to this. For example, the effect period of the failure notification mode may be fixed, and only the display time of the transition effect may be changed, or conversely, only the effect period of the failure notification mode may be changed. Further, the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect may be fixed, and a part of the effect period of the advanced effect (for example, the period during which the third symbol is fixedly displayed) may be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by displaying, by a lighting state, whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, is being executed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a variation in which a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a second symbol are alternately turned on. Display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 causes the electric accessory 64 a attached to the first entrance 64 to move for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state where a ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that can pass through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four, but may be three or less, or five or more ( For example, 8 times may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. However, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11B) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the big hit is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, when the special symbol is in a probable change state, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9”, and “0 to 9” is determined. 9 ", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value to be a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". Is 1/40 (10/400). When the special symbol is in the low-probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200". If the value is "200", it is determined that the winning is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 from "0 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is only one of "200". The probability of a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are calculated. Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is “0 to 49”, the big hit type is “big hit A” (FIG. 11). (See 202b1 in (b)). When the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11C). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 30) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) that stores a random value that determines one symbol fluctuation time from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the main controller 110 as described above. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12C). ) And an out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D).

  First, with reference to FIG. 12B, a description will be given of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is off, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, out of reach is reached. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of range when the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and out of super reach in the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed the left or right normal entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of a normal symbol being hit than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this manner, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the winning probability is changed between a low probability of the ordinary symbol and a high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 11C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (FIG. 11C )) 202c1). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random number values of the jackpot is 24 out of the total number of the random number of 240, and therefore the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204” (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 13, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 29). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e and at least a time reduction counter 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved display number for notifying the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d sets the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

  If the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the left and right ordinary entrances 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 27: No).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probable change flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. This indicates that the symbol is in the probable change state, and when the value of the probable change flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the special symbol low probability state). The probability change flag 203e is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the special symbol lottery, it is turned off when setting the start of the big hit (see S213 in FIG. 23).

  When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the probable change flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the first random number table for high probability, while the state of the probable change flag 203e is set. Is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to zero, and the main controller 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol, and every time the jackpot B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 31). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability change flag 203e is turned on. If it is, it is determined that the symbol is usually during the working hours. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the during-time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and based on the second random number table for low probability, A normal symbol lottery is performed (see S510 in FIG. 26).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 controls these various commands and controls through the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and displays an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. First, FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation effect selection table 222b, and an advanced effect mode selection table 222c.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used for specifying a detailed display mode of the fluctuation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. Can be More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation) is selected from the variation patterns defined in variation pattern table 222a. The detailed display mode of the effect) is extracted (identified) (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Among the fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, at least a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a super reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is determined whether or not to execute the continuous transformation effect (see FIGS. 5 to 7). The information shown is also included.

  The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when a variation pattern accompanied by a continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a, to determine an effect mode of the continuous transformation effect. Details of the transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the make-up effect selection table 222b defines the effect form of the continuous make-up effect for each type of fluctuation pattern (whether or not) and for the value of the effect counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. I have. As shown in FIG. 15A, five types of continuous transformation effects A to E are set in the production mode of the continuous transformation effect.

  The continuous transformation effect A is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is one, and the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is not set. For this reason, when the continuous transformation effect A is executed, regardless of whether the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the failure notification mode is displayed after the success notification mode is displayed once. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15A, the continuous transformation effect A may be selected only in the case of the hit super reach and when the value of the effect counter 223n is “0”. . That is, if the maximum number of transformations is one, it is determined that the continuous transformation effect A will be a big hit in the set variable display. As described above, in the continuous make-up effect, basically, as the number of times of change (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) increases, the expectation of the jackpot increases, but in the case of the continuous make-up effect A (when the maximum number of times is one) Only exceptionally, the jackpot is determined. Thereby, a surprising effect can be provided.

  The continuous transformation effect B is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is two, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “1 to 19”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-reach super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “0 to 44”. Since the effect counter 223n is a loop counter that is updated in the range of “0 to 99”, the continuous make-up effect B is a ratio of 19% (19/100) of the super-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. On the other hand, it is determined at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of the off-reach super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. For this reason, in the out-of-reach super reach, the ratio of determining the continuous transformation effect B is higher (the expectation of the jackpot is lower).

  In the continuous transformation effect B, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect starts when the remaining fluctuation time is 49 seconds (11 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the second operation validity period ends is set within 8 seconds (49 seconds to 41 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops once. That is, if the first and second operation validity periods are not interrupted in the middle by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation can be performed in the middle of the second operation effective period is set. It will be below. Thereby, if the operation validity period is not terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation effect A is set and the number of transformations becomes one, or the continuous transformation effect B is set. It becomes impossible for the player to determine whether the number of transformations has been reduced to one. As described above, the continuous make-up effect A is an effect in which the jackpot is determined, while the continuous make-up effect B is an effect in which the jackpot is less expected. Therefore, it is possible to accurately know the degree of expectation of the jackpot by distinguishing between the continuous make-up effect A and the continuous make-up effect B. During the operation valid period, the frame button is actively given to the player. 22 can be pressed.

  The continuous transformation effect C is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is three, and in the hit super reach, the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “20 to 44”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 89". Therefore, the continuous make-up effect C is determined at a rate of 25% (25/100) in the case of the super-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined, while the continuous make-up effect is 45 in the case of the out-of-range super reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. % (45/100). For this reason, in the off-reach super reach, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect C is determined is higher (the expectation of the jackpot is lower). Further, since the ratio determined in the case of the hit super-reach is higher than that of the continuous make-up effect B, the degree of expectation that the continuous make-up effect C is a big hit is higher than that of the continuous make-up effect B.

  In the continuous transformation effect C, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the third operation validity period ends is set within 11 seconds (49 seconds to 38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops twice. This is because the second operation validity period ends when 11 seconds have elapsed after the operation validity period has expired without pressing the frame button 22 (the first operation validity period 5 seconds + 1). (1 second success notification mode + 5 second operation valid period). Thereby, if the operation validity period is not terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation effect C or the continuous transformation effect D, E having a higher jackpot expectation than the continuous transformation effect C described later. It is impossible for the player to recognize whether there is. Therefore, the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current fluctuation display from the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) can positively press the frame button 22.

  The continuous transformation effect D is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is 4 times, and in the hit super reach, the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “45 to 79”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “90 to 98”. Therefore, the continuous make-up effect D is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100) in the case of the super-reach in the case where the continuous make-up effect is determined, and 9 in the case of the off-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. % (9/100). For this reason, the winning super reach has a higher rate of determining the continuous transformation effect D (the expectation of the jackpot is higher). In addition, as compared with the continuous transformation effects B and C, the ratio determined in the case of the hit super reach is higher and the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-range super reach is lower. The degree of expectation to be a big hit is higher than that of C.

  In the continuous transformation effect D, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effect C. Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the third operation validity period ends is set within 11 seconds (49 seconds to 38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops twice. Further, even if the period until the third operation validity period ends is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation validity period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode Is stopped three times. Accordingly, unless the operation effective period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to recognize which of the continuous transformation effects C to E. Therefore, the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current fluctuation display from the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) can positively press the frame button 22.

  The continuous transformation effect E is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is 5 times, and in the hit super reach, the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “80 to 99”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach super reach, the selection is made only when the value of the effect counter 223n is “99”. Therefore, the continuous make-up effect E is determined at a rate of 20% (20/100) in the case of the super-reach in the case where the continuous make-up effect is determined, and is 1 in the case of the off-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. % (1/100). For this reason, the winning super reach has a higher rate of determining the continuous transformation effect E (the expectation of the jackpot is higher). In addition, since the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-range super reach is extremely low as compared with the continuous make-up effects B to D, the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes higher as compared with the continuous make-up effects B to D.

  This continuous transformation effect E is a type in which the transformation can be executed the most number of times among the effect types of the continuous transformation effect. In the continuous transformation effect E, when five transformations are successful, the failure notification mode is not displayed thereafter, and a direct transition effect is performed after the display period of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed (FIG. 8). (See (a)) is started.

  In the continuous transformation effect E, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effects C and D. Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the third operation validity period ends is set within 11 seconds (49 seconds to 38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops twice. Further, even if the period until the third operation validity period ends is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation validity period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode Is stopped three times. Further, even if the end timing of the fourth operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the end timing of the fifth operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times of displaying the success notification mode is 4 It stops running. Accordingly, unless the operation effective period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to recognize which of the continuous transformation effects C to E. Therefore, the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current fluctuation display from the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) can positively press the frame button 22.

  As described above, the continuous transformation effect of the present embodiment is provided with five effect types. Each effect type is configured with a different upper limit number of transformations, and is configured to be able to suggest the jackpot expectation by the number of times the character 811 has transformed (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode). Further, regarding the continuous transformation effects B to E, the upper limit number of transformations cannot be displayed unless the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period to terminate the operation valid period. It is configured. As a result, the player who wants to know the expectation of the continuous transformation effect accurately can be made to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation validity period, so that the player is willing to participate in the game. Can be improved.

  When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. Therefore, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Returning to FIG. 14A, the description will be continued. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table in which the effect mode of the development effect is defined. The development effect mode selection table 222c is referred to when the last operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect ends, and is used to determine the mode of the development effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. Details of the development effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the development effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, the remaining fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time T) and the type of the current fluctuation display (whether super-reach or hit super-reach are displayed) For each of the above, the type of development effect to be selected is defined.

  Specifically, at the end of the last operation validity period, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 32 seconds ≦ T <35 seconds, the development effect of the effect time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, if the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, the staging development effect A with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected, and if the super-reach is off, the staging development effect A with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected.

  Also, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 35 seconds ≦ T <38 seconds, and if the current fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect B having a staging time of 33 seconds is selected. If so, the development effect B is selected with the effect time out of 33 seconds. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 38 seconds ≦ T <41 seconds, and the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect C of 36 seconds is selected. , And the development time C is out of 36 seconds.

  Similarly, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 41 seconds ≦ T <44 seconds, and the current fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect D having a staging time of 39 seconds is selected. If so, the development effect D with the effect time out of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 44 seconds ≦ T <47 seconds, and if the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect E with a staging time of 42 seconds is selected. , The production time E is out of 42 seconds, and the development effect E is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 47 seconds ≦ T <48 seconds and the fluctuation display of this time is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect F of 45 seconds is selected. , And the development effect F is selected in which the production time is out of 45 seconds.

  As described above, in order to prevent the end timing of the variable display from being shifted from the end timing of the advanced effect, the remaining fluctuation time T and the effect time of the advanced effect selected from the advanced effect mode selection table 222c. The display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are made variable in accordance with the difference between the display time and the transition effect. Thereby, regardless of the length of the remaining fluctuation time T, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the fluctuation display. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity for the player.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, A period flag 223e, a valid period timer 223f, a transformation counter 223g, a transformation effect flag 223h, a success notification mode timer 223i, a failure notification mode timer 223j, a transition effect time timer 223k, and an advanced effect storage area 223m. And at least an effect counter 223n.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a start winning, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S4908 in FIG. 41). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S5002 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S4002 in FIG. 33). Sent to control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type is set based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

  The validity period flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect. If the validity period flag 223e is on, it means that the operation is valid. If it is off, it means that the operation is not valid. The validity period flag 223e is set to ON when it is determined that it is time to start the continuous transformation effect (see S4403 in FIG. 37A). Also, if the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and it is determined that the number of times of display of the success notification mode (the number of transformations) is less than 5, it is set to ON (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, and when 5 seconds set as the operation valid period elapses without detecting the press of the frame button 22, it is set to OFF. (See S4201 in FIG. 35). While the valid period flag 223e is on, pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the valid period flag 223e is on, a transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed.

  The valid period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. When the start condition of the valid period is satisfied (when the timing of starting the continuous transformation effect or the end timing of the success notification mode is reached), the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds for the valid period timer 223f (5000) ) Is set (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of the validity period timer 223f is 1 or more, during the validity period process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 (FIG. 37 (b) )), The value is subtracted (updated) by one. Based on the value of the validity period timer 223f, it is determined whether the operation validity period has elapsed. If it is determined that the operation validity period has elapsed, a transformation setting for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is performed. The process (see FIG. 35) is executed.

  The transformation number counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times that the success notification mode (see FIGS. 6 and 7A) is displayed (the character 811 has succeeded in transformation) in one continuous transformation effect. The counter value of the transformation number counter 223g is incremented (updated) by one each time the display of the success notification mode is determined. In the continuous transformation effect in the first embodiment, the transformation is performed depending on whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g has reached an upper limit value (see FIG. 15A) determined for each rendering type of the continuous transformation effect. It is determined whether or not the upper limit number of times has been reached (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, the success notification mode for the upper limit of the number of transformations is displayed, and when the operation validity period ends thereafter, the failure notification is performed regardless of whether the remaining fluctuation time has reached the lower limit value at the end point. The mode is displayed. This makes it possible to make a difference in the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations in each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and it is possible to suggest a degree of expectation that the maximum (upper limit) transformation number is a big hit.

  The makeover effect flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not a continuous makeup effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that a continuous makeup effect is being executed. Means not inside. Here, the execution of the continuous transformation effect means a period from the end of the transformation development mode (start of the first operation valid period) to the end of the transition effect (start of the development effect). The makeover effect flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of change, which is the start time of the makeover effect, in the change display in which the execution of the continuous makeover effect is determined ( (See S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, this transformation effect flag 223h is set to off when it is determined that the display period of the transition effect has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

  The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for measuring the display time of the success notification mode. When the display condition of the success notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set to the success notification mode timer 223i. Note that, as described above, the condition for displaying the success notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number defined for each type of the continuous transformation effect, and at the end of the operation validity period. The remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the lower limit time defined for each type of the continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode has come, the timer value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the success notification mode timer 223i (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is decremented (updated) by one in the success notification mode middle process executed every millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38). .

  The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for measuring the display time of the failure notification mode. When the display condition of the failure notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set to the failure notification mode timer 223j. The condition for displaying the failure notification mode is, as described above, whether the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is equal to or more than the upper limit number defined for each type of continuous transformation effect, or the end of the operation validity period. That is, the remaining fluctuation time at the time point is less than the lower limit time set for each type of the continuous transformation effect. The failure notification mode timer 223j determines that the display timing of the failure notification mode has come, and when the production mode of the advanced effect is selected, the display time corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the advanced effect is determined. The corresponding timer value is set (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update processing of the main processing (see S4012 of FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by one in the failure notification mode middle processing executed every millisecond (see S4701 of FIG. 39). .

  The transition effect time timer 223k is a timer for measuring the display time of the transition effect. When the transition effect display condition is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the transition effect display period is set in the transition effect time timer 223k. The transition effect is started when the display time of the failure notification mode has elapsed or when the display time of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed in the continuous transformation effect E. At the start of the transition effect, the transition effect time timer 223k is set with a timer value corresponding to a difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect (S4610 in FIG. 38, FIG. 39, S4704). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by one (see S4801 in FIG. 40) in the transition effect process executed every millisecond.

  The development effect storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of the development effect. In the development effect storage area 223m, based on the end of the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect, the development effect is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) according to the remaining fluctuation time. Is selected, the data corresponding to the effect mode is stored. At the start of the transition effect, the mode of the transition effect (production time) is determined from the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m, and the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the transition time of the transition effect is displayed. Set as time. At the end of the transition effect, the type of the development effect to be started is specified based on the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m.

  The data corresponding to the type of the development effect is composed of, for example, 4-bit data. For example, the 1st to 3rd bits are used as an area for storing data indicating the fluctuation time, and the 4th bit is used as an area for storing the data indicating the pass / fail. . More specifically, if the first to third bits are “001B”, the rendering time is 30 seconds, and if “010B”, the rendering time is 33 seconds. If there is, the development time is 36 seconds. In the case of “100B”, the production time indicates a development effect of 39 seconds, in the case of “101B”, the production time indicates a development effect of 42 seconds, and in the case of “111B”, the production time is 36 seconds. Show the development effect. If the most significant bit (fourth bit) is 1 (high), it means a development effect corresponding to the hit, and if the most significant bit (fourth bit) is 0 (low), it is out of order. It means that it is a development effect corresponding to. Therefore, for example, if the data “1010B” is stored in the development effect storage area 223m, the current development effect is a development effect that is a hit in a 33 second effect time (ie, a hit development effect B). Means

  The effect counter 223n is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223n is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and is incremented and updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. . The effect counter 223n has a separate counter for each effect type.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of a control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, based on the erroneous data, Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR flash memory 234d) and is stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, smaller than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a). 2 kilobytes). In the NOR flash memory 234d, of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of a boot program to be executed first is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated to the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. The ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 sets the address from the NOR flash memory 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. From the program, the instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are replaced by the NOR flash memory. The data is stored in the memory 234d for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred from the NOR flash memory. By storing the character ROM 234 in the memory 234d, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The set boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control except for the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The program and the fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table to be described later) used in the control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d without storing all the boot programs, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) transmitted from the MPU 231 and described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 18B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage”, and FIG. 18B shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 18, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “sandy beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 changes the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the sandy beach stage that is frequently displayed is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position is shifted from the position a including the initial position to the position a'. Since the image data corresponding to the image during the period b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the frame button by the player can be used. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of No. 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed in the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. The display can be displayed on the device 81. It is possible to display et al. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers "0" to "9" as the third symbol are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, a stop symbol indicating each big hit is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special game state and informs the player of the game value (usually a short period of time of the symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol held. Is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time-saving period of this ordinary symbol is, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the ordinary entrance 67, the more chances are for the ordinary symbol to be drawn, and the greater the chance of hitting the ordinary symbol. . Therefore, the chance of opening the electric accessory 64a as a normal symbol jackpot increases, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, so that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory 64a is normally opened as a jackpot of a symbol, and the first ball is opened. When the ball easily enters the entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain the expectation that a special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the player. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol, which is a sub-symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set as the variation effect display data table for the variation effect, one table is prepared for each variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Further, a display data table corresponding to each game menu screen is also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table for a fluctuation effect (variation display data table) among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table corresponds to an address in which the time (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time is specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any one of the back A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back A and B as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 19) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 20 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 43). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 55 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 55A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 21) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 45 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 52) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 21), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 21, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. (Character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite are described in the order of various comments.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first is placed on the rearmost side (backmost drawing hierarchy), and the sprite drawn last is placed on the frontmost side (frontmost drawing hierarchy). It can be arranged in. When the comment display function is ON, the image arranged at the forefront side (the foreground drawing hierarchy) is a character image constituting a comment. By arranging the comment on the foreground side (the foreground drawing hierarchy), the comment can be more clearly recognized by the player.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 of FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 56). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, it is performed (see S7802 of FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first symbol variation process is performed. A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start win) in the entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is reset to off, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the jackpot. (S214). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S212, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating a stop of the change of the special symbol is set (S217), and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state).

  When the probability change flag 203e is ON (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the process of S301 and the value for the high probability time Based on the per-random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state), and thus the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "200", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the two types of special symbol big hits (big hit A , Jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R certain variable big hit) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B) and “50”. If it is in the range of “−99”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit B (16R time saving big hit) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) as described above. When the processing in S307 ends, the process moves to S310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) to obtain the normal reach, The fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as super reach is determined. When the processing in S309 ends, the processing moves to S310.

  In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). Is done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a starting win. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entry (winning) to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered (wins) the first entrance opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is suspended in the special symbol N) is obtained. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol retaining ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball count command in the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Are stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

  When the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and the process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / no-go, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: S504). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the normal symbol time saving state (S508). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability change flag 203e is ON, it is determined that the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is in effect, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, If the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in a normal state of a normal symbol (not a time saving state).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the time is in the state of saving the time of the ordinary symbol (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second random number table for the high probability time are stored. On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second collision for the low probability time are calculated. Based on the random number table, a lottery result on whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol hit (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S511: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S511 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

  In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514). If the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S514 that the normal state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this processing is performed. To end. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. The symbol lottery frequency increases. Therefore, the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, so that the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S515 or the processing of S516 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the process of S517, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S517 that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol (S520), and it is determined that the current symbol is in the time reduction state (S520: Yes), “1 second × 2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64, and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64. Is set to “0.2 times × 1 time”, and the process proceeds to S523.

  In the processing of S523, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set to start for the time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 (S523), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 end. On the other hand, in the processing of S519, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S519: No), the processing of S520 to S523 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball counter 203d even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 Is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is executed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) and the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). Then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot effect or the variable is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. The stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening port 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1004 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls are opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1007, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1009, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011). If it is determined (S1011: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the big hit A (S1012).

  In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the big hit is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B) (S1012: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time reduction counter 203f, so that 100 times of the normal symbol after the big hit is completed. It is set so that the time reduction period is given (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that the current big hit is the big hit A (S1012: Yes), the certain change flag 203e is turned on so that the special change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

  In the process of S1013 or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol after the jackpot is completed (whether the special symbol is in the probable state or the special symbol is in the low probability state) is sounded. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and the present process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4018 (see FIG. 33). ) Is determined (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4018. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4017 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  In the processing of S3902, if the power-off processing flag is off (S3902: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It is started after the execution of the power-off process in S4018 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the flow shifts to S3908.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the flow shifts to S3904. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4018 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the flow shifts to S3908.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4018, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and the process shifts to S3904 to start initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the process of S3904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3906). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4018 (see S4017 in FIG. 33). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4018 is executed, the process of S3908 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4018 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S3909), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3908 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the processes of S3908 to S3906 are performed via the processes of S3904 to S3906. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), the process skips S3909, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S3910, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S3911), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S3909 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S3904 to the process of S3908 via the process of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3904. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the current process of S4001 (S4001). If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4013 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4012. In the processing of S4001, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S4002 to S4012 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4013 and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4014 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4014 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4003 to S4014 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4008 to be described later (S4003), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4004). . The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4005 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4005, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4007). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing, an input for monitoring whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, an effect corresponding to the input is set. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation period of the continuous transformation effect, this is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4008), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S4009, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4010), and then a menu setting processing is executed (S4011). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the menu setting process, a process corresponding to the operation content of the player when the game menu screen is displayed is executed.

  After the process of S4011, during the execution of the variable display, the effect update process for changing the effect mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the value of various timers, and the like is executed (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. . The effect update processing (S4012) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4013, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination processing ends, a variable display setting processing is executed (S4014). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S4014 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4017), and the power-off processing is executed (S4018). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S4019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4016: No), the process returns to S4001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4016: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing. The frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, as described above.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34), first, it is determined whether or not the validity period flag 223e is on (S4101). If it is off (S4101: No), it is not the operation validity period. Therefore, this processing is ended as it is. This is because if it is not the operation valid period, even if the press of the frame button 22 is detected, there is no possibility that the failure notification mode or the success notification mode is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4101: Yes), it means that the current operation is valid, and then the press of the frame button 22 is detected. It is determined whether it has been performed (S4102). In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), a transformation setting process for setting a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed (S4103), and this process is performed. To end. Details of the transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  Next, the details of the above-described transformation setting processing (S4103) will be described with reference to FIG. In this transformation setting process, first, the valid period flag 223e is set to off, and the valid period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). Thereby, the end of the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect is set.

  Upon completion of the process in S4201, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is read (S4202), and the read transformation number (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) is the upper limit number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect that is being executed this time. Is determined (S4203). In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g matches the upper limit (S4203: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time in the fluctuation display is specified (S4204), and the specified remaining fluctuation is determined. The production mode of the development effect corresponding to the time (T) is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) (S4205).

  When the processing of S4205 is completed, data corresponding to the effect form of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and the remaining fluctuation time specified in the processing of S4204 and the development selected in the processing of S4205. The display time of the current failure notification mode is calculated from the difference between the effect and the effect time (S4207). Specifically, half of the time obtained by subtracting the effect time of the development effect from the remaining fluctuation time T is specified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the display time of the specified failure notification mode is set in the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number (S4203: No), the remaining fluctuation time (T) is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed. (S4209). In the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S4210 to S4212 for setting the display of the success notification mode is executed. That is, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S4210), the success notification mode according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g is set (S4211), and the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is reduced to 1 second. The corresponding timer value is set (S4212), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining fluctuation time T is less than the lower limit specified in the transformation effect selection table 222b) (S4209: No) Then, the processing of S4204 to S4208 described above for setting the display of the failure notification mode is executed, and this processing ends.

  By performing the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within a range that does not fall below the lower limit remaining fluctuation time set for each effect type, the success notification mode is limited to the upper limit number of transformations. Can be displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed for less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached. This allows the player to want to display more success notification modes within a range not less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, so that the frame button 22 can be positively pressed. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

  Next, details of the above-described effect update processing (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect update processing (S4012) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 33) of the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the fluctuation display, the remaining fluctuation time, values of various timers, and the like are changed. This is a process for changing the presentation mode according to the situation. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect update processing.

  In this effect update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being executed (S4301). If it is determined that the variable display is not being performed (S4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. To return to the main processing (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the variable display is being performed (S4301: Yes), then, whether the transformation effect flag 223h is on (that is, whether the continuous transformation effect is being executed) or not It is determined (S4302). In the process of S4302, when it is determined that the transformation effect flag 223h is off (S4302: No), a transformation effect start for determining whether or not to start a continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. A determination process is performed (S4303), and this process ends. The details of the transformation effect start determination processing (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the process of S4302, when it is determined that the makeover effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the continuous makeup effect is being executed, so first, whether the validity period flag 223e is on or not is determined. Is determined (S4304), and if it is on (S4304: Yes), a process is performed during the validity period to determine whether the operation validity period has ended (S4305), and this process ends. Details of the processing during the valid period (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is off (that is, not during the operation valid period) (S4304: No), the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is larger than 0. (S4306), and if the value is larger than 0 (S4306: Yes), the process in the success notification mode is performed to determine whether the end timing of the success notification mode is reached. Is executed (S4307), and this processing ends. Details of the process in the success notification mode (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (that is, the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), then the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is changed to It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (if the failure notification mode is being displayed) (S4308). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4308: Yes), it is necessary to determine the end timing of the failure notification mode. The process in the failure notification mode is executed (S4309), and this process ends. Details of the processing during the failure notification mode (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4308, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (that is, the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is greater than 0. (Ie, whether or not the transition effect is being executed) (S4310). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), it is determined whether or not to switch from the transition effect to the advanced effect. (S4311), and terminates the present process. It should be noted that the details of this transition effect processing (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), the process ends and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33).

  By performing this effect update process (see FIG. 36), appropriate control can be performed in accordance with the progress of the continuous make-up effect, so that it is possible to suitably execute the effect update in the continuous make-up effect. it can.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination processing (S4303) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The transformation effect start determination process (S4303) is a process for determining whether or not to start a continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time, as described above.

  In the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (the timing at which 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change) (S4401), and If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4401: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation effect is set (S4402). Next, a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and the process ends.

  By executing the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), the continuous transformation effect is accurately executed at the same timing every time the variable display in which the execution of the continuous transformation effect is set is executed. be able to.

  Next, the details of the above-described processing during the valid period (S4305) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process during the valid period (S4305) is a process for determining whether or not the operation valid period has ended, as described above.

  In the process during the valid period (see FIG. 37B), the value of the valid period timer 223f is updated by subtracting 1 (S4501). Since the processing during the valid period (see FIG. 37B) is executed every millisecond, the value of the valid period timer 223f is decremented by one every millisecond.

  When the process of S4501 ends, it is next determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction in the process of S4501 has become 0 (S4502), and if the value of the valid period timer 223f is not 0 ( S4502: No), the process is terminated as it is not the end timing of the operation validity period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction has become 0 (S4502: Yes), the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) and the remaining fluctuation time ( According to T), the above-described transformation setting processing (S4503, see FIG. 35) for determining the display mode to be displayed is executed, and the processing ends. Since the details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described above with reference to FIG. 35, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, details of the above-described process in the success notification mode (S4307) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process in the success notification mode (S4307) is a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode, as described above.

  In the processing in the success notification mode (see FIG. 38), the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and it is determined whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction has become 0. It is determined (S4602). In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), it is not the end timing of the success notification mode (the success notification mode continues), and thus the process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), it means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed. Then, the processing of S4603 to S4611 for setting the presentation mode after the display period ends is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 5 (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the operation effective period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period, the display control device 114 executes a display mode (see FIG. 5B) corresponding to the operation valid period on the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S4604 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the validity period timer 223f, and the start of the operation validity period is set by setting the validity period flag 223e to ON (S4605). This processing ends. Thereby, a new operation validity period can be started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), the success notification mode has already been displayed five times, and it is necessary to set the operation effective period any longer. Therefore, a development effect in a mode corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time (T) and a transition effect are determined. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time (T) of the fluctuation display is specified (S4606), and the development mode of the development effect corresponding to the specified remaining fluctuation time (T) is stored in the development effect mode selection table 222c (FIG. 15). (See (b))) (S4607).

  When the processing of S4607 ends, next, data corresponding to the effect form of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4608), and the remaining fluctuation time (T) and the development selected in the processing of S4607. The difference from the effect time of the effect is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4609). Then, a timer value corresponding to the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4610), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4611), and the process ends.

  The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, details of the above-described process in the failure notification mode (S4309) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The failure notification mode middle process (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode as described above.

  In the failure notification mode middle process (see FIG. 39), first, the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S4701), and it is determined whether or not the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after the subtraction has become 0 (S4701). S4702). In the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is not 0 (S4702: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the failure notification mode, and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j has become 0 (S4702: Yes), it means that the end timing of the failure notification mode has been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time (T ) And the effect time of the developed effect in the mode indicated by the data stored in the developed effect storage area 223m, and the difference time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4703). Then, the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4705), and the process ends.

  The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the transition effect processing (S4311) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The transition effect process (S4311) is a process for determining the end timing of the transition effect, as described above.

  In the transition effect processing (see FIG. 40), first, the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is subtracted by 1 (S4801), and it is determined whether the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802). In the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is not 0 (S4802: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the transition effect, and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect timer 223k is 0 (that is, the end timing of the transition effect) (S4802: Yes), it is stored in the advanced effect storage area 223m. The start of the development effect corresponding to the existing data is set (S4803). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is turned off (S4804), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and the process ends. As described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are set so that the end timing of the advanced effect and the end timing of the variable display exactly match. Therefore, the development effect set in the process of S4803 can be ended at the end timing of the change. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the effect mode.

  Next, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4901). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( (S4903), and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4904). If the stop type command is received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4907: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4908). In the process of S4908, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S4908, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S4908 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the detection of the start winning or the special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4908 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4907, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4907: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4909). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main processing.

  In the process of S4909, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4909: No), it is next determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4911). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4912), and the process returns to the main processing. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  In the process of S4911, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4911: No), it is next determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4913). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4914). Then, a display round number command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the extracted number of rounds on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4915), and the present process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4916). If an ending command has been received (S4916: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S4917), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S4916 (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S4918). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By executing the command determination process, it is possible to execute an appropriate process according to the command output from main controller 110.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4014). This variable display setting process (S4014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S5001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S5001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S5008. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S5002), and then, in the process of S4903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), the variation pattern is determined. Based on the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command, the fluctuation display mode of the current fluctuation display is determined from the fluctuation pattern table 222a (S5003).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variation pattern type is a mode involving a continuous transformation effect (S5004). If it is determined that the type is a mode involving a continuous transformation effect (S5004: Yes), the transformation effect selection table Based on 222b (see FIG. 15A) and the value of the effect counter 223n, the mode of the continuous transformation effect is determined (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern type determined in the process of S5004 does not involve a continuous transformation effect (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5006.

  In the process of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S5003 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S5006). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the process of S5007, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S5008.

  In the process of S5008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S5008). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5008: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009), and then, in the process of S4906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5010).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5011), and the display control device is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5012), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When detecting that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, and when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first ROM of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is set. Then, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 43) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 transmits the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main address at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 55A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. A determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. If the change pattern is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45A, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 21. The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  46 to 51, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  In the process of S6502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the fluctuation display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. From As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the conventional video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured by using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S6503, and the time in the fluctuation display data table is determined. When it is determined that the variable effect is to be ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6603, and the identification is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the processing of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are both set to off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A, B), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S7002. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in the processing of S7002 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If (S6416: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), it is next determined whether there is a command related to the continuous make-up effect (S6418), and if there is a command related to the continuous make-up effect (S6418) S6418: Yes), execute the transformation effect related command processing (S6419), and return to the processing of S6401.

  The commands related to the continuous transformation effect include, for example, a display command indicating the start of the operation effective period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), and a start of the transition effect. And a display command indicating the start of an advanced effect. A display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b, like the variable display data table and the like. By executing the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419), the type of display mode instructed to start display, the display time, and the like are determined from the command related to the continuous transformation effect, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. This is set in the data table buffer 233d.

  Here, the details of the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the transformation effect-related command processing. This transformation effect-related command process executes a process corresponding to the continuous transformation effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the transformation effect command processing, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S7202). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time indicated by the command is set in the time counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), and the present processing ends, returning to the command determination processing. The continuous make-up effect is a type of effect set during the execution of the change display, and the execution of the continuous make-up effect means that a change pattern command is set (a change pattern command process (FIG. 47 ( This is executed after the execution of a)) and before the end of the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, since the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are already set to OFF in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A), these flags are set in the transformation effect related command processing (see FIG. 51). Need not be turned off again.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, when it is determined that there is no command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process proceeds to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6420 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 47B), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7301: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7302). Then, S7303, S7304 The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45B), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, a pointer update process is performed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle so that it is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table buffer is determined. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and the process is terminated and displayed. Return to the setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the rendering contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7506). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. , And End information are always rendered, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7306 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S7309: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the contents of the stopped symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stopped symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so the demonstration display data table is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S7317), and then write Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In this way, if the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so as to be displayed.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process is performed to set a display data table defining that the image (one of FIGS. 17B and 17C) is to be stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In the process of step S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process shifts to the process of S7703.

  In the processing of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45B), the command is not a simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No) in step S7802, the process skips steps S7803 and S7804 and shifts to step S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S7806 (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, and thus ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the processing in S7805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7805: No), the processing shifts to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7812), and the process moves to S7813.

  If the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7812, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S7813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), to generate a drawing list shown in FIG. 21 (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as drawing target buffer information. When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 1, information for instructing to develop an image rendered in the second frame buffer 236c is included as rendering target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  After the processing of S7902, the drawing processing updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 ms after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous transformation effect as one of the effect modes for improving the interest of the player. This continuous transformation effect is an effect in which the character 811 is transformed one to five times in the third symbol display device 81. Basically, the greater the number of transformations, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is. is there. During the execution of the continuous transformation effect, an operation validity period in which pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is valid is set a plurality of times. When the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period (5 seconds) elapses, an effect (success notification mode) in which the character 811 is successfully transformed is executed. May be More specifically, when either of the above two conditions is satisfied, the upper limit number of transformations that has been determined in advance for each production type of the continuous transformation production has not been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time has not been reached. If it is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type, the character 811 successfully transforms (success notification mode is displayed). On the other hand, if the maximum number of transformations has been reached or the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit, the effect of failure in the transformation (failure notification mode) is executed, and the continuous transformation effect ends. .

  The operation validity period varies in length according to the player's playing method. That is, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated at that time, and a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, each operation validity period, when all the success notification modes are displayed after the elapse of the operation validity period, the effect period of the continuous transformation effect is displayed before the upper limit number of success notification modes are displayed. Set to elapse. In other words, when all the transformations are executed after the elapse of the operation validity period, before the transformation (success notification mode) of the upper limit number of times is performed, the length of the rendering period is set to elapse. An effect time (a lower limit remaining fluctuation time determined for each effect type) is set. As a result, when the operation valid period is started, unless the frame button 22 is actively pressed to end the operation valid period at an early stage, it is impossible to perform the transformation to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, the player who wants to confirm the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  Further, depending on the game method of the player during the execution of the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 is positively pressed during the operation valid period), the subsequent effect mode (display timing of the success notification mode, (The number of display times) can be varied, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between the effect type having a low degree of expectation (the upper limit number of transformations is small) and the effect type having a high degree of expectation (the upper limit number of transformations is large). A transformation effect can be performed. Therefore, even if the appearance corresponds to a low degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the number of cases that lead to a jackpot. it can.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, a development effect for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is executed. In this development effect, a plurality of types having different effect times are provided. Here, the effect time of the continuous make-up effect varies depending on the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. Therefore, the timing at which the continuous make-up effect ends is not constant, and the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the continuous make-up effect ends is variable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the remaining change time is determined, and the development effect of the effect period that can be executed with the remaining change time is selected. Then, a failure notification mode and a transition effect are executed using a period of a difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect period of the selected advanced effect. As a result, variations in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, and thus the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start of the development effect and the production time of the development effect. This can be suppressed. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop despite the end of the development effect, or conversely, the effect period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation where the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, a display effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In the first embodiment, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated, and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. The condition for terminating (reducing) is not limited to this. For example, when a new ball entry to the first entrance 64 is detected, the operation validity period may be terminated and a success notification mode or a failure notification mode may be displayed.

  In the first embodiment, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated (shortened) to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. , But is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the operation valid period is terminated based on detection of a predetermined number of presses of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. In this case, the same number of times may be set each time as the number of presses required to terminate the operation validity period, or the number of presses may be randomly determined by lottery each time the operation validity period starts. The configuration may be determined. With this configuration, it is possible to more positively press the frame button 22 for a player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved. In addition, when determining the number of presses required to terminate the operation validity period, the operation type such as whether or not the effect type of the continuous transformation effect being executed or the upper limit number of transformations has been reached, a lottery result of a special symbol, etc. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of presses that are likely to be selected is varied according to the situation when setting the validity period. Specifically, for example, it may be configured such that the variable display that makes a big hit becomes easier to select a smaller number of times of pressing than the variable display that makes a mistake. Also, for example, a continuous transformation effect with a large number of transformation times may be configured so that a small number of times of pressing can be easily selected, or an upper limit of the transformation may be achieved when the transformation number has reached the maximum number of times. A configuration may be such that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected when the number has not been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the frame button 22 to be pressed while paying attention to the number of presses until the operation validity period ends, thereby further improving the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the continuous makeover effect. Can be done.

  In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. But it is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the operation effective period is to be terminated. Further, for example, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of frame buttons 22 are provided, and for each operation valid period, when the press is detected, the operation valid period is terminated and the notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is performed to determine whether to display the notification mode). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation valid period is not terminated even if a press is detected (or the operation valid period is terminated only with a low probability). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation effect while considering which of the frame buttons 22 can be pressed to terminate the operation validity period. Can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the operation valid period is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the operation valid period ends, unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. However, the present embodiment is limited to this configuration. Instead, a case may be provided in which the operation validity period is terminated even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. Specifically, for example, each time the operation validity period is set, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to terminate the operation in the middle of the period. Also, for example, in correspondence with the type of the continuous make-up effect, the operation valid period is not terminated in the middle unless the press of the frame button 22 is detected, and the operation valid period is not detected even if the press of the frame button 22 is not detected. May be provided with a type that is terminated on the way.

  In the first embodiment, a value in the range of 1 to 5 times can be set as the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect, but the upper limit number may be set arbitrarily. By narrowing the range of the settable maximum number of times (for example, to 1 to 3 times), it is possible to reduce the difference in the jackpot expectation for each number of transformations, so that the continuous transformation effect was completed with a small number of transformations. Also in this case, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the jackpot. Conversely, by widening the range of the settable upper limit number (for example, to 1 to 10 times), it is possible to give the player more chances to press (operate) the frame button 22. . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved. Further, in the first embodiment, in the continuous transformation effect, the transformation succeeds at least once (the success notification mode is displayed). However, in at least some of the effect types, the upper limit number of transformation times is 0. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of times is set (the transformation is never successful). In addition to the maximum number of transformations, the length of the operation validity period, the success notification mode, the failure notification mode, the display period of the transition effect, and the like may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the first embodiment, when the frame button 22 has not been operated at all (ie, there is no operation valid period that has been interrupted in the middle) in all types of continuous make-up effects, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the type is set. Before the success notification mode is displayed (the character 811 succeeds in the transformation), the operation validity period is set to the length at which the continuous transformation effect ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some types of continuous transformation effects, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed at all, the success notification mode may be displayed up to the maximum number of times corresponding to the type. With such a configuration, even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times can be provided. Therefore, a continuous transformation effect can be enjoyed even for a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 and plays a game with the pachinko machine 10.

  In the first embodiment, the number of times of displaying the success notification mode (the number of transformations) has not reached the upper limit and the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the operation valid period has the lower limit regardless of the end condition of the operation valid period. If the time is equal to or longer than the time, the transformation is successful (displaying the success notification mode), but the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed is made variable according to the end condition of the operation valid period (whether the time set as the operation valid period has elapsed or whether the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

  In the first embodiment, the operation validity period of 5 seconds is newly set when the display time of the first to fourth success notification modes in one continuous transformation effect has elapsed, but the present invention is limited to this. Not something. At the start of the continuous transformation effect, one operation valid period is set, and when the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the operation valid period is interrupted (subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is stopped). Good. If the number of times of displaying the success notification mode is less than the upper limit number, after the display time has elapsed, the suspended operation validity period is restarted (subtraction of the validity period timer 223f is restarted). Good. Further, the length of the operation validity period may be changed according to the number of times of display of the maximum success notification mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reset the value of the valid period timer 223f every time a press on the frame button 22 is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, even when a period during which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected continues for a predetermined period, the success notification mode may be displayed within a range that does not reach the upper limit number. With this configuration, the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment can be realized. Instead of suspending the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f, the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f may be continued during the display time of the success notification mode. During the display time of the success notification mode, even if a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the press may be treated as invalid. Even with such a configuration, the same operation as that of the first embodiment can be realized.

  In the first embodiment, the display time of the transition effect is changed so that the end timing of the subsequent advanced effect matches the end timing of the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition effect is fixed to 1 second, and after the end of the advanced effect (or as a part of the advanced effect), the difference between the set effect time of the advanced effect and the remaining fluctuation time is compensated for. For performing an effect for the purpose. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the time is adjusted at the end of the effect, the end time of the effect and the end timing of the variable display can be matched by simpler control of simply setting the remaining fluctuation time to the effect time. it can.

  In the first embodiment, when a press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is immediately (before the operation valid period has elapsed). Mode) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period (for example, one second). In this case, during the predetermined period (for example, one second), an effect of notifying the player of the press of the frame button 22 may be performed. By setting a predetermined period between the detection of the press on the frame button 22 and the display of the notification mode, an opportunity for the player to imagine which notification mode is displayed during the predetermined period. Can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the predetermined period (the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed until the notification mode is displayed) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be set in accordance with the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. It may be configured to be variable. As a specific example of changing the predetermined period, for example, if there is a margin of 1 second or more before the end timing of the operation valid period, set 1 second, When the press on the button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the period from when the operation valid period is set to when the notification mode is displayed to be longer than when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Further, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period, regardless of the timing of pressing the frame button 22.

  In the first embodiment, it is better to depress the frame button 22 and terminate the operation validity period than to notify the user that the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation validity period has elapsed. Although the display timing of the mode is configured to be earlier, the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of the continuous make-up effect, pressing the frame button 22 may delay the display timing of the notification mode. That is, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected, a predetermined press effect indicating that the press of the frame button 22 is detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the effect period of the press effect may be set such that the press effect ends later than the timing at which the originally set operation valid period ends. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not always displayed immediately, but rather, the display timing of the notification mode may be delayed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it is better to press 22 every time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the transition effect having a length corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed has been described. Further, as a mode of the transition effect, a predetermined still image (or a moving image in which the mode does not significantly change) is displayed until the start timing of the advanced effect, and the end timing of the transition effect (the length of the execution period). Irrespective of this, the configuration is such that it is possible to prevent the display mode from becoming unnatural when switching to the development effect.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, the transition effect is constituted by an effect mode in which the change in the mode is relatively large and an effect mode in which the mode change is small (absent). Then, the end timing of the transition effect is configured to be within a period in which the effect mode in which the mode change is relatively small is displayed. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the display mode during the execution of the transition effect can be increased. In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the transition effect, the configuration is such that only the transition effect time covers the difference time between the development effect time and the remaining fluctuation time. That is, in this modification, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to one second.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the transition effect in the present modification will be described. Note that, in the present modified example, similarly to the advanced effect in the above-described first embodiment, base effect data as a base for executing the transition effect is prepared. The base effect has a display period of 4 seconds, and is configured to execute a transition effect of a corresponding effect period by executing the effect from the beginning of the base effect or from the middle of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the data of the base effect for executing the transition effect of the present modified example includes data of roughly four types of display modes in one data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for the first second (first section) of the base effect is constituted by data corresponding to an effect in which the character 811 searches for a target (a monster 812) to fight in the advanced effect. ing. Further, the data corresponding to the time point of 1 second to 2 seconds (second section) of the base effect is constituted by data corresponding to the effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811. In other words, it is constituted by data corresponding to an effect in which the type of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 this time is unknown to the player. This effect allows the player to imagine which type of monster 812 to fight.

  Further, the data corresponding to the time point of 2 seconds to 3 seconds elapse of the base effect (third section) is constituted by data corresponding to the effect in which the type of the monster 812 fighting with the character 811 in this advanced effect is clear. ing. That is, the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed as a silhouette is deviated, and the data corresponding to the effect of displaying the mode of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 is displayed. With this effect, the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed thereafter can be suggested to the player based on the type of the monster 812.

  In this way, the effect corresponding to the beginning to the time when 1 second has elapsed (first section), the effect corresponding to the time when 1 second has elapsed to 2 seconds (second section), and the time when 2 seconds have elapsed to 3 seconds have elapsed The effect corresponding to (third section) is an effect in which the change in the display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is relatively large. That is, the character 811 moves to various places, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appears in front of the character 811, or the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed in the silhouette is canceled. Is changed to a completely different content.

  On the other hand, the data corresponding to the time point when 3 seconds to 4 seconds elapse (the fourth section) of the base effect is a static image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 of the type notified in the effect step 2 are confronted. The image (see FIG. 8A) is composed of data corresponding to the effect to be displayed. In other words, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in a mode in which the display mode does not change (relatively small) even after a lapse of time. By executing the transition effect such that the timing of switching to the advanced effect is within the range of the third section, it is possible to prevent the appearance when switching to the advanced effect from becoming unnatural. .

  As shown in FIG. 83, in this modification, three types of start timings (start positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Which of the three types of start timings is to be set as the start timing is selected according to the effect period of the transition effect. All of these start timings are set at places where the break of the production is good. Can be. Here, in the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the effect time of the advanced effect is in the range of 2 to 5 seconds. The production time (production type) of the development production is determined. In the present modification, as described above, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, so that the transition effect period is in the range of 1 second to 4 seconds. In this modified example, it is configured to determine from which start timing the base effect of the transition effect is to be started based on the effect period of the transition effect.

  More specifically, in the case where the production period of the transition production is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the data after the third start timing (the beginning of the third section) of the base production data is Is set as data for executing the transition effect. Thereby, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing at which the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the fourth section. That is, during the effect period of 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, first, an effect for one second in the third section is executed, and then the effect (still image) in the fourth section is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. . This makes it possible to set the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  In addition, when the transition production effect period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the data after the second start timing (at the beginning of the second section) of the base production data is transferred to the current transition production. Set as data to be executed. Thus, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing at which the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section, as in the case where the effect period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds. it can. In other words, during the effect period of 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the effect of one second in the second section and the effect of one second in the third section are executed, and then the fourth section until the end timing of the transition effect. Is displayed (still image). This makes it possible to set the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  Furthermore, when the transition effect period is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the data after the first start timing (the beginning of the first section) of the base production data is transferred to the current transition effect. Set as data to be executed. Thus, as in the other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing at which the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. In other words, during the effect period of 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the effect of 1 second in each of the first section to the third section is executed, and then the effect of the fourth section (still image) until the end timing of the transition effect Is displayed. This makes it possible to set the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  As described above, in the present modification, when performing a transition effect that is a connection effect between a continuous transformation effect and an advanced effect, effect data (first section) corresponding to a mode in which the display mode changes relatively significantly is performed. To the third section) and a transition effect using data of a base effect configured to include an effect data corresponding to a mode in which the display mode does not change (change is relatively small). . In addition, according to the effect time of the transition effect, the start of the transition effect is set from any one of a plurality of start timings preset for the base effect. In other words, the range of data used to execute the transition effect is selected according to the transition effect time. As described above, by making it possible to execute a transition effect with a different effect time using one base effect, display data for executing the transition effect can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Can be reduced.

  Further, in the present modification, the end timing of the transition effect is set during the display of the effect based on the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small) regardless of the transition effect stage time. , The start timing is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a natural appearance when ending the transition effect and switching to the advanced effect.

  In this modification, three start timings are set for the base effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily.

  In the present modification, the time of the transition effect is adjusted to fill the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the developed effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the remaining effect time may be adjusted in the failure notification mode and the transition effect. In this case, a base effect may be provided for the failure notification mode as well as the transition effect. Then, of the effect data of the base effect, the failure notification mode may be displayed using the effect data in a range corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation between the failure notification mode and the transition effect.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, if it is assumed that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation validity period in one continuous make-up effect, the continuous notification mode is displayed before the upper limit number of success notification modes is displayed. The configuration was such that the operation validity period was set to the length at which the transformation effect ended. In other words, when all of the transformations are executed after the elapse of the operation validity period, an effect period in which the effect period elapses before the upper limit number of alterations (success notification mode) is executed. Was set. Further, in the operation valid period, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the operation valid period is terminated, so that only when the game method in which the frame button 22 is actively pressed to terminate the operation valid period is performed. And the upper limit number of success notification modes can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period, the success notification mode is set until the period set at the start of the operation valid period elapses. Alternatively, the failure notification mode is not displayed. That is, it is impossible to shorten the period from the setting of the operation validity period to the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Further, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 in each operation valid period, and the set operation valid period becomes longer as the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is continued. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, only when the player actively presses the frame button 22, the number of transformations can reach the upper limit number set for each effect type. It is possible.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode during the execution of the continuous transformation effect of the second embodiment. FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing a change over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each operation validity period. Further, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during each operation validity period. is there.

  In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the super reach change in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the first operation validity period is set 11 seconds after the start of the change. You. In the second embodiment, since the operation valid period is not interrupted halfway, at the start of the operation valid period, a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) displayed after the operation valid period is included. Is determined in advance. That is, at the start of the operation effective period, the display start of a series of effect modes in which the effect mode during the operation effective period and the notification mode are put together is set. Hereinafter, a production mode composed of one operation valid period and one notification mode set after the valid period is referred to as a transformation production mode.

  In addition, as to which notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is set as the transformation effect mode to be displayed, the transformation effect mode is set at the start of the transformation effect mode (at the start of the operation effective period). The remaining fluctuation time at the time when the process ends (when the notification mode ends) is determined by previously determining. Specifically, first, the display period of the transformation effect mode is determined using a period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60) described later. Next, the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect, which is predicted from the determined display period, is compared with the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time specified for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. Then, when the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the time when the transformation effect mode ends is a value that is larger than the lower limit by 5 seconds or more, a success notification is displayed as a notification mode displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. It is configured to select a transformation effect mode in which the mode is displayed. On the other hand, in other cases, a failure notification mode is set. In addition, 5 seconds is the shortest time (the minimum value of the display period of the transformation effect mode) from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the display of the notification mode. That is, if it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more after the end of the notification mode, it is possible to secure a display time for displaying a new transformation effect mode with a failure notification mode at least once, so that the success notification is performed. Display the mode. On the other hand, if the margin for the lower limit value is predicted to be less than 5 seconds after the end of the makeover effect, the display period for displaying the new makeup effect cannot be secured, and the change accompanied by the failure notification condition The continuous transformation effect is ended by setting the effect mode. Thereby, the type of the transformation effect mode can be changed flexibly according to the remaining fluctuation time.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), as the first transformation effect mode, a transformation effect mode in which the display period is 5 seconds (the operation effective period is 4 seconds) is set. Thus, the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the display period of the first transformation effect mode has elapsed is 44 seconds. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, in the present continuous transformation effect (continuous transformation effect D2 in which the maximum number of transformations is four), the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 24 seconds, which is predicted. The remaining fluctuation time is a value larger than the lower limit by 5 seconds or more. Therefore, a transformation effect mode with a success notification mode is set as the first transformation effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, the first success notification mode is displayed when four seconds set as the operation validity period has elapsed. Although details will be described later, in one continuous make-up effect, the number of continuous operation valid periods in which the frame button 22 has not been pressed at all is counted by a non-pressed number counter 223r described later. According to the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r, the length of the set operation effective period (the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode) is changed (the longer the counter value, the longer the period is set). , FIG. 60 (c)). Since this time is the first operation validity period, 1 is set to the non-pressing number counter 223r.

  When the display period of the first success notification mode (the display period of the transformation effect mode) elapses (16 seconds after the start of the change), the second transformation effect mode is set. The display period of the second transformation effect mode is set to 7 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 6 seconds) corresponding to 1 which is the value of the non-pressing counter 223r. The remaining variation time at the end of the second transformation effect mode is 37 seconds, and there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the lower limit value. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58A, the success notification mode for one second is displayed after the operation validity period for six seconds has elapsed.

  At the end timing of the second transformation effect mode (23 seconds after the start of the change), the third transformation effect mode is set. As the display period of the third transformation effect mode, 9 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 8 seconds) corresponding to 2 which is the value of the non-pressing counter 223r is selected. The remaining fluctuation time at the end of the third transformation effect mode is 28 seconds, and the margin for the lower limit of 24 seconds is less than 5 seconds, so the third transformation effect mode involves a failure notification mode. Set the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), an operation validity period of 8 seconds and a failure notification mode of 1 second are displayed, and then a transition effect is executed. That is, the continuous transformation effect is completed only by performing the transformation twice without performing the transformation (display of the success notification mode) four times, which is the upper limit number of times. In the second embodiment, the effect time of the development effect is determined in advance for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. In the transition effect, a difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect is set. In the example of FIG. 58 (a), after a transition effect of an effect time of 5 seconds is set, a development effect (hit development effect D2) for 23 seconds is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the continuous make-up effect, when the player presses the frame button 22 in each operation valid period, the effect period of each of the first to fifth make-up effect modes is Each is set to the shortest 5 seconds. Thereby, the maximum number of four transformations can be included in the production period of the continuous transformation production.

  As described above, by actively pressing the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the player can set a short operation valid period, thereby displaying more success notification modes. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit of the number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can actively press the frame button 22, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. First, FIG. 59A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, a period selection table 222d is newly added to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment in comparison with the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 14A). They differ in the point. Also, the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b and the development effect mode selection table 222c are partially changed.

  The period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when setting a new transformation effect mode. For each value of the non-pressing counter 223r, the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode, the length of the operation effective period, and the like are set. Is a data table that defines.

  As shown in FIG. 60C, the value “0” of the non-pressing number counter 223r is associated with “5 seconds” as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “4 seconds” as the operation valid period. Have been. For this reason, when the transformation effect mode is newly set with the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r being 0, the transformation effect mode for 5 seconds including the operation validity period of 4 seconds is selected. The non-pressing frequency counter 223r becomes 0 at the start of the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, or when the press on the frame button 22 is detected in the operation valid period immediately before. is there.

  In addition, for the value “1” of the non-pressing number counter 223r, “7 seconds” is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “6 seconds” is defined as the operation effective period. For this reason, when the transformation effect mode is newly set with the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r being 1, the transformation effect mode for 7 seconds including the operation validity period of 6 seconds is selected. Note that the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r becomes 1 in the continuous transformation effect of 1 in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the operation validity period two times before, and in the one previous operation validity period. The case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, or the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect.

  Also, for the value “2 or more” of the non-pressing number counter 223r, “9 seconds” is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “8 seconds” is defined as the operation effective period. Accordingly, in the case of one continuous make-up effect, if the operation valid period in which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected is continuous two or more times and the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r is 2 or more, the operation is performed for eight seconds. A transformation effect mode of a display period of 9 seconds including an operation effective period is set. When the transformation effect mode is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the transformation effect condition to be set ends is determined (predicted). Then, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit value set for each effect type, it is changed to set the shortest operation effective period regardless of the contents of the period selection table 222d. . As a result, it is possible to secure the production period of the development production.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is set, the operation set before the operation effective period to be set in one continuous transformation effect is set. The configuration is such that the length of the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is determined in consideration of the operation status of the frame button 22 in the effective period, and the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected in the past. , The operation validity period to be set is likely to be long. More specifically, the display period (operation effective period) is set to be longer as the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected is larger. As a result, unless the player actively presses the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation effect mode becomes longer, and the chance of displaying the success notification mode is reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to display more success notification modes can actively press the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

  In the second embodiment, when the operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-pressing counter 223r is reset to 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, 1 may be subtracted from the value of the non-pressing frequency counter 223r. With this configuration, as the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r increases, it becomes more difficult to shorten the subsequent operation valid period. Therefore, the frame button 22 is provided to the player in each operation valid period. Can be motivated to press. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is 2 or more, a transformation effect mode of the same length (9 seconds) is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the range where the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is larger than 2, the display period of the transformation effect mode may be set longer as the counter value increases.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Like the make-up effect selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the make-up effect selection table 222b shows the effect of the continuous make-up effect when a change pattern with a continuous make-up effect is selected from the change pattern table 222a. It is a data table referred to for determination.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the make-up effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment defines five effect types of continuous make-up effects A2 to E2. The continuous make-up effect A2 is an effect type corresponding to the continuous make-up effect A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of make-ups and the value of the associated effect counter 223n are the same as the continuous make-up effect A2. Are identical. Similarly, the continuous make-up effect B2 corresponds to the continuous make-up effect B in the first embodiment, the continuous make-up effect C2 corresponds to the continuous make-up effect C in the first embodiment, and the continuous make-up effect D2 is made in the first embodiment. The continuous make-up effect E2 corresponds to the continuous make-up effect D in the embodiment, and the continuous make-up effect E2 in the first embodiment corresponds to the maximum (upper limit) number of make-up times and the value of the associated effect counter 223n. And are the same.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the continuous transformation effect A2, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 39 seconds. That is, each transformation effect mode (operation effective period, notification condition) is set such that the remaining fluctuation time at the timing when the last notification mode of the continuous make-up effect A2 ends is 39 seconds or more. Similarly, in the continuous make-up effect B2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 34 seconds, in the continuous make-up effect C2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 29 seconds, and in the continuous make-up effect D2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set. Is set to 24 seconds, and in the continuous transformation effect E2, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 19 seconds. The lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time is set to a value obtained by adding one second to the effect time of the developed effect corresponding to each effect type. That is, after the end of the continuous transformation effect, a time is set in which a corresponding advanced effect can be executed after a transition effect of at least one second. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during all the operation valid periods in one continuous makeover effect, in addition to displaying the upper limit number of success notification modes, the remaining change time is displayed in the makeover effect selection table 222b. It is configured such that the continuous transformation effect ends at a timing that matches the prescribed lower limit value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 (b), details of the developed effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the development effect executed after the continuous transformation effect is completed, similarly to the development effect mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment includes a pair of the continuous transformation effect type, the special symbol lottery result, and the development effect effect mode (production time). It is one correspondence. Specifically, when the continuous transformation effect A2 is executed as the effect type, an advanced effect in which the effect time is 38 seconds is selected. That is, if the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, the staging development effect A2 with a staging time of 38 seconds is selected, and if it is out of super reach, a staging development effect A2 with a staging time of 38 seconds is selected.

  Similarly, when the continuous transformation effect B2 is executed as the effect type, if the effect time is 33 seconds, the extended effect B2 or the off-line extended effect B2 is selected, and if the continuous transformed effect C2 is executed, The development effect C2 for which the production time is 28 seconds or the off-line development effect C2 is selected. In addition, when the continuous transformation effect D2 is performed as the production type, the development effect D2 or the departure development effect B2 is selected when the production time is 23 seconds, and when the continuous transformation effect E2 is performed, the production is performed. The development effect E2 with a duration of 18 seconds or the off-line development effect E2 is selected. In this way, by defining the effect type of the continuous transformation effect and the effect type of the advanced effect in association with each other, it is possible to reduce the processing load when selecting the effect type of the advanced effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)) in that a timer 223p and a non-press count counter during the display period are provided. 223r, a pressed flag 223s, and a transition effect flag 223t are added. Further, the difference is that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

  During the display period, the timer 223p is a timer that measures a period from when one transformation effect mode starts to when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends. During the display period, the value of the timer 223p is updated one by one in the valid period process 2 executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

  The non-pressing number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of consecutive times of the operation valid period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in one continuous transformation effect. When the frame button 22 has not been pressed at least once during the operation validity period, 1 is added to the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r (see S4514 in FIG. 63). Based on the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r and the specified contents of the period selection table 222d, the length of the display period (and the operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is determined.

  The pressed-down flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not a press on the frame button 22 has been detected in one operation valid period. If the flag is on, it means that the press on the frame button 22 has been detected. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation validity period. The pressed-down flag 223s is set to ON when the pressing of the frame button 22 is first detected during the operation valid period in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 61). Also, at the end of the operation validity period, the value is set to off after updating the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

  The transition effect flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not a transition effect should be set when the display period of the currently executed transformation effect mode ends. If the transition effect flag 223t is on, it means that the start of the transition effect should be set at the end of the display period of the transformation effect mode, and if it is off, a new transformation effect mode is set. Means that you should. This transition effect flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined that a new make-up effect form is the last make-up effect form in the present continuous make-up effect. That is, when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode is within 5 seconds from the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time defined for each effect type, the display is turned on (see S5116 in FIG. 64). .

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. This frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and monitors pressing of the frame button 22. This is a process for performing control according to the pressed state.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), in each of steps S4101 and S4102, S4101 of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S4102 are executed.

  Further, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), It is determined whether the completion flag 223s is on (S4111). In the process of S4111, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is ON (S4111: Yes), it means that the currently detected press is not the first press in the operation valid period, and thus the process is terminated as it is. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4111, if it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223s is off (S4111: No), it means that the first pressing in the operation valid period has been detected, so that the pressed-down flag 223s is turned on first. Is set (S4112). Then, the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), a pressing effect corresponding to the pressing is set (S4114), and the process ends. Note that the press effect is an effect for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed, such as displaying an image in which an image imitating the frame button 22 has been pressed, This is an effect that generates a predetermined sound effect.

  Next, the effect update process 2 (S4022) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect update process 2 (S4022) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the effect update process (see FIG. 36). Is a process for varying the effect mode in accordance with the remaining fluctuation time, values of various timers, and the like.

  Of the effect update processing 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311, the processing of S4301 to S4304 of the effect update processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4310 and S4311 are executed.

  Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4304: Yes), during the valid period in the first embodiment. Instead of the processing (see FIG. 37B), the processing 2 during the valid period is executed (S4321), and this processing ends. The in-valid-process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation-valid period, similarly to the in-valid-period process (see FIG. 37B) in the first embodiment. Details of the in-valid-period process 2 (S4321) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62), when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0. Is determined (S4322), and when it is determined to be 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4322, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0 (S4322: Yes), the process is performed during the display period (S4323), and this process ends. The process during the display period (S4323) is a process for determining the timing at which the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, details of the above-described process 2 during the valid period (S4321) will be described. The in-valid-period process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period, as described above.

  In the valid period process 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f and the value of the timer 223p during the display period are both decremented and updated (S4511). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction has become 0 (whether or not the end timing of the operation valid period has come) (S4512), and if not, (S4512: No). The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4512 that the value of the valid period timer 223f has become 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513). In the process of S4513, if it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223s is off (S4513: No), it means that the press on the frame button 22 has not been detected during the current operation validity period. The value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is updated by adding 1 to the value (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4513, if it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223s is ON (S4513: Yes), the pressed down on the frame button 22 is detected at least once during the operation validity period. , S4514 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to off, and the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4515), followed by terminating the present process.

  By executing the process 2 during the valid period (see FIG. 63), the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r indicating the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which pressing on the frame button 22 has not been detected can be appropriately updated. . Therefore, the subsequent operation validity period can be set to an appropriate length.

  Next, the details of the above-described processing during the display period (S4323) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing during the display period (S4323).

  In the processing during the display period (see FIG. 64), first, the value of the timer 223p during the display period is subtracted by 1 (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223p during the display period after the subtraction is 0. (S5102). In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p is not 0 during the display period after the subtraction (S5102: No), the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223p has become 0 during the display period after the subtraction (S5102: Yes), it means that the timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, A process for setting either a new transformation effect mode or a transition effect is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103). If it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103: Yes), it means that the transition effect should be set. First, a development effect mode corresponding to the present effect type is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60 (b)), and the data corresponding to the read development effect mode is expanded. It is stored in the effect storage area 223m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the advanced effect selected from the advanced effect mode selection table 222c in the process of S5104 is set as the effect time of the transition effect set this time (S5105). finish. By executing the processing of S5105, the difference between the effect time of the developed effect and the remaining fluctuation time can be covered by the effect time of the transition effect, so that the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the developed effect And can be matched.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is off (S5103: No), it means that the transformation effect mode should be newly set. The display period and the operation valid period of the transformation effect mode corresponding to the value of “?” Are read from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether the read display period is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect set this time (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether or not a time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the remaining fluctuation time at the present time is equal to or greater than a lower limit predetermined for each effect type.

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the display period of the makeover effect is beyond the range of the effect period of the continuous makeover effect (S5107: No), the display period of the makeover effect is included in the effect period of the continuous makeover effect. , The shortest display period of 5 seconds is set. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the timer 223p during the display period, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set to the valid period timer 223f (S5108). Next, a transformation effect mode of the type in which the failure notification mode is displayed in the set display period is set (S5109), and both the transition effect flag 223t and the valid period flag 223e are set to ON (S5110). finish. That is, when a long operation validity period is selected and it is determined that the end timing of the make-up effect mode exceeds the effect period of the continuous make-up effect, the display is switched to the shortest display period and the continuous make-up effect is terminated. .

  In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the end timing of the makeover effect is within the range of the effect period of the continuous makeover effect (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read out in the process of S5106 is displayed. The timer is set in the timer 223p during the period, and the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set in the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the operation validity period is started by setting the validity period flag 223e to ON (S5112).

  When the process of S5112 ends, next, the timing at which the display period read in the process of S5106 elapses (end timing of the makeover effect mode) is equal to or later than 5 seconds before the end of the continuous makeover effect time (lower limit). It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within 5 seconds (S5113). If it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the rendering period at the time when the display period has elapsed (S5113: No), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S5114), and the execution of the transformation effect mode with the success notification mode, which ends in the display period set in the process of S5111, is set (S5115). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5113, if it is determined that the end timing of the display period is 5 seconds or more before the end of the effect period (S5113: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is ended in the operation effective period set this time. Then, the transition effect flag 223t is set to ON (S5116). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4 (S5117). If it is determined that the value is 4 (S5117: Yes), the process proceeds to S5114 to perform the fifth success. Set the execution of the notification mode. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is five, and after setting the fifth success notification mode, a direct transition effect is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5117 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 4 (not more than 3) (S5117: No), the process ends when the display period set in the process of S5111 has elapsed. The execution of the transformation effect mode with the notification mode is set (S5118), and the process ends.

  By executing the processing during the display period, the length of the operation valid period can be changed according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each operation valid period of the continuous make-up effect, and the frame button 22 is not pressed. The set operation validity period becomes longer as the operation validity period continues. With this configuration, the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) is set for each effect type only when the player actively presses the frame button 22 as in the first embodiment. It is possible to reach the maximum number of times. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to perform the transformation up to the upper limit number of times, so that the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the display period of one transformation effect mode is associated with each value of the non-pressing number counter 223r, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary that the tendency of the selected display period can be made different depending on the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. A configuration in which a plurality of display period candidates are defined in association with each other may be adopted. Then, one display period may be selected from the candidates by lottery. In addition, in the lottery of the display period, as the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is larger, the ratio of selecting the longer display period may be increased. With this configuration, it is possible to impart randomness to the length of the set display period. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display period that is easy to be selected is changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, not only the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, but also the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode can be played, so that the player can perform the continuous transformation effect. Interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the operation valid period to be set is made variable in accordance with the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is not detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . It is sufficient if the player presses the frame button 22 so that the number of display times of the success notification mode can be easily set to be larger, and, for example, the number of continuous operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected may be counted. . The configuration may be such that the longer the counted number of consecutive times is, the shorter the length of the set operation valid period is. Then, the frame button 22 is actively pressed to increase the count value of the continuous number. If a shorter operation validity period is not set, the continuous number of times before reaching the upper limit transformation number set for each effect type is reached. You may comprise so that a transformation effect may be complete | finished. With this configuration, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, a player who wants to display more success notification modes can positively press the frame button 22. That is, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times that the press on the frame button 22 is not detected is counted in one continuous make-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times may be taken over and counted. That is, the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r at the end of the previous continuous make-up effect is held, and in the next continuous make-up effect, counting is started from the held value of the non-press number counter 223r. It may be. In this case, the non-pressing number counter 223r itself may be maintained as it was at the end of the previous continuous make-up effect, or the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r may be stored in the RAM 223 at the end of the continuous make-up effect. A configuration may be employed in which the counter value is saved in the area and the saved counter value is set again in the non-pressing number counter 223r at the start of the continuous transformation effect. With this configuration, the operation status of the player in one continuous transformation effect can be taken over from the next time onward, so that the effect of not performing the operation can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to press the frame button 22 more positively.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit number of transformations is determined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number, and the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value. When the operation validity period ends, the transformation is always successful (success notification mode is displayed).

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number, whether to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery. In addition, the rate of displaying the success notification mode is configured to be higher in the variable display that is a big hit than in the variable display that is a loss. As a result, when the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is further improved as compared with the first embodiment. Furthermore, the lottery executed by pressing the frame button 22 has a higher percentage of displaying the success notification mode than the lottery executed when the operation valid period has elapsed.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the audio lamp The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 in the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. 14 (see FIG. 14A) in that a transformation possibility determination table 222e is added.

  When the display condition of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is satisfied, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is referred to to determine whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. This is a data table. Details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation possibility determination table 222e. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the transformation possibility determination table 222e, the fluctuation type of the fluctuation display (whether super hit or out of super reach) in which the continuous transposition effect is set, and the operation validity The range of the counter value (random number value) of the effect counter 223n for which the display of the success notification mode is determined is associated with each period end condition.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is hit super reach and the operation validity period ends due to detection of pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is A range of “0 to 79” is defined in association with each other. Since the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 80 out of 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the effect counter 223n, the operation during the hit super reach is performed. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 80% (80/100).

  On the other hand, if the variation type is out of super reach and the operation validity period ends by detecting the press of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99”. ing. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

  As described above, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%. Since the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50%, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the possibility that the winning super reach is executed increases. Therefore, a game during the continuous transformation effect can be performed in the hope that the success notification mode will continue more times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the fluctuation type is hit super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the press of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is set to “0 to 49”. Is defined. Since the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50 out of 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the effect counter 223n, the operation during the hit super reach is performed. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation type is out of super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the press of the button 22, the range of “60 to 99” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. . Since the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 40 out of 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the effect counter 223n, the operation during the out-of-reach super reach is performed. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 40% (40/100).

  As described above, when the operation effective period ends during the execution of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. The success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 40%. In other words, the difference between the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of the hit super reach and the case of the out-of-range super reach as compared with the case where the operation validity period is ended by detecting the press of the frame button 22. Is decreasing. Therefore, when the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation does not increase so much. Therefore, the player who wants to more accurately estimate the jackpot expectation during the execution of the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22.

  In addition, when the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50% even during the execution of the hit super reach. In other words, the configuration is such that the success notification mode is less likely to be displayed than in the case where the operation validity period ends when the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In other words, when a player who does not press the frame button 22 very much plays a game, the continuous transformation effect can be easily ended with a relatively small number of times of displaying the success notification mode even when a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of cases in which a large number of hits are displayed with a small number of success notification modes, so that even if a continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of display of a success notification mode, a sense of expectation for a large jackpot can be provided.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S4031).

  The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main process instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the operation valid period This is a process for setting a corresponding effect when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the period.

  Of the frame button input monitoring / production processing 3 (see FIG. 66), in the processing of S4101 and S4102, the processing of S4101 and S4102 of the frame button input monitoring / production processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Also, in the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the first embodiment is executed. In place of the transformation setting process in the embodiment (see FIG. 35), a transformation setting process 3 is executed (S4121), and this process ends to return to the main process (see FIG. 33). Details of the transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 3 (S4121). The transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is a process for setting the display of the corresponding notification mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the number of transformations, and the like, similarly to the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. is there.

  In the transformation setting processing 3 (see FIG. 67), in the processing of S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212, the processing of S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212 of the transformation setting processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed.

  In the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4203, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit transformation number corresponding to the effect type of the current continuous transformation effect. (S4223: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than a lower limit value defined for each effect type.

  If it is determined in the process of S4221 that the display (transformation) of the success notification mode is not a possible period (S4221: No), the process is performed to set the failure notification mode and select the effect type of the advanced effect. Is shifted to S4204. On the other hand, in the process of S4221, if it is determined that the present time is within the period in which the display of the success notification mode can be set (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation possibility determination table 222e (see FIG. 66 (b)) The value of the effect counter 223n is read (S4222). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223n matches the counter value corresponding to the display determination of the success notification mode (success of the transformation) defined in the transformation possibility determination table 222e (S4223).

  In the process of S4223, if it is determined that the counter value corresponds to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process proceeds to S4210 to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4223 that the counter value does not correspond to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process proceeds to S4204 to display the failure notification mode.

  By the transformation setting process 3, it is possible to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode with a lottery probability according to the type of the variable display and the end condition of the operation validity period. Thus, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the result of the present fluctuation display will be a hit. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the type of notification mode displayed after the operation validity period ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a case in which the success notification mode display is determined differently according to the variation type of the variation display in which the continuous make-up effect is set, resulting in a big hit Is configured such that the display of the success notification mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case of the departure. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not the success notification mode is displayed. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible, and the player who wants to more accurately determine the expectation of the jackpot is caused to positively press the frame button 22. be able to. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  Also, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, by pressing the frame button 22 and terminating the operation validity period, the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number set for each effect type. It has a configuration that can be performed. That is, in the third embodiment, when the player actively presses the frame button 22 to terminate the operation effective period halfway and continues to win the lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode. , The success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, as compared with the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is likely to be reduced. In other words, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is likely to be relatively small in both cases of winning and losing, so even if the continuous transformation effect is completed in a small number of times, expect a sense of being successful. You can hug me. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the case where the operation effective period ends based on the detection of the press of the frame button 22 and the case where the operation effective period ends without detecting the press of the frame button 22 are as follows. The lottery probability of whether to display the success notification mode is made different. When the operation validity period ends without detecting the press of the frame button 22, the difference in the lottery probability at which the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of the hit super-reach and the case of the out-of-range super-reach is determined. It is configured to be less. With this configuration, if the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation does not increase so much. The player who wants to more accurately estimate the jackpot expectation can positively press the frame button 22.

  In the third embodiment, when the lottery of whether to display the success notification mode is omitted, the failure notification mode is displayed and the continuous transformation effect is terminated. However, the continuous transformation effect is not necessarily terminated. You don't have to. For example, instead of the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, an upper limit value of the number of times to set the operation validity period is set, and the continuous transformation effect is continued until the upper limit value is reached, even if the failure notification mode is displayed. (A new operation validity period is set after the failure notification mode ends). With this configuration, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed more times. In addition, by actively pressing the frame button 22 and terminating the operation validity period, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed more times. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to accurately predict whether the winning or losing will be based on the displayed percentage of the success notification mode. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be more positively pressed in the continuous transformation effect.

  In the third embodiment, regardless of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, the success notification mode in the case where the frame button 22 is pressed is smaller than the case where the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting the press of the frame button 22. Although the winning probability in the lottery for displaying or not is configured to be high, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while the special symbol lottery is lost. May be configured so that the winning probability is the same whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the jackpot expectation when the success notification mode is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, so that the player presses the frame button 22 more positively. Can be done. In addition, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode is increased, but when the special symbol lottery is lost, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the winning is performed. You may comprise so that a probability may become low. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the jackpot expectation when the frame button 22 is pressed to display the success notification mode. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode may be made to depend only on the special symbol lottery result. In other words, whether the success notification mode is displayed with the same probability whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period or the case where the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting the press of the frame button 22 is determined. May be configured to perform the lottery.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment described above, whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery, and when the lottery is won, the success notification mode is displayed. Further, the lottery probability at which the display of the success notification mode is determined is set higher during the execution of the hit superreach than during the execution of the off-reach superreach. Thereby, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during a predetermined period (the first two operation valid periods) in one continuous make-up effect, the pressing state (operation state of the player) on the frame button 22 is determined, and The configuration is such that the rate at which the success notification mode is set is varied according to the determination result. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is determined whether or not the player is a player who actively presses the frame button 22 when the operation validity period is set, and suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is a hit according to the determination result. (The selection rate when selecting the notification mode).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 68 (a) is a block diagram showing an advanced presentation mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the development effect form selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment shows that the development effect state to be selected corresponds to the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the fluctuation type of the fluctuation display. It is stipulated.

  It should be noted that, in the fourth embodiment, the operation validity period is not interrupted in the middle in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, in which the production mode of the development effect can be determined according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g. It is because it is. Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the operation validity period is always set to 5 seconds. For this reason, the relationship between the value of the transformation number counter 223g at the time of setting the display of the failure notification mode and the remaining fluctuation time has a one-to-one correspondence. For example, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2, it means that the operation validity period of 5 seconds is displayed three times and the success notification mode of one second is displayed twice, so that the failure notification mode is displayed. Is always 28 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds × 3 + 1 seconds × 2 until the continuous transformation effect is started). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds. Therefore, taking into account 1 second as the display period of the failure notification mode and 1 second as the display period of the transition effect, if a 30-second effect is executed as the advanced effect, the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the advanced effect And can be matched.

  Similarly, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4, it means that the operation validity period of 5 seconds is displayed 5 times and the success notification mode of 1 second is displayed 4 times. The elapsed time when the display is set is always 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds × 5 + 1 seconds × 4). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 20 seconds. Therefore, by executing the failure effect mode and the extended effect of 18 seconds in which the effect time of the transition effect is reduced, the end timing of the extended effect can be matched with the end timing of the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, a development effect with a production time of 30 seconds is associated with the value “2” of the transformation number counter 223g. In other words, the winning extended reach A4 with a rendering time of 30 seconds is associated with the hit superreach, and the extended developing effect A4 with a rendering time of 30 seconds is associated with the missed super reach.

  Similarly, for the value “3” of the transformation number counter 223g, a development effect in which the effect time is 24 seconds is defined in association with the value. In other words, the winning super-reach is defined in association with the winning extended effect B4 of which the production time is 24 seconds, and the super-reach is defined in association with the developing advanced effect B4 of which the rendering time is 24 seconds. Further, for the value "4, 5" of the transformation number counter 223g, a development effect in which the effect time is 18 seconds is defined in association with the value. That is, the hit super-reach is defined in association with the winning extended performance C4 with a production time of 18 seconds, and the super-reach is defined with the extended developing performance C4 with a rendering time of 18 seconds.

  In this way, by referring to the development effect mode selection table 222c, it is possible to determine the type of the development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g. And the end timing of the variable display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 (b) to (d), details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 68B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e according to the fourth embodiment includes a case where it is determined that a player who tends to press the frame button 22 in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game. A push notification table 222e1 used to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode, and a success notification when it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing a game. And a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used to determine whether to display the mode.

  In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined over two operation valid periods after the start of the continuous transformation effect. That is, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected twice in the first two operation valid periods, it is determined that the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing a game. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that the player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 is playing a game. Note that, in order to determine the tendency of the player, in the first two operation valid periods, the success notification mode is always set as the notification mode after the end. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed before the tendency of the player is determined, and the continuous transformation effect is not ended.

  FIG. 68 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the pressing tendency table 222e1. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the press tendency table 222e1, an effect counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode for each of the set number of operation valid periods in one continuous make-up effect and for each variation type. Are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, when the variation type is hit and super reach, “0 to 79” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n in association with the third to fifth operation effective periods in the continuous transformation effect. I have. As a result, when the third to fifth operation effective periods of the continuous transformation effect have ended, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach, “0 to 59” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223 n for the third operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation validity is performed. “0 to 39” is defined in association with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and “0 to 19” is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation validity period. It is stipulated.

  For this reason, when the out-of-reach super reach is executed, it is difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode as compared with the hit super reach. Further, the longer the operation valid period is, the more difficult it is to determine the display of the success notification mode. For this reason, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the degree of expectation of a jackpot increases. Therefore, the player who tends to press the frame button 22 can play the game in expectation that the success notification mode will be displayed more times.

  FIG. 68 (d) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. The non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same configuration as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68 (c)). That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the value of the effect counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode is associated with each of the set number of operation valid periods in one continuous make-up effect and the variation type. Stipulated.

  Specifically, when the variation type is hit and super reach, “0 to 39” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation validity period is set. For the operation validity period, “0 to 79” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n, and for the fifth operation validity period, the value range of the effect counter 223n is set to “0 to 39”. Is associated and defined. That is, during the execution of the hit super-reach, it is difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation effective periods, while ending the even-numbered (fourth) operation effective period. Sometimes, the success notification mode is easily set.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach, “0 to 69” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n for the third operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation validity is set. "0-49" is associated with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and "0-69" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation validity period. It is stipulated. That is, during execution of the out-of-order super reach, the success notification mode is easily set at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation effective periods, contrary to the case of the hit super-reach. It becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the (fourth) operation validity period.

  Therefore, after the odd-numbered operation validity period has ended, the failure notification mode is displayed, and the expectation of winning a jackpot is increased. On the other hand, after the even-numbered operation validity period is completed, the success notification mode is displayed. The higher the expectations, the greater the jackpot. Therefore, in the odd-numbered operation validity period, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the failure notification mode will be displayed after the end of the period, while in the even-numbered operational validity period, after the end of the period. The game can be played in expectation of the display of the success notification mode.

  As described above, the lottery method (table used for the lottery) for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode is different between the player who tends to press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to hardly press the frame button 22. Thereby, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the larger the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, the higher the expectation of big hits. On the other hand, when the player who has a tendency to not easily press the frame button 22 is playing a game, the odds number of times when the success notification mode is displayed decreases the jackpot expectation, and the even number times displays the success notification mode. When this is done, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the jackpot expectation is improved.

  In addition, during the first two operation valid periods in one continuous transformation effect, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method (gaming ability) that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be switched, it is possible to make the player select a favorite suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method that matches the taste of each player. Further, even if the user is tired of one suggestion method, the user can switch to the other suggestion method, so that the game can be prevented from being monotonous (suppressed).

  In the fourth embodiment, as the type of the continuous make-up effect, only the continuous make-up effect with the maximum number of make-up times of 5 is set so that the degree of expectation to be a big hit can be more accurately determined from the display timing of the success notification mode. It is configured to be set. With this configuration, the case where the failure notification mode is displayed can be limited to the case where the display of the success notification mode based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e is omitted in the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more accurately predict the degree of expectation to be a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B) in that a pressed flag 223s and a pressed The difference is that a number counter 223u is provided.

  The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not pressing on the frame button 22 has been detected during one operation valid period, as in the second embodiment. Further, the press number counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of operation valid periods in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect. Based on the counter value of the number-of-presses counter 223u, the tendency of the player (whether the player who tends to press the frame button 22 plays a game) is determined.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S4041) will be described with reference to FIG. The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment. This is a process for displaying an effect corresponding to the detection.

  Of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the processing in S4101 and S4102 respectively correspond to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those in S4101 and S4102 are executed.

  Also, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that a press on the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), the pressed flag 223s is on. It is determined whether this is the case (S4131), and if the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4131 that the pressed-down flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed-down flag 223s is set to on (S4132), and then the value of the pressing-down counter 223u is set to 1. It is updated by adding (S4133). Then, a press effect for notifying the player that the press is detected is set (S4134), and the process ends. In the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the press count counter 223u can be updated in response to the press on the frame button 22, so that the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is The determination can be made according to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the processing during valid period 4 (S4331) will be described. The in-valid-process 4 (S4331) is a process executed in place of the in-valid-process (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the operation valid period ends. This is a process for performing the corresponding control at the timing.

  Of the processing 4 during the valid period (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S4501 and S4502, the same processing as the processing during the valid period (see FIG. 37B) in the third embodiment is respectively performed. Be executed. In the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the subtracted valid period timer 223f is 0 (S4502: Yes), then Then, the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4531), and the transformation setting process 4 is executed (S4532). The transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting a notification mode in the continuous transformation effect, similarly to the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. Details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4532 ends, it is determined whether the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 or not (S4533). That is, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, after the first and second operation validity periods have ended, the success notification mode is always displayed (success in the transformation). Then, the tendency of the player is determined based on the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the two operation valid periods. In the process of S4533, it is determined whether or not it is time to determine the tendency of the player to press (whether the first two operation valid periods have ended).

  In the process of S4533, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 2 (S4533: No), this timing is not the timing of determining the tendency of the player to press, and thus the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), the tendency of the player to press is determined, and whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined. The processing of S4534 to S4536 for setting the table used for the lottery is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534). If it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534: Yes), the success notification mode is set. The table 222e1 for pressing tendency (see FIG. 68 (c)) is set as a table used for the lottery (decision of the transformation possibility) of whether or not to be displayed (S4535), and this processing ends. Since the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u being 2 means that the player has pressed the frame button 22 twice in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect, the frame button 22 is positively activated. This is because there is a high possibility that the player pressing the button 22 is playing a game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4534, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), there is a high possibility that a player who has a tendency to hardly press the frame button 22 is playing a game. Is determined, a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68 (d)) is set as a table used for the lottery on whether or not to display the success notification mode (S4536), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, details of the above-described transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 4 (S4532). Of the transformation setting processing 4 (S4532), in the processing of S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 to S4212, respectively, S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 of the transformation setting processing 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. The same processing as the processing from S4212 to S4212 is executed.

  In the transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when the processing in S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g read in the processing in S4202 is 2 or more ( S4231). In the process of S4231, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), the transformation setting process 4 of this time determines whether any of the first two operation effective periods of the continuous transformation effect is performed. It means that it was executed at the end timing. As described above, since the success notification mode is always displayed after the first half of the operation validity period ends, in this case, the processing of S4210 to S4212 for setting the success notification mode is executed, and the present processing is performed. To end.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4231, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), the value is set in the validity period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the transformation possibility determination table 222e. Then, the table (either the pressing tendency table 222e1 or the non-pressing tendency table 222e2) and the value of the effect counter 223n are read (S4222). As described above, by determining whether or not to display the success notification mode with reference to the pressing tendency table 222e1, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Method) can be realized. On the other hand, by determining whether or not to display the success notification mode with reference to the non-press tendency table 222e2, when the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation validity period, the jackpot expectation degree is reduced, and the even-numbered operation is performed. When the success notification mode is displayed after the validity period, it is possible to realize a gaming property (a method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases.

  Upon completion of the process of S4222, it is determined whether the read value of the effect counter 223n is a counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode (success of the transformation) specified in the table (S4223). If the counter value corresponds to the display of the notification mode (success of the transformation) (S4223: Yes), the processing of S4210 to S4212 for displaying the success notification mode is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4223, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223n is out of the range of the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the advanced effect mode selection table From 222c, the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the mode of the development effect corresponding to the fluctuation type of the current fluctuation display are read (S4232). Next, data corresponding to the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and a failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to one second is set to the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and the process ends.

  By executing the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), the method of suggesting the degree of expectation to be a big hit can be changed according to the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22, so that the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player who is currently playing the game is likely to press the frame button 22 during the predetermined period in the continuous transformation effect. Can be determined (identified). Then, the method of indicating the degree of expectation (gaming ability) in the continuous announcement effect differs between players who tend to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period and players who do not. That is, when it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing a game, the greater the number of times of displaying the success notification mode (the number of times of successful transformation), the greater the hit. It is configured to set a suggestion method that increases the expectation. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation validity period, the expectation of the big hit decreases. Further, when the success notification mode is displayed after the even-numbered operation validity period, a suggestion method is set in which the degree of expectation of winning is improved.

  With such a configuration, various suggestion methods can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, during the first two operation valid periods in one continuous transformation effect, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method (gaming ability) that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be switched, it is possible to make the player select a favorite suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method that matches the taste of each player. Further, even if the user is tired of one suggestion method, the user can switch to the other suggestion method, so that the game can be prevented from being monotonous (suppressed).

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the tendency of the player is determined in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect, but the method of determining the tendency of the player is not limited to this. A configuration in which the tendency of the player is determined based on the pressing state during the first one operation valid period may be adopted. Thereby, in the continuous transformation effect, it is possible to execute a suggestion method that is more suitable for each player for a longer number of times. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the tendency of the player is determined in accordance with a pressing state over three or more operation valid periods. With this configuration, it is possible to more accurately determine the tendency of the player. Further, a period for determining the tendency of the player may be provided separately from the operation valid period set in the continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for example, before the continuous transformation effect is started, an effect (pressing effect) that prompts a press on the frame button 22 is displayed one or more times, and based on the pressing status in the one or more pressing effects, It is good also as composition which discriminates a tendency of a player. With this configuration, all notification modes of the continuous transformation effect can be set to a suggestion method according to the tendency of the player.

  In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is always set to 5 times. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed only when the lottery of whether to display the success notification mode, which is executed based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, is omitted. It is not something that can be done. As in the above embodiments, a plurality of types having different upper limit times of transformation may be provided. With this configuration, when the failure notification mode is displayed, the failure notification mode is not selected by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, but the upper limit number of transformations in the current continuous transformation effect is reached. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the failure notification mode may be displayed. Therefore, when it is assumed that the failure notification mode is determined by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at a timing when the jackpot is reduced, the player's expectation for the jackpot is not It is possible to suppress the reduction.

  In the fourth embodiment, for a player who actively presses the frame button 22, the larger the number of times of display of the success notification mode, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be increased. For a player who does not often press, it is configured such that the odds of the successive transformation effects end to increase the jackpot expectation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The method of indicating the degree of expectation may be different depending on whether the player is a player who actively presses the frame button 22 or a player who does not press the frame button 22 much. On the other hand, when the continuous transformation effect ends at the even-numbered times, the expectation of the big hit increases. On the other hand, for the player who does not press the frame button 22, the larger the continuous transformation effect ends with the smaller number of transformations, the bigger the expectation degree becomes. May be increased. In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the tendency of the number of times of transformation, the rule of the display mode in which the jackpot expectation degree increases when the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed) is set as a player's rule. It is good also as a structure made different according to the tendency of. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation is indicated by the type of the back image displayed on the back of the character 811. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation of the rear image increases in the order of wilderness, mountain, and sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who does not tend to press the frame button 22, the back image may be set to indicate the degree of expectation based on the expression of the character 811 instead of setting the image at random. That is, the expression of the character 811 may be configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of no expression → smile → angry face. Further, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the suggestion method during the execution of the continuous transformation effect according to the tendency of the player, the content of the development effect may be changed according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who actively presses the frame button 22, as the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the advanced effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases, In the case of a player who does not press the button 22, it may be configured such that the more the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812, the higher the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment described above, in one continuous transformation effect, the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is determined, and the method of reporting the jackpot expectation is changed according to the determination result.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the continuous make-up effect is made different from the situation of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the past continuous make-up effect. Specifically, for a player who positively presses the frame button 22, an effect mode in which the operation validity period is set relatively frequently is executed. On the other hand, for a player who is less likely to press the frame button 22, instead of reducing the number of times the operation effective period is set, a long development effect is set. This gives the player who actively presses the frame button 22 a greater number of opportunities to press the frame button 22, while giving the player who does not want to press the frame button 22 a chance to do so. Instead of reducing it, you can enjoy the extended production for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that matches the taste of each player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, even when the failure notification mode is displayed in the continuous make-up effect, the continuous make-up effect is terminated if the set number of operation valid periods (2 or 5 times) remains. Instead, the operation validity period is set again. That is, it is prevented (suppressed) that the operation validity period ends in a small number of times despite the fact that a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 plays a game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fourth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, the development effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the player is a player who tends to press the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is positively pressed according to the determination result (participation frequency is high). For the player having the tendency, the operation valid period is set to be longer. For players who tend not to press the frame button 22 very often (participation frequency is low), the number of times the operation effective period is set is reduced, and the effect time of the advanced effect is extended. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the extended production (extended production for low participation frequency) in which the production time is extended, the production in which the character 811 searches the cave to collect items. Is executed. The found item makes the character 811 advantageous in a battle with the monster 812 that is performed later. The effect of searching for a cave (searching effect) has a configuration in which the number of items discovered by the character 811 indicates a degree of expectation of a jackpot (the more items, the easier it is to win the monster 812). are doing). That is, when the operation validity period is set to a small number for a player who has a low participation frequency, the number of executions of the effect indicating the degree of expectation decreases depending on whether or not the character 811 is transformed. Thus, the degree of expectation can be indicated by the number of items discovered by the character 811. As a result, even when the number of times of setting the operation validity period is small, it is possible to give the same opportunity of suggesting the degree of expectation as when the number of times of setting is large.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the above-described search effect. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the search effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 proceeds toward the back of the cave is displayed. Further, in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm, the characters "search mode" and the characters "expected degree UP when an item is GET" are displayed. Further, in the display area HR4 displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm, the characters “item × 0” are displayed. The characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items found by the character 811. Note that the character 811 can find up to three items in one search effect.

  FIG. 73B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 finds an item during execution of the search effect. In this case, an effect is performed in which the character 811 opens the treasure chest displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and items appear in the treasure chest. On the right side of the treasure box, a display area HR5 for notifying the type of the acquired item is displayed. In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the characters “power up drink GET !!” are displayed in the display area HR5. Further, the character displayed in the display area HR4 is updated to “item × 1”. The number displayed in the display area HR4 can indicate a degree of expectation to be a big hit to the player. In the search effect, there is a possibility that an effect in which no item appears even though the character 811 has found the treasure box. That is, in the search effect, the treasure chest is basically found three times, and the degree of expectation is suggested by how many times the item is found out of the three times.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the player does not frequently participate in the continuous transformation effect, the search effect is executed instead of reducing the number of times of setting the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect. In this search effect, it is possible to suggest a degree of expectation to be a big hit based on the number of items found by the character 811. As a result, even when the number of times of setting the operation validity period is small, it is possible to give the same opportunity of suggesting the degree of expectation as when the number of times of setting is large.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when it is determined that the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is low and when it is determined that the participation frequency is high. First, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), a description will be given of a temporal change in the effect mode when the player's participation frequency is low.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, the operation validity period is set only twice. That is, the operation validity period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are set twice each. In the example of FIG. 74A, the failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and the success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the fifth embodiment, even if the failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation effect is not terminated until the specified number of operation valid periods is set. . This makes it possible to more accurately estimate the degree of expectation of the jackpot according to the number of times of displaying the success notification mode.

  When the display period of the second notification mode ends, a transition effect for one second is set. When the transition effect is completed, an advanced effect is started. In the development effect in which the participation frequency is low, first, a search effect for 15 seconds (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect that indicates a degree of expectation to be a big hit based on the number of items found by the character 811 is executed. Then, after the effect period of 15 seconds has elapsed, an effect of a mode of battle with the monster 812 is executed. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), a winning development effect A5 in a mode of winning the monster 812 during the effect period of 23 seconds is executed.

  As described above, when the participation frequency is low, the opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation is given twice by the two operation valid periods set in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, the search effect gives the opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation three times. Therefore, a total of five opportunities to indicate the jackpot expectation are given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when it is determined that the player's participation frequency is high. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation validity period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are displayed five times. That is, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), a failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, a success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, and a failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode. The success notification mode is displayed as the fourth, fifth, and fifth notification modes. As shown in FIG. 74B, the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which the operation valid period is not terminated even when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period. As a result, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect can be fixed, so that the effect time of the subsequently developed effect can also be fixed. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare various modes for each effect time of the development effect, and the storage capacity for displaying the development effect can be reduced.

  When the display period of the fifth notification mode ends, the transition effect is displayed, and thereafter, the development effect A5 is displayed with the effect time of 23 seconds. As described above, when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation validity period is always set to five times in the continuous transformation effect, and therefore, as in the case where the participation frequency is low, there is an opportunity to indicate the jackpot expectation degree of five. Given once.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. First, FIG. 75A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment in that a valid period number table 222f is added.

  The valid period number table 222f is a data table in which the number of operation valid periods set in the continuous transformation effect is defined for each state of the pressing tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating the degree of participation of the player in the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the valid operation period). If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player actively participates in the continuous make-up effect, and if it is off, it means that the player has low participation frequency in the continuous make-up effect. .

  The details of the valid period count table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the valid period count table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), “5 times” is defined as the set number of operation valid periods in association with the state “on” of the press tendency flag 223y. Therefore, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22) is playing a game, the operation effective period is set to five times in the continuous transformation effect. . Of the notification modes displayed after the set five operation validity periods have ended, the number of times (ratio) in which the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation to the jackpot to the player. .

  In the present embodiment, as in the above-described third embodiment, when a jackpot is hit, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80% after each operation valid period ends, but the event is missed. In this case, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is set so that the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the expectation of the player for the jackpot can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “2 times” is defined as the set number of operation valid periods in association with the state “OFF” of the press tendency flag 223y. For this reason, when the player who participates in the continuous transformation effect at a low frequency (the frequency of pressing the frame button 22 is low) is playing a game, the operation effective period is set twice in the continuous transformation effect. Of the notification modes displayed after the set two operation validity periods have ended, the number of times (ratio) in which the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation to the jackpot to the player. .

  Note that when the frequency of participation in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, the number of times the operation validity period is set is reduced by three times as compared with the case of a player with a high participation frequency. That is, the number of times of suggesting the jackpot expectation in the continuous transformation effect is reduced. In order to cover the decrease in the number of suggestions, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute an effect (search effect) indicating the degree of expectation in the advanced effect. As a result, even for a player with a low participation frequency, it is possible to ensure the same number of suggestions of the jackpot expectation as a player with a high participation frequency. In addition, by increasing the effect time of the extended effect instead of reducing the number of times the operation effective period is set, it is possible to provide an effect mode that matches the taste of a player who does not want to press the frame button 22.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69) in that a valid period number counter 223w, a notification mode timer 223x, and a pressing tendency flag 223y are provided. And a total press counter 223aa and a total valid period counter 223ab. Further, the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

  The valid period number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times the operation valid period is set in one continuous transformation effect. The value of the valid period counter 223w is set to 1 when setting the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect (see S4412 in FIG. 78). Each time a new operation validity period is set, the value is incremented by one (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of the valid period counter 223w is used to determine whether to set a new operation valid period or set a transition effect every time the display period of the notification mode elapses. That is, if the value of the valid period number counter 223w is less than the set number of operation valid periods specified in the valid period number table 222f, a new operation valid period is set. On the other hand, when the value of the valid period number counter 223w matches the set number specified in the valid period number table 222f, the start of the transition effect is set.

  The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode set after the operation effective period ends. In the notification mode timer 223x, a timer value corresponding to one second is set each time display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of the notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or the failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether to set a new operation valid period or a transition effect. .

  The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating whether or not the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect (actively pressing the frame button 22). It means that the frequency of participation in continuous transformation production is low. Note that the participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of operation valid periods in which the player has pressed (participated) the frame button 22 to the set number of total operation valid periods. Specifically, when the operation validity period in which the player has pressed the frame button 22 is more than 80% of the whole, if the player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game. Determine. Each time one continuous make-up effect ends, the push tendency flag 223y is updated according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous make-up effect (S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82). reference).

  The total press counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In other words, the total number of times of the operation valid period accompanied by the pressing of all the frame buttons 22 since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted by the total pressing counter 223aa. The rate at which the frame button 22 is pressed based on the counter value of the total press counter 223aa and the number of all operation valid periods set after the power is turned on (counter value of the total valid period counter 223ab described later). (The tendency of the player) is determined. Every time one continuous make-up effect ends, this total press counter 223aa is updated according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous make-up effect (see S5302 in FIG. 82). ).

  The total valid period number counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of operation valid periods. That is, the number of all operation valid periods since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on is counted by the total valid period number counter 223ab. Based on the value of the total valid period counter 223ab and the value of the total press counter 223aa, the ratio of pressing the frame button 22 (the tendency of the player) is determined. Like the total press counter 223aa, every time one continuous make-up effect ends, the total valid period number counter 223ab changes according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous make-up effect. (See S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the effect update processing 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect update processing 5 (S4051) is similar to the effect update processing (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and during the execution of the fluctuation display, the remaining fluctuation time and the values of the various timers are changed. This is a process for changing the presentation mode according to the like.

  Of the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processing of S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310, S4301, S4302, and S4302 of the effect update processing (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4304 and S4310 are executed.

  Also, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S4302, when it is determined that the in-transformation effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the start timing of the continuous inversion effect is determined. A transformation effect start determination process 5 for discrimination is executed (S4341), and this process ends. Details of this transformation effect start determination processing 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4304: Yes), the end timing of the valid period is determined. During the valid period, the process 5 is executed (S4342), and the process ends. Details of the in-valid-process 5 (S4342) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (b).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), it is next determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is greater than 0 (S4343). If the value is greater than 0 (S4343: Yes), it means that the notification mode is being displayed, so that the notification mode middle process for determining the end timing of the notification mode is executed (S4344). The process ends. Details of the processing during the notification mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4343, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is a value greater than 0 (during the transition effect display time). ) Is determined (S4310), and if the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if the value of the transition effect time timer 223x is a value larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), the transition effect process 5 for determining the end timing of the transition effect is executed. (S4345), this process ends. Details of this transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described with reference to FIG. This transformation effect start determination processing 5 (S4341) determines the start timing of the continuous transformation effect as in the transformation effect start determination processing (see FIG. 37A) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is processing for.

  Of the transformation effect start determination processing 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processing of S4401, S4402, and S4404, the transformation effect start determination processing in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 37 (a)). )), The same processes as those in S4401, S4402, and S4404 are executed.

  In the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78A) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4402 ends, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set to the validity period timer 223f. At the same time, the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, 1 is set to the value of the valid period number counter 223w (S4412), and the process shifts to S4404.

  By executing the transformation effect start determination processing 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set at the same timing (11 seconds after the start of the change) every time, The counting of the valid period counter 223w can be started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78B, details of the above-described processing 5 during the valid period (S4342) will be described. In the valid period process 5 (S4342), similarly to the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the end timing of the operation valid period is determined. This is a process for displaying a corresponding notification mode.

  Of the processing 5 during the valid period (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, the processing of S4501, S4502, and S4531 each correspond to the processing 4 during the valid period (see FIG. 71) of the fourth embodiment. The same processes as those of S4501, S4502, and S4531 are executed. In the validity period process 5 (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4502 ends, the fourth notification mode or the failure notification mode is set to display either the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Instead of the transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the embodiment, the transformation setting processing 5 is executed (S4541), and this processing ends. Details of the transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 5 (S4541). Of the transformation setting processing 5 (S4541), in the processing of S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233, S4201, S4202, and S4210 of the transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. , S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233.

  In the transformation setting processing 5 (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing in S4233 or S4211 ends, a timer value corresponding to one second is set for the value of the notification mode timer 223x ( (S4241), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, details of the above-described process in the notification mode (S4344) will be described. As described above, the notification mode middle process (S4344) is a process of determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode).

  In the process in the notification mode (see FIG. 80), first, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is decremented by 1 (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S5202). In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 (S5202: No), it means that the display time (1 second) of the notification mode has not elapsed, The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5202 that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after the subtraction has become 0 (S5202: Yes), a process for setting any of a new operation effective period or a transition effect is performed. Execute. More specifically, the push tendency flag 223y and the value of the valid period counter 223w are read out (S5203), and these are compared with the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f (S5204).

  As a result of the comparison in the process of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the validity period counter 223w matches the upper limit corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205), and is determined to match the upper limit. In this case (S5205: Yes), a transition effect is set. More specifically, the timer value corresponding to one second is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S5206), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S5207), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the validity period counter 223w does not match the upper limit corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation validity period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the value of the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the valid period counter 223w (S5209), and this processing ends.

  By executing the process in the notification mode (see FIG. 80), the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is accurately determined, and the corresponding control (start setting of the transition effect, or a new setting). Operation validity period).

  Next, the details of the above-described transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described with reference to FIG. This transition effect processing 5 (S4345) is executed instead of the transition effect processing (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the processing during transition effect 5 (see FIG. 81), the processing in steps S4801 and S4802 are the same as the processing in steps S4801 and S4802 of the processing during transition effect (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  In the transition effect processing 5 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). In the process of S4811, if it is determined that the pressing tendency flag 223y is ON (S4811: Yes), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the effect time after the end of the search effect (search mode). (S4812), and the process moves to S4814.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4811 that the press tendency flag 223y is off (S4811: No), it is set so that the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the search effect (search mode). (S4813), the process proceeds to S4814.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between starting the extended effect from the search effect or starting after the end of the search effect, according to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (the tendency of the player). As a result, it is possible to execute a development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time.

  After the processing of S4812 or S4813, a pressing tendency update process for updating the tendency of the player (the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y) according to the player's participation frequency in the present continuous transformation effect is executed (S4814). ). The details of the pressing tendency update processing (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S4814, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S4815), the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the value of the valid period number counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and the present processing is performed. finish.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the above-described pressing tendency update processing (S4814) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this pressing tendency update processing (S4814). In the pressing tendency update processing (S4814), first, the value of the valid period number counter 223w is added to the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab, so that the number of operation valid periods set in the present continuous transformation effect is calculated. This is reflected on the set number of times of the total operation valid period (S5301). Next, by adding the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u to the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the number of times of the operation validity period in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected in the present continuous transformation effect is depressed on the frame button 22. Is reflected in the total number of detected operation valid periods (S5302).

  When the process of S5302 is completed, a value obtained by dividing the value of the updated total number of presses counter 223aa by the value of the updated total valid period number counter 223ab is calculated (S5303). It is determined whether the value is greater than 0.8 (S5304: Yes). In the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is greater than 0.8 (S5304), if the operation validity period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed at a rate of 80% or more. (That is, a player actively participating in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game), so that the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), the player who has relatively low frequency of pressing the frame button 22 during the operation validity period is played. Is performed, the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to off (S5306), and this processing ends.

  By executing the pressing tendency update process (see FIG. 82), every time the continuous make-up effect ends, the tendency of the player can be updated in consideration of the participation status of the player in the continuous make-up effect. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, based on the player's participation status in the continuous transformation effect (the ratio of the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is pressed to the total number of operation valid periods). Thus, a configuration in which the production mode in the continuous transformation production is made different. That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, a relatively large number of times (5 Instead of setting the operation validity period, the effect time of the development effect is shortened. On the other hand, when the player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect much (does not press the frame button 22 much during the operation valid period) is playing a game, a relatively small number (two times) of operations are performed in the continuous transformation effect. Instead of setting the validity period, the production time of the development effect is extended. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player who tends to actively participate in the continuous make-up effect more opportunities to participate in the continuous make-up effect. On the other hand, for a player who does not tend to participate in the continuous make-up effect, the opportunity to participate in the continuous make-up effect is reduced, and the extended effect can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately set according to the tendency of the player.

  In the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which the tendency of the player is determined based on the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected to the number of all the operation valid periods set after the power is turned on. But it is not limited to this. For example, a function of identifying a player playing a game is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and each time it is determined (authenticated) that a different player has started the game, the tendency of the player is renewed. May be determined. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started a game, the value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab may be reset to 0. This makes it possible to more accurately determine the tendency of each player, thereby realizing an effect that more closely matches the tendency of each player. The function of identifying a player playing a game includes, for example, a well-known face authentication function, a fingerprint authentication function, a voiceprint authentication function, and the like. In addition, information of a player who is currently playing a game may be acquired from a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, information indicating the type of the card inserted into the card unit (for example, the card serial number or member number) can be output from the card unit to the pachinko machine 10, while the pachinko machine 10 side And the type of the card can be identified from the information output from the card unit. Then, based on the information output from the card unit, it may be configured to determine that the same player is playing a game while the same card is inserted.

  Further, a known gaming system including a portable terminal (a mobile phone, a smartphone, a tablet, or the like) possessed by a player, a server capable of communicating with the portable terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 capable of communicating with the server. May be applied. That is, the server stores individual information for each player (game history, type and number of effects produced, and the like), and stores the information stored in the server in a corresponding portable terminal (for each player). A gaming system configured to be able to browse through a portable terminal that has accessed the server with the assigned login ID and password) or change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 based on the stored information. May be applied. More specifically, the information on the game history accumulated on the server side includes the value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab described above. When the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab stored (stored) in the server are determined by the pachinko machine 10 that starts the game. , It is possible to reflect the ratio of the players participating in the continuous transformation effect on different days or on different platforms. Therefore, even if the date and time at which the game is played and the platform (hall) at which the game is played are changed, it is possible to accurately determine the tendency of each player and set an effect mode suited to the tendency of the player.

  In the gaming system, as a method of reflecting the information of the server on the pachinko machine 10, for example, a password generated based on a common encoding rule between the server and the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. Method. That is, when starting a game, the mobile terminal connected to the server requests a password for starting the game from the server. The server converts a game history or the like corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the above-described encoding rule. When the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into a value of the total press counter 223aa, a value of the total valid period counter 223ab, and the like based on the above-described encoding rule and set in the RAM 223 or the like. I do. Thereby, the game can be started from the state of the game history immediately after the operator of the portable terminal has finished the previous game. When ending the game, a predetermined operation for causing the pachinko machine 10 to generate a password corresponding to the game end (for example, selecting an option corresponding to the game end on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10; Etc.). Based on a predetermined operation, the game history including the current value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the above-described encoding rule, and the third symbol display device 81 To be displayed. The displayed password is output to the server by the mobile terminal connected to the server. The server converts the password into information corresponding to the game history and updates the information corresponding to the operator of the connected mobile terminal. This allows the pachinko machine 10 and the server to share and update individual information for each player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the change in which the continuous transformation effect is set depends on whether or not the number of operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of operation valid periods. Although the presentation mode (the set number of operation effective periods and the mode of the extended presentation) in the display is configured to be variable, the threshold value for varying the presentation mode is not limited to 80% and may be arbitrarily determined. In the fifth embodiment, an effect mode that is set (easily set) when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the continuous transformation effect frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%, and a case where the ratio is 80% or less. Is switched to the effect mode (which is easy to set). However, the effect of the player may be more finely determined and the effect mode may be further subdivided. Specifically, for example, when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected is equal to or less than 20%, the continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set once is set, and the press of the frame button 22 is pressed. When the ratio of the operation valid period in which the operation valid period is detected exceeds 20% and is equal to or less than 40%, a continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set twice is set, and the operation valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is detected. When the ratio of the period exceeds 40% and is equal to or less than 60%, a continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set three times is set, and the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected is 6%. In the case where the ratio exceeds the percentage and is equal to or less than 80%, a continuous transformation effect in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is set to four times is set, and the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%. In the case, the number of times the operation validity period is set is 5 It may be configured to set up. That is, according to the player's tendency (participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect), one configuration may be set from among five types of effect modes in which the number of operation effective periods and the effect time of the advanced effect are different. . With this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect mode that more closely matches the tendency of each player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the tendency of the player is determined based on the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected. However, the method of determining the tendency of the player is limited to this. Not something. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with another effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the ratio of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the other effects is also taken into account. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22 (a tendency to participate in the continuous transformation effect).

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, as a specific winning opening (large opening) that is opened during execution of the jackpot game (privilege game), a single specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Was provided. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center lower part in the front view of the game board 13, the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the flow path provided on the left side in the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. Both the game ball fired toward (left-hit) and the game ball fired (right-hit) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view enter the ball. Had to be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, two types of specific winning ports having different benefits (number of prize balls) given when a game ball enters are provided. Specifically, a left specific winning opening 650La to which seven prize balls are given each time a game ball enters is provided on the left side of the area below the first entrance opening 64, and 10 prizes are provided. The right specific winning opening 650Ra to which the ball is provided is provided on the right side of the area below the first entering opening 64. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are provided in a symmetrical arrangement at the center lower part of the game board 13 in a front view. These two specific winning openings (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are set such that the game ball is normally difficult to enter, and when one of the jackpot rounds is started, one of the specific winning openings is specified. The winning opening is ready to enter the ball. Further, although the details will be described later, when each specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) is set to be able to enter the ball, the left-hit game ball is also hit right. The game balls are structured so that both can be entered. This allows the player to freely select a preferred firing direction during the jackpot, thereby improving the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 84, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment is deleted. Further, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side of the first entrance 64 in front view, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right of the first entrance 64 in front view. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable winning device 650L is provided with a left specific winning opening 650La through which a game ball can enter, on the left side in front view. When a game ball enters the left variable winning device 650L through the left specific winning opening 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning opening 650La is always open, so that a game ball reaching the left variable winning device 650L from the right in front view can always enter. However, a plurality of nails that form a slant in a downward rightward direction when viewed from the front of the left variable winning device are arranged, and most of the left-played game balls are below the first entrance 64 through the slant. , The game ball flows down and to the lower right in the region below the first entrance 64. That is, since the game ball flows down in a direction away from the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La in normal times. The arrangement of the nails and the like on the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetric, and a downward slant is formed above the right variable winning device 650R. However, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device are provided. Since it is sufficiently far from the device 650R, there is no possibility that a game ball that has been hit right and has flowed down the slope formed by the nail above the right variable winning device 650R will directly enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface provided with the opening) of the left variable winning device 650L is configured so that the upper side protrudes from the lower side to the right in front view. Thereby, even if the game ball flows down almost vertically from above, it can be more reliably prevented (suppressed) from entering the left specific winning opening 650Ra by being hindered by the protruding portion. Note that the right variable winning device 650R is the same as the left variable winning device 650L except that the arrangement is symmetrical to the left variable winning device 650L, and that ten prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Therefore, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, two variable members 650Lb, 650Rb capable of appearing and retracting (variable operation) on the near side and the far side in front view. Is provided. Since these variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are normally buried on the back side in front view (that is, buried on the back side of the base plate 60), the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb move to the area below the first entrance 64. The progress of the game ball flowing down is not hindered by the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, the variable member 650Lb forms a downward slant downward in front view by performing a protruding operation toward the near side in front view. Since the inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the right side of the left variable winning device 650L, the game ball that has flowed down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. In addition, the variable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation toward the near side in a front view, thereby forming an inclination downward in a lower right direction in a front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the left side surface of the right variable winning device 650R, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  In each round of the jackpot, since the variable member corresponding to the jackpot type projects toward the front side in front view, the game ball can easily enter a variable winning opening different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot A6 (16 rounds with a variable jackpot), the variable member 650Rb protrudes, so that the game ball is moved to the right specific winning opening 650Ra having a relatively large number of prize balls (ie, 10). It becomes easy to enter the ball. On the other hand, in each of the jackpot B6 (seven-variable variable jackpot) and the jackpot C6 (seven-hour jackpot), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, so that there are relatively few prize balls (that is, seven) on the left. Gaming balls can easily enter the specific winning opening 650La.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in a state where the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are both protruding (a state where they are disposed at the protruding positions), almost all of the game balls that have reached below the first ball entrance 64 from above. It is configured to be able to receive. Thus, in a state where either of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, both the left-hitting game ball and the right-hitting game ball are received by the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in a protruding state. Then, it is guided to the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La corresponding to the movable member 650Lb or the right specific winning opening 650Ra corresponding to the movable member 650Rb) from the inclination formed by the movable member. Therefore, both when the left movable member 650Lb is set to the big hit type in which the movable operation is performed (variable operation), and when the right movable member 650Rb is set to the big hit type in which the movable operation is performed (variable operation), the play direction of the game ball is changed. The game ball can be made to enter the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra) simply by continuously firing the gaming ball in the desired firing direction. . Therefore, every time a big hit occurs, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the big hit.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the jackpot game is changed according to the jackpot type. Then, regardless of the type of the special winning opening in which the game ball can enter, both the left-hit game ball and the right-hit game ball are guided to the specific winning opening in which the ball can enter. You. That is, two specific winning openings (a left specific winning opening 650La, a right specific winning) are provided for an area (an area below the first entrance 64) that can be reached by a left-hit game ball and a right-hit game ball. The opening 650Ra) is provided. Then, each movable member for guiding the game ball to each specific winning opening changes almost all the game balls reaching the area (specific area) below the first ball opening 64 to the corresponding specific winning opening. It is configured to operate variably so that it can be guided. This allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening regardless of the firing direction of the game ball during execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while any of the movable members is located at the protruding position, the firing intensity is such that the game ball can reach the game area (the firing intensity at which the game ball can fly beyond the return ball preventing member 68). Most of the launched game balls (game balls that reach a specific area without entering the first entrance port 64 or the general winning opening 63) can enter the specific winning port. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, the number of game balls that cannot flow into the specific winning opening (ball entry) and flow down to the out port 66 can be further reduced, so that the game efficiency during the execution of the jackpot game can be reduced. Can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In addition, the two specific winning openings are configured such that a privilege (the number of awarded payout balls) given when a game ball enters is different from each other. Then, the type of the specific winning opening in which the game ball can enter during the execution of the jackpot game is made different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. That is, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to which the game shifts after the execution of the jackpot game, the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given each time the ball enters the specific winning opening is also determined by the jackpot type. , The game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limit, but must be set within a range equal to or less than an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds). For this reason, there is a limit to making a difference in the awarded spherical surface paid out only by the number of rounds. Further, if the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is to be increased within the range of the upper limit value (16 rounds), the number of rounds of the jackpot for the relatively disadvantageous type must be reduced, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The longer the disadvantageous type jackpot period becomes, the shorter the time. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game or the like) or an audio effect (reproduction of a specific song or the like) during execution of the jackpot game, a disadvantageous type of jackpot occurs. In such a case, the execution of the jackpot game may end before the player sufficiently enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the number of rounds can be increased by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different awards (number of prize balls to be paid out) and by changing the specific winning openings that can enter the ball according to the type of jackpot. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without making the number too small (that is, while ensuring a sufficient execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game). More specifically, in the jackpot of the advantageous type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (ie, a right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (the number of winning balls) is set to be able to enter the ball. In a disadvantageous type jackpot, a specific winning port (ie, a left specific winning port 650La) having a small number of benefits (number of prize balls) to be granted in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of rounds of jackpots for disadvantageous types. Therefore, it is possible to add sharpness for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R) in the sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view when the left specific winning opening 650La of the left variable winning device 650L is in a state where a ball can be entered (winning), and FIG. 85 (b) is a right variable winning device. It is a front perspective view when the right specific winning opening 650Ra of 650R is in a state where it can enter a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in a state where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is in a state of protruding forward from the front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the portion of the movable member 650Lb that protrudes forward from the base plate 60 in front view forms a downward slope from upper right to lower left. The game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance opening 64 is guided to the lower left direction in front view where the left specific winning opening 650La is provided, and enters the left specific winning opening 650La. Can be. In addition, since the upper left side of the right specific winning opening 650Ra is closed by the movable member 650Lb, it is impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can enter, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball input port 64) is surely replaced with only the left specific winning opening 650La. You can enter the ball.

  On the other hand, in a state where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the movable member 650Rb projects toward the near side in front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the portion of the movable member 650Rb protruding forward from the base plate 60 in front of the base plate 60 forms a downward slope from upper left to lower right. The game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance 64 is guided to the lower right in front view where the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided, and enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be done. In addition, since the upper right side of the left specific winning opening 650La is closed by the movable member 650Rb, it is impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Therefore, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state in which the ball can enter, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is reliably replaced with the right specific winning opening 650Ra only. You can enter the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a detailed configuration of the above-described movable members 650Lb and 650Rb will be described. In the description of FIG. 86, the lower side of the figure indicates the near side direction of the game board 13, and the upper side indicates the far side direction of the game board 13. First, FIG. 86A is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86 (a), the movable member 650Lb is formed such that it protrudes from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape toward the back of the game board 13. , 650Lb4, and 650Lb4, respectively. Although not shown, these protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 have ends opposite to the base member 650Lb1 connected to a left variable winning device solenoid (not shown). By driving the solenoid for the left variable winning device (turning the solenoid on), the base member 650Lb1 is moved forward and forward through the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4, and is buried deep inside the base plate 60. From the base plate 60 to the front side of the base plate 60. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the left variable winning device is turned off, the base member 650Lb1 is moved rearward in front view, and is buried deep in the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), a cutout portion 650Lb5 is provided at the center of the base member 650Lb1 from the front side to the back side in front view, and only the connection portion 650Lb2 provided on the back side in front view is provided. Accordingly, the left side and the right side of the base member 650Lb1 are connected without separating. The width of the notch 650Lb5 is configured to be at least wider than the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Although the details will be described later, by engaging the movable member 650Rb with the notch 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be independently moved out and out without interfering with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the movable member 650Rb has the same shape as the movable member 650Lb, except that the direction (arrangement) of the notch 650Rb5 is opposite to that of the movable member 650Lb. The notch 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided in the base member 650Rb1 from the back side to the front side in the front view, and is connected to the left side of the base member 650Lb1 only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side in the front view. The right side is connected without separating. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member Rb cross each other and are housed behind the base plate 60. At this time, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are in a state where the notch portion 650Lb5 and the notch portion 650 are engaged. That is, the movable member 650Lb is accommodated in a state where the connecting portion 650Lb5 and the connecting portion 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb face each other. Such storage allows the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb to be stored in a relatively small space, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively utilized.

  FIG. 86B is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86B, when the movable member 650Rb performs the protruding operation, almost the entire base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed to the front side of the base plate 60. As a result, the base member 650Rb1 forms a downward slope toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance 64 is along the slope. The user is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  FIG. 86C is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the connection portion 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connection portion 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the operation proceeds. This protruding operation continues when the connecting portion 650Lb contacts the connecting portion 650Rb2, and when the connecting portions contact each other, the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is hindered and the operation stops. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the movable member 650Lb is in a state where at least the connecting portion 650Lb2 is housed at the back side of the base plate 60 at the projecting position. Even if a part of the base portion on the back side (a range including at least the connection portion 650Lb2) is housed, the game ball sufficiently passes through the range protruding forward from the base plate 60. The possible width is exposed. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific region (the region below the first entrance 64) is reliably moved to the left specific winning opening by the inclination formed by the base member 650Lb1. 650La.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, a first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), three types of big hits, big hits A6, B6, and C6, are defined in the first hit type selection table 202b of the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 87, “big hit A6” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”. "Big hit A6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and a special symbol probable change state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit A6" is reached, the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Rb changes to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit A6" has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of a special symbol which is more advantageous than the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set). The privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each ball entry also increases (to ten). Therefore, "big hit A6" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A6” are “0 to 4”. Since there are five jackpots, when a jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot A6” is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, “big hit B6” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 49”. “Big hit B6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds, and a special symbol positive change state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit B6" is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb is changed to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit B6" has a relatively small number of rounds, the game state after the end of the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of a special symbol that is more advantageous than the time saving state of a normal symbol is set), and the big hit is medium. The privilege (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) given for each ball entry is relatively small (to seven). Therefore, the "big hit B6" is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the big hit, but at least in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained in the big hit, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A6". Become. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B6” are “5 to 49”. Since there are 45 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot B6" is determined when the jackpot is won is 45% (45/100).

  Further, “big hit C6” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99”. The "big hit C6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given only until the change display of the special symbol 100 times after the big hit ends. Further, when the "big hit C6" is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb changes to the protruding position). For this reason, in the "big hit C6", the number of rounds is relatively small, the game state after the end of the big hit is disadvantageous, and the privilege (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each entry during the big hit is relatively small (7 Individual). Therefore, the "big hit C6" is most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the big hit and the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit C6” is “50 to 99”. Since there are 50 jackpots, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot C6” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment has not been changed except for the content of the first hit type selection table 202b, and a description of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa is added. I have.

  The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the movable member that is movable (projected) in each round of the jackpot. When a big hit occurs, data indicating a movable member corresponding to the big hit type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot A6 is determined, “01H” indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while either the jackpot B6 or C6 is stored. If this is determined, “02H” indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322 and S323 in FIG. 88). During the execution of the jackpot game, every time a new round starts, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified, and the projecting operation of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (FIG. 89). S1021). The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa has an initial value set to “00H”, and is reset to the initial value even at the end of the big hit (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value “00H” means that the jackpot game is not being executed (that is, the type of the movable member is not specified).

<Control processing of main controller in sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. First, with reference to FIG. 88, a special symbol change start process 6 (S221) according to the sixth embodiment will be described. This special symbol change start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Similar to the symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed. This is a process for performing (acceptance determination) and determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S301 to S311, each of the special symbol variation start processes (see FIG. 24) of S301 to S311 in the first embodiment is performed. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after the display mode according to the jackpot type is set in the process of S306 (S306), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A6. It is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A6 (S321: No), and “02H” indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S321). S322), the process proceeds to S307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S321 that the current jackpot type is the jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), “01H” indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S323). Then, the process proceeds to S307. The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa in each process of S322 and S323 is referred to when a new round is started in the jackpot, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the projecting position. You.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S921). The jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 31). As in the case of ()), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, the processing is for performing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of the special winning opening.

  Among the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016, the jackpot control process (FIG. 31), the same processes as those in S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1004 that the start timing of a new round has come (S1004: Yes), the movable type storage area 203aa is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa. A projecting operation of the movable member corresponding to the stored data is set (S1021). More specifically, when “01H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, a setting is made such that a protruding operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that a ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. . On the other hand, when “02H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the movable member 650Lb is set so as to be able to enter the left specific winning opening 650La by setting the projecting operation of the movable member 650Lb. Upon completion of the process in S1021, the process proceeds to S1006.

  In the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1007 that the condition for closing the large opening (specific winning opening) is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the movable state is determined. The burying operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and the process ends. That is, when “01H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the setting is such that the immersion operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that it is impossible to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, when “02H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersion operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La.

  In the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 ends, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is reset to “00H” (S1024). ) And the process moves to S1016. According to the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89), the variable operation of each movable member is performed so that the specific winning port corresponding to the jackpot type can be entered among the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra. Can be appropriately controlled.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which two specific winning ports (left specific winning port 650La and right specific winning port 650Ra) having different privileges given to the specific area are provided. In addition, the specific winning opening that can enter the ball is varied according to the jackpot type. More specifically, by performing a protruding operation, a movable member 650Lb that forms a slope that guides the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the left specific winning opening 650La, and the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area is rightward. A movable member 650Rb that forms an inclination for guiding to the specific winning opening 650Ra is provided between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the jackpot types (jackpots B6 and C6) in which the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to perform the projecting operation in each round of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the big hit type (big hit A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to perform the projecting operation in each round of the big hit.

  Each of the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb is configured to have a width capable of receiving almost all of the game balls that have flowed down to the specific region in the state where the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions. For this reason, in a state where any of the movable members is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area can be almost certainly made to enter the corresponding specific winning opening. Here, the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) can reach almost all game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 63 or the first entrance 64, regardless of the firing direction. Is configured. That is, almost all (90% or more) of the left-hitting game ball and the right-hitting game ball reach the specific area. Therefore, regardless of whether the left movable member 650Lb is in the jackpot type arranged at the projecting position or the right movable member 650Rb is in the jackpot type arranged at the projecting position, regardless of the firing direction of the game ball, The game ball can be made to enter a specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). Therefore, each time a big hit occurs, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the big hit.

  In the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a surface on which a game ball can enter (left specific winning opening 650La, The right specific winning opening 650Ra) is arranged so as to be opposed. Each movable member forms a downward slope toward each specific winning opening, thereby forming a state in which game balls can enter each specific winning opening. In other words, each specific winning opening is provided in a direction in which the game ball does not normally advance, and it is possible to enter each specific winning opening by changing the moving direction of the game ball to a direction different from the normal by each movable member. State. Thereby, the configuration of the special winning opening 65a of the above-described first embodiment or the like (provided in the middle of the flow path in which the game ball also travels in the normal state, so that most of the game ball flowing down the flow path flows in Each specific winning opening can be made more compact than in the case of an open structure. That is, since each specific winning opening can be configured to have an area equal to or more than one game ball and less than two gaming balls, the area of the specific winning opening can be reduced. Therefore, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area of the two variable winning devices shown on the board can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of large winning ports (specific winning ports) that are opened and closed during execution of a jackpot game, each large winning port is provided with a flow path provided with the large winning port. It is general to be configured to be openable with substantially the same width as. In addition, a plurality of winning prize openings are arranged side by side in the vertical direction when viewed from the front in one flow path, and the game spheres are placed in any of the winning prize openings simply by continuously firing game balls to the same flow path during the jackpot. It is general that it is configured to be able to enter a ball. However, in this configuration, since the installation area increases as the number of the winning holes increases, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board configuration is reduced. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be compactly configured, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the two specific winning openings (the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are a privilege (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) given when game balls enter each other. Are configured differently. Then, the type of the specific winning opening in which the game ball can enter during the execution of the jackpot game is made different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. That is, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to which the game shifts after the execution of the jackpot game, the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given each time the ball enters the specific winning opening is also determined by the jackpot type. , The game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limit, but must be set within a range equal to or less than an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds). For this reason, there is a limit to making a difference in the awarded spherical surface paid out only by the number of rounds. Further, if the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is to be increased within the range of the upper limit value (16 rounds), the number of rounds of the jackpot for the relatively disadvantageous type must be reduced, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The longer the disadvantageous type jackpot period becomes, the shorter the time. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game or the like) or an audio effect (reproduction of a specific song or the like) during execution of the jackpot game, a disadvantageous type of jackpot occurs. In such a case, the execution of the jackpot game may end before the player sufficiently enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the number of rounds can be increased by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different awards (number of prize balls to be paid out) and by changing the specific winning openings that can enter the ball according to the type of jackpot. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without making the number too small (that is, while ensuring a sufficient execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game). More specifically, in the jackpot of the advantageous type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (ie, a right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (the number of winning balls) is set to be able to enter the ball. In a disadvantageous type jackpot, a specific winning port (ie, a left specific winning port 650La) having a small number of benefits (number of prize balls) to be granted in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of rounds of jackpots for disadvantageous types. Therefore, it is possible to add sharpness for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, an independent drive source is provided for each movable member. However, a single drive source may be used to control the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. More specifically, for example, only one motor is provided as a drive source, and the motor is driven in the forward direction (first direction) in a state where each movable member 650Lb is disposed at the immersion position (immersion position). By doing so, only the movable member 650Lb moves toward the projecting position, while driving the motor in the negative direction (second direction), so that only the movable member 650Rb moves toward the projecting position. May be. That is, two types of gears are provided for the rotating shaft of one motor: a left tilt gear for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Lb, and a right tilt gear for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Rb. In addition, the gears for tilting the left are arranged such that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the forward direction at the retracted position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the movable member 650Lb side and the gear for tilting to the left engage only when the motor rotates forward. In addition, the gears for tilting the right are arranged in such a manner that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction at the retracted position of each movable member. In other words, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the movable member 650Rb side and the right tilt gear are engaged only when the motor rotates in the negative direction. With this configuration, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be separately moved by one drive source, so that the number of components can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is arranged below the first entrance 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a game ball that is right-handed in a state where any movable member is disposed at the protruding position is used. , May be configured to be guided to almost a specific winning opening. Conversely, each variable winning device is configured to be provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and left-handed in a state where any movable member is arranged at the protruding position. You may comprise so that a game ball may be almost entirely guided to a specific winning opening. Since the right flow path and the left flow path of the variable display device unit 80 have a smaller space than the area below the first ball entrance 64, each variable winning device and each movable member are placed on the board. The occupied area can be made smaller. In this case, the width and the inclination angle of each movable member may be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is protruded, so that the specific winning opening is provided. The game ball reaching the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming a slope toward the specific entrance.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a single moving member 650b capable of moving in parallel in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is provided between the two specific winning openings in the specific area instead of the two movable members. As will be described later in detail, the moving member 650b has a left side inclined toward the lower left direction in front view, while a right side inclined toward the lower right direction in front view. In a case where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter a ball, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the left in front view to be adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, so that the moving member 650b is tilted on the left side. A game ball can be guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. Conversely, in the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the right direction as viewed from the front, so that the moving member 650b is inclined rightward to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball is configured to be movable. As described above, by moving the single movable member 650b in parallel to the left and right, the number of solenoids for driving various movable members can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  The board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 90, the game board 13 in this modification is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in that a moving member 650b is used instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. They differ in that they are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b has a substantially triangular shape, and is normally stationary at the intermediate position of each specific winning opening (when a jackpot game is not being executed). In this state (see FIG. 90), a space is created between the moving member 650b and each specific winning opening, which is equal to or more than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific region (the region below the first ball entrance 64) in the normal state is the flow path between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning opening 650La, or the moving member 650b and the right specific winning. It flows down the flow path between the port 650Ra and is guided to the out port 66.

  Next, a detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 (a) is a top view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91 (b) is a front view of the moving member 650b. FIG. 91 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCI-XCI shown in FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), the moving member 650b is configured such that a horizontally long and substantially rectangular flat plate-shaped protruding portion 650bb protrudes from the rear side of a substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown, the protruding portion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction, so that the protruding portion 650bb moves leftward in front view with respect to the protruding portion 650bb. The driving force is transmitted, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the left in front view. When the moving member motor is driven in the negative direction, a driving force in the right direction in front view is transmitted to the protruding portion 650bb, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the right direction in front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2 each having a width of one game ball or more are provided on the right side of the moving member 650b in front view and the left side in front view. I have. The game ball that has reached the moving member 650b from above flows down along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

  FIG. 91D is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in FIG. 91D, the protruding portion 650bb of the moving member 650b is included in the back side of the base plate 60 via the left and right movement holes 650ba opened in the base plate 60. The end of the protruding portion 650bb on the far side in front view is connected to the moving member motor as described above. When a driving force in the left-right direction is applied to the moving member 650b by the moving member motor, the protrusion 650bb moves in the left-right direction along the left-right moving hole 650ba, so that the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left-right direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow-down direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a flowing direction of a game ball in a state in which the moving member 650b has moved parallel to the left direction as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left direction when viewed from the front and is in a state adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball reaching the specific area from the left direction (That is, a game ball hit left) falls on the left slope of the moving member 650b as viewed from the front, and flows down the slope to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R, and moves in the direction of the out opening 66. Flow down. Thereby, in a state where the moving member 650b has moved in the left direction in parallel, the game ball can enter only the left specific winning opening 650La.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b has moved parallel to the right in front view. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the moving member 650b moves parallel to the right in front view and is in a state adjacent to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball reaching the specific area from the right. (That is, a game ball hit right) falls on the right slope in the front view of the moving member 650b and flows down along the slope to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (that is, the game ball hit left) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L and moves toward the out opening 66. Flow down. Thereby, in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction, the game ball can be made to enter only the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment, instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, the single moving member 650b is translated in the left-right direction in parallel, so that the specific winning opening ( One of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) is configured to be in a state where the game ball can enter the ball. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the state of the two specific winning openings (switch between a state where ball entry is possible and a state where ball entry is difficult) with one drive source (motor for moving member). Therefore, the number of drive sources can be reduced as compared with the above-described sixth embodiment, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, during execution of the jackpot game, the game balls are guided to the specific winning opening on the side close to the moving member 650b by the inclination provided on the left and right sides of the moving member 650b. Just by visually recognizing the arrangement in the left-right direction, the player can easily understand the firing direction in which the game ball can easily enter. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right in front view and is in a state close to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the player can easily enter the game ball into the right specific winning opening 650Ra by performing a right hit. Can be ball. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left in front view and is in a state close to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball can easily enter the left specific winning opening 650La by performing a left hit. Can be ball.

  In this modification, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a game ball can enter. The surfaces (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are arranged to face each other. Thus, as in the sixth embodiment, the area of each specific winning opening may be at least one game ball, and the area of the specific winning opening can be reduced. That is, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area that the two variable winning devices show on the board can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration can be increased.

  In the modification of the sixth embodiment, each specific winning opening is arranged in the left-right direction, and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the left-right direction between each specific winning opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, each specific winning opening may be arranged in the vertical direction, and the moving member 650b may be configured to be vertically movable from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. In this case, the inclination of the side of the moving member 650b opposite to the side on which the specific winning opening is arranged may be deleted. With this configuration, the area occupied by the variable winning devices and the moving member 650b on the board can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning opening is in the flowing direction of the game ball (vertical direction in front view). By arranging them so as to be orthogonal to each other, it has been configured to prevent (suppress) a game ball from entering a specific winning opening at a normal time (a state other than during the execution of the big hit game). , But is not limited to this. For example, an opening and closing door for opening and closing each specific winning opening may be provided separately from the movable member. Then, in the jackpot gaming state, only the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening / closing plate attached to the specific winning opening that facilitates the guiding of the game ball reaching the specific area by the movable member) may be opened. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a prize ball from being paid out even when the game ball does not enter the special prize port and is not in the jackpot game state at normal times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole. In this case, the movable member may be configured to be movable periodically or randomly regardless of the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve a gaming property of firing a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily guided by the movable member to the specific winning opening with the opening / closing door opened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the case of realizing this playability, the player understands to which specific winning opening the game ball can be easily guided by using the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment. Because it is easier, it is more effective. The period during which the movable member is moved periodically or randomly may be performed only during the execution of the jackpot game, or the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be continuously moved while the power is turned on. Is also good. In the case where the opening and closing door is provided for each specific winning opening in the modification of the sixth embodiment described above, the arrangement of the moving member 650b is set to an intermediate position between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Rb. And by tilting each opening / closing door in the direction of the moving member 650b, a side surface of the moving member 650b and the tilted opening / closing door form a flow path toward a specific winning opening. Each specific winning opening may be configured to be able to enter a ball. With this configuration, the width in which the game balls can be guided to the corresponding specific winning opening is widened in a state where the ball can enter each specific winning opening, thereby reducing the possibility of generating useless balls. can do. Therefore, the profit of the player can be increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, when a game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra, ten prize balls are paid out, while when the game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La, Although the configuration is such that seven prize balls are paid out, the amount of privilege given when a game ball enters each specific winning opening can be arbitrarily determined. In this case, the number of prize balls given when entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra does not necessarily need to be greater than the number of prize balls given when entering the left specific winning opening 650La. . For example, the number of award balls to be awarded may be matched, or the number of award balls to be awarded may be greater when entering the left specific winning opening 650La than when entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Good. Further, the privilege given when the ball enters each specific winning opening is not limited to the prize ball. For example, if a game ball enters one specific winning opening during execution of a jackpot game, only the prize ball is paid out, while if a game ball enters the other specific winning opening, a prize is won. Instead of or in addition to the ball being paid out, a configuration may be such that a specially changed state of the special symbol is given as a privilege after the end of the jackpot.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the configuration is such that two specific winning ports are provided in the specific area, and the specific winning ports that can enter the ball are switched according to the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, one or both of the two specific winning openings provided in the specific area may be used as the entrance (second entrance) serving as a trigger for a special symbol lottery. That is, at least one of the two specific winning openings may be constituted by a second opening having the same function as the first opening 64. In this case, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (moving member 650b) may be configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern when a win is made in a normal symbol lottery. In the case where the combination is changed to the combination of the specific winning opening and the second winning opening, the condition that each winning opening (the specific winning opening and the second winning opening) can enter the ball can be satisfied at the same time. Like the movable member in the sixth embodiment, it is preferable that the movable member for forming a state in which each winning opening can enter the ball can be operated independently. The through gate 67 is set so that the game ball can always pass through it, and the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed during the execution of the big hit game in the same manner as in the normal case. Therefore, during the round game of each round of the jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning opening is located at the protruding position), it becomes a hit by the lottery of the normal symbol, and the movable member corresponding to the second ball opening protrudes. The condition to move to the position may be satisfied. For this reason, if a movable member that can form a state in which only one entrance can enter the ball, such as the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment, is adopted, at least one of the prizes is won. A problem may occur that the state in which the ball can enter the mouth cannot be achieved even though the condition that the ball can enter the mouth is satisfied. Therefore, as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which separate movable members corresponding to each winning opening can be independently controlled to move, each winning opening can enter the ball. Even if the conditions are satisfied in duplicate, the movable members corresponding to each winning opening can be simultaneously moved. It is possible to suppress a problem that it is not possible to enter a state in which a ball can be entered, even though a condition that allows the ball to enter at least one of the winning ports is satisfied.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, two specific winning openings are arranged in the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) so as to face left and right, and head toward each specific winning opening. Although the configuration was such that the game ball that reached the specific area was guided to the corresponding specific winning opening by forming a slope, the arrangement of the specific winning opening and the configuration for causing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening are: However, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, with the same configuration as the variable prize winning device 65 in the first embodiment, two variable prize winning devices having different numbers of prize balls may be vertically arranged in a specific area. Then, the specific winning opening that is opened according to the jackpot type may be made different.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the specific winning opening that can enter the ball is made different according to the type of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the specific winning ports that can enter the ball are made different according to the number of jackpot rounds. Thereby, the degree of freedom of control can be further increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are configured to face each other. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening La are arranged side by side, and the left specific winning opening 650La is configured to face right when viewed from the front, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra is configured to face left when viewed from the front. It is not necessary to face each specific winning opening. While the movable member 650Lb is located at the protruding position, it is possible to enter the ball (easy entry), and while the movable member 650Rb is located at the protruding position, and when each movable member is at the immersion position (immersion position). A left specific winning opening 650La is provided at a position where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball) while being arranged, and the ball can be entered while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position (entering the ball). Easy) and at the position where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball) while the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position and while each movable member is arranged at the buried position (immersion position). Any structure may be used as long as the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided. As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the spherical surface of the left specific winning opening 650La and the spherical surface of the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be arranged in parallel. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific winning opening 650La formed of a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 is provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and on the lower right side of the movable member 650Rb. The right specific winning opening 650Ra constituted by a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 may be provided. In addition, with respect to the periphery of each specific winning opening, both the person guiding the game ball flowing down the movable member to the specific winning opening in a state where the corresponding movable member is arranged at the protruding position, the corresponding movable member is Outer edges 650La1 and 650Ra1 may be provided for preventing (suppressing) a game ball flowing down in a state where the game ball is placed at the immersion position (burial position) from reaching the specific winning opening. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially inverted “U” -shaped peripheral portion 650La1 is provided around the left specific winning opening 650La. The game ball flowing down at the normal time is prevented from reaching the left specific winning opening 650La by the upper side and the left side of the peripheral portion 650La1. Further, in a state where the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower left through the movable member 650Lb is formed from the upper right side in the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral portion 650La1 to the lower left side. The inclination to the side leads to the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially “U” -shaped peripheral portion 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball that has flowed down during normal times is prevented from reaching the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the upper side and the right side of the peripheral portion 650Ra1. Further, in a state where the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower right direction via the movable member 650Rb is viewed from the upper left in front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral portion 650Ra1. The inclination to the lower right side leads to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As described above, even if the right specific winning opening 650La and the left specific winning opening 650Ra are not configured to face each other, it is possible to realize the same gaming properties as in the sixth embodiment described above.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modified example, in each round of the jackpot, the corresponding movable member is moved to the protruding position, so that the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, and the right specific winning opening is determined. Although the state in which the ball can enter the 650Ra is formed, the invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a state in which a ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650La and a state in which a ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be switched according to the passage of a game ball. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a movable member that structurally switches the state (arrangement) every time the game ball passes is provided, or a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided, so that controllability can be obtained. May be realized.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described sixth embodiment, two specific prize holes (left region) in which the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the specific region (region below the first ball entrance 64) are different from each other. A specific winning opening 650La and a right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and the type of the specific winning opening that can be entered in each round of the big hit is varied according to the big hit type.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that after the big jackpot is completed, the certain game is changed. Two probable variable winning prize ports (left probable variable winning prize port 655La and right probable variable winning prize port 655Ra) are provided to trigger a state (probably changed state of special symbol and reduced time of ordinary design). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probability change winning ports is set to be capable of entering the ball for a predetermined period (for example, one second). That is, when one movable member is moved to the protruding position, a slope is formed which is directed downward toward one of the positive change winning ports. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95, in this first round, during a predetermined period (one second) during which one of the positive change winning prize holes can enter the ball, a game ball that has been right-hitted and has reached the specific area, One of the game balls left-hit and reaching the specific area can enter the probability change winning opening, and the other is constituted by a period during which it is difficult to enter the ball. For this reason, in the first round of the jackpot, a novel playability can be achieved in which the player predicts the launch direction in which the player can enter the probability change winning opening and launches the game ball.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in place of the left variable winning device 650L. The point where the positive variable winning device 655L is provided, the right variable winning device 655R is provided instead of the right variable winning device 650R, and the variable winning below the area where the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are provided. The only difference is that the device 65 is provided.

  The left certain winning prize device 655L and the right certain winning prize device 655R are provided with a left certain winning prize opening 655La and a right certain winning prize opening 655Ra having the same shape as the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, respectively. I have. For this reason, the game ball that has reached the specific area in the normal state (a state other than during the execution of the jackpot game) does not enter the left probable winning prize port 655La or the right probable winning prize port 655Ra and the out port 66 does not enter. Flow down in the direction of. In the state where the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the movable member 650Lb forms an inclination toward the left certainty winning opening 655La (a slope from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front). The game ball that has arrived is guided to the left probable winning prize port 655La. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 650Rb protrudes, the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination toward the right likelihood winning opening 655Ra (incline downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction). The game ball that has arrived at is guided to the right-variable winning winning port 655Ra. As described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position only for one second (a predetermined period) in one round, and therefore, while any of the movable members is disposed at the protruding position. Even if the game ball reaches the specific area, if the corresponding probable winning prize port cannot be reached within one second after being placed at the protruding position, the movable member may be immersed. As a result, the game ball flows down in the direction of the out port 66.

  The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 of the first embodiment and the like. That is, a specific winning opening 65a in which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid for opening and closing the lower opening of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The specific winning opening 65a in the seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which a game ball can enter in each round after the second round of the jackpot. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to the protruding position for one second in accordance with the jackpot type. On the other hand, in each of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are maintained in a state of being immersed, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is opened forward to the specific winning opening 65a. And an open state in which the game ball can enter. This open state continues until 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, or until 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. In the first round of the jackpot, a game ball enters one of the probability change winning prize mouths (left probability change prize mouth 655La or right probability change prize mouth 655Ra). In addition, if a game ball does not enter the probability change winning port even once during the execution of the jackpot game while the normal symbol time reduction state is given, 100 time reduction game states (special A low probability state of the symbol and a normal symbol time reduction state) are given. Therefore, the degree of advantage after the end of the jackpot varies depending on whether or not a game ball enters the probability change winning opening, so that the game ball enters the probability change entrance for the first round for the player. It can be noticed depending on whether or not. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the left-probable variable winning device 655L and the right-probable variable winning device 655R will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is an enlarged front view of a specific area portion of the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 94 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCIV-XCIV shown in FIG. 94 (a). As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the left-probability changing winning device 655L and the right-probability changing winning device 655R are connected on the back side of the base plate 60. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), a game ball provided in the left-probability winning prize port 655La is guided to the rear side of the base plate 60 and discharged therefrom. The left probable variable flow path 655Ld for performing the game and the right probable variable flow path 655Rd for guiding the game ball entering the right probable winning award 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharging the game ball are on the back side of the base plate 60. At. Further, at a position where the left probable variable flow path 655Ld and the right probable variable flow path 655Rd join, a discharge port 656 for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. Although not shown, the outlet 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (probable change switch) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. By detecting the passage of the probability change switch, it is determined that the game ball has entered any one of the probability change winning ports, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change game state.

  As described above, the probability change winning devices are merged inside, and the game ball entering a certain probability change winning hole is discharged through one discharge port 656, and further, the passage of the one discharge port is monitored. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the probability change winning ports, thereby minimizing the number of probability change switches. That is, in the case where a probable change switch is provided for each probable change winning device, at least two probable change switches must be provided. It can be accurately determined that the game ball has entered one of the two. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of the probability change switches. In addition, by joining the probability change winning devices internally, it is possible to handle as one winning device. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of winning devices that can enter the ball during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, as in the seventh embodiment, by using two positive change winning devices as one winning device, the number of winning devices in the game rules can be reduced, so that the game rules can be more easily satisfied. A pachinko machine 10 can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, in the seventh embodiment, in the case of the jackpot type in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position in the first round of the jackpot, the downflow direction of the game ball in the first round explain. For the sake of simplicity, in the following description, a movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position will be referred to as an “opening pattern” which means that it is easy to win the left positive variable winning opening 655La. Open pattern ”. On the other hand, a movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, which is an opening pattern in which the right probable winning opening 655Ra can be easily won, is referred to as a “right V opening pattern”.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the right V release pattern (the movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position) is determined and the player makes a left hit. is there. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), a left-hit game ball falls on the movable member 650Rb from the front left direction with respect to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb has a downward slope from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, the downward momentum (momentum in the lower left direction) of the game ball is not reduced. Therefore, during the one second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, it is possible to relatively easily make the ball enter the right certainty winning opening 655Ra.

  FIGS. 95 (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the downward flow of the game ball when the right V release pattern is determined and the player makes a right hit. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the right-hit game ball falls onto the movable member 650Rb from the right side in front view with respect to the specific area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), since the game ball has a momentum (momentum) directed to the left in front view, the moment until the momentum is reduced (the momentum becomes zero). , And rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the momentum of the rolling in the upper left direction disappears due to the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb (the momentum becomes zero), the game ball rolls to the lower right direction in front view along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. To start. However, it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the momentum of the game ball becomes 0, and thereafter, the momentum gradually accelerates from the state of 0 and reaches the right positive variable winning prize port 655Ra. Just no time left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), one second passes while the game ball rolls on the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right direction in front view, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. That is, since the inclination of the direction toward the right probable prize port 655Ra is lost, the game ball rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the out port 66. For this reason, if the player makes a right hit when the right V release pattern is determined, the movable member 650Rb reaches the right positive change winning prize port 655Ra within one second while the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position. It will be extremely difficult to do so.

  It should be noted that when the left V release pattern is determined, the operation is the same as the right V release pattern, except that the left and right operations are reversed from the right V release pattern. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted and briefly described, when a right hit is performed in a case where the left V opening pattern is determined, the game ball has a momentum from the right to the left in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the player advances in the state, the player enters the left probable winning opening 655La along the inclination of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum (winning). On the other hand, if a left hit is performed when the left V release pattern is determined, the game ball advances with a momentum from the left to the right in front view with respect to the specific area. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction on the slope formed by the movable member 650Lb for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down along the slope in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, as in the case where the right V release pattern is determined and the player strikes right (see FIGS. 95 (b) and (c)), the movable member 650Lb is immersed before reaching the left certainty winning opening 655La. Thus, the game ball flows down to the out port 66.

  Here, the gaming board 13 of the seventh embodiment has a period of about one second until the launched game ball reaches the specific area regardless of whether the player hits the ball left or right. It costs. Therefore, in the method of firing the game ball after confirming the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball is not reached before reaching the specific region or immediately after reaching the specific region. After one second, the movable member is returned to the immersion position. In other words, even if the game ball is fired after the type of the movable member is confirmed, it is impossible to make the game ball enter the probability change winning port. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, for a player who wants to enter a game ball into the probability change winning prize mouth, any of the movable members is moved to the projecting position before the movable member is moved to the projecting position. The type of the movable member is predicted, and the game ball can be fired in the predicted firing direction. Thus, if the movable member predicted by the player to be located at the protruding position and the movable member actually located at the protruding position match, the game ball can be inserted into the positive change winning prize port. On the other hand, when the movable member opposite to the prediction is arranged at the projecting position, it becomes difficult to cause the game ball to enter the certain variance winning opening. Therefore, in the first round of each big hit, the type of the movable member disposed at the protruding position (the firing direction in which the ball easily enters the probable entry ball opening) is more seriously predicted and the game ball is fired. Since a novel playability can be provided, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the big hit of the left V opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position) in the first round. The rate at which the type is determined is higher than the rate at which the big hit type of the right V open pattern (open pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position) is determined. On the other hand, the average round number of each jackpot type in which the left V opening pattern is set is smaller than the average round number of each jackpot type in which the right V opening pattern is set. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, by right-handing each time, the probability change game state is given after the end of the jackpot at a high rate (70% rate), but the jackpot of a relatively large number of rounds (10 or more rounds) When the type is determined, the probability change game state ends at a high rate. On the other hand, when a game method of predicting an opening pattern and changing a firing direction is performed each time, a transition to a certain-variable game state is determined, and a bigger number of rounds (10 rounds or 16 rounds) is played. May be very advantageous for the player, but depending on the accuracy of the prediction of the player, the rate of transition to the probable change game state is significantly reduced (for example, a rate of 50% or less). ).

  With this configuration, it is possible to switch the game method in the first round of the jackpot according to what element the player gives priority to the jackpot. More specifically, for the player who gives the highest priority to the rate at which the probable change game state is set (priority is given), a right hit is performed each time in the first round of the jackpot, and a high rate of about 70% Can select a game method to which a certain change state is given. On the other hand, for a player who wants to make the jackpot of a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (the number of rounds is also more advantageous, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is more advantageous), It is possible to predict whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot of a large number of rounds, and to select a game method in which the launch direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for a jackpot that is won in a normal state (a so-called first hit), a right-handed operation is performed while emphasizing the set ratio of the probability-change gaming state, while a jackpot that is won during a probability-change gaming state (a so-called retreat) The game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction for the hit, and the initial hit predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction. The player can select various game methods, such as a game method of right-handing with emphasis on the ratio of playing. Therefore, it is possible to select a favorite game property for each player and play the game, so that it is possible to realize a wide range of game properties suited to different tastes for each player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can be used by everyone can be realized, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when a big hit occurs, a display area HR8 and a display area HR9 each having a horizontally-long and substantially rectangular shape are formed in the upper left part and the upper right part in the main display area Dm. Inside the display area HR9, a character "big hit" indicating that a big hit game is currently being executed is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand that the big hit game is being executed.

  Further, inside the display area HR8, various information indicating the progress status of the jackpot (display indicating the current round number, the maximum round number, the total number of prize balls acquired in one jackpot, and the number of obtainable prize balls) are displayed. Display indicating the maximum number of prize balls) is displayed. During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained are kept secret from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, “ROUND: 01 / ???” is displayed as a display indicating the number of rounds, and “GET: 0000 / ???” is displayed as a display indicating the number of award balls. Is done. This is because if the maximum number of rounds or the maximum number of prize balls is displayed first, the type of jackpot is recognized by the player who has visually recognized the displayed content, and the type of movable movable member (probable change winning prize) This is because there is a possibility that the firing direction in which the ball can enter the mouth) may also be specified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, information that can identify the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls, is kept secret until at least one round is completed. This eliminates the need for the player to specify the type of the movable member that can be moved to the protruding position, so that the type of the movable member that can be moved to the protruding position (e.g. (The firing direction in which the ball can be made) can be selected. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) for prompting the player to select whether to perform left-handed or right-handed is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, a display area HR10 is formed substantially at the center of the main display area Dm, and the character “select!” Is displayed inside the display area HR10. In addition, below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (left half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR11 in which the character “Expectation Low” is displayed, and “the number of rounds” A display area 12 of a horizontally long and substantially elliptical shape on which a character “High” is displayed, a character “left” is displayed, and a leftward arrow image YG1 imitating a leftward arrow is displayed. On the other hand, below the display area HR9 of the main display area Dm (right half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR13 displaying the character “Expectation High” and “Round” are displayed. A horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR14 on which a character "number Low" is displayed, a character "right-handed" is displayed, and a rightward arrow image YG2 imitating a rightward arrow is displayed.

  According to these display contents, if left-handed, the expectation that the game ball will enter the probability change winning opening is low, but if the game ball enters, it may be a big hit with a large number of rounds Is high for the player. In addition, if you make a right-handed hit, although there is a high degree of expectation that game balls will enter the probability change winning opening, it is highly likely that a type of jackpot with a small number of rounds will be hit if game balls enter. Can be understood by the player. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each launch direction, it is possible to launch the game ball by predicting the launch direction in which it is possible to enter the probability change winning opening, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  Next, an opening pattern that can be set for each movable member in the first round of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change of the movable position of each movable member when the right V opening pattern is set, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the left V opening pattern set. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a temporal change of a movable position of each movable member in a case.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the right V release pattern is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the projecting position one second after the start of one round. The state where the movable member 650Rb protrudes continues for one second, and when one second elapses after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb is buried inside the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Rb is maintained in the buried state until the big hit ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the movable member 650Lb is kept buried consistently during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when one round is started, a selection effect (see FIG. 96) is started. More specifically, when the start timing of one round is reached and the main controller 110 outputs a number-of-rounds command indicating the start of the first round to the audio ramp controller 113, the main controller 113 issues a display control command. The apparatus 114 is instructed to start the execution of the selected effect. When the player who has visually recognized the selected effect makes a left hit, a game ball can enter the right probability change winning opening 655Ra via the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, when the player who has visually recognized the selected effect makes a right strike, the movable member 650Rb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the right sure change winning prize port 655Ra. Cannot enter 655Ra.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the left V release pattern is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the projecting position one second after the start of one round. The state where the movable member 650Lb protrudes continues for one second, and when one second elapses after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is buried inside the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Lb is kept in a buried state until the big hit ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a state of being continuously buried during the big hit. When the player who has visually recognized the selected effect displayed from the start of the first round makes a right-handed game, the player moves to the left positive change winning prize port 655La via the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the protruding position. The ball can enter. On the other hand, when the player who has visually recognized the selected effect makes a left hit, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the left certainty winning opening 655La. Cannot enter 655La.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 98A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11A) in the open pattern. The difference is that a table 202aa is added. Another difference is that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described sixth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The open pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines a variable operation to be set for the movable member in each open pattern (right V open pattern and left V open pattern). At the start of the first round of the big hit, the data for the open pattern corresponding to the current big hit type is read from the open pattern table 202aa and set as the variable operation of the movable member (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101). ).

  Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), “big hit A7” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see FIG. 98 (b)). 202b1). The “big hit A7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is the largest, 16 rounds, and the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit A7”. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot A7" is determined as the jackpot type is 5% (5/100).

  For the range of the first hit type counter C2 of “5 to 29”, “big hit B7” is defined in association with the value (see 202b2 in FIG. 98B). The "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and is the second largest after the "big hit A7", and the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit B7”, so In this case, the rate at which "big hit B7" is determined as the big hit type is 25% (25/100).

  In addition, "big hit C7" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69" (see 202b3 in FIG. 98 (b)). This “big hit C7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds, which is smaller than “big hit A7” or “big hit B7”, and the left V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with "big hit C7". In this case, the rate at which "big hit C7" is determined as the big hit type is 40% (40/100).

  In addition, "big hit D7" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89" (see 202b4 in FIG. 98 (b)). The "big hit D7" has five rounds and is a big hit type having the second smallest number of rounds among all the big hit types. “Big hit D7” is a big hit type in which a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit D7”, so In this case, the rate at which "big hit D7" is determined as the big hit type is 20% (20/100).

  In addition, “big hit E7” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 98B). This “big hit E7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is the smallest, ie, two rounds, and a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit E7”, so In this case, the rate at which “big hit E7” is determined as the big hit type is 10% (10/100).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when “big hit A7” or “big hit B7” is set, the opening pattern of the right V is set, while “big hit C7” to “big hit E7”. In this case, the left V opening pattern is set. Since the rate at which either "big hit A7" (sorting 5%) or "big hit B7" (sorting 25%) is determined is 30%, the rate at which the right V opening pattern is set (30%) is , The left V opening pattern is set lower (70%). Therefore, for the player who gives the most importance (priority) to the rate at which the probable change game state is set, by right-handing each time in the first round of the jackpot, the probable change state is as high as about 70%. A game method to be provided can be selected. On the other hand, for a player who wants to make the jackpot of a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (the number of rounds is also more advantageous, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is more advantageous), It is possible to predict whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot of a large number of rounds, and to select a game method in which the launch direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for a jackpot that is won in a normal state (a so-called first hit), a right-handed operation is performed while emphasizing the set ratio of the probability-change gaming state, while a jackpot that is won during a probability-change gaming state (a so-called retreat) The game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction for the hit, and the initial hit predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction. The player can select various game methods, such as a game method of right-handing with emphasis on the ratio of playing. Therefore, it is possible to select a favorite game property for each player and play the game, so that it is possible to realize a wide range of game properties suited to different tastes for each player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can be used by everyone can be realized, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 98C, the RAM 203 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the above-described sixth embodiment (see FIG. 87B) in that a probable variable setting flag 203ba and a probable variable passage counter are provided. 203bb, a winning counter 203bc, a remaining ball timer flag 203bd, a remaining ball timer 203be, and a discharge counter 203bf are added.

  The probability change setting flag 203ba is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the probability change winning port during the jackpot game. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the above-described probable change switch provided at the outlet 656, the probable change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 102). Note that the probability change setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  When the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch before the power-off is cut off, and it is determined that the game ball has passed. , The probable change setting flag 203ba may be officially set to ON and the process may return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed the probability change switch before the power is turned off, based on whether a value of a probability variation passage counter 203bb described later is greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203ba in the state where the power is cut off, and reduce damage to the hole.

  The probability change passage counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch after one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) is completed. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the probability change winning port in the first round have been discharged based on the sum of the probability change passage counter 203bb and the discharge number counter 203bf described later. The probability variable passage counter 203bb is updated by adding a value one by one every time the probability variation switch is detected during a predetermined period (a so-called ball throwing period) after one round is completed (S1409 in FIG. 104). ). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the probability change winning opening matches the number of discharges, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1415 in FIG. 104). It is to be noted that the probability change passage counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the certain winning port 655La, 655Ra, or the specific winning port 65a in each round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the ball-in detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-described variable switch provided in the variable winning device, It is updated by being added one by one (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device (the sum of the value of the winning number counter 203bc and the variable passing counter 203bb) and the number of discharged (the number of discharged) After it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203bf) matches, the value is reset to “0”, which is the initial value (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of the winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203bd indicates a ball ejection period for discharging the remaining game balls when the game balls remain inside the variable prize device 65 or the probability change prize device at the time when the round ends. Is a flag indicating whether or not. When the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203be described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

  The remaining ball timer 203be sets the variable prize device 65 or the variable prize device (the left varieties prize device) at the point in time when one round has ended and the specific prize port 65a or the variable prize ports 655La and 655Ra are changed to a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. 655L, right probable prize device 655R) is a counter for judging whether or not the time necessary for discharging the remaining game balls has elapsed when the game balls remain inside. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the seventh embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), whether the number of winnings in the variable prize device 65 or the surely changing prize device matches the number of discharged coins is determined. Is determined (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65 or the certain winning device. In addition, it is possible to keep the game balls in the probability change winning device illegally, and to prevent the illegal action of flowing the game balls to the probability change switch at the timing of the first round of the jackpot.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, even if the game ball passes through the positive change switch, the positive change setting flag 203ba is turned ON. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device in each round of the jackpot. The number-of-discharges counter 203bf allows a game ball to pass through a ball discharge port for discharging a game ball from each variable prize device (variable prize device 65 or positive change prize device) (the ball discharge port provided at the ball discharge port). Each time the exit switch is turned on by the passing of a game ball), the value is incremented by one and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 104). After it is determined that the number of played balls matches the number of discharged balls, the number is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1415 in FIG. 104).

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). The difference is that a flag 223aa is added.

  The V-winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not it has already been detected that the game ball has passed the probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot. If the V-winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passage of the certainty switch has been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passage of the certainty switch has not been detected. The V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON in the first round of the jackpot, based on the first reception of the certain-change winning command output from the main control device 110 every time the passing of the certain-change switch is detected ( See S5503 in FIG. 108). The V-winning flag 223aa is set to OFF when it is determined that the V-winning flag 223aa is ON at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when the V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON, a V-winning success effect for notifying the player that a winning has been made to the probability-change winning opening is executed. By executing the V-winning success effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that his / her own selection (the firing direction) is appropriate and that the player will shift to the certain-variable game state after the end of the jackpot. People can be more satisfied.

<Control process of main controller in seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the jackpot control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit control process 7 (S931) is a process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 30) instead of the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment.

  Of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 in each of the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, respectively. , And S1009 to S1011. In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) according to the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the release according to the round and the jackpot type is performed. A jackpot operation setting process for setting an operation is executed (S1031), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), the game state after the big hit end is set. Then, a jackpot ending process is performed (S1032), and the process ends. The details of the jackpot ending process (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 100) according to the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the positive change winning are provided. A prize-winning process for performing a process corresponding to a win in the mouth is executed (S1033). The details of the winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the end of the winning process (S1033), an abnormal process is executed to determine whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a and the probable winning port has been normally ejected (S1034). To end. Details of the winning processing (S1033) and the abnormal processing (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, respectively.

  Next, the details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). The jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and the jackpot type as described above.

  In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No) ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the release pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the release pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is the jackpot A7 or the jackpot B7, the data for performing the variable operation in the right V release pattern (see FIG. 97A) is read, while the current jackpot type is read. Is any of the big hits C7 to E7, the data for performing the variable operation in the left V release pattern (see FIG. 97B) is read.

  When the process of S1103 ends, the start of the release pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the processing of S1105 executed after the processing of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating a newly started round number is set (S1105), and this processing ends. By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be variably controlled in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot ending process (S1032) will be described. The big hit end process (S1032) is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end, as described above. In the jackpot ending process (S1032), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203ba is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), During the jackpot, it means that no game ball has entered (winned) any of the game balls into the certainty winning prize mouth (left lucky winning prize opening 655La and right certainty prize winning opening 655Ra). By setting 100, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving gaming state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol) (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability change setting flag 203ba is ON (S1201: Yes), it means that a game ball has entered the probability change winning port during the current jackpot, By setting the flag 203e to ON, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probable change game state (the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the processing of S1204 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the processing of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probable change setting flag 203ba is set to off (S1205), and the process ends. By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 102), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability change setting flag 203ba.

  Next, details of the winning process (S1033) will be described with reference to FIG. The winning process (S1033) is a process for performing a process according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the probability change winning opening as described above. In the winning process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S1301). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the time when the specific winning opening 65a or the certain-variable winning opening becomes possible to enter the ball until the interval period ends. In the processing of S1301, if it is not the round validity period (S1301: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current time is the round validity period (S1301: Yes), then winning in any one of the specific winning ports (the specific winning port 65a or the probable change winning port) is detected. If it is determined that the winning in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probable winning opening) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning for the specific winning opening has been detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203bc is updated by adding 1 (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probable change switch (S1304). If it is determined that the game ball has passed (S1304: Yes), the probable change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1304: Yes). (S1305), a probability change winning command for notifying the sound ramp control device 113 that the game ball has passed the probability change switch is set (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1304 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch (S1304: No), each processing of S1305 and S1306 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1307.

  In the processing of S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203bc is equal to or greater than 10 (S1307). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is equal to or greater than 10 (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1308). If the time has elapsed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), there is no need to end the round, so this processing is ended as it is. In the process of S1308, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set opening pattern has come, while if the current time is the second round or later, If 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

  In the processing of S1309, the closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probable change winning opening) is set (S1309), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1310). Next, by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203bd to ON, a ball throwing period is set (S1311), and this processing ends.

  Next, details of the abnormality processing (S1034) will be described with reference to FIG. This abnormal process (S1034) is a process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probability-changing winning opening has been normally discharged, as described above. In this abnormal process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round valid period (S1401). If the current time is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then, whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch (the game ball is discharged from the outlet for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device). (S1402).

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203bf (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is off (S1404: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is ON (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently in the ball throwing period, and the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is set to 1 Is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the ball throwing period (0.8 seconds after the end of the round)) (S1406). When it is determined that the value of 203be is not the upper limit value (not the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the current is the ball throwing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) If it is determined that the ball elapse period is over after one round is completed (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the probable change switch (S1408). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1408: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the probable variable switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable passage counter 203bb (S1409), and the probable variable setting flag 203ba is set to ON. (S1410), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the current ball pitching period is the ball pitching period after the second and subsequent rounds have been completed (S1407: No), each of the steps S1408 to S1410 is performed. The process is skipped and the process ends.

  Further, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (it is the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: Yes), then, the discharge number (discharge number counter 203bf) The value) is determined to be equal to the winning number (the sum of the value of the winning number counter 203bc and the value of the probability change counter 203bb) (S1411).

  In the processing of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged papers and the number of winnings do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the processing shifts to S1413. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of passing the game ball through the probability change switch while the probability change winning port is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S1411: Yes), the processing of S1412 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1413. In the processing of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to off (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203bc, the number-of-discharge counter 203bf, and the value of the certainty passing counter 203bb are reset (S1415), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 104) causes clogging of the ball inside each variable prize device (variable prize device 65 and certain variance prize device), thereby causing each specific prize port (specific prize port 65a and It is possible to detect and notify at an early stage of the occurrence of a problem that a game ball that has entered a certain winning prize port cannot be normally discharged.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the command determination process 7 (S4021) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 7 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is executed in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ) Is a process for analyzing an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 41).

  Of the command determination processing 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, in each of steps S4901 to S4910 and S4918, the command determination processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is respectively performed (see FIG. 41). The same processes as those of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 are executed. In the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the unprocessed command does not include the winning information command (S4909: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to winning is received (S4921). Here, the command related to the hit is, specifically, an opening command, a number of rounds command, a closing command, a positive change winning command, an ending command, and the like.

  In the process of S4921, if it is determined that any command related to the hit has been received from the main control device 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of the unprocessed command related to the hit is analyzed, and the command (S4922), and terminates the present process. Details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4921 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the command related to the hit (S4921: No), the process proceeds to S4918.

  Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing (S4922). Of the hit-related command processing (S4922), the processing of S4911 to S4917 is the same as that of S4911 to S4917 executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Since each process is simply ported as it is, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 106) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include the round number command (S4913). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the closing command is included in the unprocessed commands (S4951). In the processing of S4951, if it is determined that the closing command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110 (S4951: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of one round of the jackpot. Therefore, a closing command process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round is executed (S4952), and this process ends. The details of the close command processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the close command has not been received (S4951: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 includes the positive change winning command. (S4953), and if it is determined that the probability change winning command is included (S4953: Yes), it means that it is the timing when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch. Is executed (S4954), and the process ends. The details of the probability change winning command processing (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S4953, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the probable change winning command (S4953: No), the process proceeds to S4916.

  Next, the details of the above-described close command processing (S4952) will be described with reference to FIG. The closing command process (S4952) is a process for setting an effect mode at the end of the round, as described above. In the close command processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the current round has ended in the first round of the jackpot (S5401). Then, the execution of the interval effect in a mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S5402), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the round ended this time is the first round (S5401: Yes), it is next determined whether the V-winning flag 223aa is on (S5403).

  In the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the V-winning flag 223aa is ON (S5403: No), a certain-variable winning prize port (either the left-positive variable winning prize port 655La or the right-positive variable winning prize port 655Ra) during one round. Since it means that the winning of the prize has been detected, the V-winning flag 223aa is set to OFF (S5404), and the process proceeds to S5402. On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the V-winning flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), one round of the jackpot without allowing the game ball to enter the probability-change winning opening during one round. Is completed, a V-winning failure effect for notifying the player that the game ball could not be won to the probability change winning port is set (S5405), and this processing ends. . By executing this V winning failure production, the game ball did not enter the probability change winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player, and the firing that the game ball actually becomes easy to win the probability change winning opening) (The direction was not matched) can be easily understood by the player. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player more seriously predict the firing direction so that the game ball will be awarded (enters the ball) at the next winning jackpot at the next jackpot. Therefore, the player's motivation for the next big hit can be improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, details of the above-described probable change winning command processing (S4954) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the probable change winning command processing (S4954). The probability change winning command processing (S4954) is a process for performing control according to the number of times the probability change switch has passed, as described above.

  In the probability change winning command processing (S4954), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501), and if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5501: No). This means that the probability change winning command of this time is a command output based on the passage of the first probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot, so that it is notified that the game ball has entered the probability change winning port. The execution of the V-prize success effect is set (S5502), the V-prize completed flag 223aa is set to ON (S5503), and the process ends. By executing the V-winning success effect, it is determined that the game ball has entered the probability change winning opening (the firing direction selected by the player and the firing direction in which the game ball can easily win the probability change winning opening). Can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, a greater satisfaction can be given to the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5501 that the V-winning flag 223aa is ON (S5501: Yes), it means that the V-winning success effect has already been executed, and thus the V-winning success effect is duplicated. In order to prevent the processing from being executed, the processing in steps S5502 and S5503 is skipped, and the processing ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the gaming ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the probability change game state is established after the end of the jackpot (special symbol change state and special symbol time reduction state). ) Are provided as two triggers for providing a certain probability change winning prize port (a left probability change winning prize port 655La and a right probability change prize winning port 655Ra). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probability change winning ports is set to be able to enter the ball. That is, when one movable member is moved to the protruding position, a slope is formed which is directed downward toward one of the positive change winning ports. In the first round of the jackpot, the period during which the movable member is located at the protruding position is as short as one second. The movable member is buried before the game ball enters the probability change winning port along with it, and the game ball cannot enter the probability change winning port. In the seventh embodiment, when left-handed is performed when the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb is longer than when right-handed is performed. If the player hits the ball, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the left probability change winning port 655La. On the other hand, if the player hits right, the game ball easily enters the left probability change winning port 655La. On the other hand, when right-handed is performed when the movable member 650Rb is located at the protruding position, the time required for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb is longer than when left-handed, so right-handed is performed. While it is difficult to allow game balls to enter the right probability change winning port 655Ra, it becomes easy to cause game balls to enter the left probability change winning port 655Ra when right-handed. Here, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to detect in advance the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position from the presentation mode or the like, so that the game ball enters the ball. It is possible to realize a novel playability that allows a player to predict a possible firing direction (a type of a movable member arranged at a projecting position). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the seventh embodiment, any one of the positive change winning ports can enter the ball in the first round of the jackpot (that is, any movable member can be changed to the protruding position), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the round in which any of the certain variance winning prize ports is set to be able to enter the ball may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the number of rounds in which the probability change winning port is set to a state in which the ball can be entered is not limited to one, and may be set two or more times in one big hit. In this case, if the game ball can be thrown into the probability change winning port in the first round in which the probability change winning port is set to be able to enter the ball, the probability change winning port can enter after the next round In a round set in the state, a configuration may be adopted in which a launch direction in which a game ball can enter is notified (navigated) to a player.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the period required for the game ball to reach the probability change winning port is made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball. That is, when the movable member 650Lb is located at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handing is more likely to have a left-positive change prize in a shorter period of time than the game ball that has reached the specific area by left-handing. The configuration was such that it could easily reach the mouth 655La. In addition, when the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by left-handing is more likely to have a right-to-left change prize than the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handing. Although the configuration is such that it is easy to reach the mouth 655Ra, the invention is not limited to this. The launch direction in which the period required to reach the certain variation winning port in the round in which the certain variation winning port can enter the ball may be fixed. That is, in all the jackpot types, the right-handed player may be configured to shorten the time required to reach the certain winning prize mouth, as opposed to the left-handed player. It may be configured such that the time required for hitting the ball to reach the probability change winning port becomes shorter.

  In the seventh embodiment, the period until reaching the corresponding one positive change winning port differs between right-handed and left-handed, depending on the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the left probability changing winning opening 655La is arranged at a position where a game ball can enter only when a left hit is performed, and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra is positioned only when the right hit is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the arrangement is made at a position where there is a possibility that the winning will occur, and the period until reaching each of the probability change winning prize openings varies depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, in the case of one jackpot type, the game ball fired by left-handed is more likely to be left-turned than the time required for the game ball fired by right-handed to reach the right-winning winning prize opening 655Ra. While the period until reaching the mouth 655La is configured to be shorter, in other jackpot types, the game ball fired by left-handing reaches the left-probable winning prize opening 655La than the period until it reaches Alternatively, the period until the game ball fired by the right strike reaches the right probable winning prize port 655Ra may be configured to be shorter. In this case, the winning opening that can be entered by right-handing and the winning opening that can be entered by left-handing do not necessarily have to be positive change winning openings. By doing so, it may be replaced with a special winning opening in which only payout of prize balls is performed. Also, according to the jackpot type, the period until reaching the winning opening when right-handed and the period until reaching the winning opening when left-handed are not different, The period until the operation may be constant regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, by arranging nails, windmills, etc., it is configured such that the time to reach the winning opening is shorter when aiming at the winning opening on one of right-handed and left-handing than on the other. You may.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, a description will be given of a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, two winning change winning devices (a left winning change winning device 655L and a right winning change winning device 655R) and two variable winning devices are provided as a winning device that can enter the ball during the execution of the jackpot game. The prize device 65 and the prize device are provided, and the type of the prize device that can enter the ball is changed according to the round of the jackpot. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the certain winning prize openings (the left winning prize winning opening 655La and the right guessing winning prize opening 655Ra) is set to be able to enter the ball, while in the second round of the jackpot, the specific winning prize is set. The configuration is such that the mouth 65a is set in a state where the ball can enter.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, only two probability change winning devices (left probability change winning device 655L, right probability change winning device 655R) are provided, and a plurality of flow paths (probability change switches are provided inside the probability change winning device). Channel and a channel not provided with a probability change switch), and then to any of the probability change prize openings (left probability change prize opening 655La, right probability change prize opening 655Ra) according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. The configuration is such that the flow path through which the entered game balls are distributed is variable. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball that has entered the probability change winning prize port is a flow path provided with the probability change switch among a plurality of flow paths provided inside the probability change winning apparatus. On the other hand, a game ball that has entered the probability change winning port after the second round of the jackpot is controlled so as to be distributed to a channel in which the probability change switch is not provided. With this configuration, a round (first round) in which the probability change game state is given after the jackpot is completed by entering the probability change winning port by only two probability change winning devices, and the game ball is fired to the specific area. By continuing to do so, a round (two or more rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained can be provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the seventh embodiment is different in the configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment in that the variable prize device 65 is deleted, the left-probability variable prize device 655L, In addition, the internal structure of the right-winning winning device 655R is changed, and the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the seventh embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133, a description will be given of a board configuration of a game board 13 according to a modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 133, the gaming board 13 of this modification is different from the gaming board 13 of the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is omitted. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each of the winning-winning apparatuses (the left-winning-winning apparatus 655L and the right-winning-winning apparatus 655R) is also partially changed from the seventh embodiment described above. I have. The other configuration of the board is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each of the winning-winning apparatuses according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a specific area in the game board 13 of the present modified example. As shown in FIG. 134, in the present modification, the left probable winning award 655La and the right probable winning award 655Ra are provided inside the left-probable winning award device 655L and the right-probable winning award device 655R and on the back side of the base plate 60. A plurality of flow paths through which the entered game balls flow are provided. More specifically, the downstream side of the left-probability change winning device 655L is branched into two flow paths (probably-variable guidance flow path 655Ld1 and normal guidance flow path 655Ld2). A probable ball inlet 656a provided with a switch is provided. If the game ball is guided to the certain-variable entrance ball opening 656a by flowing the game ball down the positive-change guiding flow path 655Ld1 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball always passes through the positive-change switch. The game state after the end is set to the probable change game state. It should be noted that a game ball that has entered the certain-variable-entrance ball opening 656a and passed the certain-variable switch is discharged to the outside as it is.

  On the other hand, a ball discharge port 656b1 for discharging game balls to the outside is provided downstream of the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2. Since the ball discharge port 656b1 is not provided with a probable change switch, even if the game ball passes through the ball discharge port 656b1, it does not affect the game state after the end of the big hit. In other words, irrespective of the number of passes of the ball discharge port 656b1 during execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball has passed at least once through the probability change switch, the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is determined as the game state If the state is set and the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch even once, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the execution of the big hit game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 134, at a position where the game ball is branched into the probability-variable guiding flow path 655Ld1 and the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2, the game ball is placed in one of the flow paths (the probability varying guiding flow path 655Ld1 and the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2). ) Is provided with a flow path distribution valve 655Lc. In the first round of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc is in a state of being tilted leftward in a front view (a state of forming a downward slant from upper left to lower right in front view) (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal guide flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the positive change guide flow path 655Ld1 is open. In this state, the game ball that has entered the positive probability change winning prize port 655La is distributed to the positive variable guide flow path 655Ld1 whose upstream side is open, and is guided to the positive probability change ball port 656a. For this reason, if the game ball can be made to enter the left probability change winning opening 655La in the first round of the jackpot, in addition to the prize ball given to the ball entering the left probability change winning opening 655La, the probability change switch is used. Since a game ball can be passed, a certain change game state is given as a game state after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the first round of the jackpot ends and the ball ejection period elapses, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc performs a tilting operation in the right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the upstream side of the probable variable induction flow path 655Ld1 is closed by the flow distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, the game ball that has entered the positive probability winning prize opening 655La is distributed to the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2 having an open upstream side, and guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 downstream of the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2. Is done. For this reason, after the second round of the jackpot, even if the game ball is allowed to enter the left-probable winning prize port 655La, the entered game ball cannot pass through the probable-change switch. Only prize balls for balls are awarded.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right-winning winning device 655R is only a symmetrical internal structure of the left-winning winning device 655L. By inclining the flow distribution valve 655Rc provided inside the positive variation winning device 655R to the right in front view, the upstream side of the positive variation induction flow path 655Rd1 is opened (the upstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probability change winning prize port 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot is distributed to the probability change guide channel 655Rd1 and enters the probability change entry ball port 656a. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the upstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Rd2 is opened by closing the flow path distribution valve 655Rc to the left as viewed from the front (the upstream side of the positive variable guidance flow path 655Rd1 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probable winning prize port 655Ra after the second round of the jackpot is distributed to the normal guidance flow path 655Rd2 and enters the ball discharge port 656b2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, an operation pattern (flow path switching pattern) of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc in the positive change winning device will be described. FIG. 135 compares the temporal change of the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb when the left V opening pattern is set for the movable members 650Lb and 655Rb, and the temporal change of the switching of the flow path in the positive change winning device. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in the first round of the jackpot, the respective flow distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are connected to the respective normal guiding flow paths (normal guiding flow paths) until one second elapses when the movable member 650Rb is projected to the projected position. 655Ld2, the normal guiding flow path 655Rd2). When one second has elapsed since the start of the first round of the jackpot and the movable member 650Rb has moved to the protruding position, each of the flow distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc is connected to each of the positive variable induction flow paths (the positive variable induction flow path 655Ld1, the positive variable flow path). It moves to an arrangement (see FIG. 134) in which game balls are distributed to the guide channel 655Rd1). The arrangement for distributing the game balls to the probable guide path is continued even after the first round is completed and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the immersion position, and 0.5 seconds from the end of the first round. With the passage of time, the flow distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are returned to the arrangement for distributing the game balls to the respective normal guide channels (the normal guide channel 655Ld2 and the normal guide channel 655Rd2). 0.5 second from the end of this one round is a so-called ball brushing period. That is, a sufficient period is set so that a game ball that has entered the probability-change winning port just before the end of one round reaches the probability-variation entering port 656a. By setting the ball-splashing period of 0.5 seconds, a situation may occur in which the probability change state is not given after the end of the jackpot despite entering the probability change winning port just before the end of one round. This can prevent the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall.

  After the end of the first round, the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc does not change until the jackpot ends. Therefore, a game ball that has entered the positive change winning opening (either the left positive changing winning opening 655La or the right positive changing winning opening 655Ra) after the second round of the jackpot is guided to one of the ball discharge openings 656b1 and 656b2. You. On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb can be moved to the protruding position even in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, the movable member that has been moved to the projecting position in the first round is also moved to the projecting position in the second and subsequent rounds. In other words, the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the probability change winning opening (the period from the launch of the game ball to the time the ball enters the probability change winning opening) is fixed at one jackpot. Thus, by simply checking the type of the movable member that has been moved to the protruding position in the first round, the player can easily recognize the firing direction in which the ball can easily enter the certain winning opening in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, for a player who wants to quickly digest the jackpot game, the game ball can be fired in the firing direction in which the period until the ball hits the probability change winning port is likely to be short. On the other hand, a player who wants to spend a longer time playing a jackpot game (and wants to enjoy it slowly) fires a game ball in the firing direction in which the time required to enter the probability change winning opening tends to be longer. Can be done. As a result, the player himself / herself can select a game method according to the taste of each player.

  In the big hit where the left V opening pattern is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the projecting position in each round of the big hit. That is, the switching pattern of the flow path (the operation pattern of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc) inside the positive change winning device is exactly the same as the big hit where the right V opening pattern is set.

  As described above, in this modified example, only two positive change prize devices are provided on the board, and inside the positive change prize device, it is determined whether the positive change switch can be passed or it is difficult to pass every round of a jackpot. It is configured to switch (change the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc, 655Rc). With such a configuration, the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment can be omitted, so that the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment and its modification, the selection effect is always executed from the start of one round of the jackpot until any of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is moved to the protruding position. But it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1% in the case of a jackpot), a notification effect for notifying the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probability change winning opening instead of the selection effect is executed. . With this configuration, the player can be pleased when the notification effect is executed.

  In the seventh embodiment and its modification, the two positive change winning prize ports are arranged to be opposed to each other in the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the entrances is replaced with an entrance (a second entrance) having the same function as the first entrance 64 (that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed when a game ball enters). The electric accessory 64a provided along with the first entrance 64 may be deleted. Then, in a case where a win is made in a normal symbol lottery, the movable member on the side that can enter the second ball entrance may be moved to the protruding position. With this configuration, in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, the game ball that has reached the specific area can be efficiently inserted into the second entrance, so that the game efficiency during the time reduction state is further improved. be able to. In this case, during the time-variable gaming state in which the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set and the time-saving gaming state, it is easy to enter the second entrance (the second entrance after the game ball is fired). (The period until the ball enters the ball is likely to be short) may be notified to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably cause the game ball to enter the second entrance during a period in which the movable member is arranged at the projecting position as a normal symbol hit.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning ports (a left specific winning port 650La and a right specific winning port 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning port is protruded. In this configuration, the game ball reaching the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming an inclination toward the specific winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b having a shape obtained by combining two movable members in the sixth embodiment is provided, and according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b, The game balls reaching the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) are allowed to enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the types of winning ports are made different. In the eighth embodiment, one specific winning opening 657a and one general winning opening 630 are provided in place of the two specific winning openings in the sixth embodiment. Then, the movable member 657b is completely disposed at the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination capable of guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a, while the movable member 657b is moved from the buried position (submerged position) to the projected position. At an intermediate position during the movement, a game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that a general winning opening 630 is provided instead of the left specific winning opening 650La, and a right specific winning opening is provided. A point that a specific winning opening 657a is provided instead of the mouth 650Ra, a movable member 657b is provided instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed. And that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the sixth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109 (b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109 (c) is a view of the movable member 657b as viewed from the front left side. It is a side view in the case. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment is a front-side inclined member 657bf that forms an inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction on the near side in front view. And a rear-side inclined member 657bb that forms a slope in a downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction is provided on the back side in front view. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to (c), the front inclined member 657bf and the rear inclined member 657bb are joined at a substantially central portion of each side surface to form one member.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and (c), two portions on the rear side of the rear inclined member 657bb project in a rod shape. Although not shown, a solenoid for a movable member for causing the movable member 657b to move in and out (variable operation) is connected to a tip (an end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb) of the protruding portion. ing. In each round of the jackpot, the movable member solenoid is driven to change the movable member 657b to the projecting position. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, in the eighth embodiment, the moving operation of the movable member 657b in each round is made different depending on the type of big hit, and the general winning opening 630 is performed during the execution of the big hit game. There is a jackpot type in which a hammering action in which a chance to win a prize is set is set, and a jackpot type in which a hammering action which is easy to be reduced is set. During the execution of the jackpot game, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases as the game ball enters the general winning opening 630, so that the chance of winning the general winning opening 630 tends to increase, so that the big hit of the hammering operation. A game can be played in expectation of the type being determined. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the operation of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110A is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable member 657b is disposed at an intermediate position that is temporarily disposed after performing the protruding operation and before being disposed at the protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b performs the protruding operation, and only the front inclined member 657bf protrudes toward the near side from the base plate 60 (only the rear inclined member 657bb is buried), the front side is inclined. Due to the inclination of the member 657bf formed from the upper right side to the lower left side, a state in which the game ball reaching the specific area is guided to the general winning opening 630 is temporarily formed. In each round of the jackpot, when a specified number (10) or more of the game balls are detected in the specific winning opening 657a, or when a specified time (30 seconds) elapses before the specified number of balls is entered. No matter how many game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the end condition of the round is not affected. In other words, as the game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the jackpot prize balls increase, so that the more the game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the more the player can be pleased. Therefore, while at the intermediate position (see FIG. 110 (a)) that can be arranged while performing the protruding operation, the player can positively fire the game ball toward the specific area. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 110 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the movable member 657b is placed at the projecting position, in addition to the front inclined member 657bf, the rear inclined member 657bb also projects toward the near side from the base plate 60. . As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls to the rear inclined member 657bb, and the specific winning port is formed by the inclination formed by the rear inclined member 657bb from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in front view. 657a. That is, the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position (see FIG. 110B), thereby forming a state where the movable member 657b easily enters the specific winning opening 657a.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the winning holes through which the game balls reaching the specific area are guided are made different depending on the arrangement (projection amount) of the movable member 657b. At an intermediate position where the movable member 657b can be disposed until the movable member 657b reaches the projecting position, a state where the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guiding state) is formed, and the movable member 657b is in the projecting position. , A state where the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a (second guidance state) is formed. As a result, as the game balls are guided to the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game state increases. In the meantime, the game ball can be actively fired toward the specific area. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, even if the arrangement of the movable member 657b does not completely coincide with the intermediate position shown in FIG. 110A, the movable member 657b is arranged within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position. If so, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf. More specifically, for example, about 70% of the entire movable member 657b has the front inclined member 657bf projected from the base plate 60, and the rear inclined member 657bb has approximately 30% projected from the base plate 60. Until the arrangement is performed, the game balls can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

  Next, a movable pattern of the protruding member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot. The movable pattern A is a movable pattern in which a chance to enter a game ball into the general winning opening 630 is larger than that in the movable pattern B (that is, the number of times of the first guiding state is increased). First, with reference to FIG. 111A, a change with time in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable pattern A is set will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts to move to the protruding position at the same time as the start of the jackpot round. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes two seconds for the movable member 657b embedded in the base plate 60 to project to the projecting position. Of the two seconds that can move to the protruding position, for about 0.7 seconds, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guidance state, see FIG. 110 (a)). Therefore, by continuously firing the game ball toward the specific area immediately after the start of the round, the game ball may enter the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state. In each round of the jackpot, although the upper limit (10) is set for the number of balls entered for the specific winning port 657a, the number of balls entered for the general winning port 630 is not restricted at all, and therefore, the game ball As the ball enters the general winning opening 630, the number of prize balls paid out increases. Therefore, the player can positively fire the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the state (the second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening 657a) arranged at the protruding position continues for 2.5 seconds. During the 2.5 seconds, each time the game ball reaches the specific area, it is guided to the specific winning opening 657a, so that a prize ball can be acquired every time the ball enters the specific winning opening 657a. In addition, since the game balls are configured to be able to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, by continuing to show the game balls from the start of the round, 4 to 5 balls can be fired in 2.5 seconds. A certain number of game balls can be made to enter the specific winning opening 657a.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), when 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the movable member 657b was placed at the projecting position (that is, 4.5 seconds after the start of the round), the movable member 657b is moved to the burial position. Move to (immersion position). The variable operation to the buried position is performed over 2 seconds similarly to the variable operation to the protruding position. That is, since the operation completely opposite to the variable operation to the protruding position is executed, the first guiding state is maintained for about 0.7 seconds during the variable operation to the buried position. Therefore, even during the variable operation to the buried position, it is possible to cause one or two or so game balls to enter the general winning opening 630 by continuously firing the game balls to the specific area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), it can be moved from the buried position to the protruding position over 2 seconds, the state of being placed at the protruding position is maintained for 2.5 seconds, and over 2 seconds from the protruding position. The operation of moving to the buried position is repeated twice at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A, the first guidance state is set at a maximum of six times. Note that the movable pattern A is forcibly ended at the time when ten game balls enter the specific winning opening 657a, even if all the variable operations shown in FIG. 111A have not been completed. Note that the period in which the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position is 7.5 seconds (2.5 seconds × 3 times) in total, so that by continuously firing game balls at 0.6 second intervals, 12 Up to about 13 game balls can be reached. Therefore, only by continuously firing the game balls, the specified number (10) of the game balls can be surely made to enter the specific winning opening 657a, and the first guidance state of up to six times can be set. Can be. Therefore, in addition to the prize balls for the specified number of balls entering the specific winning opening 657a, prize balls based on winning in the general winning opening 630 by being set up to six times in the first guidance state can be obtained. . Therefore, the number of prize balls exceeding the specified number of prize balls can be easily obtained in each round, so that the satisfaction of the player can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 111B is a diagram illustrating a temporal change in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the movable pattern B is set, the movable member 657b moves to the protruding position over two seconds immediately after the start of the round, and the state where the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position is 26 at a maximum. It continues for 2 seconds (until 28 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round), and when 26 seconds have elapsed, it is moved to the immersion position (immersion position) over 2 seconds. For this reason, when the movable pattern B is set, the first guiding state in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 630 is obtained only two times immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times the movable member 657b enters the first guidance state (a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630) according to the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b. Are configured differently. If the number of times the first guidance state is set is large, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the execution of the jackpot game is also increased. You can have greater joy. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying attention to the set movable pattern, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents of hit type selection table 202b. Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment except that the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Descriptions other than the hit type selection table 202b are omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b of the eighth embodiment defines five types of big hits, big hits A8 to E8.

  As shown in FIG. 112, “big hit A8” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see 202 b 1 in FIG. 112). The “big hit A8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probable changing game state (a probable changing state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) is given after the end of the big hit. Further, when the "big hit A8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guiding state is likely to increase) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit A8" has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big jackpot is advantageous (that is, a probable changing gaming state that is more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state is set). And more opportunities to enter the ball (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, "big hit A8" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A8” are “0 to 4”. Since there are five jackpots, the rate at which "big jackpot A8" is determined when a jackpot is won is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, “big hit B8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 29” (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). “Big hit B8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probable change game state is given after the big hit ends. Further, when the "big hit B8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is likely to increase) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit B8" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit A8", and the game state after the end of the big win is advantageous (that is, a probable change game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state is set). The opportunity to enter the general winning opening 630 increases (the number of award balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, “big hit B8” is a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player after “big hit A8”. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B8” are “5 to 29”. Since there are 25 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot B8" is determined when the jackpot is won is 25% (25/100).

  Further, “big hit C8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 54” (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). “Big hit C8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probable change game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit C8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit C8" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit A8", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous. The number of prize balls paid out in each round is relatively small.) Therefore, the "big hit C8" is a big hit type which is disadvantageous to the player on the prize sphere compared with the "big hit A8" or the "big hit B8". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit C8” is “30 to 54”. Since there are 25 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot C8" is determined when the jackpot is won is 25% (25/100).

  Further, “big hit D8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “55 to 69” (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). “Big hit D8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is seven and a probable change game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit D8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (a movable pattern with a small number of times of the first guidance state) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the jackpot D8 is advantageous in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, but the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot is reduced (each round of the jackpot) The number of prize balls paid out is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit D8" is a big hit type which is advantageous in the game state after the big hit but is most disadvantageous to the player in the prize sphere. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit D8” is “55 to 69”. Since there are 15 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot D8" is determined when the jackpot is won is 15% (15/100).

  Further, “big hit E8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “70 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). “Big hit E8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is seven and 100 time-saving gaming states are given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit E8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, in the "big hit E8", the gaming state after the end of the big hit is disadvantageous, the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is also reduced (paid in each round of the big hit) The number of prize balls is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit E8" is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous to the player in the game state after the big hit and also in the prize sphere. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit E8” is “70 to 99”. Since there are 30 jackpots, the rate at which "big jackpot E8" is determined when a jackpot is won is 30% (30/100).

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot game is made different according to the jackpot type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of the jackpot type (either one of jackpots A and B) to be set in the movable pattern A in which many opportunities to enter the general winning opening 630 are given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and is the same as the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, this is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting a state of a specific winning opening.

  Of the jackpot control processes 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 are the jackpot control processes in the sixth embodiment, respectively. 6 (see FIG. 89), the same processes as S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the movable pattern (movable) corresponding to the jackpot type is determined. The start of one of the patterns A and B) is set (S1041), and the process shifts to S1006. More specifically, if the current jackpot is one of the jackpots A8 and B8, the movable pattern A is set as the movable pattern of the movable member 657b. The movable pattern B is set as the movable pattern of.

  In the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), the current jackpot type is the jackpot E8. It is determined whether or not there is a jackpot (S1042). If it is determined that the jackpot is E8 (S1042: Yes), the process proceeds to S1013 to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to the time-saving gaming state and end the jackpot. And migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1042 that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot E8 (any one of the jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the certain-variable gaming state. Then, the process shifts to S1014 to end the jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the front-side inclined member 657bf that forms a slope that descends from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. A movable member 657b having a shape in which the rear inclined member 657bb that forms the inclination of the movable member 657bb is combined in the front-rear direction is provided. The game balls that have reached the area below the ball opening 64) are allowed to enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b) and have different winning port types. More specifically, in an arrangement in which only the front-side inclined member 657bf protrudes forward from the base plate 60 and the rear-side inclined member 657bb is housed inside the base plate 60, the upper right front view is formed by the front-side inclined member 657bf. Due to the downward inclination from the direction to the lower left direction, a state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 arranged on the left side in the front view with respect to the movable member 657b. On the other hand, in a state where the movable member 657b is completely protruded (a state where the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position), the rear inclined member 657bb is inclined downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction in the front view. A state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the area is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the movable member 657b. The general winning opening 630 does not affect the end condition of the round no matter how many game balls enter during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the execution of the jackpot game. The more balls you get, the more prize balls you can get. Therefore, in an intermediate position (the first guiding state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf) until the movable member 657b reaches the protruding position, the game ball is positively played. Since the shooting can be performed to the specific area, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, as the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot, the movable pattern in which the number of times in which the first guidance state is set during one round is likely to be increased. One of two movable patterns, A and a movable pattern B in which the number of times the first guidance state is likely to be reduced, is set. More specifically, when one of the jackpots A8 and B8 is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A in each round of the jackpot, whereas when any of the jackpots C8 to E8 is reached, the movable member 657b is moved. It is configured to be movable by the movable pattern B. This allows the player to play the game with a stronger expectation of becoming one of the jackpots A8 and B8 in which the number of times of the first guidance state increases, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns, that is, the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B, are provided. However, the number of the movable patterns is not limited to two. Good or less. By reducing the number of types of movable patterns to one, there is no need to perform a control process of selecting a movable pattern according to the type of big hit at the start of a new round, so the processing load during execution of the big hit game is reduced. can do. Further, by increasing the number of types of movable patterns from two types (for example, five types) and further diversifying the number of times of the first guidance state, a game is performed with more attention to the set movable patterns. Can be made. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set on the movable member 657b is varied in each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the configuration may be such that the movable pattern is switched according to the number of rounds. Accordingly, the operation of the movable member 657b can be further diversified, so that each time a new round is started, a game can be performed by focusing on the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b. .

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A is set when any one of the big hits A8 and B8 is reached, and the movable pattern B is set when any one of the big hits C8 to E8. The present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the type of movable pattern and the type of jackpot can be arbitrarily determined. For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, a configuration in which the movable pattern A is set when the type of the jackpot is a small jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, a jackpot of seven rounds) may be adopted. By configuring in this way, if the type of jackpot is small with a small number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot is likely to increase, so the jackpot of the small number of rounds is determined Therefore, the discouragement of the player can be suppressed.

<Modification of the eighth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The modification of the eighth embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that a rotating member 658 is provided instead of the movable member 657b in the above-described eighth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 114 (a) to (c), the rotating member 658 is configured to be capable of rotating in a clockwise direction in a front view with the rotating shaft 658a as the rotating shaft. By rotating the upper end of the rotating member 658 to a state (see FIG. 114 (c)) again approaching the lower end of the specific winning opening 657a, a state where the ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a is formed. In other words, a state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the specific winning opening 657a by the inclination of the rotating member 658 that falls from the upper left to the lower right in front view. In each round of the jackpot, by controlling the rotating member 658 to rotate in a predetermined rotating pattern, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. Although the details will be described later, depending on the rotation position (rotation angle) until the rotation member 658 reaches the position (see FIG. 114 (c)) where the ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. The winning opening that can be balled is variable. That is, the same operation as that of the above-described eighth embodiment can be realized.

  The rotating member 658 is in a state of standing vertically in the normal state, as shown in FIG. In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area has a space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning opening 630 (the left side in the front view of the rotating member 658) or between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning opening 657a. (The right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front) and flows down to the out port 66.

  FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position that is temporarily arranged until the rotating member 658 rotates to a state where the game ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 657a. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), at the intermediate position, since the rotating member 658 forms a downward slope from the upper right side to the lower left side when viewed from the front, the game ball reaching the specific area moves to the general winning opening 630. It forms a state that is easily guided. When the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, the ball is easily entered into the specific winning opening 657a shown in FIG. 114 (c). In order to cancel the state in which the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise in front view using the rotating shaft 658a as a rotating shaft, as shown in FIG. 114 (a). It is returned to the state where it was set.

  As described above, in the modification of the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 658 that rotates is provided between the general winning opening 630 and the specific winning opening 657a. The rotating member 658 is arranged to form an inclination capable of guiding a game ball to the general winning opening 630 (see FIG. 114 (b)) according to the rotating position (rotating angle), and to the specific winning opening 657a. At least an arrangement (see FIG. 114 (c)) that forms an inclination capable of guiding a game ball can be adopted. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, the game is temporarily transferred to the general winning opening 630 at an intermediate position where the turning member 658 is rotating until the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. The ball is placed so that it can enter. Thereby, similarly to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit increases as the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the big hit game. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Note that the rotation member 658 in the modification of the eighth embodiment can be diverted to the above-described sixth embodiment and seventh embodiment. More specifically, a rotation member 658 is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left positive variable winning opening 655La in the seventh embodiment can enter the ball. In this case, the rotation member 658 may be rotated counterclockwise to form an inclination from the upper right side to the lower left side in front view. In the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment can enter the ball, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise so as to be viewed from the upper left in front view. What is necessary is just to form the inclination of the downward direction to the lower right side.

  In the eighth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a state where the gaming ball is arranged at the intermediate position. The present invention is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured such that a game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a movable range including an open position or a closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 630 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, a winning winning opening that triggers a probability change state after the end of the jackpot, or a winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot. (A so-called two-type V winning opening). Also, the privilege does not have to be given to the player (for example, an out mouth).

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b that is moved in a predetermined movable pattern (either the movable pattern A or B) during the execution of the jackpot game. The winning opening that can be won can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to vary the winning opening at which the game ball is guided according to the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific area, and to vary the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game. I was

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the type of the entrance that is easy to enter is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is movable when the winning is achieved in the normal symbol lottery. did. In this way, in a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high, a game can be played by paying attention to the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the configuration, in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110 is provided. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The point is that the executed control processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. In the description of the above-described eighth embodiment, the description of the board configuration of the game board 13 is omitted, and the configuration replaced with the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (general winning port 630, specific winning port 657a, movable member) Since only 657b) has been described, in the description of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment, differences from the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment will be described for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is different from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in that the electric board provided with the first ball entrance 64 is provided. The point that the role object 64a is deleted, the left variable prize device 650L and the right variable prize device 650R are deleted and the variable prize device 65 is provided. A second ball entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter, a motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and a front view of the second ball entrance 640 with respect to the flow path. The difference is that a general winning opening 63 provided on the left side and through which a game ball can enter is provided. The second entrance 640 is an entrance that triggers a lottery of a special symbol when a game ball enters. That is, it has the same performance as the first entrance 64. If a game ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is equal to the number of entrances to the first entrance 64. Up to a maximum of four separate reservations. In addition, when there is a retaining ball for entering the first entrance 64 and a retaining ball for entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, the retaining for entering the second entrance 640 is performed. The lottery of the special symbol based on the ball is executed with priority.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116, in the ninth embodiment, the second ball entry is provided in association with the second ball entry port 640, and the second ball entry is performed when a normal symbol lottery is won. The advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that can move into an open state where the game ball can enter the mouth 640. The advancing direction of the game ball at each movable position of the electric accessory 640a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 116 shows the flow-down path of the game ball when the game ball driven into the flow path provided in the right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80 reaches the electric accessory 640a by right-handing. It is a figure shown for every movable position of electric accessory 640a. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a closes the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position), and FIG. 116 (b) shows the state. 116 (c) shows a state in which the motorized accessory 640a is disposed at an intermediate position in the middle of moving to the open position for opening the second ball entrance 640, and FIG. This shows a state in which they are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position, the game ball fired rightward to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is closed. The space between the entrance 640 and the general winning opening 63 flows down. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), a plurality of nails, which are arranged above the general winning opening 63 and have a downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, are located at the upper right of the general winning opening 63. , And protrudes rightward from a plurality of nails forming a slant in a downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the possibility that the right-hitting game ball flows down toward the general winning opening 63 is extremely low.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), at an intermediate position where the electric accessory 640a is moving to the open position, a right-hit game ball is likely to collide with the tip of the electric accessory 640a. When the gaming ball collides with the tip of the electric accessory 640a, the colliding gaming ball is reflected to the left in front view, and is easily guided to the direction in which the general winning opening 63 is provided. This makes it easier to obtain a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10) based on the ball entering the general winning opening 63.

  In the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement does not completely match the arrangement shown in FIG. 116B, the ninth embodiment is within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position (for example, before and after the arrangement shown in FIG. 116B). If it is within about 10% of the movable range), the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 63.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the open position (a state where the second entrance 640 is opened), a right-hitting game ball is basically driven by an electric motor. It is guided to the second entrance 640 by the accessory 640a. In the state where the electric accessory 640a is completely opened, the electric accessory 640a, which is located at the upper right of the general winning opening 63, lowers from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left than the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. The height at which the nail at the upper end is arranged is higher among the plurality of nails forming the inclination of the direction. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second entrance 640 along the path formed by the electric accessory 640a and collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected leftward in a front view, a plurality of balls may be obtained. It is difficult to reach the general winning opening 63 through the upper part of the nail. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected to the left flows down through the space on the left side of the tip of the electric accessory 640a as shown in FIG. 116 (c). .

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 or the second game ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a. A state is formed, or a state in which it is difficult to enter any of the entrances is formed. Therefore, when a win is made in the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the game can be performed by paying attention to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a when the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a. Note that, in the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that more balls are awarded when entering the general winning opening 63 than when entering the second entrance port 640. Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at the intermediate position where the electric accessory 640a moves to the open position, the more advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability in which attention is paid to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11A) by the second configuration. The difference is that a hit type selection table 202ba is added.

  The second hit type selection table 202ba is a data table that is referred to for determining an opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a when a win is made in a normal symbol lottery. Details of the second hit type selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b).

  FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second hit type selection table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the second hit type selection table 202ba, the type of the open pattern set in the electric accessory 640a and the second open pattern determined for each of the ordinary symbol states are determined. The value of the hit type counter is defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the value of the second hit type counter is in the range of “0 to 94”, the electric accessory 640a is “ An opening pattern of “0.1 times × 5 times” is defined in association (see 202c1 in FIG. 117B). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is opened. Since 95 random numbers (counter values) are “0 to 94”, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is determined in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Is 95% (95/100). It is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the 0.1 second when the electric accessory 640a is opened. Therefore, even if the ball is opened five times, "0.1 It is almost impossible to make a game ball enter the second entrance 640 while the opening pattern of “× 5 times per second” is set.

  Also, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” is associated with the value of the second hit type counter in the range of “95 to 99”. (See 202c2 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which it is opened “2 seconds × 1 time”. Since there are five random numbers (counter values) of “95 to 99”, the rate at which the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” is determined in the normal symbol low probability state is 5 % (5/100). Since it is easy to allow a game ball to enter the second entrance 640 during two seconds, the “2 seconds × 1 time” release pattern is such that a game ball enters the second entrance 640. It is an open pattern that is easy to ball.

  As described above, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is low, and even if the symbol hits the ordinary symbol, most of the pattern becomes an open pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to make a game ball enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits right in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is moved in the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times”, the electric accessory 640a is continuously moved between the closed position and the open position for a short period. (See FIG. 116 (b)). Therefore, while the electric accessory 640a is performing the opening operation in the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”, the right winning is performed to the general winning opening 63 having a relatively large number of prize balls paid out by right-handing. With a high percentage. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand while the opening operation is performed in the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed based on the ball having entered the second entrance 640 in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, An extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 300 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is disadvantageous that the lottery of the special symbol is not executed for five minutes thereafter. Therefore, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the player hits right while the open pattern of “2 seconds × 1 time” (open pattern in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640) is performed, the game is played. Is disadvantageous for the elderly. For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, an opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”, in which it is almost impossible to enter the second entrance 640 in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, is determined. In such a case, while a notification that prompts the player to make a right-handed shot (a right-handed navigator effect) is performed, a release pattern of “2 seconds × 1 time” that facilitates entering the second entrance 640 is determined. Does not perform right-handed navigation. As a result, while giving the player the maximum chance to enter the ball into the general winning opening 63, the player becomes excessively disadvantageous in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (the lottery of the special symbol is performed for 5 minutes or more). No disadvantageous situation) can be prevented.

  In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the variable display are referred to as “first special symbol lottery” and “ The first special symbol fluctuating display is referred to as “the first special symbol fluctuating display,” and the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 and the fluctuating display are referred to as “the second special symbol flotation” and “No. 2 Special symbol change display ".

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the normal symbol time reduction state, the electric accessory 640a is set to “0.1 seconds × 5” for the range of the second hit type counter value of “0 to 29”. The release pattern to be released is associated and defined (see 202c3 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is opened. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) used are 30 from “0 to 29”, the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is determined in the normal symbol time saving state. The ratio is 30% (30/100).

  An opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” is associated with the value of the second hit type counter in the range of “30 to 99” (FIG. 117). (See 202c4 of (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which it is opened “2 seconds × 1 time”. Since the random number value (counter value) of 70 is “30 to 99”, the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” in the normal symbol time saving state is determined at 70%. (70/100).

  In this way, in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol increases, and when the symbol hits the ordinary symbol, the opening pattern becomes “2 seconds × 1 time” at a rate of 70%. By continuing to make a right hit in the symbol time reduction state, it is possible to keep the game ball constantly entering the second entrance 640. Further, when the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected, the game balls can easily enter the general winning opening 63, so that more prize balls can be obtained. Furthermore, in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is shortened (equivalent to the variation time of the first special symbol), so that the lottery of the second special symbol is performed many times at short intervals. Can be performed. As a result, while the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is more advantageous to the player to perform a right-handed hit, so that while the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, the right-handed navigation effect is executed. Continue to be.

  In the time-saving game state, the player continues to make a right-handed hit, and the "2 seconds x 1" release pattern is continuously executed, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be continuously executed without reducing the number of balls held. it can. In addition, in the time saving state, if a large number of open patterns of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” are luckily selected, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the general winning opening 63 without reducing the number of time savings. . For this reason, an opening pattern in which the player is placed in the opening position for a short period of time during the time-saving gaming state (that is, an opening pattern in which the opportunity to enter the second entrance 640 is relatively small) is provided to the player. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game can be performed in expectation of being determined. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (c). FIG. 117 (c) illustrates the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration. As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) (see FIG. 87 (b)) in a special design. Instead of the reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided. The difference is that a 1 special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 are provided. Another difference is that the movable type storage area 203aa is deleted.

  The first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first entrance 64, and the second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained at the timing of entering the second entrance 640. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). I have. That is, it has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Are stored respectively. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1. The value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, A determination such as a lottery of a symbol is made. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entrance 640. The maximum number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the (start winning) is 4 It is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The initial value of the first special symbol retaining ball counter 203c1 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retaining balls in the variable display increases, the number of balls reaches the maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the retained ball number of the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes four. It is incremented by one (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 9 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol change process 9 (S141) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) instead of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the process is a process for setting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. is there.

  In the special symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 118) in the eighth embodiment (first embodiment) is performed. 23), the same processes as those in S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. In the special symbol change process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the second special symbol holding ball number The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0 (S222).

  In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol holding is performed. The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball counter 203c2 (S223), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set (S224). . The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S222: No). Next, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is larger than 0 is determined. Is determined (S227).

  In the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S227: No), Since neither the reserved ball of the first special symbol nor the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, which means that it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the special symbol, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball counter 203c1 (S228), and a special figure 1 holding ball number command indicating the updated value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is set (S228). S229). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is used in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball count command. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the processing of S225 (S230), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S208.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, details of the start winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 9 (S142) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is detected.

  In the start winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won (starts winning) the first entrance 64 (S421). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the processing of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) Of the variable display to be held (N1) is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S423).

  Then, in the processing of S421, if it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has not been won (S421: No), or even if there is a game ball winning the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S423 When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

  The special figure 1 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 as an external output process of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later (S901). Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the special figure 1 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S425, the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 updated in the processing of S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) and the stop are performed. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S427. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (in the second special symbol lottery). The corresponding variable display suspension count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol suspension ball count counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S428). S429).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball count command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  After the special figure 2 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S431, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the fluctuations updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process of S433 Move to. In the process of S432, similarly to the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S433, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is executed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S433), and this process ends. Details of the prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this pre-reading process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been detected in the current startup winning process 9 (see FIG. 119). Then, if it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball has reached the upper limit (ie, 4)? It is determined whether or not it is (S1502), and when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time of detecting the entering ball (start winning prize processing 9 (FIG. 119) Based on the various counter values stored in the process of S426 or S432 of the reference), whether the lottery in the special symbol is successful (whether a big hit or not), its stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S1503).

  If the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S1503, then the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and the process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / no-go, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the ordinary symbol variation process 9 (S143) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 9 (S143) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed in the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling a variable display of a normal symbol, an opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and the like.

  Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, the processes in S501 to S519 are respectively performed in the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those in S501 to S519 are executed. In the ordinary symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment of the present invention, when it is determined in the process of S519 that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a winning (S519: Yes), the second winning type is determined. With reference to the selection table 202ba, an opening pattern to be set for the electric accessory 640a is determined, and an electric accessory operation start process for starting an opening operation based on the determined opening pattern is executed (S531). This processing ends. Details of the electric accessory operation start process (S531) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the above-described electric accessory operation start process (S531). In the electric accessory operation start process (S531), first, the second hit type selection table 202ba (see FIG. 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and the current ordinary symbol state and the second The release pattern corresponding to the value of the double hit type counter is read (S1602). Here, the current state of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the ordinary symbol time saving state if the probability change flag 203e is on or the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, while the probability variation flag 203e is determined. Is off, and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it is determined that the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is present. As described above, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “0 to 94”, “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected as the release pattern, If the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “95 to 99”, “2 seconds × 1 time” is selected as the release pattern. In the normal symbol time saving state, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “0 to 29”, “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected as the release pattern, while the second hit type selection counter is selected. If the value of the type selection counter is in the range of “30 to 99”, “2 seconds × 1 time” is selected as the release pattern.

  When the processing of S1602 ends, next, the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a based on the opening pattern read in the processing of S1602 is set (S1603). Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (whether the probability change flag 203e is OFF and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0) (S1604). If there is (S1604: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the release pattern set to be started in the processing of S1603 is a release pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” (S1605). In the process of S1605, when it is determined that the release pattern set to start this time is the release pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” (S1605: Yes), the release of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is performed. An opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the start of the pattern is set (S1606), and this processing ends. By receiving the opening start command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a right-hand navigation effect that prompts the player to right-hand. Thereby, when an opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is set so that many opportunities to enter the general winning opening 63 are obtained, the player is given an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63. Can be given reliably. Therefore, in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol), it is possible to keep the player's motivation for the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the current time is in the normal symbol time saving state (S1604: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that the “2 seconds × 1 time” release pattern has been set, (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and the process ends.

<Control processing of voice lamp control device in ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. This command determination process 9 (S4031) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and executes the command determination in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the process (see FIG. 41), this is a process for analyzing an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command.

  Of the command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, in each processing of S4901 to S4918, the processing of S4901 to S4901 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. The same processing as each processing of S4918 is executed. In the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the winning information command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110. (S4909: No), then, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the release start command (S4931), and it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the release start command. If it has been performed (S4931: Yes), a right-handed navi effect in an effect mode that prompts the player to make a right-hand operation is set (S4932), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4931, if it is determined that the release start command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4931: No), the process proceeds to S4911.

  By setting the right-handed navigator effect by the processing of S4932, when the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is obtained in which the opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 is increased, the general winning opening is set. It is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to enter the ball 63. Therefore, in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol), it is possible to keep the player's motivation for the game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory 640a that is moved to the open position when the normal symbol lottery wins is temporarily moved to the open position. When the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at an intermediate position where the game ball can be arranged, the board surface configuration is such that the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 provided on the left side of the second entrance 640. did. In this way, in a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high, a game can be played by paying attention to the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters. In the ninth embodiment, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged at the intermediate position (there is a large number of arrangements at the intermediate position), but is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 ( Although the opening pattern of the second entrance 640 is short (opening period is short), it is difficult to be arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times of arrangement at the intermediate position is small), but it is easy to enter the second entrance 640 (second). At least the opening pattern of the entrance 640 is long). By setting an open pattern that is easy to be placed at the intermediate position (there is a large number of times of being placed at the intermediate position), an opportunity to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering game balls into the general winning opening 63 is obtained. Therefore, an opening pattern that makes it difficult for a player to enter the second entrance 640 than an opening pattern that facilitates entering the second entrance 640 (that is, a disadvantageous opening in a general gaming machine) (Pattern), and a novel game property in which a game in a time-saving game state is performed in the expectation of being a pattern can be realized. Further, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal game state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the intermediate position). When it is determined that an open pattern is to be executed, a right-handed navigation effect (effect indicating that a game ball is fired toward the second entrance 640) is executed. With such a configuration, in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, it is possible to give an opportunity to win a prize ball by entering the general winning opening 63 every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the game becomes monotonous in the disadvantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the normal game state for the game.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the normal gaming state, only when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the intermediate position is large), the right-handed operation is performed. Although the configuration is such that navigation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a right-handed navigation effect may be executed regardless of the open pattern when a normal symbol is hit, or it may be difficult to arrange at the intermediate position (the number of times of arrangement at the intermediate position is small). A right-handed navigation effect may be executed only when an opening pattern that allows easy entry into the entrance 640 (the opening period of the second entrance 640 is long) is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chance of entering the second entrance 640 in the normal game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the normal game state from becoming monotonous.

  In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided (reflected) to the general winning opening 63 in a state where the gaming ball is arranged at the intermediate position. The state is not limited to the intermediate position, and the game ball may be configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 in the movable range including the open position or the closed position. In addition, it is not limited to the general winning opening 63 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (a so-called two-type V winning opening). Also, the privilege does not have to be given to the player (for example, an out mouth).

  In the ninth embodiment, the opening pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” is set while the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, and in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and hitting the ordinary symbol. The right-handed navigation effect is executed only when determined, but the execution timing of the right-handed navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, when a normal symbol hits during the time reduction state, and after the end of the time reduction state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends and an opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is started, the “0.1 seconds” Until the release pattern of “× 5 times per second” is completed, the right-handed navigation effect that has been executed during the time-saving state may be extended. Thus, the right-handed navigation effect is executed immediately after the player returns to the left-handed operation, and it is possible to suppress the player from being confused.

  In the ninth embodiment, the state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening 63 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640 a that opens and closes the second entrance 640, and the case where the second entrance 640 enters the second entrance 640. Although the configuration is such that the state is easily switched to the state where it is difficult to enter any of the entrances, the present configuration is not limited to the second entrance 640. For example, the specific winning opening may have the same configuration as the second winning opening 640 and the motorized accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the arrangement of the general winning opening 63 may be the same as in the ninth embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to increase the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board surface configuration (arrangement of nails, windmills, and the like) of the game board 13 is substantially symmetrical, and is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13. The game ball fired toward the flow path (the right-hit game ball) and the game ball fired toward the flow path provided on the left (the left-played game ball) The configuration was such that the period from when the ball was fired to when it reached the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) was substantially the same.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, in the game board 13, the game ball (the right-hit game ball) fired toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is on the left side. Is configured to have a longer period of time to reach a specific area than a game ball (a left-hit game ball) fired toward the flow path provided in. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the variable display device unit 80 has a smaller height than the game balls flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured such that a game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side has a higher percentage of entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  The difference of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in the variable display device unit in the game board 13. The difference is that a detouring object 700 is provided on the right side of 80 so that a play ball can enter the inside. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 125, this detouring object 700 sets the time required for a game ball hit right (launched on the right side of the game board 13) to reach the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided to make it longer. In other words, the detouring object 700 takes more time until the game ball fired by right-handing reaches the specific winning opening 65a than during the time until the game ball fired by left-handing reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The falling time of a right-hit game ball can be increased so that the time is longer. In the tenth embodiment, the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 second to 2 seconds, whereas the right-playing game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Is set to be 7 to 8 seconds.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the detouring object 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detouring object 700. As shown in FIG. 125, the detouring object 700 has an opening 710 at an upper part thereof. A game ball fired by right-handing can enter the inside of the bypass accessory 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 for discharging a game ball flowing down in the detour role 700 to the outside of the detour role 700 is provided below the detour role 700. Further, in order to prevent the sphere that has advanced into the detouring object 700 from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the detouring object 700 has a front edge, a rear side, and a left-right direction in a front view. In four directions. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, a PS material), the player can easily visually recognize a state in which the ball flows down.

  Further, among the peripheral portion 730, the plane on the back side in the front view can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60, It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap. Further, the front surface of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured so as to come into contact with each other without any gap when the front frame 14 is closed. , A gap can be prevented from being trapped in the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) that are inclined downward from the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere comes into contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view, the inner wall on the near side in front view, and (Distance between them). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 and each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the guide flow paths 740, 760, and 780 are inclined in a direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view. The guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined in a direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Then, the guiding flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detouring object 700. That is, a flow path inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front and a flow path inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front are alternately provided.

  The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guide channel 740, and flows downward along the slope formed by the guide channel 740 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guidance flow path 750 to the lower right direction in front view. When the flowing game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls to the guide channel 760, and flows down along the slope formed by the guide channel 760 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front.

  Thereafter, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Then, the game ball finally reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and drops from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the sphere that has entered the bypass accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the bypass accessory 700 via the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). It is possible to reduce the force of the ball flowing down (flowing speed). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time required for a game ball that has entered the detouring object 700 via the opening 710 to be discharged to the outside via the opening 720. Thus, when the ball is fired to the right side of the game board 13 as compared to the game ball being fired to the left side of the game board 13, the ball is moved to the lower portion of the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 or the variable winning prize). It is possible to lengthen the time to reach the area (where the device 65 is disposed) (7 seconds or more).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, the respective guide channels 740 to 790 are supported by the channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the lower surfaces of the guide channels 740 to 790 with respect to the rotation stop members 742 a to 792 a or the rotation stop members 742 b to 792 b provided below the guide channels 740 to 790. Stops on contact. This rotation operation will be described using the guide channel 740 as an example.

  As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This turning operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guidance flow path 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load by the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, so that the upper half of the guide channel 740 is moved downward. A force is generated in a direction to rotate the motor. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise in a front view, the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. By the rotation stop member 742b, it is possible to prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much clockwise, and the inclination of the guide channel 740 from being reversed.

  Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially columnar member, and is joined to the inner wall on the near side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral portion 730, respectively. That is, the position is not shifted by the impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 comes into contact. The structure of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b is the same as that of the rotation stop member 742b.

  On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, so that the lower half of the guide channel 740 is turned downward. A directional force occurs. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise in front view, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide flow path 740 from excessively turning counterclockwise. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large, so that the momentum of the game ball cannot be reduced. Therefore, the game ball fired by the right strike can reliably flow down to below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entry port 64 and the specific winning port 65a are disposed) in 7 seconds or more. . When the game ball flows down in a state where the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 is maximized, each guide channel is set so that it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640. A path length of 740 to 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare that a game ball flows down while all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintain the maximum inclination angle, the time required for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640 is reliably set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

  As described above, the inclination of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is changed based on the load by the weight of the game ball, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is varied. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time required for the game ball to pass through the bypass role 700. In the above description, the case where one ball travels on the guidance flow path 740 has been described. However, a state where a plurality of balls travels on the same guidance flow path during an actual game may occur. In this case, the turning operation of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, so that the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detouring object 700 can be varied.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners at the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners at the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each of the guide channels 740 to 790 rotates, the corner of the lower surface and the inner wall portion of the peripheral portion 730 can be made hard to contact. Therefore, since each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be arranged at a position closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each of the guide channels 740 to 790 and the peripheral portion 730. Can be prevented from being pinched or the game ball passing through the gap. In addition, each guide channel 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement with the largest inclination by its own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. For example, when the ball is not flowing down the guiding flow path 740, the ball rotates counterclockwise in front view using the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis due to the weight of the guiding flow path 740. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide channels 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotation operation until they contact the rotation stop members 752a to 792a by their own weights in a state where the game ball does not flow down. Thereby, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide channels 750 to 790 is performing the turning operation, or whether the game ball flows down after the turning operation of each of the guide channels 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the sphere can be varied accordingly.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each guide flow path 740-790 may not rotate by own weight, but may rotate only by passage of a game ball. Further, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 124, a number of nails are provided below the detouring accessory 700 so as to restrict the flowing direction of the game ball flowing out of the detouring accessory 700 via the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detouring accessory 700. Is arranged. With these nails, all game balls flowing out of the detouring object 700 can be dropped on the curved member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the first ball entrance 64). It can suppress that the game ball flows down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 124, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved surface member is opened when the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable prize device 65 in a front view, a relatively large space (having a width exceeding one game ball) for guiding game balls to the out port 66 below the variable prize device 65 is provided. (Flow channel) is provided. For this reason, when the specific prize hole 65a is opened, when a game ball is fired leftward, many game balls enter the specific prize hole 65a, but some of the game balls (for example, 10 The ratio of one ball per ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the bypass board 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side in the front view of the game board 13. Thus, the period until the right-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Basically, the right-handed player takes a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but the left-handed player can reach the specific winning opening 65a depending on the reflection direction of the game ball or the state of ejection. The possibility that the period until the arrival reaches a long time is not zero (for example, when the game ball fired in the left direction is temporarily stopped, or when the ball is clogged in the left channel of the variable display unit 80). etc). For this reason, a game ball flowing down (passing) through the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80 is compared with a game ball flowing down (passing) through the left flow path, during which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. (The time it takes for the game ball flowing down the left channel to reach the specific winning opening 65a is likely to be shorter).

  In the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of right-hitting game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the ratio of left-playing gaming balls to the specific winning opening 65a. Can be higher than the ratio of entering the ball. As a result, a player who wants to proceed with the jackpot game quickly (wishes to end the jackpot game early) has a small loss (about one ball out of every ten balls) during execution of the jackpot game. With the ball prepared, a game can be played by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, a game is performed by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing in preparation for a longer jackpot game period. Can be made. Therefore, a favorite game property can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game property according to the taste of each player can be realized. Each round of the jackpot is ended when 30 seconds elapse from the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds elapse. Even if the game balls start to be fired by right-handing after each round of the jackpot, 10 game balls are passed through the detour role object 700 before the elapse of 30 seconds, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the winning sphere is disadvantageous (the round ends before the specified number of game balls wins the specific winning opening 65a) when the right hit is performed.

  Next, a display mode during execution of the big hit game in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR15 and HR16 are formed on the upper left side in the front view and the upper right side in the front view in the main display area Dm. A display region HR17 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display regions HR15 and HR16 is formed below the display regions HR15 and HR16. In the display area HR15, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and a character "left-handed high-speed mode" and a character "big hit can be quickly digested" are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the player hits the left during the jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed). Can be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, in the display area HR16, an image imitating a rightward arrow is displayed, and the character "Right-handed and low-speed mode" and "The big hit can be slowly digested" are displayed. And characters are displayed. From these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the right hit is performed during the jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed over a relatively long time (the jackpot proceeds at a relatively low speed). Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that a big hit is being displayed are displayed in the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB imitating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the center portion of the display area HR17, and “ The display area HR19 with the character "big hit" is formed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the big hit game is being executed. A display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress status of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of paid out prize balls) is formed on the upper left side of the display area HR17. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters “ROUND: 01/16” (information indicating a comparison between the current round number and the maximum round number) and the characters “GET: 0000/1600” (prize balls until now) Is displayed, which indicates the comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR18 allow the player to easily understand the progress status of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the right-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of right-hit game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the ratio of left-playing game balls to the specific winning opening. It is configured to be higher than the ratio of entering the ball 65a. With such a configuration, a player who wants to rapidly progress the jackpot game (want to obtain a large amount of prize balls in a shorter time) can receive a slight loss (one ball per 10 balls) during the execution of the jackpot game. The player can play the game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing while preparing for a waste ball of a degree). On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, the player can aim at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing in preparation for a longer jackpot game period. Can be performed. Therefore, a favorite game property can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game property according to the taste of each player can be realized.

  In the tenth embodiment, by providing the detouring object 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball fired by right-handing reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. Is configured to be longer than a period until the game ball fired by the player reaches the variable winning device 65. That is, by making the path length when the game ball fired by the right strike falls down longer than the path length when the game ball fired by the left strike falls, the right-handed player is left Although the configuration is such that the downflow time is longer than when the beating is performed, the invention is not limited to this. For example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, a configuration may be provided in which a well-known clown unit is provided instead of the detouring object 700. With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period from reaching the clune means to passing through the clune means, so that it is possible to lengthen the flow time of the game ball shot rightward. Further, for example, instead of the detouring role 700, a role to stop the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 The right side of the game board 13 is made of a material (for example, an elastic body such as rubber) having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is lower than that of the base plate 60. May be configured to be easily decelerated by the friction of. In addition, instead of the detour role 700, by disposing the nails in the left flow path and the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80 differently, the flow down the right flow path is more likely to cause the left flow A configuration may be adopted in which the period until reaching the lower area (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) in the game board 13 is longer than when the road flows down.

  In the tenth embodiment, during the big hit, in the third symbol display device 81, the game performance when performing a left-handed game and the game performance when performing a right-handed game are respectively displayed in a display area HR15 and a display area HR16. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, during a big hit, a configuration may be adopted in which only an image prompting left-handing is displayed, or only an image prompting right-handing is displayed. With a configuration in which only an image prompting left-handing is displayed, the big hit can be ended in a short time, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. Thus, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying only the image that prompts the player to make a right hit, the number of useless balls (game balls that enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 65a) can be reduced. The player's profit in the jackpot can be increased.

  When notifying the player of the launch direction during the jackpot, the launch direction to be notified may be changed according to the type of the jackpot, the type of the effect performed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability change jackpot, a variable display effect (an effect mode executed only when a probability change jackpot is performed) in which the main symbols (probability change symbols) with odd numbers are aligned is executed. It is configured to determine by lottery whether to perform a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed in the case of a normal jackpot) in which the main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are aligned. And when it is a regular jackpot or a probability variable jackpot, and when an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined, an effect of notifying whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot during the jackpot is performed. . In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability-change jackpot (for example, an effect of not knowing whether or not the jackpot is a probability-change jackpot until the last round of the jackpot, and an instant notification at the end of the first round) The player is allowed to select one of an effect mode that is performed and an effect mode that is not known where in each round of the jackpot is notified (that is, operating means such as buttons and levers that can be operated by the player). May be provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and the effect mode may be selected in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the jackpot (the normal symbol notification jackpot) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, a configuration suggesting right-handing is provided. It may be. With such a configuration, a longer period for allowing the player to select an effect mode can be secured for a longer time, so that the player can more reliably select a desired effect mode. On the other hand, when the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by the variable display effect in which the positively-variable symbols are aligned), a configuration may be adopted in which left-handing is notified during the jackpot. . With this configuration, the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, for example, when a normal jackpot or a probable jackpot is determined, and an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect for notifying whether or not the probable jackpot is performed in the first round of the jackpot is executed. The effect (operation effect) that prompts the operation of the operation means may be executed in the effect. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by a player is provided as an operation means, and an effect is performed to prompt the player to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period. Then, the display mode is configured to be variable (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated) according to the number of times the push button is pressed, and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge is changed). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is reported that a probability change is a big hit by accumulating to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, when a normal jackpot or a probable variable jackpot is determined and an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined (when an operation effect is executed), the right-hand is notified in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period for performing the operation effect can be secured. Therefore, the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced. On the other hand, when a stochastic jackpot is determined and an effect in which the stochastic symbols are aligned is determined by a lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), the left hit in the first round is notified so that the jackpot is achieved. It is possible to shorten the period until the end. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, instead of selecting the production mode when notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of the music (production by voice) to be reproduced during the execution of the jackpot game is set. It may be configured to be selectable, and to notify at least right-handing during a period for selecting music (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (production by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to a plurality of (for example, ten) musics set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means such as a button which can be operated by the player instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content of the operation means. Is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each music are arranged in a vertical line, and one image (for example, the image displayed at the center) has a lit appearance, and the other images have a lit appearance. The configuration is as follows. Further, a configuration is provided in which three types of buttons are provided as operation means: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to determination operation (determination button). I do. Then, by detecting the press of the upper button during the music selection period, the image that had been lit up to just before the press was switched to the unlit appearance, and the image disposed one above was switched to the lit appearance. (The illuminated visual image moves upward by one). Similarly, when a press on the down button is detected, the illuminated visual image is moved downward by one. Further, by detecting pressing of the determination button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image which is turned on at the time of pressing and has the appearance is determined as the music to be reproduced during the current big hit. That is, the music is set to be reproduced from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. With such a configuration, the favorite music of the player can be reproduced during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

  Under such circumstances, if the left hit is reported in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, and the music selection period also becomes short. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music by operating the up button and the down button, and sets the reproduction with the enter button. On the other hand, the right-handing is notified during the first round (song selection period) of the jackpot (song selection in which the effect of selecting the music is determined to be executed) for which the song selection period is set, so that one round is set. Since the round period of the eyes can be set to a relatively long period, the player searches for the desired music from the music selection menu screen (operate the up button and the down button so that the corresponding image looks lit) A longer period for determining (pressing the determination button) can be secured. This allows the user to select the desired music without causing the player to be impatient, thereby improving the convenience of the player when selecting the music. In addition, a configuration in which a left hit is notified during the first round of a jackpot in which a song selection period is not set (a jackpot in which a normal jackpot effect is performed) prevents a game from being delayed and speedy. The jackpot game can be digested. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the presentation mode executed during the big hit.

  Further, in a case where an effect (operation effect) for prompting the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the case of a big hit, the player's past A configuration in which the firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is configured to be able to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has operated the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set. Then, in the case of starting a jackpot in which an operation effect is set, a game is played over a jackpot in which a predetermined number of past (for example, 5) operation effects are set based on the stored past operation history. When the player has not performed an operation, the left hit may be reported, whereas when the player has performed an operation within a predetermined number of jackpots, the right may be reported. In other words, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even when the operation effect is executed, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time by notifying the left hit to end the first round of the jackpot earlier. On the other hand, while achieving the playability that can be acquired, for the player who tends to perform the operation actively during the operation effect, the execution time of the operation effect is extended by notifying the right-handed, and the player in the operation effect A period for performing a sufficient operation on the operation means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming property according to a tendency of the player.

  In the tenth embodiment, the right-handed player has a prize spherical surface by adopting a board configuration in which the right-handed player has a higher ball entry rate to the specific winning opening 65a than the left-handed player. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for making right-handing advantageous with a prize sphere is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the game ball fired by a right strike and the game ball fired by a left strike at the same rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a, instead of the same ratio, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (that is, left-handed) (A position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter and the right-hit game ball can enter) may be provided with a general winning port having a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15). That is, in the state where the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball hit left is basically entered into the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls are unable to enter the specific winning opening 65a and are out. A configuration may be such that, while flowing down the mouth 66, a right-hit game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some game balls enter the general winning opening. With such a configuration, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is a prize ball due to a jackpot (that is, the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a). Is given in addition to the prize sphere, so that a right-handed hit during the jackpot can be advantageous in the prize sphere. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to obtain more prize balls to make a right-handed shot in preparation for a longer jackpot period. On the other hand, for players who want to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter time, make a left hit during the jackpot in preparation for being a little disadvantageous than a right hit on the prize sphere Can be.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the feature of simply hitting right and the feature of hitting left are displayed in the display areas HR15 and HR16 (see FIG. 126). ), But is not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether a right strike or a left strike is made at a predetermined position of the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80). Or the like may be provided, and the direction in which the player is shooting game balls may be determined from the detection result of the detection means. And it is good also as a structure which makes the effect during a big hit variable according to the determined firing direction. For example, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned off and the display area HR16 is turned on. On the other hand, when a left strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned off. It may be configured to have a light-off appearance. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of playability is achieved depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment, the game board 13 uses the game ball provided on the right side of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 as compared with the case where the game ball flows down. In order for the time to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) to be easier to reach when the player falls down, The path length of the flow path, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like were configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (that is, during the execution of the jackpot game), the game is played by right-handing than when the game ball is fired by left-handing. The game board 13 having a board surface configuration that makes it easier to win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the variable prize device 65, a right-possible variable prize device 659 is provided as a variable prize device that is opened and closed during a big hit. The right-winning prize port 659a of the right-winning prize winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and is the same as the left-winning prize-winning port 655La and the right-winning prize opening 655Ra in the above-described seventh embodiment. In addition, when the game ball enters during the big hit, a certain symbol change state is given after the big hit is completed. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when a game ball enters. In addition, the right probable winning prize mouth 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when the player hits the ball left and when the player hits the ball rightward. The number of game balls that reach the probability-changing winning device 659 while the right probability-changing winning port 659a can enter the ball increases, but the ratio of reaching game balls reaching the right probability-changing winning port 659a is It is configured to be low. On the other hand, when the right-handed player keeps hitting right in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the certainty winning device 659 while the right certainty winning port 659a can enter the ball is reduced, but the reached game balls are reached. Is configured to increase the ratio of entering the right probable winning prize port 659a. With these, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball, and therefore, for each player, the desired playability (the ball entry rate to the right-possible changing winning prize port 659a is low) Instead, it is possible to select one of a game property in which the number of game balls to be reached increases and a game property in which the number of balls reached becomes high instead of a small number of games.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. And that the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed to be the same as the various control processing in the seventh embodiment. . Other configurations, other processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the tenth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the tenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, in the game board 13 of the eleventh embodiment, a curved member 810 is provided instead of the curved member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 124) of the tenth embodiment. Are different. On a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810, as shown in FIG.

  The probability-change winning device 659 is provided with a horizontally-long rectangular right probability-changing winning port 659a at a substantially central portion thereof. This right-possible change winning prize port 659a is normally closed by the opening / closing door 659f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. It is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, a state in which it is possible to enter the right probability change winning port 659a and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball are switched in a specific switching pattern. Then, while the opening / closing door 659f1 is open (while the ball can enter the right-probable winning prize port 659a), the game ball enters the right-probable winning prize port 659a, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is changed. , The special symbol is set to the probable change state, and the normal symbol is set to the time saving state (at the end of the big hit, the probable change flag 203e is set to ON). On the other hand, if the game ball has never entered the right-winning winning prize port 659a in one jackpot, the game state after the end of the jackpot becomes a low probability state of a special symbol and a time reduction state of a normal symbol. Is set (100 is set as the value of the counter 203f during the working hours). In other words, it is more advantageous for a player to enter the game ball into the right probability change prize port 659a than to play the game ball into the right probability change prize port 659a during the jackpot. (The game state after the end of the jackpot is advantageous).

  As shown in FIG. 127, since the right probability change winning prize port 659 a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810, the game ball that has passed through the detour role object 700 and dropped on the curved member 810 is By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, it is possible to easily reach the right probability change winning prize port 659a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right probability variable winning opening 659a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved member 820 provided below the left channel in the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end in the condition of the curved member 810. . A plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface members 820 and 810 so as to form a downward slope from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810, as shown in FIG. With these configurations, when a game ball that has been hit left and passed through the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 has reached the upper surface of the curved member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 820 and Reach the right end. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right in frontal view flows downward and rightward in frontal view while interfering with the nail set between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved member 810. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved member 810 can easily reach the right probability change winning prize port 659a by rolling the upper surface of the curved member 810 rightward when viewed from the front. Can be. For this reason, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be made to reach the certain change winning device 659 both when the player hits right and when the player hits the left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be fired in a desired direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the structure of the probability change prize winning device 659 will be described in more detail. FIG. 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the probability changing prize winning device 659 in a state in which the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probability changing prize winning device 659 is closed (a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the right probability changing prize winning opening 659a). (B) is a probability change in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probability change prize winning device 659 is switched from a closed state to an open state (a game ball is switched from a state where it is difficult to enter the right probability prize opening port 659a to a state where it is possible to enter the ball). It is a front perspective view of the winning device 659.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (a), in a state where the right-winning prize opening 659a is closed, the left-end of the opening / closing door 659f1 for closing the right-positive winning prize opening 659a and the upper surface of the curved member 810 are the positive-change winning prize device 659. A portion on the left side (left floor surface 810b) is smoothly connected with almost no level difference. On the other hand, at the right end of the door 659f1, a convex portion 659g1 for suppressing a game ball rolling from the left in front view from passing through the upper surface of the door 659f1 and rolling rightward is provided. Is provided. Since the convex portion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the door 659f1, the game ball rolling on the door 659f1 from the left side of the door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 and rolls. Motion stops. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), since the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the game ball that is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 opens and closes. The upper surface of the door 659f1 flows downward toward the lower left in front view. Then, the left floor surface 810 b rolls leftward when viewed from the front, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. It should be noted that a game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the probability change prize winning device 659 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong downward flow due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, and therefore the opening and closing door 659f1. In the state where is closed, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and flow down to the direction of the outlet 66. In this way, by arranging the positive change prize winning device 659 in an inclined manner, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being stored in the upper portion of the door 659f1 during the period in which the door 659f1 is closed. Can flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right probability change prize port 659a switches to a state in which a ball can be entered, the opening / closing door 659f1 blocking the upper part of the right probability change prize port 659a becomes: The sliding door 659f1 is opened by sliding to the left in front view. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), while the opening / closing door 659f1 is being opened, the game ball rolling from the right side in the front view can enter the right certainty winning prize opening 659a, but it rolls from the left side in the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 659g1, and it is difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 659. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, when the door 659f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b have substantially the same height (substantially smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left side with respect to the probability-changing winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability-changing winning opening 659a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a description will be given of the downward flow direction of the game ball that has reached the certain-change-winning device 659 when the open / close door 659f1 of the certain-change-winning device 659 is closed and opened. First, FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the positive change winning device 659 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the door 659f1 is completely opened, the height of the upper end of the protrusion 659g1 provided at the right end of the door 659f1 is substantially the same as the height of the left floor surface 810b. Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left direction in the front view with respect to the certainty winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex portion 659g1. That is, without being hindered by the convex portion 659g1, it is possible to easily make a ball (winning) into the right certainty winning opening 659a. Also, game balls that have rolled from the right in the front view with respect to the certainty changing winning device 659 (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) may also prevent the ball from entering (winning) to the right certainty changing winning opening 659a. Since it does not exist, it is possible to easily enter the ball (winning) in the right probability change winning port 659a.

  FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the positive prize winning device 659 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), in the state where the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, the right probability change winning prize port 659a is closed by the opening and closing door 659f1, so that the game ball cannot enter the ball. In this state, the game ball that has rolled from the left in the front view with respect to the positive change winning device 659 exerts a downward-leftward gravity due to the upward-upward inclination formed by the opening / closing door 659f1. The rolling momentum is reduced. Further, at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, a convex portion 659g1 protruding above the other part of the opening / closing door 659f1 is provided. Even if it is possible to climb up, it is prevented by the convex portion 659g1 from reaching the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right side in the front view with respect to the positive change winning device 659 is in a state where sufficient momentum for overcoming the convex portion 659g1 is added by the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and pass through the door 659f1. Thus, the curved member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, an opening pattern of the opening / closing door 659f1 (right probability change winning prize port 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, a jackpot type (jackpot A11) in which the right probable prize port 659a is set to be able to enter a ball for a relatively long period, A jackpot type (jackpot B11) set to a possible state is provided. The longer the state in which the ball can be entered, the more chances for the game ball to enter the right-changing winning prize port 659a. State) is more likely to be set. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B11 (the gaming state after the jackpot is more likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the open pattern of the right-winning winning opening 659a set in the first round of the jackpot A11 is referred to as an open pattern capable of winning a V, and the right-positive change set in the first round of the big hit B11. The open pattern of the winning opening 659a is referred to as an open pattern in which it is difficult to win the V.

  FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change in the state of the right-possible variable winning prize port 659a when an open pattern in which a V prize is possible (open pattern set in the first round of the big hit A11) is set. . When the open pattern enabling the V prize is set, first, the right probability change prize port 659a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, after a lapse of 1.5 seconds, the right probability winning prize port 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), it takes 0.3 seconds from when the opening operation of the right probability variable winning prize port 659a is started to when the right probability variable winning prize port 659a is completely opened. For this reason, the state is completely opened when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds elapse (ie, 2.0 seconds elapse after the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right positive winning port 659a is started. . This closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds similarly to the opening operation (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). When the right probability change winning port 659a is completely closed, the state in which the right probability change winning port 659a is closed continues for 0.5 second. Then, when 0.5 seconds elapse (that is, when 2.8 seconds elapse from the start of the first round), the right probability change winning port 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, maintained in the opened state for 0.2 seconds, and closed for 0.3 seconds.

  After that, a completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and an opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right positive change winning port 659a is completely opened in 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is 0.2 seconds (A series of operations that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. With this repetitive operation, in the open pattern in which the V prize can be won, the open operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the last opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment, a detouring object 700 for extending the flow time of the game ball is provided in the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80. . An area below the game board 13 (an area where the first entrance port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the positive change winning device 659 are equally disposed) when the right-hit game ball passes through the detouring object 700. Is 7 seconds to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when right-handing is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the certain change winning device 659 in at least 7 seconds or more from the start of the round. Therefore, in the case of right-handed, the game ball reaches the certain-change winning device 659 around the start of the last open period in the open pattern in which the V prize can be won (after the lapse of 8 seconds from the start of the first round). Therefore, in the case of right-handing in the first round, there is a possibility that a game ball can be made to enter the right positive change winning port 659a only in the last opening period of the six opening periods. is there.

  On the other hand, if the left hit is continued in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the positive changing winning device 659) takes about 1 second to 2 seconds. The game balls reach the area where the game balls are evenly arranged. Therefore, if the player hits the left immediately at the start of the first round, the game balls can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. . That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right probable winning opening 659a. However, as described above, the game ball rolling from the left side toward the right odd winning prize opening 659a is one opening period (completely closed after the opening is started) compared to the game ball rolling from the right side. (0.8 seconds until the game is completed), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right probability change winning port 659a is shortened. Further, when the player hits the ball left, the number of game balls that cannot reach the certainty winning device 659 increases as compared with the case of hitting the ball right. That is, by passing through a plurality of nails erected between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, the game ball enters the out port 66 without reaching the curved surface member 810, There is a case where the ball enters the 1 entrance 64. Therefore, when an open pattern that allows the V prize is set, the number of game balls that reach during the opening of the right probability winning prize opening 659a is large by performing left-handing in the first round. It becomes a game property in which the ratio of balls is reduced and the number of useless balls is increased. On the other hand, when the right hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls reaching while the right probability change winning port 659a is open is small, but the rate of entering the ball is high. Becomes Therefore, the playability of the first round can be changed in accordance with the shooting direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be improved. It should be noted that the possibility of a game ball entering during one round is substantially the same (for example, a ratio of about 80%) in both the right-handed and the left-handed in the first round of the jackpot. Thus, the opening period, the board configuration, and the like are set.

  FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the state of the right probable winning opening 659a when an open pattern in which it is difficult to win a V (open pattern set in the first round of the big hit B11) is set. is there. When an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V is set, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the right probable winning opening 659a is opened simultaneously with the start of the first round, and closed immediately after being completely opened. You. Therefore, in both cases of left-handed and right-handed, it is extremely difficult to allow a game ball to enter the right-probable winning prize port 659a while the right-probable winning prize port 659a is open ( The probability that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). For this reason, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot type to be the jackpot A11 (an open pattern in which a V prize can be won is set).

  FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating the state of the open / close door 659f1 during one open period in more detail when the open pattern allowing the V prize is set. As shown in FIG. 131, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right probability change winning prize port 659a is closed by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that the game ball enters the right probability change winning prize port 659a. It is impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 131 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening and closing door 659f1, the opening and closing door 659f1 slides leftward when viewed from the front, and is stored inside the curved member 810. When 0.1 second has elapsed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right probability change winning prize port 659a whose upper part is not closed by the opening / closing door 659f1 is equal to or more than the width of one game ball (FIG. 131). (B)). As a result, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction can enter the right certainty winning port 659a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction is tilted upward in the upper right direction formed by a portion of the opening / closing door 659f1 that is not housed inside the curved member 810, and the convex portion 659g1 causes the game ball to roll right. This prevents entry into the certainty winning opening 659a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a as in the state where the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely closed. The state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right certainty winning prize port 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 second. Then, when 0.1 seconds elapse (that is, when 0.2 seconds elapse from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 659f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b). The game ball reaching the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 659g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 because the width between the right end and the right end of the game ball is less than one game ball. (See FIG. 131 (c)). Therefore, a game ball that has rolled from the left side in front view with respect to the probability-changing winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability-changing winning port 659a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right (a game ball fired by a right strike) and the game ball rolling from the left (a game ball fired by a left strike) both have a positive probability winning prize port 659a. It is possible to enter the ball. Thereafter, until the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the game balls rolled from both directions (both right and left sides) are in a state where they can enter the right certainty winning prize port 659a.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 seconds elapse after the opening operation is started, the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the protrusion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (the opening / closing door 659f1). 659f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 131 (d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. In the closing operation, an operation opposite to the opening operation is performed in the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds). For this reason, during the period from when the opening operation is started to when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed again, the game ball can enter the certain variance prize device 659a, the opening operation is started at the time of right-handing. It is 0.6 seconds from the time when 0.1 seconds elapse to 0.1 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, when left-handed, the time is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. That is, the rate of game balls reaching the probability-change-winning device 659 is higher when the player hits right than when the player hits left.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which a game ball can be played at the right-winning winning prize port 659a is determined based on whether the game ball arrived at the right-winning device 659 from the right side or the game ball arrived at the left side. It is configured to be variable depending on whether it is a sphere. Thus, when a game ball arrives from the right side with respect to the certainty-winning winning device 659, it can be more strongly expected that the player enters the right certainty-winning opening 659a. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, in the first round of the jackpot, more game balls are given to the positive change winning device 659 in the first round of the jackpot than in the case of right-handed. Is reached. Therefore, when the left hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball is difficult to enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a. When the player hits the game ball, the game ball can easily enter the left-probability winning prize port 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property in which there are few opportunities to enter the ball. Therefore, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the firing direction of the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game in the first round can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by providing the convex portion 659g1 at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, the period during which the game ball rolling from the left can enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a is turned from the right. Although the period in which the moving game ball can enter is shorter than the period in which the ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 659g1. Even if the convex portion 659g1 is deleted, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131 (b)) due to the upward-sloping inclination formed by the door 659f1. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right probability change winning prize port 659a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a description will be given of a display mode in the first round of the big hit A11 (a big hit in which a V winning open pattern is set) in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of the jackpot A11 is started, the characters “a mode in which the player hits the player several times with the left-hand button” is displayed on the display area HR15 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and “ A character that reads "The number of arrivals is large but it is difficult to enter V!" And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, when a left hit is performed, more game balls can reach the probability-changing winning device 659, but it becomes difficult for game balls to reach the right probability-changing winning port 659a (V winning. It becomes easy for the player to understand that the game becomes difficult.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR16, a character “Right-hit one-shot killing mode”, a character “The number of arrivals is small but it is easy to enter V!”, And a right-pointing arrow are illustrated. Is displayed. According to these display contents, when the player makes a right-handed game, the number of game balls reaching the probability-changing prize winning device 659 decreases, while the game balls easily enter the right probability-changing prize opening 659a (easy to win V). Can be easily understood by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR17 of the third symbol display device 81, an image imitating the positive change winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed. In addition, a state in which a decoration imitating the alphabet “V” is displayed on the front side of the right-probability changing winning device 659 in front view, and “Aim for V” is displayed on the upper left side of the display area HR17 in front view. The display area HR20 in which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed. According to these display contents, it is possible to obtain an advantageous result for the player by causing the game ball to enter the certain prize-winning device 659 provided with a decoration imitating the character "V" (special after the jackpot is over). It is possible to make the player easily understand that the symbol is in the changed state).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR17, arrows pointing in the direction of the probability change winning device 659 are respectively located on the left side and the upper right side in the front view of the image imitating the probability change winning device 659. An image is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side in the front view with respect to the image imitating the positive change winning device 659 is provided with the character "hit a few hits", and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side in the front view Is marked with the words "One-shot kill." According to these display contents, when the player makes a left hit according to the display content of the display area HR15 (a mode in which several hits are selected), a game ball is directed to the right assurance winning device 659 from the front left direction. It is possible for the player to easily understand that rolling occurs. In addition, when the player makes a right strike according to the display content of the display area HR16 (the one-shot hit mode is selected), the game ball rolls from the right upper direction when viewed from the front with respect to the right probability changing winning device 659. That can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which direction the player can confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right probable prize port 659a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, a bonus (prize ball) is given to a player by a game ball entering during execution of a jackpot game (during a special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right-variable winning device 659, are provided. The right-probable winning prize port 659a of the right-probable winning prize device 659 is set to an open state in which the ball can enter in the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, in addition to the prize ball, it is special after the end of the jackpot. A symbol change state is given. Therefore, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous to the player changes depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right-probable winning prize port 659a, and to the right-probable winning prize port 659a in the first round of the jackpot. The game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters.

  The right probability change prize mouth 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when the player hits left and when the player hits the right. If the player keeps hitting left in the first round, the right probability change prize mouth 659a is obtained. While the number of game balls reaching the right probability change winning device 659 while the ball 659a is capable of entering the ball is increased, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability change winning port 659a is reduced. . On the other hand, if the player keeps right-handing in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the right-probability change winning device 659 while the right-probability change winning port 659a can enter the ball decreases, but the reached game It is configured such that the ratio of the ball entering the right probability change winning port 659a increases. That is, the number of game balls reaching the right-winning winning prize device 659 during the predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round ends) (the number of opportunities to win the right-winning winning opening 659a) ( Element) is configured such that left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing. Further, the surface (element) of the ease of entering the ball (ball entry rate) with respect to the right-probability changing winning device 659 is configured such that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. With these, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball, and therefore, for each player, the desired playability (the ball entry rate to the right-possible changing winning prize port 659a is low) Instead, it is possible to select one of a game property in which the number of game balls to be reached increases and a game property in which the number of balls reached becomes high instead of a small number of games. As a result, it is possible to achieve a gaming property that matches the tastes of more players, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (the first round), the right-handed player has an advantage in terms of the ball entry rate as compared to the left-handed player (right The game ball that has reached the certainty winning device 659 can easily enter the right certainty winning opening 659a). On the other hand, when the player hits left, the number of reached balls becomes smaller than when the player hits right. The advantage is that the game balls are more advantageous (more game balls are more likely to reach the right-changing winning device 659). Thereby, by making a configuration in which the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side are different between right-handed and left-handed, the player can determine whether to perform right-handed or left-handed. , But the difference between right-handed and left-handed advantage is not limited to this. For example, at a position where the game ball can easily enter when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), the opening time is short (for example, up to 1 second), but the game ball is detected to be entered. A special winning opening is provided with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15 per ball) when the player hits the game ball, and the game ball easily enters when the player hits the ball right (the ball is difficult to enter when the player hits the ball left) A specific winning hole may be provided at the position (a) at which the opening time is long (for example, a maximum of 5 seconds), but a small number of prize balls are provided (for example, three per winning ball). The specific winning opening that is opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). With such a configuration, if the player continues to hit the left during the jackpot, the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening is likely to be reduced, but is provided when the player enters the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize a gaming property in which award balls increase. On the other hand, if the player keeps hitting right during the jackpot, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning opening, but the number of award balls given when entering the specific winning opening is reduced. Nature can be realized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select a desired game property and play the game. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where a game ball can easily enter when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), and a game ball can be entered when right-handed. The right-winning prize winning device 659 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball if the player hits the ball left). During the period when the right-winning winning prize device 659 is opened at one big hit, the variable winning prize device 65 is opened. May be configured to be shorter than the predetermined period. In other words, if the player continues to make a right hit at the jackpot of 1, the possibility that the ball will enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a and the probability change state is given after the big hit is increased, but the obtained prize balls are reduced, If left hitting continues, a large number of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large amount of winning balls can be obtained, but it becomes difficult to enter the right positive changing winning opening 659a. The game state after the jackpot may be disadvantageous. Also in the case of such a configuration, the superiority can be made different for each firing direction during the big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In this case, in this case, the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device in which only a prize ball is provided for entering) and the right-variable changing winning device 659 (in which a prize ball is provided for entering a ball and a positive changing state is provided) May be reversed. In addition, the setting of the surface (element) in which right-handing is more advantageous and the surface (element) in which left-handing is more advantageous are not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, during a normal game, there may be provided an element in which left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing and an element in which right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a left entrance where a game ball fired with a left hit can enter, and a right entrance where a game ball fired with a right strike can enter, When a game ball enters one of the entrances, a special symbol lottery is executed. And, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, by playing the game aiming at the right entrance with a right strike, it is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than with the left strike, but when left strike, the game efficiency is improved. Although it is disadvantageous than right-handed, a configuration that makes it easy to select a jackpot type (a type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed when a jackpot is won Good.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (the first round), when the player hits right, the game ball that has reached the right-winning prize device 659 is more right-turning than when the player hits the left. On the other hand, when the player hits the ball leftward, more game balls are more likely to reach the right-winning winning prize device 659 than when the player hits the ball rightward. Had a configuration. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the firing direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the corresponding effect according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left strike is detected, the display mode in the first round (see FIG. 132) is a display mode in which the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned off. In this case, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR16 may be turned on, and the display area HR15 may be set to have a visual display mode in which the display area HR15 is turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to more easily understand the playability selected by the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by opening and closing the opening and closing door 659f1 of the right-probability changing prize device 659 by sliding leftward in front view, a game that rolls from the right side with respect to the right-probability changing prize device 659. The ball is configured so that the period during which the ball can enter the ball is longer than the game ball rolling from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the door 659f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing door 659f1 may be configured to be opened from the near side in front view to the far side. Then, the length of the opening / closing door 659f1 on the right front side in the front view may be configured to be one game ball or more and shorter than the length on the left front side in the front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 659f1 is stored on the back side in front view, the right side of the opening / closing door 659f1 can enter the game ball earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. When the opening / closing door 659f1 projects forward and forward, the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 may be in a state where the game ball cannot enter the ball earlier. Also in the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, the game ball rolling from the right side with respect to the right likelihood change prize device 659 enters the ball more than the game ball rolling from the left side. It can be configured so that the possible period is long.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a game ball that has physically reached the left-handed position is more advantageous than a right-handed one due to the board configuration (that is, a game ball that has reached the right-probable-change prize device 659 enters the right-probable-change prize port 659a). And a surface where right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right probable prize-winning device 659 in one round). It is not limited. For example, control may be realized. More specifically, for example, a right probable winning prize port 659a is provided at a position where the game ball reaches the same ratio regardless of whether the player hits right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player has made a right-handed or left-handed hit. The configuration may be such that the opening pattern is different from that in the case in which it is performed. That is, when a right-handed hit is detected, the right-turned winning prize mouth 659a is opened in a pattern in which the opening time of each right opening is relatively small, but the opening period of each opening is relatively long. In such a case, the right probable winning prize port 659a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening the right probable prize port 659a is relatively large while the opening period of each opening is relatively short. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select the jackpot gaming properties by operating an operation means such as a button instead of the shooting direction of the game ball.

  In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set for one variable display. However, it is not always necessary to keep the continuous transformation effect within the variation time of the one variable display. A continuous transformation effect may be executed over time. That is, when a plurality of reserved balls are present at the start of the change, whether or not to set a continuous transformation effect based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball (whether or not each reserved ball is used, the type of change, etc.) When it is determined that the continuous make-up effect is to be set, a configuration may be used in which it is determined which continuous change effect is to be continued up to the change display corresponding to the reserved ball. Further, the configuration may be such that the production time of the continuous transformation effect is calculated from the pre-read result of each reserved ball, and the upper limit number of transformations is set according to the production time. With this configuration, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect can be made longer, so that the upper limit number of success notification modes can be increased. Therefore, more opportunities to display the success notification mode can be given to the player, and thus, when the continuous transformation effect is executed, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Further, by making a configuration in which a continuous transformation effect is continued over a plurality of variable displays, it is configured to make it more difficult for a player to predict how long the transformation success (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) will continue. be able to. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  In addition, in the case where the continuous makeover effect is continued over the change time of a plurality of change displays, the progress status of the continuous makeover effect (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, the remaining change number, the change time of the reserved ball, etc.) Accordingly, the number of fluctuations until the continuous transformation effect ends, the upper limit number of success notification modes, and the like may be increased or decreased. Regarding this, at the start of the change, the continuous change effect is executed over the display period of the change display of three times including the change (the change + two reserved balls), and the big change is notified by the third change display. A more specific description will be given, taking the case where it is determined as an example. For example, when the player presses the frame button 22 at almost no interval from the start of the operation valid period, most of the operation valid period is shortened, and the display of the upper limit number of success notification modes during the second variable display is performed. When the process has been completed, the continuous transformation effect may be completed in the second variation display. Then, in the third variation display, which should have continued the continuous make-up effect, an effect completely different from the continuous make-up effect may be executed. When the last operation validity period of the continuous makeover effect ends immediately after the start of the third change display, for example, the effect time of the third change display is left by increasing the upper limit number of the makeover. It is good also as composition which prevents that. As described above, by changing the production mode flexibly according to the progress of the continuous transformation production, the production mode can be further diversified.

  In the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during the execution of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a continuous transformation effect is executed during execution of a jackpot (for example, 1 to 5 rounds) may be adopted. In this case, for example, a continuous transformation effect is performed by determining whether the same normal symbol (a main symbol imitating an even number) is stopped and displayed to determine whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. (When it is difficult to identify), the configuration may be such that it is executed. Then, as the number of times of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) in the continuous transformation effect is larger, for example, the degree of expectation may be higher after the end of the jackpot (the current jackpot is the jackpot A). . With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming simply an operation for gaining a higher rank, and to further enjoy the game during the jackpot.

  Note that, in this case, the condition for terminating the operation validity period may be, for example, a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a instead of pressing the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in a continuous transformation effect only by firing a game ball to the specific winning opening 65a in order to obtain a prize ball during a jackpot. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the description has been given on the assumption that the character 811 is in a continuous transformation effect in which an effect of performing the transformation is performed one or more times. However, the technical idea described in each of the above embodiments is directed to the continuous transformation effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the application. For example, a configuration in which one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation, or departure, etc.) is notified in a single shot (single-shot effect) may be applied. That is, a configuration in which a subsequent display mode, a method of selecting an effect period, and the like may be changed depending on whether or not a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation validity period set in the single effect. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode, the method of selecting the effect period, and the like, depending on whether or not a press is detected. In a part or all of the operation valid period, the same notification mode is detected when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period and when the operation valid period ends without detecting the press. For example, the success notification mode) may be displayed at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the operation valid period). That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed, only the point of notifying that the pressing is detected is different, and the timing of determining the notification mode and the timing of displaying may be common. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it is not always necessary to notify that the pressing has been detected. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the frame button 22 that can be operated (pressed) by the player.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is executed as one type of the entertaining effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the change display of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed as a kind of entertainment effect during the execution of the jackpot, may be executed as a kind of so-called reservation notice effect, or may be executed during a so-called demonstration effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect time of the transition effect and the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol match. However, it is necessary to completely match the end timing. However, a degree of freedom may be provided. Specifically, for example, the effect time of the transition effect and the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol are within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). May be set. With this configuration, the calculation of the effect time such as the transition effect can be made to be about, so that the additional processing required for the operation can be reduced.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  All or some of the above embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (The total effective period is longer than the production period)
In one effect period, a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode, an upper limit number setting unit that sets an upper limit number of the specific display mode displayed in the specific effect, A specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on a predetermined setting condition being satisfied in the effect period; and a first condition being satisfied in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the first condition, and a second condition different from the first condition being satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. And a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode on the basis of the specific display mode. When displayed only by the first mode display means, the specific period having a length at which the effect period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number is displayed is set. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in one specific effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. The specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the fact that the predetermined setting condition is satisfied in the production period, and the first condition is satisfied in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. Thus, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. On the other hand, in the specific period, the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied. In the one production period, when the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means, the specific period of the length in which the production period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed. It is set by the specific period setting means.

  Thus, if the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means in one effect period, the effect period of the specific effect ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed. Therefore, a game can be played in the hope that a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, during the specific period, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the second condition is satisfied, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first mode display means displays the specific display mode based on the lapse of the specific time period, and the second mode display means displays the specific mode during the specific time period. A gaming machine A2 for terminating the specific period and displaying the specific display mode based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A1, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the lapse of the specific period, while the second mode is displayed during the specific period. Since the specific period is ended and the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the satisfaction of the condition, the specific display mode is displayed earlier as the second condition is satisfied. And the specific period can be ended early. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, the easier it is to increase the number of times of display of a specific display mode in one effect period. Therefore, for a player who wants to display more specific display modes, There is an effect that a game can be played with expectation that the second condition is satisfied early.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the game machine A1 or A2 is provided with operation means operable by a player, and the second mode display means detects the predetermined number of operations on the operation means in one of the specific periods, and performs the identification. A gaming machine A3 characterized by displaying the display mode of (1).

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations on the operating means operable by the player in one specific period are detected, the second mode display means Since the specific display mode is displayed, the player who wants to display more specific display modes can positively operate the operation means during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the specific effect can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means can set the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. The period and the display period of the specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, as the specific period ends earlier, the number of display times of the specific display mode can be increased, so that for a player who wants to display more specific display modes, the specific period is When set, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation that the second condition is satisfied earlier.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. The upper limit number setting means sets the upper limit number to one of a plurality of times including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number. The first number is set such that the ratio set by the upper limit number setting means is higher than the second number when the specific result is obtained by the determination means. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 to A4. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. One of the plurality of times including at least the first number and a second number different from the first number is set as the upper limit number by the upper limit number setting means. The first number is configured such that, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determining unit, the ratio set by the upper limit number setting unit is higher than the second number.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determining unit, the setting ratio of the first number as the upper limit number is increased, so that the player can infer the determination result by the determining unit from the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who desires to know the upper limit number of times accurately can play a game during a specific effect while strongly expecting that the second condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine A6, wherein the first number is greater than the second number.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, since the first number is greater than the second number, it is expected that at least the specific display mode greater than the second number is displayed. To allow the player to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the second condition is satisfied more times.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect execution means has the dynamic display execution means execute the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine A7 capable of executing the specific effect while the gaming machine A7 is in operation.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing unit while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored between the time when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed and the time when the identification information ends.

  In the gaming machine A7, after the end of the specific effect, a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the specific effect, and an effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, A gaming machine A8 comprising: a second effect time determination unit that determines the remaining time based on the dynamic display time.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A7, a second effect different from the specific effect is executed by the second effect executing means after the end of the specific effect. The effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is determined by the second effect time determination means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect ends, the second effect can be executed with the remaining dynamic display time, so that the player can perform the dynamic display of the identification information after the specific effect ends. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of boredom.

<Characteristic B group> (Control in which the period until the transformation becomes longer as the number of button PUSH is smaller during the transformation effect of 1)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period; and a predetermined effect during at least one previous display of the predetermined effect mode in the one effect period. A condition determining unit for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; and a display time setting unit for determining and setting a display time of the predetermined effect mode based on a determination result by the condition determining unit. The time setting means is such that the ratio of setting a long display time is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period is executed by the specific effect executing means. In one effect period, at least during the display of the previous predetermined effect condition, it is judged by the condition discriminating means whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The display time is determined and set by the display time setting means. The proportion of setting a long display time by the display time setting means is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means.

  Accordingly, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the display time of the predetermined effect is likely to be longer, and the number of the predetermined effect executed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, a player who wants to display the predetermined effect mode a larger number of times can be expected to satisfy the specific condition every time the predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine B1 includes operating means operable by a player, and the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when detecting an operation on the operating means. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the player operating the operating means, so that the display time of the predetermined effect mode is shortened. The player who wants to do so can be made to actively operate the operation means every time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the condition determining means determines a continuous number of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in one effect period, and the display period setting means includes: The gaming machine B3, wherein the larger the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of setting a long display time.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, in one effect period, the number of continuous predetermined effect modes in which the specific condition is not satisfied is determined by the condition determining means. The greater the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of the long display time set by the display period setting means.

  Thus, the longer the predetermined rendering mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied, the longer the display time is likely to be set, so that the number of the predetermined rendering modes that can be displayed in one rendering period is reduced. Therefore, the effect that the player who wants to display the predetermined effect mode more can be played in expectation that the specific condition is satisfied every time the predetermined effect mode is displayed. is there.

  A gaming machine B4 comprising an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times of displaying the predetermined effect mode in one effect period in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times of displaying the predetermined effect mode in one effect period is set by the upper limit number setting means. It is possible to make the user want to display more effect modes within the range. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, based on the display time being determined by the display time setting means, the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value. The display time determined by the display time setting means is set based on the end determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold value is determined by the end determination means. A gaming machine B5, comprising: avoiding means for avoiding a situation.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B4. Based on the display time being determined by the display time setting means, it is determined by the cycle determination means whether or not the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold, and the end determination means is provided. The setting of the display time determined by the display time setting means based on the determination that the predetermined presentation mode ends after the threshold value is avoided by the avoidance means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the production time of the specific production becomes too long.

  In the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, a setting determination for determining whether to set the display time shorter than the display time for which the setting is avoided. A gaming machine B6 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, a display time shorter than the set display time is set. Is determined by the setting determining means, so that there is an effect that a larger number of predetermined effect modes can be displayed as long as the effect time of the specific effect does not become too long.

  In the gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the display time of the shortest length that can be set based on the setting determination means determining that the display time of the short length is set. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, the shortest length that can be set by the display time setting means based on the setting determination means determining that the short display time is set. Since the display time is set, it is possible to more reliably suppress the effect time of the specific effect from being too long.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when the avoidance means avoids setting the display time, the game machine further includes end determination means for determining whether to end the specific effect. Machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, it is determined by the end determining means whether to end the specific effect. Therefore, when the display time exceeding the predetermined threshold is determined, the end of the specific effect may be determined by the end determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in the hope that a display time as short as possible is set.

<Character C group> (Control to increase the transformation success rate when the button PUSH is performed than when the effective period has elapsed without performing the PUSH)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect; a determination period number determining means for determining a set number of determination periods for performing a predetermined determination in an effect period of the specific effect; In the effect period, the discrimination period setting means for setting the discrimination period for the number of times determined by the discrimination period number of time determination means, and as the predetermined discrimination, whether a specific condition predetermined during the discrimination period is satisfied A first mode display determining module for determining whether to display a specific display mode based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining module; A second mode display determination for determining whether to display the specific display mode based on a lapse of the determination period without determining that the specific condition is satisfied by the means. And the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the first mode display determining unit is higher than the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determining unit. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a ratio setting means for setting a ratio.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. In the effect period of one specific effect, the number of set determination periods for performing the predetermined determination is determined by the determination period number determination means. In the effect period of one specific effect, the number of determination periods determined by the number-of-determination-periods determination unit is set by the determination period setting unit. As a predetermined determination, it is determined by the condition determining means whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the determination period, and a specific display is performed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. Whether the mode is to be displayed is determined by the first mode display determining means. Based on the lapse of the determination period without the determination that the specific condition has been satisfied by the condition determination means, the second mode display determination means determines whether to display the specific display mode. The ratio determined by the first mode display determining unit to display the specific display mode is set by the ratio setting unit to be higher than the ratio determined by the second mode display determining unit to display the specific display mode. Is done.

  Thereby, when the specific condition is satisfied during the determination period, the specific display mode is displayed at a higher ratio. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who wants to display a specific display mode to play a game in expectation that a specific condition is satisfied. Further, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to more strongly expect that the specific display mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the specific effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, when the operation on the operating means operable by the player is detected, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, so the determination period By operating the operating means during the period, the rate at which the specific display mode is displayed can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means.

  Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on satisfaction of a discriminating condition in the gaming machine C1 or C2, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. And a game execution means, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on execution of the determination by the determination means, and the ratio setting means includes: It is performed based on the specific determination result, rather than during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination unit. The gaming machine C3, wherein, during the execution of the specific effect, the rate of determining that the specific display mode is displayed is set higher.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is performed by the bonus game execution unit based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit based on the execution of the judgment by the judgment unit. The determination of the specific effect performed based on the specific determination result is performed rather than during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the determination result being different from the specific determination result by the determination unit. During execution, the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the ratio setting means is set higher.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained, a specific display mode is easily displayed. Therefore, when a specific display mode is displayed, a sense of expectation that a bonus game is performed for a player is performed. There is an effect that can be hugged.

  In the gaming machine C3, the ratio setting unit may display the specific display mode by the first mode determination unit during execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination. A first ratio is set as a ratio to be determined, and the specific display mode is changed by the second mode display determination unit during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the specific determination result. A second ratio lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio determined to be displayed, and the first mode is executed during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the deviation determination. A third ratio lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio determined by the display determination unit to display the specific display mode, and the identification performed based on the result of the deviation determination is performed. And setting a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio as a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determining means during execution of the first display. The gaming machine C4, wherein a difference between the ratio of the third ratio and the third ratio is larger than a difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, during execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination, the ratio determined by the first mode determination unit to display the specific display mode is the first ratio determined by the ratio setting unit. The percentage is set. During the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination, the second mode display determination unit determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed as a lower rate than the first rate. The ratio of 2 is set by the ratio setting means. A third rate lower than the first rate is determined as a rate determined by the first mode display determining means to display the specific display mode during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the departure determination. Is set by the ratio setting means. A fourth rate lower than the second rate is a rate at which the second mode display determining means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the off-state determination. Is set by the ratio setting means. The difference between the first ratio and the third ratio is set to be larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

  As a result, the degree of expectation of the bonus game is higher when the first mode display determining unit determines to display the specific display mode than when the second mode determining unit determines to display the specific display mode. Is high, the player can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with expectation that a specific display mode is displayed after a specific condition is satisfied during the determination period.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the determination period number determination means is executed based on the specific determination result, rather than the specific effect performed based on the off determination result. The gaming machine C5, wherein the specific effect makes it easier to set a large number of times as the number of times of the determination period.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the execution is performed based on the specific determination result, rather than the specific effect performed based on the off determination result. In the specific effect, the discrimination period number determination means makes it easier to set a larger number of times, so that the greater the number of discrimination periods, the higher the player's expectation of the privilege game can be.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific effect is determined based on a determination that the specific display mode is not to be displayed by either the first mode display determining means or the second mode display determining means. A game machine C6 comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the game.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it has been determined that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display determining unit or the second mode display determining unit. Based on the above, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means, so that a player who wants to enjoy the specific effect for a longer time can be made to more strongly expect the specific display mode to be displayed. . Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in a stronger hope that the specific condition is satisfied in the determination period.

  In the gaming machine C6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time of a dynamic display, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to execute the identification within a range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. And performing the effect. Based on a determination that the specific display mode is not to be displayed by either the first mode display determining means or the second mode display determining means, the remaining dynamic mode is determined. Based on the remaining time determining means for determining the display time, and based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, it is executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means. Gaming machine C7, characterized in that it comprises a presentation time determining means for determining an effect time of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display time setting means. . The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamic display time is determined by the remaining time determination unit based on the determination that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display determination unit or the second mode display determination unit. Based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the effect time of the effect to be executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means is determined by the effect time determining means.

  Thus, in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the remaining dynamic display time after the end of the specific effect, regardless of the end timing of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C7, the effect time determination means determines one effect time from a plurality of different effect times defined in advance so that the end timing of the effect does not exceed the dynamic display time. A gaming machine C8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the production time determining means can be used within a range in which the end timing of the production does not exceed the dynamic display time from among a plurality of predetermined production times. Since one effect time is determined, there is an effect that the processing load when determining the effect time can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (variable whether or not the transformation is possible and the production mode after the transformation effect according to the remaining fluctuation time and the number of transformations at the time of the button PUSH)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect at least including a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in a first effect period and a second effect performed after the first effect is completed. An upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect, and a specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A determination period setting unit that is set one or more times during execution; a first mode display unit that displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific determination period; A second aspect display means for ending the specific determination period and displaying the specific display mode based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and the specific display displayed during execution of the first first effect Aspect A mode display number counting means for counting the number of times of display, the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means during execution of the first effect, and at least one of a remaining effect period, A gaming machine D1 comprising: an effect time determining means for determining an effect time of two effects.

  According to the gaming machine D1, a specific effect at least including a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period, and a second effect executed after the first effect is completed. Is executed by the specific effect execution means. The upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. A specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set one or more times during execution of the first effect by the determination period setting means. The specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the elapse of the specific determination period. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the specific determination period, the specific determination period is ended by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. The number of times of display of a specific display mode displayed during the execution of the first effect is counted by the mode display number counting means. During the execution of the first effect, the effect time of the second effect is determined by the effect time determining means based on at least one of the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining effect period.

  Thereby, the effect time of the second effect varies according to the situation of the first effect, so that there is an effect that the variation of the specific effect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine D1, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the determination period setting means sets a period in which an operation on the operation means is valid as the specific determination period. A gaming machine D2, which is established when an operation on the operation means is detected.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, a period during which the operation on the operation unit is valid is set by the determination period setting unit as the specific determination period. The specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a player who wants to display the second effect of a longer effect time can positively operate the operation means.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display, the specific effect execution means, within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, Performing a specific effect, wherein the effect time determining means, based on at least one of the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time, the second effect of the second effect A gaming machine D3 for determining an effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. . Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on at least one of the number of displays counted by the mode number counting unit and the remaining dynamic display time, the rendering mode of the second rendering is determined by the rendering time determination unit.

  Thereby, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the dynamic display time, so that the interest of the player during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the effect time determining means may select, from among a plurality of different effect times defined as the effect time of the second effect, before the effect period of the specific effect ends. A gaming machine D4 for determining a longest production time within a range where the second production ends.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, from among a plurality of different production times defined as the production time of the second production, the production period of the specific production ends. Since the longest production time in the range where the second production ends before is determined by the production time determination means, the production time of the second production can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the specific effect is configured to include a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect, and is determined by the effect time determining means. A gaming machine D5 comprising: third production time determination means for determining a production time of the third production based on at least one of the produced production time and the remaining production period.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, the third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is included in the specific effect. The effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determining means based on at least one of the effect time determined by the effect time determining means and the remaining effect period.

  Thus, during the execution of the specific effect, the third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed, so that the effect mode can be diversified during the execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started, and the third effect time determination unit is configured to execute the third effect time determining means. The effect time of the third effect is determined based on a difference between the remaining effect period at the time when one effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started. An effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determining means based on a difference between the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed in accordance with the effect period of the specific effect.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, provided with an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode of the second effect based on the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means. .

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect mode determining means based on the number of displays counted by the mode number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have an impression in which the first effect and the second effect are related. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve a player's interest in the game in the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine D7, execution information used for executing the second effect is stored based on the storage mode for each effect mode of the second effect, and the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means; and the second one of the execution information selected by the selection means based on the effect time determined by the effect time determination means. Specifying means for specifying a range used for execution of the effect, and second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the execution information in the range specified by the specifying means. Gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D7. That is, execution information used to execute the second effect is stored in the storage unit for each effect mode of the second effect. Based on the presentation mode determined by the presentation mode determination unit, the corresponding execution information is selected from the storage unit by the selection unit. Based on the effect time determined by the effect time determining means, the specifying means specifies the range to be used for the execution of the second effect this time among the execution information selected by the selecting means. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing unit based on the execution information in the range specified by the specifying unit.

  Thereby, a plurality of second effects with different production times can be executed from each piece of execution information, so that the execution information is stored as compared with the case where the execution information is individually stored for each production time. This has the effect of reducing the storage area required for storage.

<Feature E group> (The suggestion mode of the degree of expectation varies depending on the tendency of the button PUSH)
In one effect period, based on a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times, and when a predetermined display condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. An effect mode determining means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode, and an effect mode setting for setting display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Means, a specific determining means for performing a specific determination in the effect period, and an effect mode having a high ratio determined by the effect mode determining means according to a result of the determination by the specific determining means. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a determination ratio varying unit that varies when the predetermined effect mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times is executed by the specific effect executing means in one effect period. Based on the fact that the predetermined display condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode. You. The display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is set by the effect mode setting means. In the first production period, the specific determination is performed by the specific determination unit, and the production mode having a high ratio determined by the production mode determination unit according to the determination result by the specific determination unit determines at least one predetermined production mode. When it is determined, it is varied by the determination ratio varying means.

  This makes it easier to determine a different rendering mode according to the result of the determination by the specific determination unit, so that the impression of the specific rendering can be made different according to the result of the specific determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is difficult for the player to get tired of.

  The gaming machine E1 includes condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed, and the specific determining means includes one of the following as the specific determination. Determining a determination result by the condition determination unit executed in at least one of the predetermined rendering modes set in the rendering period, wherein the determination ratio variable unit is configured to determine the specific determination unit in the one rendering period. For the predetermined production mode set by the production mode setting means after the predetermined production mode targeted by the determination by the above, the production mode in which the ratio determined by the production mode determination means is high is varied. A gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the condition determining unit determines whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. As the specific determination, the determination result of the condition determining means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period is determined by the specific determining means. In one effect period, for a predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting means after the predetermined effect mode targeted for determination by the specific determining means, an effect mode in which the ratio determined by the effect mode determining means is high. Is varied by the determination ratio varying means.

  Thereby, while the predetermined effect mode to be determined by the specific determination unit is displayed, the game can be performed while paying attention to the determination state by the specific determination unit, and the predetermined state set thereafter is set. In the effect mode, the player can play a game while paying attention to which effect mode is displayed. Therefore, the point to be noticed can be changed according to the timing at which the predetermined effect mode is set, so that there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the specific effect can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the specific determination means determines that the specific condition has been satisfied by the condition determination means among the at least one predetermined production mode set in one production period as the specific determination. The gaming machine E3, wherein the number of the predetermined effect mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, as a specific determination, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining unit among at least one predetermined rendering mode set in one rendering period. Since the number of times of the given predetermined presentation mode is determined by the specific determination unit, it is possible to vary the presentation mode that is easily set according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. The effect mode can be varied depending on whether or not the user operates the operation means. Therefore, the effect mode can be changed by the selection of the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is less tiring.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Executing the specific effect, based on the execution of the determination by the determination unit, wherein the determination ratio variable unit includes: If the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific effect is being executed based on the specific determination result being displayed, it is displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When determining the predetermined production mode, the ratio for determining the first mode is changed so as to be higher than other production modes, and the determination result by the specific determination unit is different from the first determination result. Becomes the second determination result, and, in the case where the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result being performed, determines the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times. In doing so, the ratio for determining the second aspect different from the first aspect is changed so as to be higher than the other presentation aspects, the determination result by the specific determination means becomes the first determination result, and In the case where the specific effect performed based on the result of the departure determination different from the specific determination result is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times, The ratio for determining the second aspect is changed so as to be higher than the other presentation aspects, and based on the fact that the determination result by the specific determination means is the second determination result and the departure determination result is obtained. Run When the specific effect is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times, the ratio for determining the first mode is changed so as to be higher than other effect modes. A gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the discrimination is performed by the discriminating unit based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating unit, the bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing unit. You. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means based on the execution of the judgment by the judgment means. When the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific effect is being executed based on the specific determination result, the predetermined number of times displayed at the predetermined number of times is determined. Is determined by the determination ratio varying means so that the ratio for determining the first mode is higher than that for the other mode. If the result of the determination by the specific determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result, and if the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the specific number of times Is determined by the determination ratio varying means so that the ratio of determining the two different platforms from the first configuration is higher than the other rendering configurations. Displayed at a specific number of times when the specific result executed by the specific determination unit based on the fact that the determination result is the first determination result and the deviation determination result is different from the specific determination result is being executed. When determining the predetermined effect mode to be performed, the determination ratio variable means changes the ratio for determining the second mode so as to be higher than the other effect modes. When the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the second determination result, and the specific effect performed based on the result of the departure determination is being performed, the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is determined. At the time of the determination, the determination ratio is changed by the determination ratio varying means such that the ratio for determining the first mode is higher than the other effect modes.

  This allows the player to estimate the degree of expectation to be a bonus game in accordance with the result of the determination by the specific determination means and the predetermined number of predetermined presentation effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine E1 includes condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. A gaming machine E6, wherein the determination is performed based on a determination result by the condition determination unit performed in at least one of the specific effects executed before the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the condition determining unit determines whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. As the specific determination, the determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on the determination result by the condition determination unit executed in at least one specific effect performed before the current specific effect.

  This makes it possible to diversify the effect mode, because the effect mode in the current specific effect varies depending on the result of the determination made by the condition determining means in the specific effect executed previously.

  In the gaming machine E6, the specific determination means may include a number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed in at least one of the specific effects executed prior to the current specific effect, and the specific condition by the condition determining means. The game machine E7 is configured to execute the determination based on the number of the predetermined effect modes determined to have been established.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, the number of predetermined effect modes displayed in at least one specific effect executed prior to the current specific effect, and the specific condition determined by the condition determining means. The determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on the number of predetermined effect modes determined to have been established, so that a game can be performed by paying attention to the number of predetermined effect modes in which the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E7, there is provided identification means for identifying a player who is playing a game, and the specific determination means is displayed while the same player is identified by the identification means as playing a game. A game machine E8 for performing a determination based on the number of the predetermined production mode and the number of the predetermined production mode determined by the condition determination unit that the specific condition is satisfied. .

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E7. That is, the player playing the game is identified by the identification means. The number of predetermined effect modes displayed while the same player is playing the game while being identified by the identifying means, and the number of predetermined effect modes for which the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means Is determined by the specific determination unit based on the above.

  This makes it possible to vary the tendency of the effect mode to be easily set according to the game result for each player, so that an effect corresponding to the player can be provided.

<Feature F group> (Adjust the connection between the first half of the production and the second half of the production)
A specific effect executing means for executing, within one effect period, a specific effect at least composed of a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect, and during execution of the first effect, A first condition for ending the first effect based on a condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied and a condition for determining whether the condition has been satisfied; Ending means, and setting a length of a period between the end of the first effect by the first effect ending means and the start of the second effect based on at least a remaining length of the effect period. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a period setting unit that performs the first stage, and an effect start unit that starts the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine F1, a specific effect constituted by at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed within one effect period by the specific effect executing means. During the execution of the first effect, the end condition determining means determines whether or not a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. Based on the determination that the end condition has been satisfied, the first effect is determined. The first effect is ended by the ending means. The length of the period from the end of the first effect by the first effect ending means to the start of the second effect is set by the period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. The second effect is started by the effect start unit based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting unit.

  Thereby, the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect can be changed according to the remaining effect time, so that the effect that the specific effect can be suitably executed can be achieved. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect as the length of the second time until the end of the first effect period. A gaming machine F2 for setting the length of time when the effect ends.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is determined by the length of the period until the end of one effect period. Since the length at which the two effects end is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the specific effect can be more suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, as the second effect, there is provided type selecting means for selecting one effect type from a plurality of effect types having different effect times, and the period setting means is selected by the type selecting means. A gaming machine F3 for setting the length of a period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect, based on the effect time of the effect type.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selecting means from a plurality of effect types having at least different effect periods. Based on the effect time of the effect type selected by the type selection means, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is set by the period setting means.

  Thereby, since the start timing of the second effect can be set according to the effect time of the second effect, there is an effect that the second effect can be more appropriately executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, in the first effect, the upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied; A number counting means for counting the number of times the specific condition is satisfied, wherein the end condition is that the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or more than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being at least established.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, in the first effect, the upper limit of the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is set by the upper limit number setting means. The number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the first first effect is counted by the number counting means. At least the termination condition is satisfied when the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit set by the upper-limit setting means.

  Thereby, even if the end timing of the first effect is changed according to the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means, there is an effect that the start of the second effect can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine F4, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period for validating an operation on the operation means one or more times during the execution of the first effect, First mode display means for displaying a specific display mode based on the elapse of the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, and one operation validity set by the operation validity period setting means A second mode display unit for ending the operation validity period and displaying the specific display mode based on detecting an operation on the operation unit during a period, wherein the specific condition includes the specific condition. A gaming machine F5, which is established when the display mode of (1) is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, the operation validity period for validating the operation of the operation means operable by the player is set by the operation validity period setting means one or more times during the execution of the first effect. Based on the elapse of the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on detection of an operation on the operation means during one operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, the operation validity period is ended by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. . The specific condition is satisfied when a specific display mode is displayed.

  With this, the end timing of the operation effective period is changed according to the timing at which the player performs an operation on the operation means, so that even if the end timing of the first effect is changed, the start of the second effect is appropriately set. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, third effect execution means for executing a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect in the period of the length set by the period setting means, Effect data storage means for storing effect data for executing the third effect; and the effect data storage means storing one of the effect data from the effect data storage means based on the length of the period being set by the period setting means. And a data readout unit for reading out the third effect from among the one effect data read by the data readout unit in a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting unit. A gaming machine F6 comprising: data range setting means for setting as data to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect is executed by the third effect executing means in the period of the length set by the period setting means. Effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. Based on the setting of the length of the period by the period setting means, one effect data is read from the effect data storage means by the data reading means. Among the one effect data read by the data reading means, data in a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set as data for executing the third effect by the data range setting means. Is done.

  Thereby, when the third effect is performed, data with different effect periods can be set based on one effect data, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in data for executing the third effect. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine F6, at least a part of the effect data is constituted by data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting unit is configured to execute the processing of the period set by the period setting unit. A gaming machine F7, wherein a range of data for executing the third effect is set such that a display time of the specific still image varies according to a length.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F6. That is, at least a part of the effect data is constituted by data for displaying a specific still image. The data range for executing the third effect is set by the data range setting unit so that the display time of the specific still image is changed according to the length of the period set by the period setting unit.

  Thereby, even if the rendering time of the third rendering is changed, only the display time of the specific still image is changed, so that it is possible to suppress an unpleasant feeling of the display content for the player. .

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a display unit capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and a display unit that is executed by the dynamic display execution unit Dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect execution means determines the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determining means. A gaming machine F8 for executing the specific effect within the determined dynamic display time based on the fact.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time determination means determines the dynamic display time of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the determined dynamic display time.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed within the dynamic display time.

<Characteristic G group> (adjust the mode after the production with an indefinite production time ends)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect in one effect period; and an end condition predetermined before the effect period elapses during execution of the first effect. Ending condition judging means for judging whether or not the effect has been established, an effect ending means for ending the first effect based on the judgment that the ending condition has been established by the ending condition judging means, And an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode from the end of the first effect to the end of the effect period based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. Gaming machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the specific effect including at least the predetermined first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during one effect period. During the execution of the first effect, the end condition determining means determines whether a predetermined end condition has been satisfied before the effect period has elapsed. The first effect is ended by the effect ending means based on the end condition determining means determining that the ending condition is satisfied. The effect mode from the end of the first effect by the effect ending means to the end of the effect period is set by the effect mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period.

  This makes it possible to set an effect mode in accordance with the length of the remaining effect time, so that there is an effect that a specific effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine G1, the production mode set by the mode setting unit includes, as the production mode, at least a type selection unit for selecting one type from a plurality of types of the production modes having different production times. Machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, as the production mode set by the mode setting unit, at least one of the plurality of production mode types having different production modes is selected by the type selection unit. Since the selection is made, there is an effect that it is possible to set the effect mode of the effect time corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period.

  In the gaming machine G2, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selecting means and the length of the remaining effect period, the effect is set by the effect mode setting means after the first effect is completed. A gaming machine G3 comprising a period setting means for setting a period until the effect mode is started.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selection means and the remaining effect period Nagasato, the effect after the first effect is completed. Since the period until the production mode set by the mode setting unit is started is set by the period setting unit, there is an effect that the interval between the first production mode and the production mode can be suitably set. .

  In the gaming machine G3, the period setting unit sets the period so that a timing at which the production mode set by the production mode setting unit ends and a timing at which the production period ends are within a predetermined period. A gaming machine G4 to be set.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the timing at which the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting means ends and the timing at which the rendering period ends are within a predetermined period. Since the period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect mode can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting means is configured to determine a difference between a length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect ends and an effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selecting device. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the period is set as the period.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3 or G4, the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selecting means are determined. Since the difference period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect period and the end timing of the effect mode can be matched.

  In the gaming machine G1, storage means for storing effect data used for executing the effect mode is provided, and the effect mode setting means corresponds to the length of the remaining effect period in one effect data. A gaming machine G6 characterized by selecting and setting a range of data to be processed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, the effect data used to execute the effect mode is stored in the storage means. In the one effect data, a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

  This makes it possible to set a plurality of presentation modes with different presentation times from one presentation data, and thus has the effect of reducing the amount of data for displaying the presentation modes.

  The gaming machine G6, further comprising: data selection means for selecting one of the effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means from a plurality of the effect data stored in the storage means; Means for selecting and setting a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period from one effect data selected by the data selecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G6. That is, one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means is selected by the data selecting means from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage means. Among the one effect data selected by the data selecting means, a data range corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation mode.

  In the gaming machine G7, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a bonus game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Means, wherein the data selection means selects one of the effect data from the storage means based on at least a result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G7. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. . At least one effect data from the storage means is selected by the data selection means based on at least the result of the determination by the determination means.

  This allows the player to predict whether or not the game will be a bonus game based on the effect mode, so that the player can pay attention to the effect mode and play the game.

<Characteristic H group> (The period until the right-hit ball reaches the attacker is made longer than when the left-hit ball is hit)
A first flow path through which a game ball fired in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, and the first flow path A ball which is provided at a position where at least a game ball which has flowed down and a game ball which has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined value is determined based on that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The second flow path fires in the second direction more than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that a period until a given game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning prize port is a prize, the state shifts to a winning state in which the large prize port is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is won to the special winning opening during the winning state, so that the player performs the game with the winning state as one pleasure. Can be made.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to fire the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that would be.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, game balls fired in the first direction flow down the first flow path, and game balls fired in the second direction different from the first direction flow through the second flow path. Flow down. Ball entry means is provided at a position where at least game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The second period is set such that the period until the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A flow path is configured.

  This allows the player who wants the game ball to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible to fire the game ball aiming at the first flow path, while taking a relatively long time to play the game ball. Can be fired at the second flow path for a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, since the player can select a desired firing direction for each player and play the game, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine H1, the ball entry means may be located at a position where a ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path is higher than a ratio of game balls flowing down the first flow path. A gaming machine H2, wherein the gaming machine H2 is disposed in the game machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the rate at which game balls flowing down the second flow path enter is higher than the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path enter. Since the ball entry means is arranged at a higher position, when flowing down the first flow path, the period until reaching the ball entry means is shortened, but it is difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when flowing down the second flow path, the ball easily enters the ball entry means, but the period until reaching the ball entry means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself / herself can select a firing direction that matches the taste of each player.

  A gaming machine H3, characterized in that the gaming machine H1 or H2 is provided with a speed-reducing means for reducing the flow speed of a game ball flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball fired in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to change between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a variable number of times the variable means performs the predetermined number of times from the second position based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. A gaming machine H4, comprising: a variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is changed to a first position.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a specific determination result by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine H4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and during execution of the variable game, the variable means A first variable for changing the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number or more of game balls having entered the ball input means after being changed from the position to the first position; Control means, and during execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position. A second variable control means for changing the position to two positions, wherein during the specific period, the game ball is started to be fired in the second direction, and then the game ball is fired in the second direction at the specific firing interval. Said specific number of game balls Gaming machine H5, characterized in that than period until after flowing down the second flow path is at least long.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at the firing interval equal to or longer than the specific firing interval. During execution of the variable game, based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means The first position is changed to the second position by the variable control means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Is done. At least a specific period from the start of the game ball launch in the second direction to the specific number of game balls fired in the second direction at a specific launch interval until the game balls finish flowing down the second flow path Is configured to be longer.

  Thus, when a game ball is fired in the second direction during execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that a person loses.

  In the gaming machine H4, the variable game execution means sets a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game. Controlling the variable means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation to be changed to the second position after a lapse of one or more of the specific variable patterns. During the execution period of the first variable operation, the game ball fired in the first direction can reach after the specific variable pattern is started, and the second variable operation is started after the specific variable pattern is started. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that gaming balls fired in two directions are difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game, the first means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period elapses after the changing means is changed to the first position. The variable game execution means is controlled so as to change the variable means in a specific variable pattern including the variable operation a predetermined number of times. The execution period of one or a plurality of first variable operations in the specific variable pattern is such that game balls fired in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can be reached, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball fired in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

  Accordingly, when the game ball is fired in the second direction, the chance that the game ball enters the ball entry means becomes smaller than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. It has the effect of making you think.

  In the gaming machine H6, as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, a first game state is set when a game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one of the variable games. A game state setting means for setting a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game. Machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H6, the game state after the completion of the execution of the variable game is the game when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one variable game. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, the second state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means when the game ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the player can play the game during execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the first flow path causes the dropped game ball to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and the second flow path causes the dropped game ball to flow in the third direction. The variable means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down the upper surface thereof while being changed to the second position, and The fourth direction side is inclined and disposed so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position. In a state in which the game ball can enter from above and the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part is in a state of being closed by the variable means, and the variable means is From the fourth direction side to the third direction side Gaming machine H8, characterized in that from the second position by sliding in the direction in which varying the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H6 and H7. That is, while the game balls flowing down the first flow path reach the ball entry means from the third direction, the game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. And reach. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface thereof, and the variable means is inclined so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. It is arranged. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above. Further, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, a state in which the upper part of the ball entry means is closed by the variable means. By sliding in the direction from the fourth direction to the third direction, the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

  In this way, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it is difficult for the game ball arrived from the third direction to enter the ball entry means, while the game ball arrived from the fourth direction is entered. Easier to do. Therefore, during the execution of the variable game, it is more likely that a game ball reaching the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when it is fired in the second direction than when it is fired in the first direction. There is an effect that it can be raised.

<Feature I Group> (Right-handing during a jackpot is more advantageous than left-handing in one aspect, but less advantageous than left-handing in another aspect)
A launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition; and a determination by the determination means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, and a first element relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game are included in the execution period of the bonus game. A first element favoring means that makes it more advantageous for a player to keep the game ball being fired in the first direction than to keep the game ball being fired in the second direction during a specific period; and A second element different from the element is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. And two-element advantageous means. Game machine I1 to butterflies.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning prize port is a prize, the state shifts to a winning state in which the large prize port is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to a player such as a prize ball is given by causing a game ball to be awarded to a special winning opening during a winning state. The state can be played with one pleasure.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to fire the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, and furthermore, the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of the predetermined privilege that can be acquired) is predetermined, there is a possibility that the hit state may be like an operation of simply firing a game ball in a predetermined direction. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the firing means is configured to be able to fire at least game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is performed by the bonus game execution unit based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The first factor relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. Is favored by the first element favoring means. The second factor relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction than the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. Is favored by the second element favoring means.

  This allows the player who wants to take advantage of the first element to fire the game ball in the first direction during the execution of the privilege game, while the player wants to take advantage of the second element. A game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide gaming properties that match the taste of each player.

  In the gaming machine I1, a ball-entering means provided at a position where at least a game ball fired in the first direction and a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, and And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means at a position higher than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and a variable means that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the privilege game. And a control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it becomes more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During execution of the bonus game, the variable means changes the predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position by the variable control means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, and thus has the effect of further improving the interest during the execution of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine I2, the first element favoring means may determine that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The game machine I3 is characterized in that the ratio of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, it is more preferable that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the ratio of entering the ball entry means is increased by the first element advantage-improving means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the privilege game with a high game rate of entering the ball entry means is provided. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively fired in the first direction.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element favoring means is configured to continuously emit the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, rather than continuously firing the game ball in the first direction. A game machine I4 wherein the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2 or I3, it is more likely that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Since the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased by the second element advantage-making means, the player who wants to have more game balls reach the ball entry means must be positively in the second direction. There is an effect that a game ball can be fired.

  In the gaming machine I4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during a specific time period, and the second element advantage means includes a game ball fired in the first direction after the specific time period is started, the predetermined number of times of the first time. It is to suppress reaching the ball entry means until the execution period of the variable operation ends, at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times, the specific period is A gaming machine I5, which is a period during which a game ball fired in the second direction is reachable from the start.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4. That is, the first variable operation in which the variable means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means has been changed to the first position is executed by the variable control means a first number of times during the specific period. Is done. It is determined by the second element advantage means that the game ball fired in the first direction from the start of the specific period reaches the ball entry means before the execution period of the predetermined number of first variable operations ends. Is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is configured as a period in which the game ball fired in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

  This allows the game ball to be launched in the second direction to reach the ball entry means during execution of the first variable operation a greater number of times than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to enter the ball into the ball entry means can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine I5, the second element advantage-making means is configured such that a period until a game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball-in means is a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is A gaming machine I6 characterized by suppressing a falling speed of a gaming ball fired in the first direction so as to be longer than a period until the ball reaches the entry ball means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I5, the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball-entering means is a period in which the game ball fired in the second direction enters the ball. Since the flowing speed of the game ball fired in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage means so as to be longer than the period until the game ball reaches the means, the game ball fired in the first direction is It is possible to more reliably prevent the vehicle from reaching the ball entry means before the predetermined number of first variable operations is completed. Therefore, firing the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chance of more reliably entering the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine I5 or I6, in the first variable operation, a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is predetermined. The variable means is varied so as to be in a second period, and the first element advantageous means is provided so that a game ball fired in the second direction is transferred to the ball entering means during the second period. And that the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period more easily enters the ball entry means than when it reaches A gaming machine I7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I5 or I6. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is set such that a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is a predetermined second period. Is varied. A game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period, compared to a case where the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period. This makes it easier for the first element advantage means to enter the ball.

  Thereby, when the game ball is fired in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, also in the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball entry means, firing the game ball in the first direction can extend the period during which the player can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball reaching the ball entry means enters the ball entry means when the game ball is fired in the first direction, as compared with the case where the game ball is fired in the second direction. effective.

  In the gaming machine I7, a game ball fired in the first direction can flow down, and a first flow path that allows the flown down game ball to reach the ball-in means from a third direction, and in the second direction A second flow path that allows the launched game balls to flow down, and allows the flowed down game balls to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, wherein the variable means comprises: While being changed to the second position, the upper surface of the game ball is configured to be able to flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. Wherein the ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball from above in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, and the variable means is provided at the second position. In the state where it is variable, the upper part is The first element advantageous means slides the variable means in a direction from the third direction to the fourth direction, thereby causing the variable means to move toward the fourth direction. A gaming machine I8 characterized by being changed from two positions to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I7. That is, the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction by the first flow path. The game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means by the second flow path from a fourth direction different from the third direction. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, a game ball can be played on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball-in means from above, while in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the ball-in means Above is closed by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in a direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantageous means.

  Thereby, the game ball which is fired in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period, is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball from above earlier than the fourth direction side, so that it is fired in the first direction and from the third direction side during the second period. A game ball that has reached the ball entry means can be easily entered. Therefore, the game ball fired in the first direction can more reliably increase the ball entry rate when reaching the ball entry means than the game ball fired in the second direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a game state after the execution of the privilege game, if a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one of the privilege games, Game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game. A gaming machine I8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I8, the gaming ball is set to the ball entry means during the execution of one bonus game, as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game, a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game during execution of the bonus game by paying attention to whether or not to play the game.

<Character J group> (variable attackers in which game balls reaching the same area are likely to win)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which the game ball fired by the firing means can reach, and a first incoming ball provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball. Means, a second ball entry means, a first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball entering, and a game ball reaching the specific area entering the first ball entry means A first position at which it becomes possible and difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second position at which it becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry means and it is possible to enter the second ball entry means. And a variable means that can be changed at least to the first position and the first position based on establishment of a first condition. It is varied to the gaming machine characterized by comprising a variable control means for variably to the second position based on the establishment of the different second condition and the first condition J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the specific area is provided at a position where the game ball fired by the firing means capable of firing the game ball can reach. The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are provided at positions where game balls reaching the specific area can enter. The first privilege is given by the first privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first privilege is granted based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second privilege different from the privilege is given. The variable means makes it possible for the game ball that has reached the specific area to enter the first ball entry means and to enter the second ball entry means with difficulty, and to enter the first ball entry means with difficulty. And a second position at which the ball can enter the second ball entry means. The variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, while the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. Is changed to

  Thereby, according to the variable position of the variable means, it is possible to vary the ball entry means that allows the game ball reaching the specific area to enter the ball, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other on a board, and the variable means is provided with the first ball entry means. And the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance on the board. The variable means is disposed between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with a case where the variable means is separately provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, and a third position where it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit. The variable control means is configured to change the variable means from the third position to the first position based on satisfaction of the first condition. A gaming machine J3 that changes from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of two conditions.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, at least the variable means is configured to be variable between the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter the first and second ball entry means. The variable means is changed by the variable control means from the third position to the first position based on the satisfaction of the first condition, while the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position by the satisfaction of the second condition. It is varied by the variable control means.

  Accordingly, in a state where neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to enter the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit, so that either the first condition or the second condition is used. There is an effect that a game can be played in the expectation that will be established.

  In the gaming machine J3, the first ball entry means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second ball entry means is provided with the first ball entry means with respect to the specific area. The first position is a position at which the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction, and the first position is the first position. The second position is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is the first direction. The gaming machine J4 is a position that is likely to be in a direction different from both the direction of the second direction and the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3. That is, while the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, the second ball entry means is provided in the second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area. Is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be the first direction, while when the variable means is arranged at the second position, the game that has reached the specific area The traveling direction of the ball tends to be the second direction. On the other hand, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be different from any of the first direction and the second direction.

  Thereby, in the first direction and the second direction, the possibility that the game ball that has reached the specific area in the state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied progresses is low, and the first direction and the second direction are different from the first area and the first direction. The configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration from the specific area to the second ball entry means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that a game ball that has progressed from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the first direction is difficult to enter, and the second ball entry means Is a game machine J5 characterized in that a game ball that has advanced from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the second direction is difficult to enter.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that gaming balls that have advanced from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the first direction are unlikely to enter the ball. Since the second ball entry means is configured such that game balls that have advanced from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the second direction are unlikely to enter the ball, the game is played in a state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied. There is an effect that a ball can be prevented from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the variable means includes a first variable member capable of moving in and out on the board, and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first position is such that the first variable member protrudes toward the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second position is the second position; The first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to protrude toward the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the third position is the first variable member and the second variable member. The two variable members are disposed so as to be buried in the board, and the first variable member can guide the game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding from the board. And the second variable member is provided on the board surface. Gaming machine J6, characterized in that to one in which a game ball which has reached the specific area by projecting constituting the flow path inducible into the second ball entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine J, 6 has the following effects in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J1 to J5. That is, the first variable member capable of appearing and retracting on the board and the second variable member different from the first variable member constitute the variable means. In the first position, the first variable member protrudes toward the near side with respect to the board surface when viewed from the front, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. In the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged to protrude forward from the board surface in front view. In the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are arranged to be buried in the board. The first variable member protrudes from the board to form a flow path that can guide the game ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entry means. When the second variable member protrudes from the board surface, a flow path is formed that can guide the game ball reaching the specific area to the second ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball entry means that can enter the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

  In the gaming machine J6, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface, and the first ball entry means is The game ball arrived from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and the game ball arrived from the other direction is difficult to enter the ball, (2) The ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. A gaming machine J7, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J6. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view. The first ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction toward the second ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit in a state where the variable unit is arranged at the third position.

  In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable means changing the third position from the third position based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine J8, comprising: a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed to a first position or the second position a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J6 or J7. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position by a predetermined number of times based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determination means, and thus has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine J8, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game. A type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a game and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times; The gaming machine J9, wherein the first privilege is configured as a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine J9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J8. That is, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game, One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a second variable game that is changed to a second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege includes a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  Thereby, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the second variable game is executed. Therefore, the game is performed by paying attention to the type of the variable game determined by the type determining means. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed a first number of times from the third position to the first position, and in the second variable game, the variable means The gaming machine J10, wherein the number of times is changed from the third position to the second position by a second number smaller than the first number.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position by the first number of times, while in the second variable game, the variable means is changed. Since the means is changed from the third position to the second position by the second number of times smaller than the first number of times, when the first variable game is executed, the first privilege more advantageous than the second privilege is given. In addition, the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position increases. Therefore, there is an effect that the superiority of the first variable game can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in a front view left and right direction on a board, and the variable The means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the first position is such that the variable means is the first ball entry means. The second position is a position where the variable means is close to the second ball entry means, and the third position is a position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine J11, which is located between the game machines.

  According to the gaming machine J11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines J1 to J5. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface. The variable means is configured to be able to change between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means in the left-right direction in front view. When the variable means is located at the first position, the variable means approaches the first ball entry means, while when the variable means is located at the second position, the variable means approaches the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the third position, the variable means is arranged between the first position and the second position.

  Thus, since the position can be switched by a relatively simple operation of moving the variable means to the left and right, there is an effect that the variable operation of the variable means can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine J11, the variable means forms a slope in which a left side surface is inclined downward from the upper right direction in front view to a lower left direction, and a right side surface is inclined in a direction downward from the upper left direction in front view to a lower right direction. The first ball entry means is such that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter, and a game ball arriving from another direction is difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means, and a game ball arriving from another direction. Is configured to be difficult to enter the ball, the first position is a game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means, the side of the second ball entry means Which can flow down from the direction so as to reach the first ball entry means. The second position is such that the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction toward the first ball entry means to the second ball entry means. A gaming machine J12, which is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine J12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J11. That is, the left side surface of the variable means forms a slope in the downward direction from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left direction, and the → side surface of the variable means forms a slope in the lower right direction from the upper left direction in front view. . The first ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction toward the second ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction toward the second ball entry means to reach the first ball entry means. It becomes possible. When the variable means is disposed at the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction toward the first ball input means to reach the second ball input means. It becomes possible.

  This allows the game ball to enter both the first ball entry device and the second ball entry device simply by causing the game ball to flow down along the inclination of the side surface of the variable device. Can be further simplified.

  In the gaming machine J12, the third position is a distance equal to or greater than the width of one game ball between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means, and the right end of the variable means, A gaming machine J13, wherein a distance equal to or greater than the width of one game ball is provided between the game machine J13 and the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J12, when the variable means is disposed at the third position, the width of one game ball is provided between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means. Since the above distance is vacant and the distance equal to or more than the width of one game ball is provided between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entry means, in the state where the variable means is arranged at the third position. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

<Characteristic K group> (variable in the launch direction until the game ball reaching the specific area enters the attacker)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a game ball fired in the first direction by the launching means; and launching in the second direction A specific area provided at a position where the entered game ball can reach, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, and a game to the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the ball, a first position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position is different from the first position and the ball entry means A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the ball can enter the ball, a third position at which the ball cannot be easily entered into the ball entry means, and based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied, A variable means for varying a predetermined period from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period; The variable means is varied by any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least a variable operation and a second variable operation in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position for the predetermined period. And a variable control means for performing control in such a manner that, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball which is fired in the first direction and reaches the variable means is the second ball. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that a period of time required to enter the ball entry means is shorter than that of a game ball which is fired in two directions and reaches the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means and a game ball fired in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, and a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. . A first position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position different from the first position and at which the ball can enter the ball entry means, and it becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means At least the variable means is configured to be variable at the third position. A first variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and a variable means is changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period. The variable control means controls the variable means to change in any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least the second variable operation. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, a game ball which is fired in the first direction and reaches the variable means enters a ball more than a game ball which is fired in the second direction and reaches the variable means. It is configured such that the period until entering the means is easily shortened.

  Thereby, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a game method for firing a game ball in the first direction to a player who wants to enter the game ball in the ball entry means in a short period of time is provided. While it is possible to select the game method, it is possible to make a player who does not want to immediately enter the game ball into the ball entry means to select a game method of firing the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, during the predetermined period, it is difficult for the game ball fired in the second direction to reach the variable means varying to the first position and enter the ball entering means. A gaming machine K2 characterized by a period of a certain length.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the variable means, which has been changed to the first position, and enters the ball entry means for a predetermined period. If the variable means is changed to the first position, unless the ball is fired in the first direction, the game ball is transferred to the ball entry means because the variable length is changed to the first position. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to predict the timing of changing to the first position and to realize the playability of firing the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, a game ball fired in the second direction and reaching the variable means is fired in the first direction and The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is easier to be shorter than the game ball that has reached the variable means, and the game ball fired in the second direction is at the first position during the predetermined period. The gaming machine K3, wherein the length of time is such that it is difficult to reach the variable means that is variable and to enter the ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K2. That is, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball fired in the second direction and reached the variable means is more than the game ball fired in the first direction and reached the variable means. The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is easily shortened. The predetermined period is configured to be a period in which it becomes difficult for the game ball fired in the second direction to reach the variable means that has been changed to the first position and to enter the ball entry means. .

  As a result, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to quickly determine the firing direction in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determining condition in any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, and the variable control means performing a determination based on a specific determination result obtained by the determining means; And a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit. , The variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means is executed by the variable game execution means, so that the game can be performed by paying attention to the result of the judgment by the judgment means. .

  In the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one of the variable games, a first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A state is set, and when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game, the first game state is set as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A game machine K5 further comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game ends. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the execution of the variable game is stopped. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after completion, attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means. Game during execution of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the variable game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during execution of the variable game is a first variable game. And the variable means is provided with a variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game controlled by the second variable operation at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game. The first variable game is determined at a first rate by the variable game type determining means, while the second variable game whose variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is higher than the first rate by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined by the ratio of 2, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction to enter the ball entry means when the variable game is executed. . In other words, it is possible to provide a game property that predicts a firing direction in which the variable game type determination unit determines the type in which the type is determined as a clue. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine K6, a variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and variable ball-in means And a second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable game execution means, wherein the variable game execution means sets the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game. The variable state is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and the variable pitching means is changed to the first state during the predetermined period in the second state. A gaming machine K7 wherein the variable control means controls the variable means to perform a variable operation in one variable operation or the second variable operation.

  According to the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K6. That is, the variable ball-in means is configured to be variable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is provided by the second privilege providing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball-in means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times in accordance with the type of the variable game. At the same time, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means such that the variable means performs the variable operation in the first variable operation or the second variable operation in a predetermined period of the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state Therefore, even if it is not possible to enter the game ball into the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, an opportunity is provided to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress discouragement of a player who has not been able to enter the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine K7, the first variable game has a larger number of times that the variable ball-in means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game than the second variable game. A gaming machine K8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, when the first variable game is set, the variable ball-in means changes from the second state to the first state during one variable game rather than the second variable game. Since the number of times the game is played increases, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of becoming the first variable game.

<Characteristic L group> (During the V round, an effect of estimating the direction in which the V prize is likely to be won and firing a game ball)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a game ball fired in the first direction by the launching means; and launching in the second direction A specific area provided at a position where the hit game ball can reach, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, and a variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern. And a game ball that is fired in the second direction and reaches the specific area based on a predetermined first condition being satisfied as a variable pattern set for the variable means. A first variable pattern is determined such that a game ball that has been fired in the first direction and has reached the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a second condition that is different from the first condition. Based on the conclusion, the first A second variable pattern is determined in which game balls that are fired in the second direction and reach the specific area are easier to enter the ball entry means than game balls that have been fired to the specific area. A variable pattern determination unit, and a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first condition or the second condition. A gaming machine L1 comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means and a game ball fired in the second direction can reach. Ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached the specific area can enter. The variable means is configured to be variably operable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition, the variable pattern determination means sets the first ball in the second direction to be more than the game ball that has reached the specific area. While the first variable pattern in which the game ball fired in the direction and reaches the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means is determined, the second condition different from the first condition is established. The second variable pattern in which the game balls fired in the second direction and reach the specific area are easier to enter the ball entry means than the game balls fired in the first direction and reach the specific area is variable. It is determined by the pattern determining means. Based on the first condition or the second condition being satisfied, the specific effect of the effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  This makes it difficult to determine whether the variable means is changed in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern from the presentation mode. It is possible to realize a game property of firing a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern is such that a game ball fired in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied can enter the ball entry means, and A game ball fired in the second direction during a specific period becomes difficult to enter the ball-entering means, and the second variable pattern includes a game ball of the specific period after the second condition is satisfied. It is difficult for game balls fired in the first direction to enter the ball entry means, and game balls fired in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means. The gaming machine L2, wherein the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at least during the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, when the first variable pattern is set, a game ball fired in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied becomes a holiday of entering the ball entry means, and a specific period of the specific period. During this time, a game ball fired in the second direction becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, the game ball fired in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied becomes difficult to enter the ball-entering unit, and the game ball during the specific period is The game balls fired in two directions can enter the ball entry means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the specific period.

  As a result, it is possible to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to be easily entered, and to realize the gaming property of firing the game ball during the specific period in the predicted direction, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine L3, comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or 2, the variable pattern determining unit determines the specific pattern based on the determination by the determining unit that is performed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Since the variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means in the determined variable pattern is executed by the variable game execution means, each time the judgment by the judgment means is executed, the game is expected to have a specific judgment result. Has the effect that it can be performed.

  In the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one of the variable games, a first game advantageous to the player is set as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A state is set, and when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game, the first game state is set as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A game machine L4 further comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game ends. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the execution of the variable game is stopped. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the completion, the game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game. A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not to play. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the variable game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game is a first variable game. And a variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. While one variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first ratio, the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is higher than the first ratio by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined by the second ratio, when the variable game is executed, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction to enter the ball entry means. it can. That is, it is possible to provide a game property that predicts a launch direction in which the variable game type determination means determines the type of the game, which is easy to enter the ball entry means, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine L5, a variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-in means And a second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable game execution means, wherein the variable game execution means sets the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game. A variable operation for changing from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and a variable operation in which the variable means is changed by the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means. And a game machine L6 for executing an operation.

  According to the gaming machine L6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L5. That is, the variable ball-in means is configured to be variable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is provided by the second privilege providing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball-in means. A variable operation for changing the variable ball-in means from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game during the execution of the variable game, and a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means Is performed by the variable game execution means.

  Thereby, even if it is not possible to enter the game ball into the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discouragement of a player who could not enter the ball.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit. And information indicating which one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect has been avoided by the avoidance means. A game machine L7, comprising: a notification effect executing means for executing an information effect.

  According to the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution unit is avoided by the avoidance unit. Based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect has been avoided by the avoiding means, a notification effect for notifying information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the notification effect executing means.

  With this, it is possible to specify the firing direction that makes it easier to enter the ball entry means by executing the notification effect, so that it is possible to play the game in expectation of the notification effect being executed. effective.

<Feature M group> (Attackers that are easy to win vary depending on the movable position from the start to the end of the movement of the attacker)
A first ball entry means into which game balls can enter, a second ball entry means, a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means, and a game at the first ball entry means A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, and a predetermined means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Variable control means for performing control so as to be variable during a period, wherein the second ball entry means is configured to change the variable position means in accordance with a variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine M1 wherein the ease of entering a game ball that has reached the variable means is variable.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the variable means is variable between a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means and a second position at which game balls cannot enter the first ball entry means. It is configured to be possible. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The ease with which the game ball reaching the variable means enters the second ball entry means varies according to the variable position during which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

  Thereby, depending on the variable position of the variable means, it is variable whether it is easy to enter the first ball entry means or to easily enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, pay attention to the variable position of the variable means. To play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1, the second ball entry means is a game that reaches the variable means in a state in which the variable means varies a specific range from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that a ball can enter.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the game ball reaching the variable means in a state in which the variable means varies the specific range from the second position to the first position. Becomes possible to enter the second ball entry means, so that the game can be played by devising the game ball to reach the variable means while the variable means is changing the specific range. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured to be a range that does not include at least the first position. When the variable position of the variable means is out of the specific range, the second ball entry means sets the variable means A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the game ball that has reached (1) becomes difficult to enter.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured to include at least the first position, and when the variable position of the variable unit is outside the specific range, the variable unit Is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, so that the timing at which game balls are fired can be further devised.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the variable means A first inclined member that is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and forms a slope that allows a game ball to flow down in a direction in which the first ball entry means is provided; A second inclined member that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball entry means is provided, and wherein the first position is The game ball that has reached the variable means is a position where it is easy for the game ball to flow down the first inclined member, and the game ball that has reached the variable means is difficult to flow down the second inclined member. It is difficult to flow down the first inclined member and the second inclined member. Gaming machine M4, which is a position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. A first inclined member that is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and forms a slope that allows a game ball to flow down in a direction in which the first ball entry means is provided; At least the variable means is constituted by a second inclined member that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the two ball entry means are provided. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, the game ball that has reached the variable means is more likely to flow down the first inclined member, and is less likely to flow down the second inclined member, while the variable means is in the second position. When it is arranged at the position, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first inclined member and the second inclined member.

  This allows the game balls to flow down to the respective ball entry means by the inclination formed by the respective inclined members, so that complicated control or the like for guiding the game balls to the respective ball entry means is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be able to move in and out of the board, and the first position is the first inclined member and the near side of the first inclined member in front view. And the second inclined member provided at the second position is arranged so as to protrude toward the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the second position is the first inclined member and the second inclined member. A game machine M5 characterized in that both are arranged buried in the board.

  According to the gaming machine M5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M4. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to move up and down on the board. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, both the first inclined member and the second inclined member provided on the near side of the front side with respect to the first inclined member with respect to the board surface are on the near side of the front side with respect to the board surface. It becomes a protruding arrangement.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to change the ball entry means that can enter the ball by simple control of causing the variable means to move in and out.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means may be a first variable pattern in which the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position is likely to increase. A variable pattern determining unit that determines one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position is more likely to be smaller than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine M6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position is large as a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means. The variable pattern determination means selects one variable from among a plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern that is easy to be changed and a second variable pattern that is more likely to be changed from the second position to the first position more frequently than the first variable pattern. Since the pattern is determined, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

  In the gaming machine M6, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the specific condition being determined during one execution period based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine M7, comprising: a variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is established the number of times.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M6, based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means that is performed based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, during one execution period, Since the variable game in which the specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means, the game can be performed every time the judgment by the judgment means is executed, expecting a specific judgment result. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M7, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the specific condition is satisfied, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, A variable game type determining unit that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining unit when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M7, the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is satisfied, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable gaming executing means. One of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which a second variable pattern is determined by a variable pattern determination unit when a specific condition is satisfied is determined by a variable game type determination unit. Is determined, the number of times that the second ball entry means becomes easy to enter the ball varies according to the type of the variable game, so that there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine M8, the first variable game is such that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one of the variable games is more likely to be satisfied than in the second variable game.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, in the first variable game, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one variable game is easily reduced as compared with the second variable game. In such a case, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being discouraged by the small number of times the specific condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic N group> (During an electric support, an open pattern that is difficult to win a power chute is more likely to obtain more award balls than an open pattern that easily wins a power chew.)
Entering means into which a game ball can enter, privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means, and a game ball into the entering means A variable position that can be changed to a first position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry device than the first position, and a predetermined first condition that is satisfied. A variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a predetermined variable pattern; a first variable pattern as the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means; And a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that facilitates a game ball to enter the ball entry means. Said variable means in a pattern While being controlled, the second condition that is advantageous for player, the gaming machine is characterized in that the easily obtained than while it is being controlled by said second variable pattern N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. The variable means is changed to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and to a second position at which game balls cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means changes in a predetermined variable pattern based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition. A plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern controlled by the variable control means. One variable pattern is determined from the variable patterns by the variable pattern determination means. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition that is advantageous to the player is more easily satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

  Thereby, the variable pattern expected by the player can be made different depending on whether priority is given to ease of establishment of the second condition or priority to ease of entering the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is increased from the start to the end of one variable pattern, compared to the second variable pattern. Wherein the second variable pattern is a total of a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period from the start to the end of one variable pattern, compared to the first variable pattern. The gaming machine N2 is configured to be longer.

  According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position during the period from the start to the end of one variable pattern is larger than that of the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern is longer than the first variable pattern.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it can be easily distinguished whether the pattern is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern depending on the number of times of being changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, a game ball can enter, and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. The second ball entry means provided at a position where the changed game ball is easily guided by the variable means, and the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine N3, comprising: a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2. That is, a game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable device is easily guided by the variable device while the variable device is variably operating a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. The second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, a second privilege greater than the predetermined privilege is provided by the second benefit provision means.

  By setting the first variable pattern, it is possible to obtain more opportunities to acquire the second privilege, so that the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the first variable pattern is set. Can be.

  In the gaming machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball, and the variable means variably operates the predetermined range. When it is, it is easy to reflect the flowing game ball to the specific area, the specific area, the at least the variable means in the first position, or in the state where the second position is arranged in the second position A gaming machine N4, which is an area where a game ball flowing down to a variable means is difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N3. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball. When the variable means is variably operating in a predetermined range, it is easy to reflect a flowing game ball to a specific area. The specific area is configured such that at least the game ball that has flowed down to the variable means in a state where the variable means is located at the first position or the second position is difficult to reach.

  This allows the game ball to be devised to reach the variable means while the predetermined range is being variably operated, thereby allowing the player to play the game, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, a first discriminator capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and a first discriminator determined by the first discriminator. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, and a second determination based on the establishment of at least a predetermined determination condition different from the ball entering the ball entry means. A second determination unit capable of performing a determination, wherein the variable control unit determines that the first condition is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, and the variable pattern determination is performed. A gaming machine N5 for controlling the variable means to change according to the variable pattern determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4. That is, a first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the game ball having entered the ball entry unit, and a game is determined based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit. Privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the ball entry into the ball entry unit. The first condition is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained by the second determination means, and the variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means is changed by the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means.

  As a result, the first discrimination is performed by entering the ball into the ball entry means, so that the game ball is transferred to the ball entry means while the variable means is being changed in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. There is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the ball enters.

  In the gaming machine N5, as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a first privilege game in which a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to a first gaming state; And a second bonus game in which the gaming state after the execution of the game is completed is set to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. A bonus game type determining means, wherein the first gaming state is less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N5. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first bonus game in which the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the first gaming state, and after the execution of the bonus game is completed. And a second bonus game in which the second gaming state is set to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The first gaming state is configured to be less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than the second gaming state.

  Thus, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means.

  In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times that the variable unit is changed to the first position is increased from the start to the end of one variable pattern as compared with the second variable pattern. Wherein the second variable pattern is a total of a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period from the start to the end of one variable pattern, compared to the first variable pattern. Is configured to be longer, and the first game state is the second variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means when the second determination result is the second determination result by the second determination means. The gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the determined ratio is higher than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N6. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position during the period from the start to the end of one variable pattern is larger than that of the second variable pattern. In the first game state, the determination ratio of the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means when the second determination result is the second determination result by the second determination means is higher than in the second game state.

  Thus, in the first game state, the first discrimination can be efficiently executed by the game balls entering the ball entry means relatively frequently. In addition, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first game state, the second condition is easily satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable pattern.

  In the gaming machine N7, a game ball can enter, and the game reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a ball is easily guided by the variable means, and a second ball which is larger than the predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting the privilege, and a first discrimination by the first discriminating means when the game ball fired in the first direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter. And the first direction based on the result of the second determination in the second game state and the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means. Fire a game ball in a second direction different from And a suggestion effect execution means for executing a second direction suggestion effect indicating that the game ball is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball. A gaming machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N7. That is, a game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable device is easily guided by the variable device while the variable device is variably operating a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. The second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, a second privilege greater than a predetermined privilege is provided by the second privilege provision means. At a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball, a specific ball entry means for performing a first discrimination by the first discrimination means when the game ball enters the ball is provided. In the second game state, a second determination result is obtained, and based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means, it is suggested that the game ball is fired in a second direction different from the first direction. Is performed by the suggestion effect execution means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter.

  Thereby, when the first variable pattern is determined, there is an effect that an opportunity to acquire the second privilege can be reliably given to the player.

<Feature O group> (Generates navigation in the direction of electric support when disadvantageous electric support opening pattern)
A launching means capable of firing a game ball, a ball-in means provided in a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction by the firing means can enter, and a game ball enters the ball-in means Privilege providing means for providing a predetermined privilege based on the above, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Variable means that can be changed to a second position, variable control means that controls the variable means to change in a predetermined variable pattern based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and variable control means thereof A plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern controlled by the variable means. One of the variable patterns A variable pattern determining unit for determining a variable pattern, and a suggestion effect indicating launching of a game ball in the specific direction can be executed while at least the variable unit is controlled by the first variable pattern by the variable control unit. Gaming machine O1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine O1, a ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction by a launch means capable of firing a game ball can enter the ball. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The variable means is configured to be variable to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which game balls cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. I have. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means varies in a predetermined variable pattern based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable combination pattern in which game balls enter the ball-entering means more easily than the first variable pattern, as the variable patterns controlled by the variable control means. One variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means from the variable patterns. While at least the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern by the variable control means, a suggestion effect indicating launching of a game ball in a specific direction is executed by the effect execution means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can be given the maximum opportunity to enter the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine O1, second ball entry means provided at a position where game balls fired in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter, and game balls enter the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege based on the ball, a first gaming state in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a first gaming state Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the second game state in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the effect execution means is configured such that the second game state is The gaming machine O2, wherein the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means in a set state.

  According to the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter the ball. The second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which the specific condition is easily established and a second gaming state in which the specific condition is more difficult to be established than the first gaming state. One game state is set by the game state setting means. The suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the fact that the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means in a state where the second game state is set.

  Thereby, since the firing direction of the game ball can be made different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of distinguishing the firing direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine O2, a discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means or the second ball-in means, and a discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming machine O3 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O2, a specific determination result is obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit that is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit. Since the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the fact that the above has been established, it is possible to expect that a specific determination result is expected each time the determination is performed by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine O3, the gaming state setting means sets one gaming state by establishing that the predetermined condition is satisfied when an end condition of execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means is satisfied. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O3, the fact that the condition for ending the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is satisfied is determined as a predetermined setting condition, and the game state setting means sets the one gaming state. Is set, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the game state set after the end of the privilege game.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes a predetermined variable range during the change from the second position to the first position, the variable means may be more than the predetermined privilege. A gaming machine O5 characterized by forming a state in which three benefits are easily provided.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes the predetermined variable range during the change from the second position to the first position, the predetermined Since a state in which the third points more than the special privilege are easily given is formed, it is possible to play the game by devising the game ball to reach the variable means while changing the predetermined variable range. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O5, a position where a game ball can enter and where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is changing the predetermined movable range. And a third privilege granting means for granting the third privilege based on a game ball having entered the third ball entering means. Gaming machine O6.

  According to the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O5. That is, the third variable means capable of entering the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means varies the predetermined movable range. . The third privilege is given by the third privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball, and the variable means varies the predetermined movable range. In this case, it is easy to reflect the flowing game ball to the specific area, and the specific area is in a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. A game machine O7, wherein the game ball O7 is an area where the game balls flowing down to the variable means are difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine O7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O6. That is, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball. When the predetermined movable range is variably operated, the flowing game balls are easily reflected to the specific area by the variable means. The specific area is a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position and the game ball flowing down to the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The game ball that has flowed down becomes difficult to reach.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the path of the game ball, and thus has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
111 Payout control device (first privilege granting means, second privilege granting means)
650La Left specific winning opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Ra right specific winning opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Lb, 650Rb movable member (variable means, first variable member, second variable member)
S1021 Variable control means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, there is a need for further enhancement of interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which a game ball fired by the launching means can reach, and a game reaching the specific area The first privilege is provided at a position where a ball can enter the ball, the second ball entry means, and a first privilege is provided based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. A first privilege granting means for providing, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, A game ball that has reached the area can enter the first ball entry means, and a first position where it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and it becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry means, A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the second ball entering means can enter the ball; Variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position based on establishment of a first condition and changing the variable means to the second position based on establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. The variable means is constituted by one variable member, and a game ball that has reached the specific area in a predetermined game state is one of the first ball input means and the second ball input means. a ball entrance that is controllably configured to be difficult.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which the game ball fired by the launching means can reach, and a game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball. 1st entry means provided in a suitable position, 2nd entry means, and 1st privilege grant which grants the 1st privilege based on the game ball having entered the 1st entry means Means, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and a game reaching the specific area. A first position at which a ball can enter the first ball entry means, and which is difficult to enter the second ball entry means; and A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means; Based on the establishment of the matter is varied to the first position, and a variable control means for variably to the second position based on the establishment of the different second condition and the first condition, said varying means The game ball that has reached the specific area in a predetermined game state is difficult to enter the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. so as to that it is capable of controlling.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three-symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third-symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the continuous transformation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of successful transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in case of successful transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when transformation failed in the continuous transformation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a transition effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows a temporal change of the effect mode of the development effect. FIG. (A), (b) is a figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production mode when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect was set is performed in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of a second random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the transformation effect selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the regulation content of the development effect mode selection table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a transformation setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart showing the process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effective period performed. It is a flowchart which shows the process in a success notification mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in a failure notification mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the transition effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation effect related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production mode in the case of the continuous display in which the maximum number of transformations was set to four in the second embodiment. It is. (A) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment. is there. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the transformation effect selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the sound lamp control in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the development effect form selection table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) shows the regulation of the period selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed production update processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 2 during an effective period performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed processing during a display period performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a transformation possibility determination table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a development effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an audio lamp according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the transformation possibility judgment table set in the ROM of the control device, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 14D is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of the non-pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio ramp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a process 4 during an effective period executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed transformation setting processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the search effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. (A) In the fifth embodiment, an effect when a variable display in which a continuous make-up effect is set is executed in a state where a player determined to have a low participation frequency in the continuous make-up effect is playing a game. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of an aspect, (b) is a state in which the player determined to have high participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect in the fifth embodiment is playing a game, It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production mode when the fluctuation | variation display which set the continuous transformation effect was performed. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the number of valid periods set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a table. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production update processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process performed in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process 5 during the valid period executed by the MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process in the notification mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 5 during the transition effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing tendency update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production | presentation mode of the transition production | presentation in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a case where the left specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment is in a state where a ball can enter, and (b) is a right specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment. It is the front perspective view which showed the case where it was in the ball possible state. (A) is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Rb in the sixth embodiment is arranged at the protruding position. (C) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is located at the protruding position. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st hit type selection table set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is main control in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the moving member in the modification of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the moving member in the modification of the sixth embodiment, and (c) is the sixth embodiment. It is a side view of the moving member in the modification of form, (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a flowing direction of a game ball in a state where a moving member and a left specific winning opening are close to each other in a modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a view showing a flowing direction of a game ball in a state where a moving member and a right specific winning opening are close to each other. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a winning combination prize device of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning exchange prize device on the XCIV-XCIV line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the right V release pattern is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player makes a left hit, and (b) and (c) show It is a figure showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the right V release pattern is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player makes a right hit. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection effect performed in the 1st round of the big hit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern of right V is set in 7th Embodiment, (b) is 7th Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a temporal change of a movable position of each movable member when an open pattern is set. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to a seventh embodiment. (B) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the specified content of (a), (c) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit related command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a closing command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sure change winning command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a movable member in the eighth embodiment. It is a side view when seen from the front view left side. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state where the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at an intermediate position, and (b) is a state where the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at a protruding position. It is the front perspective view which showed the state. (A) is a figure which shows a temporal change of the movable position when the movable member in 8th Embodiment is moved by the movable pattern A, (b) is a figure in which the movable member in 8th Embodiment is a movable pattern B FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a change with time in a movable position when the movable position is moved in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed the structure of the rotation member in the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed the falling path of the right-hitting game ball in the ninth embodiment for each movable position of the electric accessory. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. (B) is a second hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of (a), (c) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the electric accessory operation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the detour combination thing in a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the big hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state where the opening and closing door of the right variable winning apparatus in the eleventh embodiment is closed, and (b) is an opening and closing state of the opening and closing door of the right variable winning apparatus in the eleventh embodiment. It is the front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being performed. (A) is a sectional view showing a state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a sectional view of the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state which was completely closed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a temporal change in the state of the right specific winning opening when an open pattern allowing V winning is set in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is an eleventh embodiment. In the embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing a temporal change of the state of the right specific winning opening when an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult is set. It is a figure showing in more detail the state of an opening and closing door during one opening period in the case where an opening pattern in which a V prize was possible was set in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of a jackpot in which an open pattern in which a V winning is possible is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a probability change prize winning device in a modification of a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the state of the movable member in the big hit game in each modification of 7th Embodiment, and each flow-path distribution valve. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages of a “sand beach stage” and a “deep sea stage”. ing. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “sand beach stage” → “the deep sea stage” ”→“ Sandy stage ”→ ・ ・ ・ repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, a “sand beach stage” is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At a lower part of the lower plate 50 in a front view, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (second symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the ordinary entrance 67. Symbol). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to these jackpot types (Game value) is given to the player.

  Also, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display a special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has been hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It will be in an easy state. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). When the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed) as an added value after the jackpot. This high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next special symbol jackpot. On the other hand, after the “big hit B” is completed, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times as an added value.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (while the special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time reduction state", it is referred to as "normal symbol normal state", which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is a normal state (a state where the hit probability is lower than during the time reduction period).

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common, and after the end of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot, it becomes the “high probability state of the special symbol” Or "normal design time saving". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Further, as a normal symbol time-saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is increased, or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per normal symbol is increased. Is also good.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (spot jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and displays three symbol columns of, for example, left, middle, and right by controlling display contents by a display control device 114 described later. Is done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is constituted by ten types of special symbols imitating numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the game is over.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the activated line in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the main symbol composed of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to a “probable variation symbol”. When the “big hit A”, which is a 16R probability change big hit, occurs, the same combination of the probability change symbols may be stopped and displayed. A main symbol composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to a "normal symbol". When the "big hit B" which is the 16R normal big hit occurs, the same combination of the normal symbols is always stopped and displayed. In addition, even in a part of the case where "big hit A" is reached, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Thereby, even when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be expected that the big hit A has occurred.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and the The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character is combined with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol.

  A small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view. The small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the case where the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4 is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action in the main display area Dm, or a display effect such as an effect of urging the user to press the frame button 22. If you are. During the execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more intuitive effect. Further, during the execution of the display effect, by displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 simply, it is easy for the player to continue the variable display of the third symbol. Can understand.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol formed of a black circle is displayed. As described above, if a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The same number of suspended symbols displayed as the number of suspended balls displayed on the sub-display area Ds is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four, a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in accordance with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is displayed by a number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a continuous transformation effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a reach state occurs during the fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, the reach state indicates a state in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the main symbol having the same number, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed so that the player can recognize that there is a possibility that three identical symbols will be aligned, so that the player's expectation of the jackpot is improved. Can be.

  The continuous transformation effect is an effect that is performed after the reach state occurs to further improve the player's expectation of the jackpot, and the details of which will be described later, but the boys displayed in the main display area Dm. The character 811 (see FIG. 5A) transforms 0 to n times (n is a natural number of 1 or more) (the mode is changed) according to the passage of time or the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 by the player. ) Production. In this continuous transformation effect, basically, the larger the number of transformations of the character 811 is, the higher the expectation of the big hit becomes, and the character 811 may transform five times at the maximum.

  Note that the maximum number of transformations in one continuous make-up effect (the effect type of the continuous make-up effect) is determined before starting the continuous make-up effect. More specifically, one of five times is determined by a lottery using a transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. This continuous transformation production is completed when the transformation of the predetermined maximum number of times succeeds or the production time set for each production type of the continuous transformation production is reached before reaching the maximum number of times. You. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is determined by lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b. In other words, the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the type of the continuous transformation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The maximum number of transformations can be determined before starting the continuous transformation effect. I just need. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of continuous transformation effects may be set according to the number of changes after the end of the previous jackpot. In the case where the upper limit number is increased as the number of fluctuations increases, the player can feel a merit of continuing to deviate from the special symbol lottery. Even if a state in which the player keeps coming off (so-called addiction) occurs, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for the game. In addition, in the case where the upper limit number is increased as the number of times of change is smaller, when a jackpot is won at a short interval (a so-called extended state), a merit can be felt besides obtaining a prize ball. Can make the player more entertaining. Furthermore, if the upper limit number is increased in a specific range (for example, the range of the change number is 100 to 200), the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific range can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where a transformation development mode indicating that the continuous transformation effect is started (developing into a continuous transformation effect) is displayed. is there. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a boy character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and a horizontally long rectangular display area is provided above the character 811. HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, characters "continuous transformation chance" and characters "expected degree UP as the number of transformations increases" are displayed. The “continuous transformation chance” is a production name indicating a continuous transformation production. These characters displayed in the display region HR1 allow the player to easily understand that the continuous transformation chance (continuous transformation effect) is started. This transformation development mode is displayed for one second, and after one second, a continuous transformation effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 for simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol is formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm. Is done. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display is continued. The simplified display of the third symbol continues during the continuous transformation effect and the subsequent extended effect time.

  In the continuous make-up effect set after the display time of the make-up development mode has elapsed, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, a horizontally long display area HR2 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed on the left side of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and the frame button 22 is formed inside the display area HR2. The displayed image (PUSH button PB) is displayed. Below the push button PB inside the display area HR2, a hatched scroll bar SB whose length becomes shorter as time passes is displayed. The scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period for validating the operation on the frame button 22. In the present embodiment, since the operation valid period is set to 5 seconds, the length of the scroll bar SB becomes 0 over 5 seconds after the operation valid period starts. By displaying the scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the operation validity period.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the end of the operation validity period is displayed (suggested) by the length of the scroll bar SB. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as a number as it is, and the countdown may be performed as time elapses, so that the remaining valid operation period may be recognized by the player. Further, for example, the coloring of the PUSH button PB imitating the frame button 22 may be changed according to the remaining operation validity period, so that the remaining time is suggested to the player. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. When the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in yellow. When the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. The color may be displayed in orange, and when the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the push button PB may be displayed in red. Further, the remaining time until the operation validity period ends does not necessarily need to be indicated to the player. By omitting the suggestion display of the remaining time of the operation validity period, the display control can be simplified, so that the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the display area HR2, a balloon-type display area HR3 to which the character "Push is transformed!" By displaying the display contents of the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, the player is made aware that there is a possibility that the character 811 is transformed (the form of the character 811 is changed) by pressing the frame button 22. Can be.

  Further, a display area HR4 of a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape is formed on the lower right side of the display area HR3 to indicate the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in the present continuous transformation effect. In the display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the character "Transform × 0" is displayed. This character is updated according to the number of times the transformation has been successful. Specifically, when the character 811 succeeds in the transformation once, the character is updated to the character “transform × 1”, and when the character 811 succeeds twice, the character is updated to the character “transform × 2”. Similarly, when the number of transformations is three, the character is updated to “Transform × 3”. When the number of transformations is four, the character is updated to the character “Transform × 4”. When the number of times becomes five, the character is updated to the character “transform × 5 times”. By confirming the characters displayed in the display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of times of the transformation in this continuous transformation effect.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation validity period and the character 811 successfully transforms. is there. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, the display area HR2 is changed to an appearance as if the PUSH button PB has been pressed, and the operation valid period ends. . In addition, the aspect of the character 811 is changed to, for example, an aspect imitating an adventurer having a sword and a shield. Also, in the display area HR4, 1 is added to the character indicating the number of times of transformation and updated. FIG. 6A illustrates a case where the image is updated to “transform × 1”. The mode of notifying the success of the transformation (success notification mode) continues for one second, and after the success notification mode ends, the operation validity period is set again. Thereafter, the operation validity period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of transformations reaches the upper limit or the effect period elapses.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a case where the player has not pressed the frame button 22 within the set validity period and has successfully transformed. As shown in FIG. 6B, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the maximum number of times of transformation has not been reached, and the production time remains for a predetermined period or more (the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time). If it is determined that the period is equal to or longer than the lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed when the operation valid period has elapsed. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined lower limit time is defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b in association with the effect type (maximum number of transformations) of the continuous transformation effect.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period or when the frame button 22 is not pressed until the operation valid period has elapsed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time has not been reached. If the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, when all the transformations are executed after the elapse of the operation validity period, the effect period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production period is set to be the same. In other words, the operation validity period is set such that the total of the operation validity period for the upper limit number of times (and the production period of the success notification mode for the upper limit number of times) is longer than the production period of the continuous transformation effect.

  With such a configuration, if the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses by pressing the frame button 22 in each operation effective period set in one continuous transformation effect, the effect type It becomes impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each. Further, the shorter the period from when the operation valid period starts to when the frame button 22 is pressed, the earlier the start timing of the operation valid period that is set thereafter can be advanced. , Within the range of the upper limit. Therefore, a player who wants to perform the maximum number of transformations (performs as many transformations as possible) can positively press the frame button 22 during each operation validity period. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the success notification mode is changed to a mode different from that of the adventurer. The example of FIG. 7A illustrates a case where the character 811 has transformed into a form imitating a gunman when the number of transformations is the third. In the first embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared according to the number of transformations, such as a mode imitating a gunman and a mode imitating the adventurer described above.

  In the first embodiment, the mode when the transformation is successful is fixed according to the number of times of transformation, but is not limited to this. For example, each time the success notification mode is performed, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like. This makes it possible to diversify the variations of the continuous make-up effect, thereby improving the interest of the player in the continuous make-up effect. In addition, when the mode of the success notification mode is determined by lottery or the like, the mode that can be determined only in the case of the variable display that becomes a special symbol jackpot or the case that the variable display that becomes the special symbol big hit becomes easy to be determined It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a mode, a mode that is easily determined in the case of a variable display that deviates from a special symbol, or the like is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game during a continuous transformation effect, focusing not only on the number of transformations but also on the display mode of the character 811 when the transformation is successful.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a mode (failure notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has failed is displayed in the continuous transformation effect. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the transformation fails, the push button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed in a state of being split into two, and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. In addition, a display area HR5 in which a character "END ..." is displayed is displayed on the upper right side of the character 811. With these displays, it is possible to recognize that the continuous transformation effect has been completed (the number of transformations has been determined).

  In the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the process proceeds to an advanced effect for notifying whether or not a big hit has occurred. A plurality of types of advanced effects are provided, and one type of advanced effect is selected and executed according to the remaining fluctuation time and whether or not the current special symbol lottery is performed. Details of this development effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b).

  First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a display mode of a transition effect indicating transition from a continuous transformation effect to an advanced effect. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, an image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 glares is displayed in the main display area Dm, and “ The display area HR6 with the letters “VS” is displayed. In addition, in the display area HR1, a character "Defeat the enemy!" Is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the character 811 defeats the enemy (that is, the monster 812) and becomes a big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, the display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. In this display area, one or a plurality of stars indicating the degree of expectation of the development effect executed after the end of the transition effect is displayed. FIG. 8A illustrates a case where two star marks are displayed. The number of the stars is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect. Although illustration is omitted, the mode of the monster 812 is also changed in conjunction with the number of stars (that is, in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect). That is, the larger the number of stars, the weaker the appearance of the monster 812 (ie, the appearance that the character 811 is likely to win), and the smaller the number of stars, the stronger the appearance of the monster 812 ( That is, the character 811 is displayed in such a manner that the character 811 is likely to win. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the result of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) is linked to the subsequent advanced effect. Therefore, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the number of times of transformation (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) in the continuous transformation effect indicates the degree of expectation of winning.

  In the transition effect and the failure notification mode (see FIG. 7B), the length of the display period is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is because, while the production period of each advanced production is fixed (any of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds), the last stage after the continuous transformation production starts This is because the period required until the operation validity period ends varies depending on the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining fluctuation time is determined at the timing when the operation valid period ends (that is, the start timing of the failure notification mode), and the development effect of the longest production period executable with the remaining fluctuation time is selected. I do. Then, a failure notification mode and a transition effect are executed using a period of a difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect period of the selected advanced effect. As a result, variations in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, and thus the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start of the development effect and the production time of the development effect. This can be suppressed. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop despite the end of the development effect, or conversely, the effect period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation where the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, a display effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided. It should be noted that no matter how many seconds the transition effect is set for, during the period in which the transition effect is set, the mode shown in FIG. 8A is used so that the switching to the development effect is not unnatural. However, the configuration is such that no major change occurs. That is, the image illustrated in FIG. 8A is displayed as a still image, or the character 811 and the character 812 only change in a manner of periodically raising and lowering their shoulders in accordance with their own breathing and the like (FIG. 8A). Take no special action). Thereby, regardless of the execution period of the transition effect, the display mode at the time of switching to the development effect can be made equal, so that when switching from the transition effect to the development effect, it makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8 (b), a description will be given of a temporal change of the production mode of the extended production. Here, in the first embodiment, twelve types of hit development effects A to F and off-limit development effects A to F are provided as development effects. The winning and losing development effect A is a display effect with a rendering period of 30 seconds, and the winning and losing development effect B is a display effect with a rendering period of 33 seconds. Similarly, the hit and miss development effects C to F are configured as display effects of the effect periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the last operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, the development effect of the longest effect period not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first embodiment, data of a display effect (base effect) as a base for executing the extended effect is prepared. The base display effect (base effect) has a display period of 45 seconds, and the corresponding effect is executed by executing the effect from the beginning of the base display effect (base effect) or from the middle thereof. It is configured to be able to execute the development of the period. That is, the development effect is configured such that data of the development effect of each display period is generated by using data of one base effect, instead of preparing a separate effect for each effect period. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce data for executing the advanced effect, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the display mode is such that the character 811 is zoom-displayed for the first three seconds of the base effect. Then, in the next three seconds, an effect in which the character 811 attacks the monster 812 is executed. Next, a display mode in which the monster 812 as the enemy is zoom-displayed is displayed for 3 seconds, and thereafter, a display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for 3 seconds. Thereafter, a display mode in which the face of the character 811 and the face of the monster 812 are zoom-displayed is displayed for 3 seconds, and then the character 811 and the monster 812 violently attack and fight each other, and the battle is won or lost. An effect that informs (result) is displayed for 30 seconds. As described above, the base effect is roughly divided into five display modes for three seconds and one display mode for 30 seconds. By starting the display effect from the break position of any of these display modes, the advanced effect can be displayed without a sense of incongruity.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), when executing the hit and miss development effect A, by displaying a display mode for 30 seconds after the elapse of 15 seconds in the base effect, A development effect in which the effect period is 30 seconds is executed. Similarly, when the hit and miss development effect B is executed, a display mode for 33 seconds after the elapse of 12 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect C is executed, the base mode is displayed. The display mode for 36 seconds after the lapse of 9 seconds in the effect is displayed. In addition, when the hit and miss development effect D is executed, a display mode for 39 seconds after the lapse of 6 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect E is executed, the base effect is displayed. The display mode for 42 seconds after 3 seconds has elapsed is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of executing the hit-and-miss advanced effect F, the advanced effect for 45 seconds is executed by displaying the base effect from the beginning to the end.

  In addition, a plurality of display effects are prepared for the base effect, in addition to the above-described mode of battle with the monster 812. Which of the display effects is to be used to execute the extended effect is determined by lottery. In addition, in each of the original display effects, a mode for the big hit and a mode for the release are prepared.

  In the first embodiment, the base effect is configured to be divertable even after the execution of the continuous transformation effect. That is, after the reach state occurs, the base effect is executed directly or via another notice effect, without going through the continuous transformation effect, so that it is possible to inform whether or not a jackpot will be achieved. . Thereby, the versatility of the base effect can be enhanced, and the data required for executing the effect can be reduced. Also, in the case where the base effect is executed without going through the continuous transformation effect, the effect can be executed from the beginning of the base effect or from the middle thereof in accordance with the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed. This makes it possible to execute an effect using the base effect even for a variable display with different variable times.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a base effect for displaying an advanced effect is prepared, and a portion where the effect is well-divided is set in the base effect by the number of advanced effects. Each break point is set so that the remaining production time matches the production time of each development production. Thereby, it is possible to provide a natural-looking display effect over the effect time of each development effect. In addition, by configuring a development effect in which a plurality of production times are different from each other from a single original production mode, it is possible to compare with a case where separate production data is prepared for each type of development effect (production time). Thus, the data required for displaying each development effect can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of development effects having different effect times can be executed based on the base effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display effect in which the display mode is completely different may be performed in accordance with the effect time of the extended effect. With such a configuration, the development effects can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, a temporal change of the display mode when the continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect will be specifically described. 9 (a) and 9 (b), an example will be described in which a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is three is set. First, FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a time change of the effect mode when the player does not press the frame button 22 at all during the execution of the continuous change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of the variable effect (super reach) in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds. In the fluctuation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (see FIG. 4B). Then, at the point of time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach state occurs and the transformation development mode (see FIG. 5 (a)) suggesting to the player that the transformation to the continuous transformation effect is performed is performed for one second. Is displayed.

  After the display period of the transformation development effect has elapsed, an operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation is set. If the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation validity period continues for 5 seconds (until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change). Then, when the operation validity period has elapsed, the first success notification mode is displayed. This success notification mode continues for one second, and when one second elapses (17 seconds from the start of the change), the success notification mode ends, and the operation validity period corresponding to the second transformation is set. You. This second operation validity period also continues for 5 seconds (from 17 seconds to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation) unless the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, after the success notification mode for one second is set, the third operation validity period is set. The third operation validity period also continues for 5 seconds (from 23 seconds to 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) unless the frame button 22 is operated. Then, at the timing of 28 seconds (the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds) after the start of the fluctuation when the operation effective period ends, the remaining fluctuation time is small (the remaining fluctuation time is less than 38 seconds set as the lower limit value). ), And a failure notification mode for one second is set even if the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. That is, despite the fact that the upper limit number of transformations is set to three, the continuous transformation effect ends when the number of transformations is two.

  Note that conditions for determining whether or not a sufficient production time remains for setting the success notification mode are defined by a transformation production selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. Specifically, according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (that is, according to the effect type of the continuous transformation effect), the lower limit (threshold) of the remaining fluctuation time in which the success notification mode can be set is defined. I have. If the operation validity period ends with the remaining fluctuation time exceeding the lower limit, the success notification mode is set on condition that the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. On the other hand, if the operation valid period is ended after the remaining fluctuation time becomes less than the lower limit value, the failure notification mode is set regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9B, a continuous transformation effect in which the upper limit number of transformations is three is set, and the time elapse of the rendering mode when the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation validity period. The change will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the operation validity period corresponding to the first transformation, when a press on the frame button 22 of the player is detected at the time when one second elapses (12 seconds after the start of the change), The operation validity period is terminated, and the first success notification mode is displayed. When one second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses, an operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set (13 seconds after the start of the change). If the press on the frame button 22 is detected again at the time when one second elapses (14 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) in the second operation validity period, the operation validity period is similarly terminated and the second operation validity period is terminated. Is displayed. Then, when one second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses (15 seconds from the start of the change), the third operation validity period is set. If a press on the frame button 22 is detected when two seconds have elapsed since the start of the third operation validity period (17 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the remaining fluctuation time is sufficient (43 seconds). Since it remains, a third success notification mode is displayed. Thereafter, when the display period of the third success notification mode has elapsed, the fourth operation validity period is set. If the press on the frame button 22 is detected again at the time when 2 seconds have elapsed (at the time of 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation) in the fourth operation validity period, the upper limit of the number of times of the continuous makeover effect has already been obtained. Since the execution has been completed, a failure notification mode is set.

  The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition effect after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect. As described above, as the type of the development effect, the type of the effect time that is the longest within the range that does not exceed the remaining fluctuation time is selected. When the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, a maximum of 38 seconds can be used for the development effect, taking into account the failure notification mode and 2 seconds, which is the shortest display period of the transition effect. However, as described above, as the production time of the development effect, only six patterns of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds are prepared. Therefore, a development effect (development effect C) for 36 seconds, in which the effect period is shorter than 38 seconds, is set as the current development effect. Then, a difference of 4 seconds between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect period of the extended effect C of 36 seconds is set as the failure notification mode and the transition effect display period. Specifically, 4 seconds are equally divided, and 2 seconds are respectively set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect.

  As described above, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect is absorbed by the display period of the failure notification mode and the effect period of the transition effect. Even if the number is small, the timing of the fluctuation stop and the end timing of the development effect can be surely matched. As a result, variations in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, and thus the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start of the development effect and the production time of the development effect. This can be suppressed. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop despite the end of the development effect, or conversely, the effect period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation where the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, a display effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the failure notification mode is started in a state where the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, 2 seconds are set as the failure notification mode and the transition effect display time. . Then, after the end of the transition effect, the extended effect C in which the effect time is 36 seconds is executed. Thus, the timing at which the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped (the timing at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) and the end timing of the development effect can be exactly matched.

  As described above, when the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be shortened, and more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit of the number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can actively press the frame button 22, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are made variable so that the gap between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the advanced effect can be absorbed. , But is not limited to this. For example, the effect period of the failure notification mode may be fixed, and only the display time of the transition effect may be changed, or conversely, only the effect period of the failure notification mode may be changed. Further, the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect may be fixed, and a part of the effect period of the advanced effect (for example, the period during which the third symbol is fixedly displayed) may be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by displaying, by a lighting state, whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, is being executed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a variation in which a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a second symbol are alternately turned on. Display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 causes the electric accessory 64 a attached to the first entrance 64 to move for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state where a ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that can pass through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four, but may be three or less, or five or more ( For example, 8 times may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. However, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11B) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the big hit is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, when the special symbol is in a probable change state, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9”, and “0 to 9” is determined. 9 ", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value to be a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". Is 1/40 (10/400). When the special symbol is in the low-probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200". If the value is "200", it is determined that the winning is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 from "0 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is only one of "200". The probability of a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are calculated. Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is “0 to 49”, the big hit type is “big hit A” (FIG. 11). (See 202b1 in (b)). When the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11C). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 30) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) that stores a random value that determines one symbol fluctuation time from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the main controller 110 as described above. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12C). ) And an out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D).

  First, with reference to FIG. 12B, a description will be given of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is off, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, out of reach is reached. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of range when the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and out of super reach in the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed the left or right normal entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of a normal symbol being hit than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this manner, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the winning probability is changed between a low probability of the ordinary symbol and a high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 11C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (FIG. 11C )) 202c1). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random number values of the jackpot is 24 out of the total number of the random number of 240, and therefore the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204” (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 13, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 29). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e and at least a time reduction counter 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved display number for notifying the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d sets the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

  If the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the left and right ordinary entrances 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 27: No).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probable change flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. This indicates that the symbol is in the probable change state, and when the value of the probable change flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the special symbol low probability state). The probability change flag 203e is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the special symbol lottery, it is turned off when setting the start of the big hit (see S213 in FIG. 23).

  When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the probable change flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the first random number table for high probability, while the state of the probable change flag 203e is set. Is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to zero, and the main controller 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol, and every time the jackpot B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 31). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability change flag 203e is turned on. If it is, it is determined that the symbol is usually during the working hours. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the during-time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and based on the second random number table for low probability, A normal symbol lottery is performed (see S510 in FIG. 26).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 controls these various commands and controls through the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and displays an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. First, FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation effect selection table 222b, and an advanced effect mode selection table 222c.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used for specifying a detailed display mode of the fluctuation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. Can be More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation) is selected from the variation patterns defined in variation pattern table 222a. The detailed display mode of the effect) is extracted (identified) (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Among the fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, at least a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a super reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is determined whether or not to execute the continuous transformation effect (see FIGS. 5 to 7). The information shown is also included.

  The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when a variation pattern accompanied by a continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a, to determine an effect mode of the continuous transformation effect. Details of the transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the make-up effect selection table 222b defines the effect form of the continuous make-up effect for each type of fluctuation pattern (whether or not) and for the value of the effect counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. I have. As shown in FIG. 15A, five types of continuous transformation effects A to E are set in the production mode of the continuous transformation effect.

  The continuous transformation effect A is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is one, and the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is not set. For this reason, when the continuous transformation effect A is executed, regardless of whether the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the failure notification mode is displayed after the success notification mode is displayed once. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15A, the continuous transformation effect A may be selected only in the case of the hit super reach and when the value of the effect counter 223n is “0”. . That is, if the maximum number of transformations is one, it is determined that the continuous transformation effect A will be a big hit in the set variable display. As described above, in the continuous make-up effect, basically, as the number of times of change (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) increases, the expectation of the jackpot increases, but in the case of the continuous make-up effect A (when the maximum number of times is one) Only exceptionally, the jackpot is determined. Thereby, a surprising effect can be provided.

  The continuous transformation effect B is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is two, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “1 to 19”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-reach super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “0 to 44”. Since the effect counter 223n is a loop counter that is updated in the range of “0 to 99”, the continuous make-up effect B is a ratio of 19% (19/100) of the super-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. On the other hand, it is determined at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of the off-reach super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. For this reason, in the out-of-reach super reach, the ratio of determining the continuous transformation effect B is higher (the expectation of the jackpot is lower).

  In the continuous transformation effect B, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect starts when the remaining fluctuation time is 49 seconds (11 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the second operation validity period ends is set within 8 seconds (49 seconds to 41 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops once. That is, if the first and second operation validity periods are not interrupted in the middle by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation can be performed in the middle of the second operation effective period is set. It will be below. Thereby, if the operation validity period is not terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation effect A is set and the number of transformations becomes one, or the continuous transformation effect B is set. It becomes impossible for the player to determine whether the number of transformations has been reduced to one. As described above, the continuous make-up effect A is an effect in which the jackpot is determined, while the continuous make-up effect B is an effect in which the jackpot is less expected. Therefore, it is possible to accurately know the degree of expectation of the jackpot by distinguishing between the continuous make-up effect A and the continuous make-up effect B. During the operation valid period, the frame button is actively given to the player. 22 can be pressed.

  The continuous transformation effect C is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is three, and in the hit super reach, the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “20 to 44”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 89". Therefore, the continuous make-up effect C is determined at a rate of 25% (25/100) in the case of the super-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined, while the continuous make-up effect is 45 in the case of the out-of-range super reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. % (45/100). For this reason, in the off-reach super reach, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect C is determined is higher (the expectation of the jackpot is lower). Further, since the ratio determined in the case of the hit super-reach is higher than that of the continuous make-up effect B, the degree of expectation that the continuous make-up effect C is a big hit is higher than that of the continuous make-up effect B.

  In the continuous transformation effect C, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the third operation validity period ends is set within 11 seconds (49 seconds to 38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops twice. This is because the second operation validity period ends when 11 seconds have elapsed after the operation validity period has expired without pressing the frame button 22 (the first operation validity period 5 seconds + 1). (1 second success notification mode + 5 second operation valid period). Thereby, if the operation validity period is not terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation effect C or the continuous transformation effect D, E having a higher jackpot expectation than the continuous transformation effect C described later. It is impossible for the player to recognize whether there is. Therefore, the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current fluctuation display from the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) can positively press the frame button 22.

  The continuous transformation effect D is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is 4 times, and in the hit super reach, the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “45 to 79”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “90 to 98”. Therefore, the continuous make-up effect D is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100) in the case of the super-reach in the case where the continuous make-up effect is determined, and 9 in the case of the off-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. % (9/100). For this reason, the winning super reach has a higher rate of determining the continuous transformation effect D (the expectation of the jackpot is higher). In addition, as compared with the continuous transformation effects B and C, the ratio determined in the case of the hit super reach is higher and the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-range super reach is lower. The degree of expectation to be a big hit is higher than that of C.

  In the continuous transformation effect D, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effect C. Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the third operation validity period ends is set within 11 seconds (49 seconds to 38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops twice. Further, even if the period until the third operation validity period ends is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation validity period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode Is stopped three times. Accordingly, unless the operation effective period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to recognize which of the continuous transformation effects C to E. Therefore, the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current fluctuation display from the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) can positively press the frame button 22.

  The continuous transformation effect E is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of the transformation (success notification mode) is 5 times, and in the hit super reach, the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “80 to 99”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach super reach, the selection is made only when the value of the effect counter 223n is “99”. Therefore, the continuous make-up effect E is determined at a rate of 20% (20/100) in the case of the super-reach in the case where the continuous make-up effect is determined, and is 1 in the case of the off-reach in which the continuous make-up effect is determined. % (1/100). For this reason, the winning super reach has a higher rate of determining the continuous transformation effect E (the expectation of the jackpot is higher). In addition, since the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-range super reach is extremely low as compared with the continuous make-up effects B to D, the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes higher as compared with the continuous make-up effects B to D.

  This continuous transformation effect E is a type in which the transformation can be executed the most number of times among the effect types of the continuous transformation effect. In the continuous transformation effect E, when five transformations are successful, the failure notification mode is not displayed thereafter, and a direct transition effect is performed after the display period of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed (FIG. 8). (See (a)) is started.

  In the continuous transformation effect E, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time in which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effects C and D. Therefore, unless the period from the time when the first operation validity period of the continuous transformation effect is set to the time when the third operation validity period ends is set within 11 seconds (49 seconds to 38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The display count stops twice. Further, even if the period until the third operation validity period ends is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation validity period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode Is stopped three times. Further, even if the end timing of the fourth operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the end timing of the fifth operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times of displaying the success notification mode is 4 It stops running. Accordingly, unless the operation effective period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to recognize which of the continuous transformation effects C to E. Therefore, the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current fluctuation display from the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) can positively press the frame button 22.

  As described above, the continuous transformation effect of the present embodiment is provided with five effect types. Each effect type is configured with a different upper limit number of transformations, and is configured to be able to suggest the jackpot expectation by the number of times the character 811 has transformed (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode). Further, regarding the continuous transformation effects B to E, the upper limit number of transformations cannot be displayed unless the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period to terminate the operation valid period. It is configured. As a result, the player who wants to know the expectation of the continuous transformation effect accurately can be made to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation validity period, so that the player is willing to participate in the game. Can be improved.

  When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. Therefore, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Returning to FIG. 14A, the description will be continued. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table in which the effect mode of the development effect is defined. The development effect mode selection table 222c is referred to when the last operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect ends, and is used to determine the mode of the development effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. Details of the development effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the development effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, the remaining fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time T) and the type of the current fluctuation display (whether super-reach or hit super-reach are displayed) For each of the above, the type of development effect to be selected is defined.

  Specifically, at the end of the last operation validity period, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 32 seconds ≦ T <35 seconds, the development effect of the effect time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, if the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, the staging development effect A with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected, and if the super-reach is off, the staging development effect A with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected.

  Also, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 35 seconds ≦ T <38 seconds, and if the current fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect B having a staging time of 33 seconds is selected. If so, the development effect B is selected with the effect time out of 33 seconds. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 38 seconds ≦ T <41 seconds, and the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect C of 36 seconds is selected. , And the development time C is out of 36 seconds.

  Similarly, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 41 seconds ≦ T <44 seconds, and the current fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect D having a staging time of 39 seconds is selected. If so, the development effect D with the effect time out of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 44 seconds ≦ T <47 seconds, and if the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect E with a staging time of 42 seconds is selected. , The production time E is out of 42 seconds, and the development effect E is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 47 seconds ≦ T <48 seconds and the fluctuation display of this time is a hit super-reach, a staging development effect F of 45 seconds is selected. , And the development effect F is selected in which the production time is out of 45 seconds.

  As described above, in order to prevent the end timing of the variable display from being shifted from the end timing of the advanced effect, the remaining fluctuation time T and the effect time of the advanced effect selected from the advanced effect mode selection table 222c. The display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are made variable in accordance with the difference between the display time and the transition effect. Thereby, regardless of the length of the remaining fluctuation time T, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the fluctuation display. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity for the player.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, A period flag 223e, a valid period timer 223f, a transformation counter 223g, a transformation effect flag 223h, a success notification mode timer 223i, a failure notification mode timer 223j, a transition effect time timer 223k, and an advanced effect storage area 223m. And at least an effect counter 223n.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a start winning, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S4908 in FIG. 41). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S5002 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S4002 in FIG. 33). Sent to control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type is set based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

  The validity period flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect. If the validity period flag 223e is on, it means that the operation is valid. If it is off, it means that the operation is not valid. The validity period flag 223e is set to ON when it is determined that it is time to start the continuous transformation effect (see S4403 in FIG. 37A). Also, if the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and it is determined that the number of times of display of the success notification mode (the number of transformations) is less than 5, it is set to ON (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, and when 5 seconds set as the operation valid period elapses without detecting the press of the frame button 22, it is set to OFF. (See S4201 in FIG. 35). While the valid period flag 223e is on, pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the valid period flag 223e is on, a transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed.

  The valid period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. When the start condition of the valid period is satisfied (when the timing of starting the continuous transformation effect or the end timing of the success notification mode is reached), the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds for the valid period timer 223f (5000) ) Is set (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of the validity period timer 223f is 1 or more, during the validity period process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 (FIG. 37 (b) )), The value is subtracted (updated) by one. Based on the value of the validity period timer 223f, it is determined whether the operation validity period has elapsed. If it is determined that the operation validity period has elapsed, a transformation setting for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is performed. The process (see FIG. 35) is executed.

  The transformation number counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times that the success notification mode (see FIGS. 6 and 7A) is displayed (the character 811 has succeeded in transformation) in one continuous transformation effect. The counter value of the transformation number counter 223g is incremented (updated) by one each time the display of the success notification mode is determined. In the continuous transformation effect in the first embodiment, the transformation is performed depending on whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g has reached an upper limit value (see FIG. 15A) determined for each rendering type of the continuous transformation effect. It is determined whether or not the upper limit number of times has been reached (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, the success notification mode for the upper limit of the number of transformations is displayed, and when the operation validity period ends thereafter, the failure notification is performed regardless of whether the remaining fluctuation time has reached the lower limit value at the end point. The mode is displayed. This makes it possible to make a difference in the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations in each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and it is possible to suggest a degree of expectation that the maximum (upper limit) transformation number is a big hit.

  The makeover effect flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not a continuous makeup effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that a continuous makeup effect is being executed. Means not inside. Here, the execution of the continuous transformation effect means a period from the end of the transformation development mode (start of the first operation valid period) to the end of the transition effect (start of the development effect). The makeover effect flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of change, which is the start time of the makeover effect, in the change display in which the execution of the continuous makeover effect is determined ( (See S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, this transformation effect flag 223h is set to off when it is determined that the display period of the transition effect has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

  The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for measuring the display time of the success notification mode. When the display condition of the success notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set to the success notification mode timer 223i. Note that, as described above, the condition for displaying the success notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number defined for each type of the continuous transformation effect, and at the end of the operation validity period. The remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the lower limit time defined for each type of the continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode has come, the timer value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the success notification mode timer 223i (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is decremented (updated) by one in the success notification mode middle process executed every millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38). .

  The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for measuring the display time of the failure notification mode. When the display condition of the failure notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set to the failure notification mode timer 223j. The condition for displaying the failure notification mode is, as described above, whether the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is equal to or more than the upper limit number defined for each type of continuous transformation effect, or the end of the operation validity period. That is, the remaining fluctuation time at the time point is less than the lower limit time set for each type of the continuous transformation effect. The failure notification mode timer 223j determines that the display timing of the failure notification mode has come, and when the production mode of the advanced effect is selected, the display time corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the advanced effect is determined. The corresponding timer value is set (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update processing of the main processing (see S4012 of FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by one in the failure notification mode middle processing executed every millisecond (see S4701 of FIG. 39). .

  The transition effect time timer 223k is a timer for measuring the display time of the transition effect. When the transition effect display condition is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the transition effect display period is set in the transition effect time timer 223k. The transition effect is started when the display time of the failure notification mode has elapsed or when the display time of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed in the continuous transformation effect E. At the start of the transition effect, the transition effect time timer 223k is set with a timer value corresponding to a difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect (S4610 in FIG. 38, FIG. 39, S4704). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by one (see S4801 in FIG. 40) in the transition effect process executed every millisecond.

  The development effect storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of the development effect. In the development effect storage area 223m, based on the end of the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect, the development effect is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) according to the remaining fluctuation time. Is selected, the data corresponding to the effect mode is stored. At the start of the transition effect, the mode of the transition effect (production time) is determined from the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m, and the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the transition time of the transition effect is displayed. Set as time. At the end of the transition effect, the type of the development effect to be started is specified based on the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m.

  The data corresponding to the type of the development effect is composed of, for example, 4-bit data. For example, the 1st to 3rd bits are used as an area for storing data indicating the fluctuation time, and the 4th bit is used as an area for storing the data indicating the pass / fail. . More specifically, if the first to third bits are “001B”, the rendering time is 30 seconds, and if “010B”, the rendering time is 33 seconds. If there is, the development time is 36 seconds. In the case of “100B”, the production time indicates a development effect of 39 seconds, in the case of “101B”, the production time indicates a development effect of 42 seconds, and in the case of “111B”, the production time is 36 seconds. Show the development effect. If the most significant bit (fourth bit) is 1 (high), it means a development effect corresponding to the hit, and if the most significant bit (fourth bit) is 0 (low), it is out of order. It means that it is a development effect corresponding to. Therefore, for example, if the data “1010B” is stored in the development effect storage area 223m, the current development effect is a development effect that is a hit in a 33 second effect time (ie, a hit development effect B). Means

  The effect counter 223n is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223n is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and is incremented and updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. . The effect counter 223n has a separate counter for each effect type.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of a control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, based on the erroneous data, Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR flash memory 234d) and is stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, smaller than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a). 2 kilobytes). In the NOR flash memory 234d, of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of a boot program to be executed first is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated to the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. The ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 sets the address from the NOR flash memory 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. From the program, the instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are replaced by the NOR flash memory. The data is stored in the memory 234d for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred from the NOR flash memory. By storing the character ROM 234 in the memory 234d, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The set boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control except for the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The program and the fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table to be described later) used in the control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d without storing all the boot programs, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) transmitted from the MPU 231 and described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 18B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage”, and FIG. 18B shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 18, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “sandy beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 changes the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the sandy beach stage that is frequently displayed is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position is shifted from the position a including the initial position to the position a'. Since the image data corresponding to the image during the period b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the frame button by the player can be used. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of No. 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed in the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. The display can be displayed on the device 81. It is possible to display et al. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers "0" to "9" as the third symbol are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, a stop symbol indicating each big hit is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special game state and informs the player of the game value (usually a short period of time of the symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol held. Is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time-saving period of this ordinary symbol is, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the ordinary entrance 67, the more chances are for the ordinary symbol to be drawn, and the greater the chance of hitting the ordinary symbol. . Therefore, the chance of opening the electric accessory 64a as a normal symbol jackpot increases, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, so that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory 64a is normally opened as a jackpot of a symbol, and the first ball is opened. When the ball easily enters the entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain the expectation that a special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the player. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol, which is a sub-symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set as the variation effect display data table for the variation effect, one table is prepared for each variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Further, a display data table corresponding to each game menu screen is also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table for a fluctuation effect (variation display data table) among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table corresponds to an address in which the time (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time is specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any one of the back A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back A and B as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 19) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 20 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 43). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 55 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 55A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 21) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 45 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 52) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 21), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 21, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. (Character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite are described in the order of various comments.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first is placed on the rearmost side (backmost drawing hierarchy), and the sprite drawn last is placed on the frontmost side (frontmost drawing hierarchy). It can be arranged in. When the comment display function is ON, the image arranged at the forefront side (the foreground drawing hierarchy) is a character image constituting a comment. By arranging the comment on the foreground side (the foreground drawing hierarchy), the comment can be more clearly recognized by the player.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 of FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 56). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, it is performed (see S7802 of FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first symbol variation process is performed. A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start win) in the entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is reset to off, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the jackpot. (S214). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S212, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating a stop of the change of the special symbol is set (S217), and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state).

  When the probability change flag 203e is ON (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the process of S301 and the value for the high probability time Based on the per-random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state), and thus the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "200", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the two types of special symbol big hits (big hit A , Jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R certain variable big hit) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B) and “50”. If it is in the range of “−99”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit B (16R time saving big hit) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) as described above. When the processing in S307 ends, the process moves to S310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) to obtain the normal reach, The fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as super reach is determined. When the processing in S309 ends, the processing moves to S310.

  In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). Is done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a starting win. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entry (winning) to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered (wins) the first entrance opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is suspended in the special symbol N) is obtained. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol retaining ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball count command in the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Are stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

  When the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and the process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / no-go, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: S504). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the normal symbol time saving state (S508). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability change flag 203e is ON, it is determined that the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is in effect, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, If the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in a normal state of a normal symbol (not a time saving state).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the time is in the state of saving the time of the ordinary symbol (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second random number table for the high probability time are stored. On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second collision for the low probability time are calculated. Based on the random number table, a lottery result on whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol hit (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S511: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S511 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

  In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514). If the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S514 that the normal state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this processing is performed. To end. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. The symbol lottery frequency increases. Therefore, the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, so that the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S515 or the processing of S516 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the process of S517, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S517 that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol (S520), and it is determined that the current symbol is in the time reduction state (S520: Yes), “1 second × 2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64, and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64. Is set to “0.2 times × 1 time”, and the process proceeds to S523.

  In the processing of S523, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set to start for the time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 (S523), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 end. On the other hand, in the processing of S519, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S519: No), the processing of S520 to S523 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball counter 203d even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 Is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is executed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) and the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). Then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot effect or the variable is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. The stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening port 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1004 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls are opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1007, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1009, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011). If it is determined (S1011: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the big hit A (S1012).

  In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the big hit is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B) (S1012: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time reduction counter 203f, so that 100 times of the normal symbol after the big hit is completed. It is set so that the time reduction period is given (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that the current big hit is the big hit A (S1012: Yes), the certain change flag 203e is turned on so that the special change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

  In the process of S1013 or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol after the jackpot is completed (whether the special symbol is in the probable state or the special symbol is in the low probability state) is sounded. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and the present process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4018 (see FIG. 33). ) Is determined (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4018. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4017 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  In the processing of S3902, if the power-off processing flag is off (S3902: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It is started after the execution of the power-off process in S4018 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the flow shifts to S3908.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the flow shifts to S3904. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4018 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the flow shifts to S3908.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4018, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and the process shifts to S3904 to start initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the process of S3904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3906). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4018 (see S4017 in FIG. 33). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4018 is executed, the process of S3908 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4018 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S3909), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3908 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the processes of S3908 to S3906 are performed via the processes of S3904 to S3906. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), the process skips S3909, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S3910, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S3911), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S3909 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S3904 to the process of S3908 via the process of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3904. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the current process of S4001 (S4001). If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4013 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4012. In the processing of S4001, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S4002 to S4012 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4013 and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4014 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4014 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4003 to S4014 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4008 to be described later (S4003), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4004). . The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4005 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4005, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4007). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing, an input for monitoring whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, an effect corresponding to the input is set. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation period of the continuous transformation effect, this is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4008), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S4009, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4010), and then a menu setting processing is executed (S4011). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the menu setting process, a process corresponding to the operation content of the player when the game menu screen is displayed is executed.

  After the process of S4011, during the execution of the variable display, the effect update process for changing the effect mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the value of various timers, and the like is executed (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. . The effect update processing (S4012) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4013, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination processing ends, a variable display setting processing is executed (S4014). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S4014 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4017), and the power-off processing is executed (S4018). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S4019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4016: No), the process returns to S4001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4016: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing. The frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, as described above.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34), first, it is determined whether or not the validity period flag 223e is on (S4101). If it is off (S4101: No), it is not the operation validity period. Therefore, this processing is ended as it is. This is because if it is not the operation valid period, even if the press of the frame button 22 is detected, there is no possibility that the failure notification mode or the success notification mode is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4101: Yes), it means that the current operation is valid, and then the press of the frame button 22 is detected. It is determined whether it has been performed (S4102). In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), a transformation setting process for setting a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed (S4103), and this process is performed. To end. Details of the transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  Next, the details of the above-described transformation setting processing (S4103) will be described with reference to FIG. In this transformation setting process, first, the valid period flag 223e is set to off, and the valid period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). Thereby, the end of the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect is set.

  Upon completion of the process in S4201, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is read (S4202), and the read transformation number (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) is the upper limit number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect that is being executed this time. Is determined (S4203). In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g matches the upper limit (S4203: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time in the fluctuation display is specified (S4204), and the specified remaining fluctuation is determined. The production mode of the development effect corresponding to the time (T) is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) (S4205).

  When the processing of S4205 is completed, data corresponding to the effect form of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and the remaining fluctuation time specified in the processing of S4204 and the development selected in the processing of S4205. The display time of the current failure notification mode is calculated from the difference between the effect and the effect time (S4207). Specifically, half of the time obtained by subtracting the effect time of the development effect from the remaining fluctuation time T is specified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the display time of the specified failure notification mode is set in the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number (S4203: No), the remaining fluctuation time (T) is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed. (S4209). In the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S4210 to S4212 for setting the display of the success notification mode is executed. That is, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S4210), the success notification mode according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g is set (S4211), and the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is reduced to 1 second. The corresponding timer value is set (S4212), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining fluctuation time T is less than the lower limit specified in the transformation effect selection table 222b) (S4209: No) Then, the processing of S4204 to S4208 described above for setting the display of the failure notification mode is executed, and this processing ends.

  By performing the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within a range that does not fall below the lower limit remaining fluctuation time set for each effect type, the success notification mode is limited to the upper limit number of transformations. Can be displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed for less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached. This allows the player to want to display more success notification modes within a range not less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, so that the frame button 22 can be positively pressed. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

  Next, details of the above-described effect update processing (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect update processing (S4012) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 33) of the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the fluctuation display, the remaining fluctuation time, values of various timers, and the like are changed. This is a process for changing the presentation mode according to the situation. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect update processing.

  In this effect update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being executed (S4301). If it is determined that the variable display is not being performed (S4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. To return to the main processing (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the variable display is being performed (S4301: Yes), then, whether the transformation effect flag 223h is on (that is, whether the continuous transformation effect is being executed) or not It is determined (S4302). In the process of S4302, when it is determined that the transformation effect flag 223h is off (S4302: No), a transformation effect start for determining whether or not to start a continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. A determination process is performed (S4303), and this process ends. The details of the transformation effect start determination processing (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the process of S4302, when it is determined that the makeover effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the continuous makeup effect is being executed, so first, whether the validity period flag 223e is on or not is determined. Is determined (S4304), and if it is on (S4304: Yes), a process is performed during the validity period to determine whether the operation validity period has ended (S4305), and this process ends. Details of the processing during the valid period (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is off (that is, not during the operation valid period) (S4304: No), the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is larger than 0. (S4306), and if the value is larger than 0 (S4306: Yes), the process in the success notification mode is performed to determine whether the end timing of the success notification mode is reached. Is executed (S4307), and this processing ends. Details of the process in the success notification mode (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (that is, the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), then the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is changed to It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (if the failure notification mode is being displayed) (S4308). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4308: Yes), it is necessary to determine the end timing of the failure notification mode. The process in the failure notification mode is executed (S4309), and this process ends. Details of the processing during the failure notification mode (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4308, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (that is, the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is greater than 0. (Ie, whether or not the transition effect is being executed) (S4310). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), it is determined whether or not to switch from the transition effect to the advanced effect. (S4311), and terminates the present process. It should be noted that the details of this transition effect processing (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), the process ends and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33).

  By performing this effect update process (see FIG. 36), appropriate control can be performed in accordance with the progress of the continuous make-up effect, so that it is possible to suitably execute the effect update in the continuous make-up effect. it can.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination processing (S4303) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The transformation effect start determination process (S4303) is a process for determining whether or not to start a continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time, as described above.

  In the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (the timing at which 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change) (S4401), and If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4401: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation effect is set (S4402). Next, a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and the process ends.

  By executing the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), the continuous transformation effect is accurately executed at the same timing every time the variable display in which the execution of the continuous transformation effect is set is executed. be able to.

  Next, the details of the above-described processing during the valid period (S4305) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process during the valid period (S4305) is a process for determining whether or not the operation valid period has ended, as described above.

  In the process during the valid period (see FIG. 37B), the value of the valid period timer 223f is updated by subtracting 1 (S4501). Since the processing during the valid period (see FIG. 37B) is executed every millisecond, the value of the valid period timer 223f is decremented by one every millisecond.

  When the process of S4501 ends, it is next determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction in the process of S4501 has become 0 (S4502), and if the value of the valid period timer 223f is not 0 ( S4502: No), the process is terminated as it is not the end timing of the operation validity period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction has become 0 (S4502: Yes), the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) and the remaining fluctuation time ( According to T), the above-described transformation setting processing (S4503, see FIG. 35) for determining the display mode to be displayed is executed, and the processing ends. Since the details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described above with reference to FIG. 35, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, details of the above-described process in the success notification mode (S4307) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process in the success notification mode (S4307) is a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode, as described above.

  In the processing in the success notification mode (see FIG. 38), the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and it is determined whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction has become 0. It is determined (S4602). In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), it is not the end timing of the success notification mode (the success notification mode continues), and thus the process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), it means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed. Then, the processing of S4603 to S4611 for setting the presentation mode after the display period ends is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 5 (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the operation effective period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period, the display control device 114 executes a display mode (see FIG. 5B) corresponding to the operation valid period on the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S4604 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the validity period timer 223f, and the start of the operation validity period is set by setting the validity period flag 223e to ON (S4605). This processing ends. Thereby, a new operation validity period can be started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), the success notification mode has already been displayed five times, and it is necessary to set the operation effective period any longer. Therefore, a development effect in a mode corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time (T) and a transition effect are determined. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time (T) of the fluctuation display is specified (S4606), and the development mode of the development effect corresponding to the specified remaining fluctuation time (T) is stored in the development effect mode selection table 222c (FIG. 15). (See (b))) (S4607).

  When the processing of S4607 ends, next, data corresponding to the effect form of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4608), and the remaining fluctuation time (T) and the development selected in the processing of S4607. The difference from the effect time of the effect is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4609). Then, a timer value corresponding to the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4610), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4611), and the process ends.

  The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, details of the above-described process in the failure notification mode (S4309) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The failure notification mode middle process (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode as described above.

  In the failure notification mode middle process (see FIG. 39), first, the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S4701), and it is determined whether or not the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after the subtraction has become 0 (S4701). S4702). In the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is not 0 (S4702: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the failure notification mode, and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j has become 0 (S4702: Yes), it means that the end timing of the failure notification mode has been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time (T ) And the effect time of the developed effect in the mode indicated by the data stored in the developed effect storage area 223m, and the difference time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4703). Then, the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4705), and the process ends.

  The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the transition effect processing (S4311) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The transition effect process (S4311) is a process for determining the end timing of the transition effect, as described above.

  In the transition effect processing (see FIG. 40), first, the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is subtracted by 1 (S4801), and it is determined whether the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802). In the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is not 0 (S4802: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the transition effect, and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect timer 223k is 0 (that is, the end timing of the transition effect) (S4802: Yes), it is stored in the advanced effect storage area 223m. The start of the development effect corresponding to the existing data is set (S4803). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is turned off (S4804), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and the process ends. As described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are set so that the end timing of the advanced effect and the end timing of the variable display exactly match. Therefore, the development effect set in the process of S4803 can be ended at the end timing of the change. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the effect mode.

  Next, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4901). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( (S4903), and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4904). If the stop type command is received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4907: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4908). In the process of S4908, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S4908, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S4908 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the detection of the start winning or the special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4908 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4907, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4907: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4909). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main processing.

  In the process of S4909, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4909: No), it is next determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4911). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4912), and the process returns to the main processing. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  In the process of S4911, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4911: No), it is next determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4913). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4914). Then, a display round number command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the extracted number of rounds on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4915), and the present process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4916). If an ending command has been received (S4916: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S4917), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S4916 (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S4918). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By executing the command determination process, it is possible to execute an appropriate process according to the command output from main controller 110.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4014). This variable display setting process (S4014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S5001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S5001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S5008. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S5002), and then, in the process of S4903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), the variation pattern is determined. Based on the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command, the fluctuation display mode of the current fluctuation display is determined from the fluctuation pattern table 222a (S5003).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variation pattern type is a mode involving a continuous transformation effect (S5004). If it is determined that the type is a mode involving a continuous transformation effect (S5004: Yes), the transformation effect selection table Based on 222b (see FIG. 15A) and the value of the effect counter 223n, the mode of the continuous transformation effect is determined (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern type determined in the process of S5004 does not involve a continuous transformation effect (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5006.

  In the process of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S5003 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S5006). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the process of S5007, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S5008.

  In the process of S5008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S5008). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5008: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009), and then, in the process of S4906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5010).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5011), and the display control device is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5012), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When detecting that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, and when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first ROM of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is set. Then, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 43) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 transmits the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main address at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 55A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. A determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. If the change pattern is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45A, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 21. The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  46 to 51, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  In the process of S6502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the fluctuation display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. From As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the conventional video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured by using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S6503, and the time in the fluctuation display data table is determined. When it is determined that the variable effect is to be ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6603, and the identification is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the processing of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are both set to off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A, B), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S7002. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in the processing of S7002 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If (S6416: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), it is next determined whether there is a command related to the continuous make-up effect (S6418), and if there is a command related to the continuous make-up effect (S6418) S6418: Yes), execute the transformation effect related command processing (S6419), and return to the processing of S6401.

  The commands related to the continuous transformation effect include, for example, a display command indicating the start of the operation effective period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), and a start of the transition effect. And a display command indicating the start of an advanced effect. A display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b, like the variable display data table and the like. By executing the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419), the type of display mode instructed to start display, the display time, and the like are determined from the command related to the continuous transformation effect, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. This is set in the data table buffer 233d.

  Here, the details of the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the transformation effect-related command processing. This transformation effect-related command process executes a process corresponding to the continuous transformation effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the transformation effect command processing, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S7202). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time indicated by the command is set in the time counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), and the present processing ends, returning to the command determination processing. The continuous make-up effect is a type of effect set during the execution of the change display, and the execution of the continuous make-up effect means that a change pattern command is set (a change pattern command process (FIG. 47 ( This is executed after the execution of a)) and before the end of the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, since the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are already set to OFF in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A), these flags are set in the transformation effect related command processing (see FIG. 51). Need not be turned off again.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, when it is determined that there is no command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process proceeds to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6420 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 47B), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7301: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7302). Then, S7303, S7304 The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45B), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, a pointer update process is performed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle so that it is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table buffer is determined. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and the process is terminated and displayed. Return to the setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the rendering contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7506). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. , And End information are always rendered, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7306 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S7309: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the contents of the stopped symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stopped symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so the demonstration display data table is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S7317), and then write Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In this way, if the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so as to be displayed.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process is performed to set a display data table defining that the image (one of FIGS. 17B and 17C) is to be stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In the process of step S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process shifts to the process of S7703.

  In the processing of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45B), the command is not a simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No) in step S7802, the process skips steps S7803 and S7804 and shifts to step S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S7806 (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, and thus ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the processing in S7805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7805: No), the processing shifts to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7812), and the process moves to S7813.

  If the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7812, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S7813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), to generate a drawing list shown in FIG. 21 (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as drawing target buffer information. When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 1, information for instructing to develop an image rendered in the second frame buffer 236c is included as rendering target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  After the processing of S7902, the drawing processing updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 ms after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous transformation effect as one of the effect modes for improving the interest of the player. This continuous transformation effect is an effect in which the character 811 is transformed one to five times in the third symbol display device 81. Basically, the greater the number of transformations, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is. is there. During the execution of the continuous transformation effect, an operation validity period in which pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is valid is set a plurality of times. When the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period (5 seconds) elapses, an effect (success notification mode) in which the character 811 is successfully transformed is executed. May be More specifically, when either of the above two conditions is satisfied, the upper limit number of transformations that has been determined in advance for each production type of the continuous transformation production has not been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time has not been reached. If it is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type, the character 811 successfully transforms (success notification mode is displayed). On the other hand, if the maximum number of transformations has been reached or the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit, the effect of failure in the transformation (failure notification mode) is executed, and the continuous transformation effect ends. .

  The operation validity period varies in length according to the player's playing method. That is, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated at that time, and a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, each operation validity period, when all the success notification modes are displayed after the elapse of the operation validity period, the effect period of the continuous transformation effect is displayed before the upper limit number of success notification modes are displayed. Set to elapse. In other words, when all the transformations are executed after the elapse of the operation validity period, before the transformation (success notification mode) of the upper limit number of times is performed, the length of the rendering period is set to elapse. An effect time (a lower limit remaining fluctuation time determined for each effect type) is set. As a result, when the operation valid period is started, unless the frame button 22 is actively pressed to end the operation valid period at an early stage, it is impossible to perform the transformation to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, the player who wants to confirm the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  Further, depending on the game method of the player during the execution of the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 is positively pressed during the operation valid period), the subsequent effect mode (display timing of the success notification mode, (The number of display times) can be varied, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between the effect type having a low degree of expectation (the upper limit number of transformations is small) and the effect type having a high degree of expectation (the upper limit number of transformations is large). A transformation effect can be performed. Therefore, even if the appearance corresponds to a low degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the number of cases that lead to a jackpot. it can.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, a development effect for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is executed. In this development effect, a plurality of types having different effect times are provided. Here, the effect time of the continuous make-up effect varies depending on the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. Therefore, the timing at which the continuous make-up effect ends is not constant, and the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the continuous make-up effect ends is variable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the remaining change time is determined, and the development effect of the effect period that can be executed with the remaining change time is selected. Then, a failure notification mode and a transition effect are executed using a period of a difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect period of the selected advanced effect. As a result, variations in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, and thus the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start of the development effect and the production time of the development effect. This can be suppressed. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop despite the end of the development effect, or conversely, the effect period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation where the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, a display effect without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In the first embodiment, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated, and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. The condition for terminating (reducing) is not limited to this. For example, when a new ball entry to the first entrance 64 is detected, the operation validity period may be terminated and a success notification mode or a failure notification mode may be displayed.

  In the first embodiment, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated (shortened) to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. , But is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the operation valid period is terminated based on detection of a predetermined number of presses of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. In this case, the same number of times may be set each time as the number of presses required to terminate the operation validity period, or the number of presses may be randomly determined by lottery each time the operation validity period starts. The configuration may be determined. With this configuration, it is possible to more positively press the frame button 22 for a player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved. In addition, when determining the number of presses required to terminate the operation validity period, the operation type such as whether or not the effect type of the continuous transformation effect being executed or the upper limit number of transformations has been reached, a lottery result of a special symbol, etc. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of presses that are likely to be selected is varied according to the situation when setting the validity period. Specifically, for example, it may be configured such that the variable display that makes a big hit becomes easier to select a smaller number of times of pressing than the variable display that makes a mistake. Also, for example, a continuous transformation effect with a large number of transformation times may be configured so that a small number of times of pressing can be easily selected, or an upper limit of the transformation may be achieved when the transformation number has reached the maximum number of times. A configuration may be such that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected when the number has not been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the frame button 22 to be pressed while paying attention to the number of presses until the operation validity period ends, thereby further improving the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the continuous makeover effect. Can be done.

  In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. But it is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the operation effective period is to be terminated. Further, for example, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of frame buttons 22 are provided, and for each operation valid period, when the press is detected, the operation valid period is terminated and the notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is performed to determine whether to display the notification mode). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation valid period is not terminated even if a press is detected (or the operation valid period is terminated only with a low probability). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation effect while considering which of the frame buttons 22 can be pressed to terminate the operation validity period. Can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the operation valid period is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the operation valid period ends, unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. However, the present embodiment is limited to this configuration. Instead, a case may be provided in which the operation validity period is terminated even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. Specifically, for example, each time the operation validity period is set, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to terminate the operation in the middle of the period. Also, for example, in correspondence with the type of the continuous make-up effect, the operation valid period is not terminated in the middle unless the press of the frame button 22 is detected, and the operation valid period is not detected even if the press of the frame button 22 is not detected. May be provided with a type that is terminated on the way.

  In the first embodiment, a value in the range of 1 to 5 times can be set as the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect, but the upper limit number may be set arbitrarily. By narrowing the range of the settable maximum number of times (for example, to 1 to 3 times), it is possible to reduce the difference in the jackpot expectation for each number of transformations, so that the continuous transformation effect was completed with a small number of transformations. Also in this case, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the jackpot. Conversely, by widening the range of the settable upper limit number (for example, to 1 to 10 times), it is possible to give the player more chances to press (operate) the frame button 22. . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved. Further, in the first embodiment, in the continuous transformation effect, the transformation succeeds at least once (the success notification mode is displayed). However, in at least some of the effect types, the upper limit number of transformation times is 0. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of times is set (the transformation is never successful). In addition to the maximum number of transformations, the length of the operation validity period, the success notification mode, the failure notification mode, the display period of the transition effect, and the like may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the first embodiment, when the frame button 22 has not been operated at all (ie, there is no operation valid period that has been interrupted in the middle) in all types of continuous make-up effects, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the type is set. Before the success notification mode is displayed (the character 811 succeeds in the transformation), the operation validity period is set to the length at which the continuous transformation effect ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some types of continuous transformation effects, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed at all, the success notification mode may be displayed up to the maximum number of times corresponding to the type. With such a configuration, even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times can be provided. Therefore, a continuous transformation effect can be enjoyed even for a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 and plays a game with the pachinko machine 10.

  In the first embodiment, the number of times of displaying the success notification mode (the number of transformations) has not reached the upper limit and the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the operation valid period has the lower limit regardless of the end condition of the operation valid period. If the time is equal to or longer than the time, the transformation is successful (displaying the success notification mode), but the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed is made variable according to the end condition of the operation valid period (whether the time set as the operation valid period has elapsed or whether the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

  In the first embodiment, the operation validity period of 5 seconds is newly set when the display time of the first to fourth success notification modes in one continuous transformation effect has elapsed, but the present invention is limited to this. Not something. At the start of the continuous transformation effect, one operation valid period is set, and when the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the operation valid period is interrupted (subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is stopped). Good. If the number of times of displaying the success notification mode is less than the upper limit number, after the display time has elapsed, the suspended operation validity period is restarted (subtraction of the validity period timer 223f is restarted). Good. Further, the length of the operation validity period may be changed according to the number of times of display of the maximum success notification mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reset the value of the valid period timer 223f every time a press on the frame button 22 is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, even when a period during which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected continues for a predetermined period, the success notification mode may be displayed within a range that does not reach the upper limit number. With this configuration, the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment can be realized. Instead of suspending the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f, the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f may be continued during the display time of the success notification mode. During the display time of the success notification mode, even if a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the press may be treated as invalid. Even with such a configuration, the same operation as that of the first embodiment can be realized.

  In the first embodiment, the display time of the transition effect is changed so that the end timing of the subsequent advanced effect matches the end timing of the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition effect is fixed to 1 second, and after the end of the advanced effect (or as a part of the advanced effect), the difference between the set effect time of the advanced effect and the remaining fluctuation time is compensated for. For performing an effect for the purpose. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the time is adjusted at the end of the effect, the end time of the effect and the end timing of the variable display can be matched by simpler control of simply setting the remaining fluctuation time to the effect time. it can.

  In the first embodiment, when a press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is immediately (before the operation valid period has elapsed). Mode) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period (for example, one second). In this case, during the predetermined period (for example, one second), an effect of notifying the player of the press of the frame button 22 may be performed. By setting a predetermined period between the detection of the press on the frame button 22 and the display of the notification mode, an opportunity for the player to imagine which notification mode is displayed during the predetermined period. Can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the predetermined period (the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed until the notification mode is displayed) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be set in accordance with the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. It may be configured to be variable. As a specific example of changing the predetermined period, for example, if there is a margin of 1 second or more before the end timing of the operation valid period, set 1 second, When the press on the button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the period from when the operation valid period is set to when the notification mode is displayed to be longer than when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Further, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period, regardless of the timing of pressing the frame button 22.

  In the first embodiment, it is better to depress the frame button 22 and terminate the operation validity period than to notify the user that the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation validity period has elapsed. Although the display timing of the mode is configured to be earlier, the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of the continuous make-up effect, pressing the frame button 22 may delay the display timing of the notification mode. That is, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected, a predetermined press effect indicating that the press of the frame button 22 is detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the effect period of the press effect may be set such that the press effect ends later than the timing at which the originally set operation valid period ends. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not always displayed immediately, but rather, the display timing of the notification mode may be delayed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it is better to press 22 every time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the transition effect having a length corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed has been described. Further, as a mode of the transition effect, a predetermined still image (or a moving image in which the mode does not significantly change) is displayed until the start timing of the advanced effect, and the end timing of the transition effect (the length of the execution period). Irrespective of this, the configuration is such that it is possible to prevent the display mode from becoming unnatural when switching to the development effect.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, the transition effect is constituted by an effect mode in which the change in the mode is relatively large and an effect mode in which the mode change is small (absent). Then, the end timing of the transition effect is configured to be within a period in which the effect mode in which the mode change is relatively small is displayed. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the display mode during the execution of the transition effect can be increased. In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the transition effect, the configuration is such that only the transition effect time covers the difference time between the development effect time and the remaining fluctuation time. That is, in this modification, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to one second.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the transition effect in the present modification will be described. Note that, in the present modified example, similarly to the advanced effect in the above-described first embodiment, base effect data as a base for executing the transition effect is prepared. The base effect has a display period of 4 seconds, and is configured to execute a transition effect of a corresponding effect period by executing the effect from the beginning of the base effect or from the middle of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the data of the base effect for executing the transition effect of the present modified example includes data of roughly four types of display modes in one data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for the first second (first section) of the base effect is constituted by data corresponding to an effect in which the character 811 searches for a target (a monster 812) to fight in the advanced effect. ing. Further, the data corresponding to the time point of 1 second to 2 seconds (second section) of the base effect is constituted by data corresponding to the effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811. In other words, it is constituted by data corresponding to an effect in which the type of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 this time is unknown to the player. This effect allows the player to imagine which type of monster 812 to fight.

  Further, the data corresponding to the time point of 2 seconds to 3 seconds elapse of the base effect (third section) is constituted by data corresponding to the effect in which the type of the monster 812 fighting with the character 811 in this advanced effect is clear. ing. That is, the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed as a silhouette is deviated, and the data corresponding to the effect of displaying the mode of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 is displayed. With this effect, the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed thereafter can be suggested to the player based on the type of the monster 812.

  In this way, the effect corresponding to the beginning to the time when 1 second has elapsed (first section), the effect corresponding to the time when 1 second has elapsed to 2 seconds (second section), and the time when 2 seconds have elapsed to 3 seconds have elapsed The effect corresponding to (third section) is an effect in which the change in the display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is relatively large. That is, the character 811 moves to various places, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appears in front of the character 811, or the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed in the silhouette is canceled. Is changed to a completely different content.

  On the other hand, the data corresponding to the time point when 3 seconds to 4 seconds elapse (the fourth section) of the base effect is a static image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 of the type notified in the effect step 2 are confronted. The image (see FIG. 8A) is composed of data corresponding to the effect to be displayed. In other words, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in a mode in which the display mode does not change (relatively small) even after a lapse of time. By executing the transition effect such that the timing of switching to the advanced effect is within the range of the third section, it is possible to prevent the appearance when switching to the advanced effect from becoming unnatural. .

  As shown in FIG. 83, in this modification, three types of start timings (start positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Which of the three types of start timings is to be set as the start timing is selected according to the effect period of the transition effect. All of these start timings are set at places where the break of the production is good. Can be. Here, in the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the effect time of the advanced effect is in the range of 2 to 5 seconds. The production time (production type) of the development production is determined. In the present modification, as described above, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, so that the transition effect period is in the range of 1 second to 4 seconds. In this modified example, it is configured to determine from which start timing the base effect of the transition effect is to be started based on the effect period of the transition effect.

  More specifically, in the case where the production period of the transition production is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the data after the third start timing (the beginning of the third section) of the base production data is Is set as data for executing the transition effect. Thereby, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing at which the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the fourth section. That is, during the effect period of 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, first, an effect for one second in the third section is executed, and then the effect (still image) in the fourth section is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. . This makes it possible to set the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  In addition, when the transition production effect period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the data after the second start timing (at the beginning of the second section) of the base production data is transferred to the current transition production. Set as data to be executed. Thus, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing at which the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section, as in the case where the effect period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds. it can. In other words, during the effect period of 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the effect of one second in the second section and the effect of one second in the third section are executed, and then the fourth section until the end timing of the transition effect. Is displayed (still image). This makes it possible to set the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  Furthermore, when the transition effect period is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the data after the first start timing (the beginning of the first section) of the base production data is transferred to the current transition effect. Set as data to be executed. Thus, as in the other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing at which the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. In other words, during the effect period of 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the effect of 1 second in each of the first section to the third section is executed, and then the effect of the fourth section (still image) until the end timing of the transition effect Is displayed. This makes it possible to set the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  As described above, in the present modification, when performing a transition effect that is a connection effect between a continuous transformation effect and an advanced effect, effect data (first section) corresponding to a mode in which the display mode changes relatively significantly is performed. To the third section) and a transition effect using data of a base effect configured to include an effect data corresponding to a mode in which the display mode does not change (change is relatively small). . In addition, according to the effect time of the transition effect, the start of the transition effect is set from any one of a plurality of start timings preset for the base effect. In other words, the range of data used to execute the transition effect is selected according to the transition effect time. As described above, by making it possible to execute a transition effect with a different effect time using one base effect, display data for executing the transition effect can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Can be reduced.

  Further, in the present modification, the end timing of the transition effect is set during the display of the effect based on the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small) regardless of the transition effect stage time. , The start timing is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a natural appearance when ending the transition effect and switching to the advanced effect.

  In this modification, three start timings are set for the base effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily.

  In the present modification, the time of the transition effect is adjusted to fill the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the developed effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the remaining effect time may be adjusted in the failure notification mode and the transition effect. In this case, a base effect may be provided for the failure notification mode as well as the transition effect. Then, of the effect data of the base effect, the failure notification mode may be displayed using the effect data in a range corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation between the failure notification mode and the transition effect.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, if it is assumed that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation validity period in one continuous make-up effect, the continuous notification mode is displayed before the upper limit number of success notification modes is displayed. The configuration was such that the operation validity period was set to the length at which the transformation effect ended. In other words, when all of the transformations are executed after the elapse of the operation validity period, an effect period in which the effect period elapses before the upper limit number of alterations (success notification mode) is executed. Was set. Further, in the operation valid period, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the operation valid period is terminated, so that only when the game method in which the frame button 22 is actively pressed to terminate the operation valid period is performed. And the upper limit number of success notification modes can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period, the success notification mode is set until the period set at the start of the operation valid period elapses. Alternatively, the failure notification mode is not displayed. That is, it is impossible to shorten the period from the setting of the operation validity period to the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Further, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 in each operation valid period, and the set operation valid period becomes longer as the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is continued. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, only when the player actively presses the frame button 22, the number of transformations can reach the upper limit number set for each effect type. It is possible.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode during the execution of the continuous transformation effect of the second embodiment. FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing a change over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each operation validity period. Further, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during each operation validity period. is there.

  In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the super reach change in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the first operation validity period is set 11 seconds after the start of the change. You. In the second embodiment, since the operation valid period is not interrupted halfway, at the start of the operation valid period, a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) displayed after the operation valid period is included. Is determined in advance. That is, at the start of the operation effective period, the display start of a series of effect modes in which the effect mode during the operation effective period and the notification mode are put together is set. Hereinafter, a production mode composed of one operation valid period and one notification mode set after the valid period is referred to as a transformation production mode.

  In addition, as to which notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is set as the transformation effect mode to be displayed, the transformation effect mode is set at the start of the transformation effect mode (at the start of the operation effective period). The remaining fluctuation time at the time when the process ends (when the notification mode ends) is determined by previously determining. Specifically, first, the display period of the transformation effect mode is determined using a period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60) described later. Next, the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect, which is predicted from the determined display period, is compared with the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time specified for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. Then, when the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the time when the transformation effect mode ends is a value that is larger than the lower limit by 5 seconds or more, a success notification is displayed as a notification mode displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. It is configured to select a transformation effect mode in which the mode is displayed. On the other hand, in other cases, a failure notification mode is set. In addition, 5 seconds is the shortest time (the minimum value of the display period of the transformation effect mode) from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the display of the notification mode. That is, if it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more after the end of the notification mode, it is possible to secure a display time for displaying a new transformation effect mode with a failure notification mode at least once, so that the success notification is performed. Display the mode. On the other hand, if the margin for the lower limit value is predicted to be less than 5 seconds after the end of the makeover effect, the display period for displaying the new makeup effect cannot be secured, and the change accompanied by the failure notification condition The continuous transformation effect is ended by setting the effect mode. Thereby, the type of the transformation effect mode can be changed flexibly according to the remaining fluctuation time.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), as the first transformation effect mode, a transformation effect mode in which the display period is 5 seconds (the operation effective period is 4 seconds) is set. Thus, the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the display period of the first transformation effect mode has elapsed is 44 seconds. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, in the present continuous transformation effect (continuous transformation effect D2 in which the maximum number of transformations is four), the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 24 seconds, which is predicted. The remaining fluctuation time is a value larger than the lower limit by 5 seconds or more. Therefore, a transformation effect mode with a success notification mode is set as the first transformation effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, the first success notification mode is displayed when four seconds set as the operation validity period has elapsed. Although details will be described later, in one continuous make-up effect, the number of continuous operation valid periods in which the frame button 22 has not been pressed at all is counted by a non-pressed number counter 223r described later. According to the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r, the length of the set operation effective period (the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode) is changed (the longer the counter value, the longer the period is set). , FIG. 60 (c)). Since this time is the first operation validity period, 1 is set to the non-pressing number counter 223r.

  When the display period of the first success notification mode (the display period of the transformation effect mode) elapses (16 seconds after the start of the change), the second transformation effect mode is set. The display period of the second transformation effect mode is set to 7 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 6 seconds) corresponding to 1 which is the value of the non-pressing counter 223r. The remaining variation time at the end of the second transformation effect mode is 37 seconds, and there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the lower limit value. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58A, the success notification mode for one second is displayed after the operation validity period for six seconds has elapsed.

  At the end timing of the second transformation effect mode (23 seconds after the start of the change), the third transformation effect mode is set. As the display period of the third transformation effect mode, 9 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 8 seconds) corresponding to 2 which is the value of the non-pressing counter 223r is selected. The remaining fluctuation time at the end of the third transformation effect mode is 28 seconds, and the margin for the lower limit of 24 seconds is less than 5 seconds, so the third transformation effect mode involves a failure notification mode. Set the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), an operation validity period of 8 seconds and a failure notification mode of 1 second are displayed, and then a transition effect is executed. That is, the continuous transformation effect is completed only by performing the transformation twice without performing the transformation (display of the success notification mode) four times, which is the upper limit number of times. In the second embodiment, the effect time of the development effect is determined in advance for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. In the transition effect, a difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect is set. In the example of FIG. 58 (a), after a transition effect of an effect time of 5 seconds is set, a development effect (hit development effect D2) for 23 seconds is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the continuous make-up effect, when the player presses the frame button 22 in each operation valid period, the effect period of each of the first to fifth make-up effect modes is Each is set to the shortest 5 seconds. Thereby, the maximum number of four transformations can be included in the production period of the continuous transformation production.

  As described above, by actively pressing the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the player can set a short operation valid period, thereby displaying more success notification modes. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit of the number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can actively press the frame button 22, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. When a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the present pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the maximum number of transformation times is large). Also in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation production will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. Thereby, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, a case where the transformation period ends but the number of transformations is small despite the continuous transformation production having a large upper limit number (that is, high expectation of jackpot). Can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. First, FIG. 59A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, a period selection table 222d is newly added to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment in comparison with the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 14A). They differ in the point. Also, the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b and the development effect mode selection table 222c are partially changed.

  The period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when setting a new transformation effect mode. For each value of the non-pressing counter 223r, the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode, the length of the operation effective period, and the like are set. Is a data table that defines.

  As shown in FIG. 60C, the value “0” of the non-pressing number counter 223r is associated with “5 seconds” as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “4 seconds” as the operation valid period. Have been. For this reason, when the transformation effect mode is newly set with the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r being 0, the transformation effect mode for 5 seconds including the operation validity period of 4 seconds is selected. The non-pressing frequency counter 223r becomes 0 at the start of the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, or when the press on the frame button 22 is detected in the operation valid period immediately before. is there.

  In addition, for the value “1” of the non-pressing number counter 223r, “7 seconds” is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “6 seconds” is defined as the operation effective period. For this reason, when the transformation effect mode is newly set with the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r being 1, the transformation effect mode for 7 seconds including the operation validity period of 6 seconds is selected. Note that the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r becomes 1 in the continuous transformation effect of 1 in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the operation validity period two times before, and in the one previous operation validity period. The case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, or the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect.

  Also, for the value “2 or more” of the non-pressing number counter 223r, “9 seconds” is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “8 seconds” is defined as the operation effective period. Accordingly, in the case of one continuous make-up effect, if the operation valid period in which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected is continuous two or more times and the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r is 2 or more, the operation is performed for eight seconds. A transformation effect mode of a display period of 9 seconds including an operation effective period is set. When the transformation effect mode is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the transformation effect condition to be set ends is determined (predicted). Then, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit value set for each effect type, it is changed to set the shortest operation effective period regardless of the contents of the period selection table 222d. . As a result, it is possible to secure the production period of the development production.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is set, the operation set before the operation effective period to be set in one continuous transformation effect is set. The configuration is such that the length of the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is determined in consideration of the operation status of the frame button 22 in the effective period, and the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected in the past. , The operation validity period to be set is likely to be long. More specifically, the display period (operation effective period) is set to be longer as the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected is larger. As a result, unless the player actively presses the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation effect mode becomes longer, and the chance of displaying the success notification mode is reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to display more success notification modes can actively press the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

  In the second embodiment, when the operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-pressing counter 223r is reset to 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, 1 may be subtracted from the value of the non-pressing frequency counter 223r. With this configuration, as the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r increases, it becomes more difficult to shorten the subsequent operation valid period. Therefore, the frame button 22 is provided to the player in each operation valid period. Can be motivated to press. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is 2 or more, a transformation effect mode of the same length (9 seconds) is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the range where the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is larger than 2, the display period of the transformation effect mode may be set longer as the counter value increases.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Like the make-up effect selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the make-up effect selection table 222b shows the effect of the continuous make-up effect when a change pattern with a continuous make-up effect is selected from the change pattern table 222a. It is a data table referred to for determination.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the make-up effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment defines five effect types of continuous make-up effects A2 to E2. The continuous make-up effect A2 is an effect type corresponding to the continuous make-up effect A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of make-ups and the value of the associated effect counter 223n are the same as the continuous make-up effect A2. Are identical. Similarly, the continuous make-up effect B2 corresponds to the continuous make-up effect B in the first embodiment, the continuous make-up effect C2 corresponds to the continuous make-up effect C in the first embodiment, and the continuous make-up effect D2 is made in the first embodiment. The continuous make-up effect E2 corresponds to the continuous make-up effect D in the embodiment, and the continuous make-up effect E2 in the first embodiment corresponds to the maximum (upper limit) number of make-up times and the value of the associated effect counter 223n. And are the same.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the continuous transformation effect A2, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 39 seconds. That is, each transformation effect mode (operation effective period, notification condition) is set such that the remaining fluctuation time at the timing when the last notification mode of the continuous make-up effect A2 ends is 39 seconds or more. Similarly, in the continuous make-up effect B2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 34 seconds, in the continuous make-up effect C2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 29 seconds, and in the continuous make-up effect D2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set. Is set to 24 seconds, and in the continuous transformation effect E2, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 19 seconds. The lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time is set to a value obtained by adding one second to the effect time of the developed effect corresponding to each effect type. That is, after the end of the continuous transformation effect, a time is set in which a corresponding advanced effect can be executed after a transition effect of at least one second. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during all the operation valid periods in one continuous makeover effect, in addition to displaying the upper limit number of success notification modes, the remaining change time is displayed in the makeover effect selection table 222b. It is configured such that the continuous transformation effect ends at a timing that matches the prescribed lower limit value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 (b), details of the developed effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the development effect executed after the continuous transformation effect is completed, similarly to the development effect mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment includes a pair of the continuous transformation effect type, the special symbol lottery result, and the development effect effect mode (production time). It is one correspondence. Specifically, when the continuous transformation effect A2 is executed as the effect type, an advanced effect in which the effect time is 38 seconds is selected. That is, if the present fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, the staging development effect A2 with a staging time of 38 seconds is selected, and if it is out of super reach, a staging development effect A2 with a staging time of 38 seconds is selected.

  Similarly, when the continuous transformation effect B2 is executed as the effect type, if the effect time is 33 seconds, the extended effect B2 or the off-line extended effect B2 is selected, and if the continuous transformed effect C2 is executed, The development effect C2 for which the production time is 28 seconds or the off-line development effect C2 is selected. In addition, when the continuous transformation effect D2 is performed as the production type, the development effect D2 or the departure development effect B2 is selected when the production time is 23 seconds, and when the continuous transformation effect E2 is performed, the production is performed. The development effect E2 with a duration of 18 seconds or the off-line development effect E2 is selected. In this way, by defining the effect type of the continuous transformation effect and the effect type of the advanced effect in association with each other, it is possible to reduce the processing load when selecting the effect type of the advanced effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)) in that a timer 223p and a non-press count counter during the display period are provided. 223r, a pressed flag 223s, and a transition effect flag 223t are added. Further, the difference is that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

  During the display period, the timer 223p is a timer that measures a period from when one transformation effect mode starts to when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends. During the display period, the value of the timer 223p is updated one by one in the valid period process 2 executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

  The non-pressing number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of consecutive times of the operation valid period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in one continuous transformation effect. When the frame button 22 has not been pressed at least once during the operation validity period, 1 is added to the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r (see S4514 in FIG. 63). Based on the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r and the specified contents of the period selection table 222d, the length of the display period (and the operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is determined.

  The pressed-down flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not a press on the frame button 22 has been detected in one operation valid period. If the flag is on, it means that the press on the frame button 22 has been detected. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation validity period. The pressed-down flag 223s is set to ON when the pressing of the frame button 22 is first detected during the operation valid period in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 61). Also, at the end of the operation validity period, the value is set to off after updating the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

  The transition effect flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not a transition effect should be set when the display period of the currently executed transformation effect mode ends. If the transition effect flag 223t is on, it means that the start of the transition effect should be set at the end of the display period of the transformation effect mode, and if it is off, a new transformation effect mode is set. Means that you should. This transition effect flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined that a new make-up effect form is the last make-up effect form in the present continuous make-up effect. That is, when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode is within 5 seconds from the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time defined for each effect type, the display is turned on (see S5116 in FIG. 64). .

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. This frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and monitors pressing of the frame button 22. This is a process for performing control according to the pressed state.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), in each of steps S4101 and S4102, S4101 of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S4102 are executed.

  Further, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), It is determined whether the completion flag 223s is on (S4111). In the process of S4111, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is ON (S4111: Yes), it means that the currently detected press is not the first press in the operation valid period, and thus the process is terminated as it is. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4111, if it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223s is off (S4111: No), it means that the first pressing in the operation valid period has been detected, so that the pressed-down flag 223s is turned on first. Is set (S4112). Then, the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), a pressing effect corresponding to the pressing is set (S4114), and the process ends. Note that the press effect is an effect for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed, such as displaying an image in which an image imitating the frame button 22 has been pressed, This is an effect that generates a predetermined sound effect.

  Next, the effect update process 2 (S4022) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect update process 2 (S4022) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the effect update process (see FIG. 36). Is a process for varying the effect mode in accordance with the remaining fluctuation time, values of various timers, and the like.

  Of the effect update processing 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311, the processing of S4301 to S4304 of the effect update processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4310 and S4311 are executed.

  Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4304: Yes), during the valid period in the first embodiment. Instead of the processing (see FIG. 37B), the processing 2 during the valid period is executed (S4321), and this processing ends. The in-valid-process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation-valid period, similarly to the in-valid-period process (see FIG. 37B) in the first embodiment. Details of the in-valid-period process 2 (S4321) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62), when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0. Is determined (S4322), and when it is determined to be 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4322, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0 (S4322: Yes), the process is performed during the display period (S4323), and this process ends. The process during the display period (S4323) is a process for determining the timing at which the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, details of the above-described process 2 during the valid period (S4321) will be described. The in-valid-period process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period, as described above.

  In the valid period process 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f and the value of the timer 223p during the display period are both decremented and updated (S4511). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction has become 0 (whether or not the end timing of the operation valid period has come) (S4512), and if not, (S4512: No). The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4512 that the value of the valid period timer 223f has become 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513). In the process of S4513, if it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223s is off (S4513: No), it means that the press on the frame button 22 has not been detected during the current operation validity period. The value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is updated by adding 1 to the value (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4513, if it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223s is ON (S4513: Yes), the pressed down on the frame button 22 is detected at least once during the operation validity period. , S4514 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to off, and the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4515), followed by terminating the present process.

  By executing the process 2 during the valid period (see FIG. 63), the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r indicating the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which pressing on the frame button 22 has not been detected can be appropriately updated. . Therefore, the subsequent operation validity period can be set to an appropriate length.

  Next, the details of the above-described processing during the display period (S4323) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing during the display period (S4323).

  In the processing during the display period (see FIG. 64), first, the value of the timer 223p during the display period is subtracted by 1 (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223p during the display period after the subtraction is 0. (S5102). In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p is not 0 during the display period after the subtraction (S5102: No), the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223p has become 0 during the display period after the subtraction (S5102: Yes), it means that the timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, A process for setting either a new transformation effect mode or a transition effect is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103). If it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103: Yes), it means that the transition effect should be set. First, a development effect mode corresponding to the present effect type is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60 (b)), and the data corresponding to the read development effect mode is expanded. It is stored in the effect storage area 223m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the advanced effect selected from the advanced effect mode selection table 222c in the process of S5104 is set as the effect time of the transition effect set this time (S5105). finish. By executing the processing of S5105, the difference between the effect time of the developed effect and the remaining fluctuation time can be covered by the effect time of the transition effect, so that the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the developed effect And can be matched.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is off (S5103: No), it means that the transformation effect mode should be newly set. The display period and the operation valid period of the transformation effect mode corresponding to the value of “?” Are read from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether the read display period is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect set this time (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether or not a time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the remaining fluctuation time at the present time is equal to or greater than a lower limit predetermined for each effect type.

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the display period of the makeover effect is beyond the range of the effect period of the continuous makeover effect (S5107: No), the display period of the makeover effect is included in the effect period of the continuous makeover effect. , The shortest display period of 5 seconds is set. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the timer 223p during the display period, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set to the valid period timer 223f (S5108). Next, a transformation effect mode of the type in which the failure notification mode is displayed in the set display period is set (S5109), and both the transition effect flag 223t and the valid period flag 223e are set to ON (S5110). finish. That is, when a long operation validity period is selected and it is determined that the end timing of the make-up effect mode exceeds the effect period of the continuous make-up effect, the display is switched to the shortest display period and the continuous make-up effect is terminated. .

  In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the end timing of the makeover effect is within the range of the effect period of the continuous makeover effect (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read out in the process of S5106 is displayed. The timer is set in the timer 223p during the period, and the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set in the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the operation validity period is started by setting the validity period flag 223e to ON (S5112).

  When the process of S5112 ends, next, the timing at which the display period read in the process of S5106 elapses (end timing of the makeover effect mode) is equal to or later than 5 seconds before the end of the continuous makeover effect time (lower limit). It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within 5 seconds (S5113). If it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the rendering period at the time when the display period has elapsed (S5113: No), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S5114), and the execution of the transformation effect mode with the success notification mode, which ends in the display period set in the process of S5111, is set (S5115). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5113, if it is determined that the end timing of the display period is 5 seconds or more before the end of the effect period (S5113: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is ended in the operation effective period set this time. Then, the transition effect flag 223t is set to ON (S5116). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4 (S5117). If it is determined that the value is 4 (S5117: Yes), the process proceeds to S5114 to perform the fifth success. Set the execution of the notification mode. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is five, and after setting the fifth success notification mode, a direct transition effect is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5117 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 4 (not more than 3) (S5117: No), the process ends when the display period set in the process of S5111 has elapsed. The execution of the transformation effect mode with the notification mode is set (S5118), and the process ends.

  By executing the processing during the display period, the length of the operation valid period can be changed according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each operation valid period of the continuous make-up effect, and the frame button 22 is not pressed. The set operation validity period becomes longer as the operation validity period continues. With this configuration, the number of transformations (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) is set for each effect type only when the player actively presses the frame button 22 as in the first embodiment. It is possible to reach the maximum number of times. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to perform the transformation up to the upper limit number of times, so that the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the display period of one transformation effect mode is associated with each value of the non-pressing number counter 223r, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary that the tendency of the selected display period can be made different depending on the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. A configuration in which a plurality of display period candidates are defined in association with each other may be adopted. Then, one display period may be selected from the candidates by lottery. In addition, in the lottery of the display period, as the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is larger, the ratio of selecting the longer display period may be increased. With this configuration, it is possible to impart randomness to the length of the set display period. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display period that is easy to be selected is changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, not only the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, but also the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode can be played, so that the player can perform the continuous transformation effect. Interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the operation valid period to be set is made variable in accordance with the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is not detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . It is sufficient if the player presses the frame button 22 so that the number of display times of the success notification mode can be easily set to be larger, and, for example, the number of continuous operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected may be counted. . The configuration may be such that the longer the counted number of consecutive times is, the shorter the length of the set operation valid period is. Then, the frame button 22 is actively pressed to increase the count value of the continuous number. If a shorter operation validity period is not set, the continuous number of times before reaching the upper limit transformation number set for each effect type is reached. You may comprise so that a transformation effect may be complete | finished. With this configuration, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, a player who wants to display more success notification modes can positively press the frame button 22. That is, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times that the press on the frame button 22 is not detected is counted in one continuous make-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times may be taken over and counted. That is, the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r at the end of the previous continuous make-up effect is held, and in the next continuous make-up effect, counting is started from the held value of the non-press number counter 223r. It may be. In this case, the non-pressing number counter 223r itself may be maintained as it was at the end of the previous continuous make-up effect, or the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r may be stored in the RAM 223 at the end of the continuous make-up effect. A configuration may be employed in which the counter value is saved in the area and the saved counter value is set again in the non-pressing number counter 223r at the start of the continuous transformation effect. With this configuration, the operation status of the player in one continuous transformation effect can be taken over from the next time onward, so that the effect of not performing the operation can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to press the frame button 22 more positively.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit number of transformations is determined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number, and the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value. When the operation validity period ends, the transformation is always successful (success notification mode is displayed).

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number, whether to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery. In addition, the rate of displaying the success notification mode is configured to be higher in the variable display that is a big hit than in the variable display that is a loss. As a result, when the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is further improved as compared with the first embodiment. Furthermore, the lottery executed by pressing the frame button 22 has a higher percentage of displaying the success notification mode than the lottery executed when the operation valid period has elapsed.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the audio lamp The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 in the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. 14 (see FIG. 14A) in that a transformation possibility determination table 222e is added.

  When the display condition of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is satisfied, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is referred to to determine whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. This is a data table. Details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation possibility determination table 222e. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the transformation possibility determination table 222e, the fluctuation type of the fluctuation display (whether super hit or out of super reach) in which the continuous transposition effect is set, and the operation validity The range of the counter value (random number value) of the effect counter 223n for which the display of the success notification mode is determined is associated with each period end condition.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is hit super reach and the operation validity period ends due to detection of pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is A range of “0 to 79” is defined in association with each other. Since the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 80 out of 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the effect counter 223n, the operation during the hit super reach is performed. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 80% (80/100).

  On the other hand, if the variation type is out of super reach and the operation validity period ends by detecting the press of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99”. ing. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

  As described above, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%. Since the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50%, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the possibility that the winning super reach is executed increases. Therefore, a game during the continuous transformation effect can be performed in the hope that the success notification mode will continue more times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the fluctuation type is hit super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the press of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is set to “0 to 49”. Is defined. Since the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50 out of 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the effect counter 223n, the operation during the hit super reach is performed. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation type is out of super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the press of the button 22, the range of “60 to 99” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. . Since the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 40 out of 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the effect counter 223n, the operation during the out-of-reach super reach is performed. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 40% (40/100).

  As described above, when the operation effective period ends during the execution of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. The success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 40%. In other words, the difference between the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of the hit super reach and the case of the out-of-range super reach as compared with the case where the operation validity period is ended by detecting the press of the frame button 22. Is decreasing. Therefore, when the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation does not increase so much. Therefore, the player who wants to more accurately estimate the jackpot expectation during the execution of the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22.

  In addition, when the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50% even during the execution of the hit super reach. In other words, the configuration is such that the success notification mode is less likely to be displayed than in the case where the operation validity period ends when the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In other words, when a player who does not press the frame button 22 very much plays a game, the continuous transformation effect can be easily ended with a relatively small number of times of displaying the success notification mode even when a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of cases in which a large number of hits are displayed with a small number of success notification modes, so that even if a continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of display of a success notification mode, a sense of expectation for a large jackpot can be provided.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S4031).

  The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main process instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the operation valid period This is a process for setting a corresponding effect when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the period.

  Of the frame button input monitoring / production processing 3 (see FIG. 66), in the processing of S4101 and S4102, the processing of S4101 and S4102 of the frame button input monitoring / production processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Also, in the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the first embodiment is executed. In place of the transformation setting process in the embodiment (see FIG. 35), a transformation setting process 3 is executed (S4121), and this process ends to return to the main process (see FIG. 33). Details of the transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 3 (S4121). The transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is a process for setting the display of the corresponding notification mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the number of transformations, and the like, similarly to the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. is there.

  In the transformation setting processing 3 (see FIG. 67), in the processing of S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212, the processing of S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212 of the transformation setting processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed.

  In the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4203, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit transformation number corresponding to the effect type of the current continuous transformation effect. (S4223: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than a lower limit value defined for each effect type.

  If it is determined in the process of S4221 that the display (transformation) of the success notification mode is not a possible period (S4221: No), the process is performed to set the failure notification mode and select the effect type of the advanced effect. Is shifted to S4204. On the other hand, in the process of S4221, if it is determined that the present time is within the period in which the display of the success notification mode can be set (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation possibility determination table 222e (see FIG. 66 (b)) The value of the effect counter 223n is read (S4222). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223n matches the counter value corresponding to the display determination of the success notification mode (success of the transformation) defined in the transformation possibility determination table 222e (S4223).

  In the process of S4223, if it is determined that the counter value corresponds to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process proceeds to S4210 to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4223 that the counter value does not correspond to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process proceeds to S4204 to display the failure notification mode.

  By the transformation setting process 3, it is possible to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode with a lottery probability according to the type of the variable display and the end condition of the operation validity period. Thus, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the result of the present fluctuation display will be a hit. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the type of notification mode displayed after the operation validity period ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a case in which the success notification mode display is determined differently according to the variation type of the variation display in which the continuous make-up effect is set, resulting in a big hit Is configured such that the display of the success notification mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case of the departure. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not the success notification mode is displayed. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible, and the player who wants to more accurately determine the expectation of the jackpot is caused to positively press the frame button 22. be able to. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  Also, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, by pressing the frame button 22 and terminating the operation validity period, the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number set for each effect type. It has a configuration that can be performed. That is, in the third embodiment, when the player actively presses the frame button 22 to terminate the operation effective period halfway and continues to win the lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode. , The success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, as compared with the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is likely to be reduced. In other words, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is likely to be relatively small in both cases of winning and losing, so even if the continuous transformation effect is completed in a small number of times, expect a sense of being successful. You can hug me. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the case where the operation effective period ends based on the detection of the press of the frame button 22 and the case where the operation effective period ends without detecting the press of the frame button 22 are as follows. The lottery probability of whether to display the success notification mode is made different. When the operation validity period ends without detecting the press of the frame button 22, the difference in the lottery probability at which the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of the hit super-reach and the case of the out-of-range super-reach is determined. It is configured to be less. With this configuration, if the operation validity period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation does not increase so much. The player who wants to more accurately estimate the jackpot expectation can positively press the frame button 22.

  In the third embodiment, when the lottery of whether to display the success notification mode is omitted, the failure notification mode is displayed and the continuous transformation effect is terminated. However, the continuous transformation effect is not necessarily terminated. You don't have to. For example, instead of the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, an upper limit value of the number of times to set the operation validity period is set, and the continuous transformation effect is continued until the upper limit value is reached, even if the failure notification mode is displayed. (A new operation validity period is set after the failure notification mode ends). With this configuration, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed more times. In addition, by actively pressing the frame button 22 and terminating the operation validity period, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed more times. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to accurately predict whether the winning or losing will be based on the displayed percentage of the success notification mode. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be more positively pressed in the continuous transformation effect.

  In the third embodiment, regardless of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, the success notification mode in the case where the frame button 22 is pressed is smaller than the case where the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting the press of the frame button 22. Although the winning probability in the lottery for displaying or not is configured to be high, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while the special symbol lottery is lost. May be configured so that the winning probability is the same whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the jackpot expectation when the success notification mode is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, so that the player presses the frame button 22 more positively. Can be done. In addition, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode is increased, but when the special symbol lottery is lost, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the winning is performed. You may comprise so that a probability may become low. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the jackpot expectation when the frame button 22 is pressed to display the success notification mode. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode may be made to depend only on the special symbol lottery result. In other words, whether the success notification mode is displayed with the same probability whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period or the case where the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting the press of the frame button 22 is determined. May be configured to perform the lottery.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment described above, whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery, and when the lottery is won, the success notification mode is displayed. Further, the lottery probability at which the display of the success notification mode is determined is set higher during the execution of the hit superreach than during the execution of the off-reach superreach. Thereby, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during a predetermined period (the first two operation valid periods) in one continuous make-up effect, the pressing state (operation state of the player) on the frame button 22 is determined, and The configuration is such that the rate at which the success notification mode is set is varied according to the determination result. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is determined whether or not the player is a player who actively presses the frame button 22 when the operation validity period is set, and suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is a hit according to the determination result. (The selection rate when selecting the notification mode).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 68 (a) is a block diagram showing an advanced presentation mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the development effect form selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment shows that the development effect state to be selected corresponds to the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the fluctuation type of the fluctuation display. It is stipulated.

  It should be noted that, in the fourth embodiment, the operation validity period is not interrupted in the middle in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, in which the production mode of the development effect can be determined according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g. It is because it is. Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the operation validity period is always set to 5 seconds. For this reason, the relationship between the value of the transformation number counter 223g at the time of setting the display of the failure notification mode and the remaining fluctuation time has a one-to-one correspondence. For example, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2, it means that the operation validity period of 5 seconds is displayed three times and the success notification mode of one second is displayed twice, so that the failure notification mode is displayed. Is always 28 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds × 3 + 1 seconds × 2 until the continuous transformation effect is started). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds. Therefore, taking into account 1 second as the display period of the failure notification mode and 1 second as the display period of the transition effect, if a 30-second effect is executed as the advanced effect, the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the advanced effect And can be matched.

  Similarly, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4, it means that the operation validity period of 5 seconds is displayed 5 times and the success notification mode of 1 second is displayed 4 times. The elapsed time when the display is set is always 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds × 5 + 1 seconds × 4). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 20 seconds. Therefore, by executing the failure effect mode and the extended effect of 18 seconds in which the effect time of the transition effect is reduced, the end timing of the extended effect can be matched with the end timing of the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, a development effect with a production time of 30 seconds is associated with the value “2” of the transformation number counter 223g. In other words, the winning extended reach A4 with a rendering time of 30 seconds is associated with the hit superreach, and the extended developing effect A4 with a rendering time of 30 seconds is associated with the missed super reach.

  Similarly, for the value “3” of the transformation number counter 223g, a development effect in which the effect time is 24 seconds is defined in association with the value. In other words, the winning super-reach is defined in association with the winning extended effect B4 of which the production time is 24 seconds, and the super-reach is defined in association with the developing advanced effect B4 of which the rendering time is 24 seconds. Further, for the value "4, 5" of the transformation number counter 223g, a development effect in which the effect time is 18 seconds is defined in association with the value. That is, the hit super-reach is defined in association with the winning extended performance C4 with a production time of 18 seconds, and the super-reach is defined with the extended developing performance C4 with a rendering time of 18 seconds.

  In this way, by referring to the development effect mode selection table 222c, it is possible to determine the type of the development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g. And the end timing of the variable display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 (b) to (d), details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 68B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e according to the fourth embodiment includes a case where it is determined that a player who tends to press the frame button 22 in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game. A push notification table 222e1 used to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode, and a success notification when it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing a game. And a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used to determine whether to display the mode.

  In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined over two operation valid periods after the start of the continuous transformation effect. That is, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected twice in the first two operation valid periods, it is determined that the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing a game. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that the player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 is playing a game. Note that, in order to determine the tendency of the player, in the first two operation valid periods, the success notification mode is always set as the notification mode after the end. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed before the tendency of the player is determined, and the continuous transformation effect is not ended.

  FIG. 68 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the pressing tendency table 222e1. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the press tendency table 222e1, an effect counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode for each of the set number of operation valid periods in one continuous make-up effect and for each variation type. Are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, when the variation type is hit and super reach, “0 to 79” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n in association with the third to fifth operation effective periods in the continuous transformation effect. I have. As a result, when the third to fifth operation effective periods of the continuous transformation effect have ended, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach, “0 to 59” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223 n for the third operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation validity is performed. “0 to 39” is defined in association with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and “0 to 19” is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation validity period. It is stipulated.

  For this reason, when the out-of-reach super reach is executed, it is difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode as compared with the hit super reach. Further, the longer the operation valid period is, the more difficult it is to determine the display of the success notification mode. For this reason, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the degree of expectation of a jackpot increases. Therefore, the player who tends to press the frame button 22 can play the game in expectation that the success notification mode will be displayed more times.

  FIG. 68 (d) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. The non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same configuration as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68 (c)). That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the value of the effect counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode is associated with each of the set number of operation valid periods in one continuous make-up effect and the variation type. Stipulated.

  Specifically, when the variation type is hit and super reach, “0 to 39” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation validity period is set. For the operation validity period, “0 to 79” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n, and for the fifth operation validity period, the value range of the effect counter 223n is set to “0 to 39”. Is associated and defined. That is, during the execution of the hit super-reach, it is difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation effective periods, while ending the even-numbered (fourth) operation effective period. Sometimes, the success notification mode is easily set.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach, “0 to 69” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n for the third operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation validity is set. "0-49" is associated with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and "0-69" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation validity period. It is stipulated. That is, during execution of the out-of-order super reach, the success notification mode is easily set at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation effective periods, contrary to the case of the hit super-reach. It becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the (fourth) operation validity period.

  Therefore, after the odd-numbered operation validity period has ended, the failure notification mode is displayed, and the expectation of winning a jackpot is increased. On the other hand, after the even-numbered operation validity period is completed, the success notification mode is displayed. The higher the expectations, the greater the jackpot. Therefore, in the odd-numbered operation validity period, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the failure notification mode will be displayed after the end of the period, while in the even-numbered operational validity period, after the end of the period. The game can be played in expectation of the display of the success notification mode.

  As described above, the lottery method (table used for the lottery) for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode is different between the player who tends to press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to hardly press the frame button 22. Thereby, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the larger the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, the higher the expectation of big hits. On the other hand, when the player who has a tendency to not easily press the frame button 22 is playing a game, the odds number of times when the success notification mode is displayed decreases the jackpot expectation, and the even number times displays the success notification mode. When this is done, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the jackpot expectation is improved.

  In addition, during the first two operation valid periods in one continuous transformation effect, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method (gaming ability) that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be switched, it is possible to make the player select a favorite suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method that matches the taste of each player. Further, even if the user is tired of one suggestion method, the user can switch to the other suggestion method, so that the game can be prevented from being monotonous (suppressed).

  In the fourth embodiment, as the type of the continuous make-up effect, only the continuous make-up effect with the maximum number of make-up times of 5 is set so that the degree of expectation to be a big hit can be more accurately determined from the display timing of the success notification mode. It is configured to be set. With this configuration, the case where the failure notification mode is displayed can be limited to the case where the display of the success notification mode based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e is omitted in the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more accurately predict the degree of expectation to be a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B) in that a pressed flag 223s and a pressed The difference is that a number counter 223u is provided.

  The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not pressing on the frame button 22 has been detected during one operation valid period, as in the second embodiment. Further, the press number counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of operation valid periods in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect. Based on the counter value of the number-of-presses counter 223u, the tendency of the player (whether the player who tends to press the frame button 22 plays a game) is determined.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S4041) will be described with reference to FIG. The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment. This is a process for displaying an effect corresponding to the detection.

  Of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the processing in S4101 and S4102 respectively correspond to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those in S4101 and S4102 are executed.

  Also, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that a press on the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), the pressed flag 223s is on. It is determined whether this is the case (S4131), and if the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4131 that the pressed-down flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed-down flag 223s is set to on (S4132), and then the value of the pressing-down counter 223u is set to 1. It is updated by adding (S4133). Then, a press effect for notifying the player that the press is detected is set (S4134), and the process ends. In the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the press count counter 223u can be updated in response to the press on the frame button 22, so that the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is The determination can be made according to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the processing during valid period 4 (S4331) will be described. The in-valid-process 4 (S4331) is a process executed in place of the in-valid-process (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the operation valid period ends. This is a process for performing the corresponding control at the timing.

  Of the processing 4 during the valid period (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S4501 and S4502, the same processing as the processing during the valid period (see FIG. 37B) in the third embodiment is respectively performed. Be executed. In the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the subtracted valid period timer 223f is 0 (S4502: Yes), then Then, the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4531), and the transformation setting process 4 is executed (S4532). The transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting a notification mode in the continuous transformation effect, similarly to the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. Details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4532 ends, it is determined whether the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 or not (S4533). That is, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, after the first and second operation validity periods have ended, the success notification mode is always displayed (success in the transformation). Then, the tendency of the player is determined based on the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the two operation valid periods. In the process of S4533, it is determined whether or not it is time to determine the tendency of the player to press (whether the first two operation valid periods have ended).

  In the process of S4533, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 2 (S4533: No), this timing is not the timing of determining the tendency of the player to press, and thus the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), the tendency of the player to press is determined, and whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined. The processing of S4534 to S4536 for setting the table used for the lottery is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534). If it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534: Yes), the success notification mode is set. The table 222e1 for pressing tendency (see FIG. 68 (c)) is set as a table used for the lottery (decision of the transformation possibility) of whether or not to be displayed (S4535), and this processing ends. Since the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u being 2 means that the player has pressed the frame button 22 twice in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect, the frame button 22 is positively activated. This is because there is a high possibility that the player pressing the button 22 is playing a game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4534, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), there is a high possibility that a player who has a tendency to hardly press the frame button 22 is playing a game. Is determined, a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68 (d)) is set as a table used for the lottery on whether or not to display the success notification mode (S4536), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, details of the above-described transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 4 (S4532). Of the transformation setting processing 4 (S4532), in the processing of S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 to S4212, respectively, S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 of the transformation setting processing 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. The same processing as the processing from S4212 to S4212 is executed.

  In the transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when the processing in S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g read in the processing in S4202 is 2 or more ( S4231). In the process of S4231, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), the transformation setting process 4 of this time determines whether any of the first two operation effective periods of the continuous transformation effect is performed. It means that it was executed at the end timing. As described above, since the success notification mode is always displayed after the first half of the operation validity period ends, in this case, the processing of S4210 to S4212 for setting the success notification mode is executed, and the present processing is performed. To end.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4231, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), the value is set in the validity period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the transformation possibility determination table 222e. Then, the table (either the pressing tendency table 222e1 or the non-pressing tendency table 222e2) and the value of the effect counter 223n are read (S4222). As described above, by determining whether or not to display the success notification mode with reference to the pressing tendency table 222e1, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Method) can be realized. On the other hand, by determining whether or not to display the success notification mode with reference to the non-press tendency table 222e2, when the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation validity period, the jackpot expectation degree is reduced, and the even-numbered operation is performed. When the success notification mode is displayed after the validity period, it is possible to realize a gaming property (a method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases.

  Upon completion of the process of S4222, it is determined whether the read value of the effect counter 223n is a counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode (success of the transformation) specified in the table (S4223). If the counter value corresponds to the display of the notification mode (success of the transformation) (S4223: Yes), the processing of S4210 to S4212 for displaying the success notification mode is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4223, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223n is out of the range of the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the advanced effect mode selection table From 222c, the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the mode of the development effect corresponding to the fluctuation type of the current fluctuation display are read (S4232). Next, data corresponding to the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and a failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to one second is set to the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and the process ends.

  By executing the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), the method of suggesting the degree of expectation to be a big hit can be changed according to the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22, so that the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player who is currently playing the game is likely to press the frame button 22 during the predetermined period in the continuous transformation effect. Can be determined (identified). Then, the method of indicating the degree of expectation (gaming ability) in the continuous announcement effect differs between players who tend to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period and players who do not. That is, when it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing a game, the greater the number of times of displaying the success notification mode (the number of times of successful transformation), the greater the hit. It is configured to set a suggestion method that increases the expectation. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation validity period, the expectation of the big hit decreases. Further, when the success notification mode is displayed after the even-numbered operation validity period, a suggestion method is set in which the degree of expectation of winning is improved.

  With such a configuration, various suggestion methods can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, during the first two operation valid periods in one continuous transformation effect, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method (gaming ability) that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be switched, it is possible to make the player select a favorite suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method that matches the taste of each player. Further, even if the user is tired of one suggestion method, the user can switch to the other suggestion method, so that the game can be prevented from being monotonous (suppressed).

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the tendency of the player is determined in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect, but the method of determining the tendency of the player is not limited to this. A configuration in which the tendency of the player is determined based on the pressing state during the first one operation valid period may be adopted. Thereby, in the continuous transformation effect, it is possible to execute a suggestion method that is more suitable for each player for a longer number of times. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the tendency of the player is determined in accordance with a pressing state over three or more operation valid periods. With this configuration, it is possible to more accurately determine the tendency of the player. Further, a period for determining the tendency of the player may be provided separately from the operation valid period set in the continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for example, before the continuous transformation effect is started, an effect (pressing effect) that prompts a press on the frame button 22 is displayed one or more times, and based on the pressing status in the one or more pressing effects, It is good also as composition which discriminates a tendency of a player. With this configuration, all notification modes of the continuous transformation effect can be set to a suggestion method according to the tendency of the player.

  In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is always set to 5 times. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed only when the lottery of whether to display the success notification mode, which is executed based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, is omitted. It is not something that can be done. As in the above embodiments, a plurality of types having different upper limit times of transformation may be provided. With this configuration, when the failure notification mode is displayed, the failure notification mode is not selected by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, but the upper limit number of transformations in the current continuous transformation effect is reached. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the failure notification mode may be displayed. Therefore, when it is assumed that the failure notification mode is determined by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at a timing when the jackpot is reduced, the player's expectation for the jackpot is not It is possible to suppress the reduction.

  In the fourth embodiment, for a player who actively presses the frame button 22, the larger the number of times of display of the success notification mode, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be increased. For a player who does not often press, it is configured such that the odds of the successive transformation effects end to increase the jackpot expectation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The method of indicating the degree of expectation may be different depending on whether the player is a player who actively presses the frame button 22 or a player who does not press the frame button 22 much. On the other hand, when the continuous transformation effect ends at the even-numbered times, the expectation of the big hit increases. On the other hand, for the player who does not press the frame button 22, the larger the continuous transformation effect ends with the smaller number of transformations, the bigger the expectation degree becomes. May be increased. In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the tendency of the number of times of transformation, the rule of the display mode in which the jackpot expectation degree increases when the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed) is set as a player's rule. It is good also as a structure made different according to the tendency of. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation is indicated by the type of the back image displayed on the back of the character 811. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation of the rear image increases in the order of wilderness, mountain, and sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who does not tend to press the frame button 22, the back image may be set to indicate the degree of expectation based on the expression of the character 811 instead of setting the image at random. That is, the expression of the character 811 may be configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of no expression → smile → angry face. Further, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the suggestion method during the execution of the continuous transformation effect according to the tendency of the player, the content of the development effect may be changed according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who actively presses the frame button 22, as the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the advanced effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases, In the case of a player who does not press the button 22, it may be configured such that the more the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812, the higher the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment described above, in one continuous transformation effect, the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is determined, and the method of reporting the jackpot expectation is changed according to the determination result.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the continuous make-up effect is made different from the situation of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the past continuous make-up effect. Specifically, for a player who positively presses the frame button 22, an effect mode in which the operation validity period is set relatively frequently is executed. On the other hand, for a player who is less likely to press the frame button 22, instead of reducing the number of times the operation effective period is set, a long development effect is set. This gives the player who actively presses the frame button 22 a greater number of opportunities to press the frame button 22, while giving the player who does not want to press the frame button 22 a chance to do so. Instead of reducing it, you can enjoy the extended production for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that matches the taste of each player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, even when the failure notification mode is displayed in the continuous make-up effect, the continuous make-up effect is terminated if the set number of operation valid periods (2 or 5 times) remains. Instead, the operation validity period is set again. That is, it is prevented (suppressed) that the operation validity period ends in a small number of times despite the fact that a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 plays a game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fourth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, the development effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the player is a player who tends to press the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is positively pressed according to the determination result (participation frequency is high). For the player having the tendency, the operation valid period is set to be longer. For players who tend not to press the frame button 22 very often (participation frequency is low), the number of times the operation effective period is set is reduced, and the effect time of the advanced effect is extended. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the extended production (extended production for low participation frequency) in which the production time is extended, the production in which the character 811 searches the cave to collect items. Is executed. The found item makes the character 811 advantageous in a battle with the monster 812 that is performed later. The effect of searching for a cave (searching effect) has a configuration in which the number of items discovered by the character 811 indicates a degree of expectation of a jackpot (the more items, the easier it is to win the monster 812). are doing). That is, when the operation validity period is set to a small number for a player who has a low participation frequency, the number of executions of the effect indicating the degree of expectation decreases depending on whether or not the character 811 is transformed. Thus, the degree of expectation can be indicated by the number of items discovered by the character 811. As a result, even when the number of times of setting the operation validity period is small, it is possible to give the same opportunity of suggesting the degree of expectation as when the number of times of setting is large.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the above-described search effect. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the search effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 proceeds toward the back of the cave is displayed. Further, in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm, the characters "search mode" and the characters "expected degree UP when an item is GET" are displayed. Further, in the display area HR4 displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm, the characters “item × 0” are displayed. The characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items found by the character 811. Note that the character 811 can find up to three items in one search effect.

  FIG. 73B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 finds an item during execution of the search effect. In this case, an effect is performed in which the character 811 opens the treasure chest displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and items appear in the treasure chest. On the right side of the treasure box, a display area HR5 for notifying the type of the acquired item is displayed. In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the characters “power up drink GET !!” are displayed in the display area HR5. Further, the character displayed in the display area HR4 is updated to “item × 1”. The number displayed in the display area HR4 can indicate a degree of expectation to be a big hit to the player. In the search effect, there is a possibility that an effect in which no item appears even though the character 811 has found the treasure box. That is, in the search effect, the treasure chest is basically found three times, and the degree of expectation is suggested by how many times the item is found out of the three times.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the player does not frequently participate in the continuous transformation effect, the search effect is executed instead of reducing the number of times of setting the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect. In this search effect, it is possible to suggest a degree of expectation to be a big hit based on the number of items found by the character 811. As a result, even when the number of times of setting the operation validity period is small, it is possible to give the same opportunity of suggesting the degree of expectation as when the number of times of setting is large.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when it is determined that the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is low and when it is determined that the participation frequency is high. First, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), a description will be given of a temporal change in the effect mode when the player's participation frequency is low.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, the operation validity period is set only twice. That is, the operation validity period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are set twice each. In the example of FIG. 74A, the failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and the success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the fifth embodiment, even if the failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation effect is not terminated until the specified number of operation valid periods is set. . This makes it possible to more accurately estimate the degree of expectation of the jackpot according to the number of times of displaying the success notification mode.

  When the display period of the second notification mode ends, a transition effect for one second is set. When the transition effect is completed, an advanced effect is started. In the development effect in which the participation frequency is low, first, a search effect for 15 seconds (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect that indicates a degree of expectation to be a big hit based on the number of items found by the character 811 is executed. Then, after the effect period of 15 seconds has elapsed, an effect of a mode of battle with the monster 812 is executed. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), a winning development effect A5 in a mode of winning the monster 812 during the effect period of 23 seconds is executed.

  As described above, when the participation frequency is low, the opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation is given twice by the two operation valid periods set in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, the search effect gives the opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation three times. Therefore, a total of five opportunities to indicate the jackpot expectation are given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when it is determined that the player's participation frequency is high. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation validity period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are displayed five times. That is, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), a failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, a success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, and a failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode. The success notification mode is displayed as the fourth, fifth, and fifth notification modes. As shown in FIG. 74B, the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which the operation valid period is not terminated even when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period. As a result, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect can be fixed, so that the effect time of the subsequently developed effect can also be fixed. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare various modes for each effect time of the development effect, and the storage capacity for displaying the development effect can be reduced.

  When the display period of the fifth notification mode ends, the transition effect is displayed, and thereafter, the development effect A5 is displayed with the effect time of 23 seconds. As described above, when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation validity period is always set to five times in the continuous transformation effect, and therefore, as in the case where the participation frequency is low, there is an opportunity to indicate the jackpot expectation degree of five. Given once.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. First, FIG. 75A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment in that a valid period number table 222f is added.

  The valid period number table 222f is a data table in which the number of operation valid periods set in the continuous transformation effect is defined for each state of the pressing tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating the degree of participation of the player in the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the valid operation period). If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player actively participates in the continuous make-up effect, and if it is off, it means that the player has low participation frequency in the continuous make-up effect. .

  The details of the valid period count table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the valid period count table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), “5 times” is defined as the set number of operation valid periods in association with the state “on” of the press tendency flag 223y. Therefore, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22) is playing a game, the operation effective period is set to five times in the continuous transformation effect. . Of the notification modes displayed after the set five operation validity periods have ended, the number of times (ratio) in which the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation to the jackpot to the player. .

  In the present embodiment, as in the above-described third embodiment, when a jackpot is hit, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80% after each operation valid period ends, but the event is missed. In this case, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is set so that the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the expectation of the player for the jackpot can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “2 times” is defined as the set number of operation valid periods in association with the state “OFF” of the press tendency flag 223y. For this reason, when the player who participates in the continuous transformation effect at a low frequency (the frequency of pressing the frame button 22 is low) is playing a game, the operation effective period is set twice in the continuous transformation effect. Of the notification modes displayed after the set two operation validity periods have ended, the number of times (ratio) in which the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation to the jackpot to the player. .

  Note that when the frequency of participation in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, the number of times the operation validity period is set is reduced by three times as compared with the case of a player with a high participation frequency. That is, the number of times of suggesting the jackpot expectation in the continuous transformation effect is reduced. In order to cover the decrease in the number of suggestions, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute an effect (search effect) indicating the degree of expectation in the advanced effect. As a result, even for a player with a low participation frequency, it is possible to ensure the same number of suggestions of the jackpot expectation as a player with a high participation frequency. In addition, by increasing the effect time of the extended effect instead of reducing the number of times the operation effective period is set, it is possible to provide an effect mode that matches the taste of a player who does not want to press the frame button 22.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69) in that a valid period number counter 223w, a notification mode timer 223x, and a pressing tendency flag 223y are provided. And a total press counter 223aa and a total valid period counter 223ab. Further, the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

  The valid period number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times the operation valid period is set in one continuous transformation effect. The value of the valid period counter 223w is set to 1 when setting the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect (see S4412 in FIG. 78). Each time a new operation validity period is set, the value is incremented by one (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of the valid period counter 223w is used to determine whether to set a new operation valid period or set a transition effect every time the display period of the notification mode elapses. That is, if the value of the valid period number counter 223w is less than the set number of operation valid periods specified in the valid period number table 222f, a new operation valid period is set. On the other hand, when the value of the valid period number counter 223w matches the set number specified in the valid period number table 222f, the start of the transition effect is set.

  The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode set after the operation effective period ends. In the notification mode timer 223x, a timer value corresponding to one second is set each time display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of the notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or the failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether to set a new operation valid period or a transition effect. .

  The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating whether or not the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect (actively pressing the frame button 22). It means that the frequency of participation in continuous transformation production is low. Note that the participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of operation valid periods in which the player has pressed (participated) the frame button 22 to the set number of total operation valid periods. Specifically, when the operation validity period in which the player has pressed the frame button 22 is more than 80% of the whole, if the player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game. Determine. Each time one continuous make-up effect ends, the push tendency flag 223y is updated according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous make-up effect (S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82). reference).

  The total press counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In other words, the total number of times of the operation valid period accompanied by the pressing of all the frame buttons 22 since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted by the total pressing counter 223aa. The rate at which the frame button 22 is pressed based on the counter value of the total press counter 223aa and the number of all operation valid periods set after the power is turned on (counter value of the total valid period counter 223ab described later). (The tendency of the player) is determined. Every time one continuous make-up effect ends, this total press counter 223aa is updated according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous make-up effect (see S5302 in FIG. 82). ).

  The total valid period number counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of operation valid periods. That is, the number of all operation valid periods since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on is counted by the total valid period number counter 223ab. Based on the value of the total valid period counter 223ab and the value of the total press counter 223aa, the ratio of pressing the frame button 22 (the tendency of the player) is determined. Like the total press counter 223aa, every time one continuous make-up effect ends, the total valid period number counter 223ab changes according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous make-up effect. (See S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the effect update processing 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect update processing 5 (S4051) is similar to the effect update processing (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and during the execution of the fluctuation display, the remaining fluctuation time and the values of the various timers are changed. This is a process for changing the presentation mode according to the like.

  Of the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processing of S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310, S4301, S4302, and S4302 of the effect update processing (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4304 and S4310 are executed.

  Also, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S4302, when it is determined that the in-transformation effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the start timing of the continuous inversion effect is determined. A transformation effect start determination process 5 for discrimination is executed (S4341), and this process ends. Details of this transformation effect start determination processing 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4304: Yes), the end timing of the valid period is determined. During the valid period, the process 5 is executed (S4342), and the process ends. Details of the in-valid-process 5 (S4342) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (b).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), it is next determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is greater than 0 (S4343). If the value is greater than 0 (S4343: Yes), it means that the notification mode is being displayed, so that the notification mode middle process for determining the end timing of the notification mode is executed (S4344). The process ends. Details of the processing during the notification mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4343, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is a value greater than 0 (during the transition effect display time). ) Is determined (S4310), and if the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if the value of the transition effect time timer 223x is a value larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), the transition effect process 5 for determining the end timing of the transition effect is executed. (S4345), this process ends. Details of this transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described with reference to FIG. This transformation effect start determination processing 5 (S4341) determines the start timing of the continuous transformation effect as in the transformation effect start determination processing (see FIG. 37A) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is processing for.

  Of the transformation effect start determination processing 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processing of S4401, S4402, and S4404, the transformation effect start determination processing in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 37 (a)). )), The same processes as those in S4401, S4402, and S4404 are executed.

  In the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78A) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4402 ends, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set to the validity period timer 223f. At the same time, the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, 1 is set to the value of the valid period number counter 223w (S4412), and the process shifts to S4404.

  By executing the transformation effect start determination processing 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set at the same timing (11 seconds after the start of the change) every time, The counting of the valid period counter 223w can be started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78B, details of the above-described processing 5 during the valid period (S4342) will be described. In the valid period process 5 (S4342), similarly to the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the end timing of the operation valid period is determined. This is a process for displaying a corresponding notification mode.

  Of the processing 5 during the valid period (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, the processing of S4501, S4502, and S4531 each correspond to the processing 4 during the valid period (see FIG. 71) of the fourth embodiment. The same processes as those of S4501, S4502, and S4531 are executed. In the validity period process 5 (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4502 ends, the fourth notification mode or the failure notification mode is set to display either the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Instead of the transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the embodiment, the transformation setting processing 5 is executed (S4541), and this processing ends. Details of the transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 5 (S4541). Of the transformation setting processing 5 (S4541), in the processing of S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233, S4201, S4202, and S4210 of the transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. , S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233.

  In the transformation setting processing 5 (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing in S4233 or S4211 ends, a timer value corresponding to one second is set for the value of the notification mode timer 223x ( (S4241), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, details of the above-described process in the notification mode (S4344) will be described. As described above, the notification mode middle process (S4344) is a process of determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode).

  In the process in the notification mode (see FIG. 80), first, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is decremented by 1 (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S5202). In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 (S5202: No), it means that the display time (1 second) of the notification mode has not elapsed, The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5202 that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after the subtraction has become 0 (S5202: Yes), a process for setting any of a new operation effective period or a transition effect is performed. Execute. More specifically, the push tendency flag 223y and the value of the valid period counter 223w are read out (S5203), and these are compared with the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f (S5204).

  As a result of the comparison in the process of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the validity period counter 223w matches the upper limit corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205), and is determined to match the upper limit. In this case (S5205: Yes), a transition effect is set. More specifically, the timer value corresponding to one second is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S5206), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S5207), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the validity period counter 223w does not match the upper limit corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation validity period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the value of the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the valid period counter 223w (S5209), and this processing ends.

  By executing the process in the notification mode (see FIG. 80), the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is accurately determined, and the corresponding control (start setting of the transition effect, or a new setting). Operation validity period).

  Next, the details of the above-described transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described with reference to FIG. This transition effect processing 5 (S4345) is executed instead of the transition effect processing (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the processing during transition effect 5 (see FIG. 81), the processing in steps S4801 and S4802 are the same as the processing in steps S4801 and S4802 of the processing during transition effect (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  In the transition effect processing 5 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). In the process of S4811, if it is determined that the pressing tendency flag 223y is ON (S4811: Yes), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the effect time after the end of the search effect (search mode). (S4812), and the process moves to S4814.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4811 that the press tendency flag 223y is off (S4811: No), it is set so that the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the search effect (search mode). (S4813), the process proceeds to S4814.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between starting the extended effect from the search effect or starting after the end of the search effect, according to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (the tendency of the player). As a result, it is possible to execute a development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time.

  After the processing of S4812 or S4813, a pressing tendency update process for updating the tendency of the player (the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y) according to the player's participation frequency in the present continuous transformation effect is executed (S4814). ). The details of the pressing tendency update processing (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S4814, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S4815), the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the value of the valid period number counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and the present processing is performed. finish.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the above-described pressing tendency update processing (S4814) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this pressing tendency update processing (S4814). In the pressing tendency update processing (S4814), first, the value of the valid period number counter 223w is added to the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab, so that the number of operation valid periods set in the present continuous transformation effect is calculated. This is reflected on the set number of times of the total operation valid period (S5301). Next, by adding the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u to the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the number of times of the operation validity period in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected in the present continuous transformation effect is depressed on the frame button 22. Is reflected in the total number of detected operation valid periods (S5302).

  When the process of S5302 is completed, a value obtained by dividing the value of the updated total number of presses counter 223aa by the value of the updated total valid period number counter 223ab is calculated (S5303). It is determined whether the value is greater than 0.8 (S5304: Yes). In the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is greater than 0.8 (S5304), if the operation validity period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed at a rate of 80% or more. (That is, a player actively participating in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game), so that the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), the player who has relatively low frequency of pressing the frame button 22 during the operation validity period is played. Is performed, the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to off (S5306), and this processing ends.

  By executing the pressing tendency update process (see FIG. 82), every time the continuous make-up effect ends, the tendency of the player can be updated in consideration of the participation status of the player in the continuous make-up effect. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, based on the player's participation status in the continuous transformation effect (the ratio of the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is pressed to the total number of operation valid periods). Thus, a configuration in which the production mode in the continuous transformation production is made different. That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, a relatively large number of times (5 Instead of setting the operation validity period, the effect time of the development effect is shortened. On the other hand, when the player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect much (does not press the frame button 22 much during the operation valid period) is playing a game, a relatively small number (two times) of operations are performed in the continuous transformation effect. Instead of setting the validity period, the production time of the development effect is extended. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player who tends to actively participate in the continuous make-up effect more opportunities to participate in the continuous make-up effect. On the other hand, for a player who does not tend to participate in the continuous make-up effect, the opportunity to participate in the continuous make-up effect is reduced, and the extended effect can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately set according to the tendency of the player.

  In the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which the tendency of the player is determined based on the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected to the number of all the operation valid periods set after the power is turned on. But it is not limited to this. For example, a function of identifying a player playing a game is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and each time it is determined (authenticated) that a different player has started the game, the tendency of the player is renewed. May be determined. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started a game, the value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab may be reset to 0. This makes it possible to more accurately determine the tendency of each player, thereby realizing an effect that more closely matches the tendency of each player. The function of identifying a player playing a game includes, for example, a well-known face authentication function, a fingerprint authentication function, a voiceprint authentication function, and the like. In addition, information of a player who is currently playing a game may be acquired from a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, information indicating the type of the card inserted into the card unit (for example, the card serial number or member number) can be output from the card unit to the pachinko machine 10, while the pachinko machine 10 side And the type of the card can be identified from the information output from the card unit. Then, based on the information output from the card unit, it may be configured to determine that the same player is playing a game while the same card is inserted.

  Further, a known gaming system including a portable terminal (a mobile phone, a smartphone, a tablet, or the like) possessed by a player, a server capable of communicating with the portable terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 capable of communicating with the server. May be applied. That is, the server stores individual information for each player (game history, type and number of effects produced, and the like), and stores the information stored in the server in a corresponding portable terminal (for each player). A gaming system configured to be able to browse through a portable terminal that has accessed the server with the assigned login ID and password) or change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 based on the stored information. May be applied. More specifically, the information on the game history accumulated on the server side includes the value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab described above. When the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab stored (stored) in the server are determined by the pachinko machine 10 that starts the game. , It is possible to reflect the ratio of the players participating in the continuous transformation effect on different days or on different platforms. Therefore, even if the date and time at which the game is played and the platform (hall) at which the game is played are changed, it is possible to accurately determine the tendency of each player and set an effect mode suited to the tendency of the player.

  In the gaming system, as a method of reflecting the information of the server on the pachinko machine 10, for example, a password generated based on a common encoding rule between the server and the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. Method. That is, when starting a game, the mobile terminal connected to the server requests a password for starting the game from the server. The server converts a game history or the like corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the above-described encoding rule. When the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into a value of the total press counter 223aa, a value of the total valid period counter 223ab, and the like based on the above-described encoding rule and set in the RAM 223 or the like. I do. Thereby, the game can be started from the state of the game history immediately after the operator of the portable terminal has finished the previous game. When ending the game, a predetermined operation for causing the pachinko machine 10 to generate a password corresponding to the game end (for example, selecting an option corresponding to the game end on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10; Etc.). Based on a predetermined operation, the game history including the current value of the total press counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the above-described encoding rule, and the third symbol display device 81 To be displayed. The displayed password is output to the server by the mobile terminal connected to the server. The server converts the password into information corresponding to the game history and updates the information corresponding to the operator of the connected mobile terminal. This allows the pachinko machine 10 and the server to share and update individual information for each player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the change in which the continuous transformation effect is set depends on whether or not the number of operation valid periods in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of operation valid periods. Although the presentation mode (the set number of operation effective periods and the mode of the extended presentation) in the display is configured to be variable, the threshold value for varying the presentation mode is not limited to 80% and may be arbitrarily determined. In the fifth embodiment, an effect mode that is set (easily set) when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the continuous transformation effect frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%, and a case where the ratio is 80% or less. Is switched to the effect mode (which is easy to set). However, the effect of the player may be more finely determined and the effect mode may be further subdivided. Specifically, for example, when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected is equal to or less than 20%, the continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set once is set, and the press of the frame button 22 is pressed. When the ratio of the operation valid period in which the operation valid period is detected exceeds 20% and is equal to or less than 40%, a continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set twice is set, and the operation valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is detected. When the ratio of the period exceeds 40% and is equal to or less than 60%, a continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set three times is set, and the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected is 6%. In the case where the ratio exceeds the percentage and is equal to or less than 80%, a continuous transformation effect in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is set to four times is set, and the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%. In the case, the number of times the operation validity period is set is 5 It may be configured to set up. That is, according to the player's tendency (participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect), one configuration may be set from among five types of effect modes in which the number of operation effective periods and the effect time of the advanced effect are different. . With this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect mode that more closely matches the tendency of each player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the tendency of the player is determined based on the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected. However, the method of determining the tendency of the player is limited to this. Not something. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with another effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the ratio of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the other effects is also taken into account. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22 (a tendency to participate in the continuous transformation effect).

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, as a specific winning opening (large opening) that is opened during execution of the jackpot game (privilege game), a single specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Was provided. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center lower part in the front view of the game board 13, the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the flow path provided on the left side in the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. Both the game ball fired toward (left-hit) and the game ball fired (right-hit) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view enter the ball. Had to be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, two types of specific winning ports having different benefits (number of prize balls) given when a game ball enters are provided. Specifically, a left specific winning opening 650La to which seven prize balls are given each time a game ball enters is provided on the left side of the area below the first entrance opening 64, and 10 prizes are provided. The right specific winning opening 650Ra to which the ball is provided is provided on the right side of the area below the first entering opening 64. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are provided in a symmetrical arrangement at the center lower part of the game board 13 in a front view. These two specific winning openings (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are set such that the game ball is normally difficult to enter, and when one of the jackpot rounds is started, one of the specific winning openings is specified. The winning opening is ready to enter the ball. Further, although the details will be described later, when each specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) is set to be able to enter the ball, the left-hit game ball is also hit right. The game balls are structured so that both can be entered. This allows the player to freely select a preferred firing direction during the jackpot, thereby improving the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 84, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment is deleted. Further, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side of the first entrance 64 in front view, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right of the first entrance 64 in front view. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable winning device 650L is provided with a left specific winning opening 650La through which a game ball can enter, on the left side in front view. When a game ball enters the left variable winning device 650L through the left specific winning opening 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning opening 650La is always open, so that a game ball reaching the left variable winning device 650L from the right in front view can always enter. However, a plurality of nails that form a slant in a downward rightward direction when viewed from the front of the left variable winning device are arranged, and most of the left-played game balls are below the first entrance 64 through the slant. , The game ball flows down and to the lower right in the region below the first entrance 64. That is, since the game ball flows down in a direction away from the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La in normal times. The arrangement of the nails and the like on the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetric, and a downward slant is formed above the right variable winning device 650R. However, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device are provided. Since it is sufficiently far from the device 650R, there is no possibility that a game ball that has been hit right and has flowed down the slope formed by the nail above the right variable winning device 650R will directly enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface provided with the opening) of the left variable winning device 650L is configured so that the upper side protrudes from the lower side to the right in front view. Thereby, even if the game ball flows down almost vertically from above, it can be more reliably prevented (suppressed) from entering the left specific winning opening 650Ra by being hindered by the protruding portion. Note that the right variable winning device 650R is the same as the left variable winning device 650L except that the arrangement is symmetrical to the left variable winning device 650L, and that ten prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Therefore, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, two variable members 650Lb, 650Rb capable of appearing and retracting (variable operation) on the near side and the far side in front view. Is provided. Since these variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are normally buried on the back side in front view (that is, buried on the back side of the base plate 60), the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb move to the area below the first entrance 64. The progress of the game ball flowing down is not hindered by the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, the variable member 650Lb forms a downward slant downward in front view by performing a protruding operation toward the near side in front view. Since the inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the right side of the left variable winning device 650L, the game ball that has flowed down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. In addition, the variable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation toward the near side in a front view, thereby forming an inclination downward in a lower right direction in a front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the left side surface of the right variable winning device 650R, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  In each round of the jackpot, since the variable member corresponding to the jackpot type projects toward the front side in front view, the game ball can easily enter a variable winning opening different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot A6 (16 rounds with a variable jackpot), the variable member 650Rb protrudes, so that the game ball is moved to the right specific winning opening 650Ra having a relatively large number of prize balls (ie, 10). It becomes easy to enter the ball. On the other hand, in each of the jackpot B6 (seven-variable variable jackpot) and the jackpot C6 (seven-hour jackpot), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, so that there are relatively few prize balls (that is, seven) on the left. Gaming balls can easily enter the specific winning opening 650La.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in a state where the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are both protruding (a state where they are disposed at the protruding positions), almost all of the game balls that have reached below the first ball entrance 64 from above. It is configured to be able to receive. Thus, in a state where either of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, both the left-hitting game ball and the right-hitting game ball are received by the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in a protruding state. Then, it is guided to the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La corresponding to the movable member 650Lb or the right specific winning opening 650Ra corresponding to the movable member 650Rb) from the inclination formed by the movable member. Therefore, both when the left movable member 650Lb is set to the big hit type in which the movable operation is performed (variable operation), and when the right movable member 650Rb is set to the big hit type in which the movable operation is performed (variable operation), the play direction of the game ball is changed. The game ball can be made to enter the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra) simply by continuously firing the gaming ball in the desired firing direction. . Therefore, every time a big hit occurs, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the big hit.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the jackpot game is changed according to the jackpot type. Then, regardless of the type of the special winning opening in which the game ball can enter, both the left-hit game ball and the right-hit game ball are guided to the specific winning opening in which the ball can enter. You. That is, two specific winning openings (a left specific winning opening 650La, a right specific winning) are provided for an area (an area below the first entrance 64) that can be reached by a left-hit game ball and a right-hit game ball. The opening 650Ra) is provided. Then, each movable member for guiding the game ball to each specific winning opening changes almost all the game balls reaching the area (specific area) below the first ball opening 64 to the corresponding specific winning opening. It is configured to operate variably so that it can be guided. This allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening regardless of the firing direction of the game ball during execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while any of the movable members is located at the protruding position, the firing intensity is such that the game ball can reach the game area (the firing intensity at which the game ball can fly beyond the return ball preventing member 68). Most of the launched game balls (game balls that reach a specific area without entering the first entrance port 64 or the general winning opening 63) can enter the specific winning port. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, the number of game balls that cannot flow into the specific winning opening (ball entry) and flow down to the out port 66 can be further reduced, so that the game efficiency during the execution of the jackpot game can be reduced. Can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In addition, the two specific winning openings are configured such that a privilege (the number of awarded payout balls) given when a game ball enters is different from each other. Then, the type of the specific winning opening in which the game ball can enter during the execution of the jackpot game is made different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. That is, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to which the game shifts after the execution of the jackpot game, the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given each time the ball enters the specific winning opening is also determined by the jackpot type. , The game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limit, but must be set within a range equal to or less than an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds). For this reason, there is a limit to making a difference in the awarded spherical surface paid out only by the number of rounds. Further, if the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is to be increased within the range of the upper limit value (16 rounds), the number of rounds of the jackpot for the relatively disadvantageous type must be reduced, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The longer the disadvantageous type jackpot period becomes, the shorter the time. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game or the like) or an audio effect (reproduction of a specific song or the like) during execution of the jackpot game, a disadvantageous type of jackpot occurs. In such a case, the execution of the jackpot game may end before the player sufficiently enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the number of rounds can be increased by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different awards (number of prize balls to be paid out) and by changing the specific winning openings that can enter the ball according to the type of jackpot. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without making the number too small (that is, while ensuring a sufficient execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game). More specifically, in the jackpot of the advantageous type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (ie, a right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (the number of winning balls) is set to be able to enter the ball. In a disadvantageous type jackpot, a specific winning port (ie, a left specific winning port 650La) having a small number of benefits (number of prize balls) to be granted in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of rounds of jackpots for disadvantageous types. Therefore, it is possible to add sharpness for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R) in the sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view when the left specific winning opening 650La of the left variable winning device 650L is in a state where a ball can be entered (winning), and FIG. 85 (b) is a right variable winning device. It is a front perspective view when the right specific winning opening 650Ra of 650R is in a state where it can enter a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in a state where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is in a state of protruding forward from the front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the portion of the movable member 650Lb that protrudes forward from the base plate 60 in front view forms a downward slope from upper right to lower left. The game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance opening 64 is guided to the lower left direction in front view where the left specific winning opening 650La is provided, and enters the left specific winning opening 650La. Can be. In addition, since the upper left side of the right specific winning opening 650Ra is closed by the movable member 650Lb, it is impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can enter, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball input port 64) is surely replaced with only the left specific winning opening 650La. You can enter the ball.

  On the other hand, in a state where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the movable member 650Rb projects toward the near side in front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the portion of the movable member 650Rb protruding forward from the base plate 60 in front of the base plate 60 forms a downward slope from upper left to lower right. The game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance 64 is guided to the lower right in front view where the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided, and enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be done. In addition, since the upper right side of the left specific winning opening 650La is closed by the movable member 650Rb, it is impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Therefore, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state in which the ball can enter, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is reliably replaced with the right specific winning opening 650Ra only. You can enter the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a detailed configuration of the above-described movable members 650Lb and 650Rb will be described. In the description of FIG. 86, the lower side of the figure indicates the near side direction of the game board 13, and the upper side indicates the far side direction of the game board 13. First, FIG. 86A is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86 (a), the movable member 650Lb is formed such that it protrudes from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape toward the back of the game board 13. , 650Lb4, and 650Lb4, respectively. Although not shown, these protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 have ends opposite to the base member 650Lb1 connected to a left variable winning device solenoid (not shown). By driving the solenoid for the left variable winning device (turning the solenoid on), the base member 650Lb1 is moved forward and forward through the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4, and is buried deep inside the base plate 60. From the base plate 60 to the front side of the base plate 60. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the left variable winning device is turned off, the base member 650Lb1 is moved rearward in front view, and is buried deep in the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), a cutout portion 650Lb5 is provided at the center of the base member 650Lb1 from the front side to the back side in front view, and only the connection portion 650Lb2 provided on the back side in front view is provided. Accordingly, the left side and the right side of the base member 650Lb1 are connected without separating. The width of the notch 650Lb5 is configured to be at least wider than the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Although the details will be described later, by engaging the movable member 650Rb with the notch 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be independently moved out and out without interfering with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the movable member 650Rb has the same shape as the movable member 650Lb, except that the direction (arrangement) of the notch 650Rb5 is opposite to that of the movable member 650Lb. The notch 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided in the base member 650Rb1 from the back side to the front side in the front view, and is connected to the left side of the base member 650Lb1 only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side in the front view. The right side is connected without separating. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member Rb cross each other and are housed behind the base plate 60. At this time, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are in a state where the notch portion 650Lb5 and the notch portion 650 are engaged. That is, the movable member 650Lb is accommodated in a state where the connecting portion 650Lb5 and the connecting portion 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb face each other. Such storage allows the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb to be stored in a relatively small space, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively utilized.

  FIG. 86B is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86B, when the movable member 650Rb performs the protruding operation, almost the entire base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed to the front side of the base plate 60. As a result, the base member 650Rb1 forms a downward slope toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance 64 is along the slope. The user is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  FIG. 86C is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the connection portion 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connection portion 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the operation proceeds. This protruding operation continues when the connecting portion 650Lb contacts the connecting portion 650Rb2, and when the connecting portions contact each other, the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is hindered and the operation stops. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the movable member 650Lb is in a state where at least the connecting portion 650Lb2 is housed at the back side of the base plate 60 at the projecting position. Even if a part of the base portion on the back side (a range including at least the connection portion 650Lb2) is housed, the game ball sufficiently passes through the range protruding forward from the base plate 60. The possible width is exposed. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific region (the region below the first entrance 64) is reliably moved to the left specific winning opening by the inclination formed by the base member 650Lb1. 650La.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, a first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), three types of big hits, big hits A6, B6, and C6, are defined in the first hit type selection table 202b of the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 87, “big hit A6” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”. "Big hit A6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and a special symbol probable change state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit A6" is reached, the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Rb changes to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit A6" has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of a special symbol which is more advantageous than the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set). The privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each ball entry also increases (to ten). Therefore, "big hit A6" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A6” are “0 to 4”. Since there are five jackpots, when a jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot A6” is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, “big hit B6” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 49”. “Big hit B6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds, and a special symbol positive change state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit B6" is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb is changed to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit B6" has a relatively small number of rounds, the game state after the end of the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of a special symbol that is more advantageous than the time saving state of a normal symbol is set), and the big hit is medium. The privilege (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) given for each ball entry is relatively small (to seven). Therefore, the "big hit B6" is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the big hit, but at least in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained in the big hit, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A6". Become. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B6” are “5 to 49”. Since there are 45 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot B6" is determined when the jackpot is won is 45% (45/100).

  Further, “big hit C6” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99”. The "big hit C6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given only until the change display of the special symbol 100 times after the big hit ends. Further, when the "big hit C6" is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb changes to the protruding position). For this reason, in the "big hit C6", the number of rounds is relatively small, the game state after the end of the big hit is disadvantageous, and the privilege (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each entry during the big hit is relatively small (7 Individual). Therefore, the "big hit C6" is most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the big hit and the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit C6” is “50 to 99”. Since there are 50 jackpots, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot C6” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment has not been changed except for the content of the first hit type selection table 202b, and a description of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa is added. I have.

  The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the movable member that is movable (projected) in each round of the jackpot. When a big hit occurs, data indicating a movable member corresponding to the big hit type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot A6 is determined, “01H” indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while either the jackpot B6 or C6 is stored. If this is determined, “02H” indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322 and S323 in FIG. 88). During the execution of the jackpot game, every time a new round starts, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified, and the projecting operation of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (FIG. 89). S1021). The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa has an initial value set to “00H”, and is reset to the initial value even at the end of the big hit (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value “00H” means that the jackpot game is not being executed (that is, the type of the movable member is not specified).

<Control processing of main controller in sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. First, with reference to FIG. 88, a special symbol change start process 6 (S221) according to the sixth embodiment will be described. This special symbol change start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Similar to the symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed. This is a process for performing (acceptance determination) and determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S301 to S311, each of the special symbol variation start processes (see FIG. 24) of S301 to S311 in the first embodiment is performed. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after the display mode according to the jackpot type is set in the process of S306 (S306), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A6. It is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A6 (S321: No), and “02H” indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S321). S322), the process proceeds to S307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S321 that the current jackpot type is the jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), “01H” indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S323). Then, the process proceeds to S307. The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa in each process of S322 and S323 is referred to when a new round is started in the jackpot, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the projecting position. You.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S921). The jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 31). As in the case of ()), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, the processing is for performing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of the special winning opening.

  Among the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016, the jackpot control process (FIG. 31), the same processes as those in S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1004 that the start timing of a new round has come (S1004: Yes), the movable type storage area 203aa is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa. A projecting operation of the movable member corresponding to the stored data is set (S1021). More specifically, when “01H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, a setting is made such that a protruding operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that a ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. . On the other hand, when “02H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the movable member 650Lb is set so as to be able to enter the left specific winning opening 650La by setting the projecting operation of the movable member 650Lb. Upon completion of the process in S1021, the process proceeds to S1006.

  In the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1007 that the condition for closing the large opening (specific winning opening) is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the movable state is determined. The burying operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and the process ends. That is, when “01H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the setting is such that the immersion operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that it is impossible to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, when “02H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersion operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La.

  In the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 ends, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is reset to “00H” (S1024). ) And the process moves to S1016. According to the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89), the variable operation of each movable member is performed so that the specific winning port corresponding to the jackpot type can be entered among the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra. Can be appropriately controlled.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which two specific winning ports (left specific winning port 650La and right specific winning port 650Ra) having different privileges given to the specific area are provided. In addition, the specific winning opening that can enter the ball is varied according to the jackpot type. More specifically, by performing a protruding operation, a movable member 650Lb that forms a slope that guides the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the left specific winning opening 650La, and the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area is rightward. A movable member 650Rb that forms an inclination for guiding to the specific winning opening 650Ra is provided between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the jackpot types (jackpots B6 and C6) in which the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to perform the projecting operation in each round of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the big hit type (big hit A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to perform the projecting operation in each round of the big hit.

  Each of the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb is configured to have a width capable of receiving almost all of the game balls that have flowed down to the specific region in the state where the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions. For this reason, in a state where any of the movable members is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area can be almost certainly made to enter the corresponding specific winning opening. Here, the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) can reach almost all game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 63 or the first entrance 64, regardless of the firing direction. Is configured. That is, almost all (90% or more) of the left-hitting game ball and the right-hitting game ball reach the specific area. Therefore, regardless of whether the left movable member 650Lb is in the jackpot type arranged at the projecting position or the right movable member 650Rb is in the jackpot type arranged at the projecting position, regardless of the firing direction of the game ball, The game ball can be made to enter a specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). Therefore, each time a big hit occurs, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the big hit.

  In the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a surface on which a game ball can enter (left specific winning opening 650La, The right specific winning opening 650Ra) is arranged so as to be opposed. Each movable member forms a downward slope toward each specific winning opening, thereby forming a state in which game balls can enter each specific winning opening. In other words, each specific winning opening is provided in a direction in which the game ball does not normally advance, and it is possible to enter each specific winning opening by changing the moving direction of the game ball to a direction different from the normal by each movable member. State. Thereby, the configuration of the special winning opening 65a of the above-described first embodiment or the like (provided in the middle of the flow path in which the game ball also travels in the normal state, so that most of the game ball flowing down the flow path flows in Each specific winning opening can be made more compact than in the case of an open structure. That is, since each specific winning opening can be configured to have an area equal to or more than one game ball and less than two gaming balls, the area of the specific winning opening can be reduced. Therefore, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area of the two variable winning devices shown on the board can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of large winning ports (specific winning ports) that are opened and closed during execution of a jackpot game, each large winning port is provided with a flow path provided with the large winning port. It is general to be configured to be openable with substantially the same width as. In addition, a plurality of winning prize openings are arranged side by side in the vertical direction when viewed from the front in one flow path, and the game spheres are placed in any of the winning prize openings simply by continuously firing game balls to the same flow path during the jackpot. It is general that it is configured to be able to enter a ball. However, in this configuration, since the installation area increases as the number of the winning holes increases, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board configuration is reduced. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be compactly configured, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the two specific winning openings (the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are a privilege (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) given when game balls enter each other. Are configured differently. Then, the type of the specific winning opening in which the game ball can enter during the execution of the jackpot game is made different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. That is, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to which the game shifts after the execution of the jackpot game, the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given each time the ball enters the specific winning opening is also determined by the jackpot type. , The game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limit, but must be set within a range equal to or less than an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds). For this reason, there is a limit to making a difference in the awarded spherical surface paid out only by the number of rounds. Further, if the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is to be increased within the range of the upper limit value (16 rounds), the number of rounds of the jackpot for the relatively disadvantageous type must be reduced, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The longer the disadvantageous type jackpot period becomes, the shorter the time. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game or the like) or an audio effect (reproduction of a specific song or the like) during execution of the jackpot game, a disadvantageous type of jackpot occurs. In such a case, the execution of the jackpot game may end before the player sufficiently enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the number of rounds can be increased by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different awards (number of prize balls to be paid out) and by changing the specific winning openings that can enter the ball according to the type of jackpot. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without making the number too small (that is, while ensuring a sufficient execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game). More specifically, in the jackpot of the advantageous type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (ie, a right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (the number of winning balls) is set to be able to enter the ball. In a disadvantageous type jackpot, a specific winning port (ie, a left specific winning port 650La) having a small number of benefits (number of prize balls) to be granted in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of rounds of jackpots for disadvantageous types. Therefore, it is possible to add sharpness for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, an independent drive source is provided for each movable member. However, a single drive source may be used to control the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. More specifically, for example, only one motor is provided as a drive source, and the motor is driven in the forward direction (first direction) in a state where each movable member 650Lb is disposed at the immersion position (immersion position). By doing so, only the movable member 650Lb moves toward the projecting position, while driving the motor in the negative direction (second direction), so that only the movable member 650Rb moves toward the projecting position. May be. That is, two types of gears are provided for the rotating shaft of one motor: a left tilt gear for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Lb, and a right tilt gear for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Rb. In addition, the gears for tilting the left are arranged such that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the forward direction at the retracted position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the movable member 650Lb side and the gear for tilting to the left engage only when the motor rotates forward. In addition, the gears for tilting the right are arranged in such a manner that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction at the retracted position of each movable member. In other words, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the movable member 650Rb side and the right tilt gear are engaged only when the motor rotates in the negative direction. With this configuration, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be separately moved by one drive source, so that the number of components can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is arranged below the first entrance 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a game ball that is right-handed in a state where any movable member is disposed at the protruding position is used. , May be configured to be guided to almost a specific winning opening. Conversely, each variable winning device is configured to be provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and left-handed in a state where any movable member is arranged at the protruding position. You may comprise so that a game ball may be almost entirely guided to a specific winning opening. Since the right flow path and the left flow path of the variable display device unit 80 have a smaller space than the area below the first ball entrance 64, each variable winning device and each movable member are placed on the board. The occupied area can be made smaller. In this case, the width and the inclination angle of each movable member may be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is protruded, so that the specific winning opening is provided. The game ball reaching the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming a slope toward the specific entrance.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a single moving member 650b capable of moving in parallel in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is provided between the two specific winning openings in the specific area instead of the two movable members. As will be described later in detail, the moving member 650b has a left side inclined toward the lower left direction in front view, while a right side inclined toward the lower right direction in front view. In a case where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter a ball, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the left in front view to be adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, so that the moving member 650b is tilted on the left side. A game ball can be guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. Conversely, in the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the right direction as viewed from the front, so that the moving member 650b is inclined rightward to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball is configured to be movable. As described above, by moving the single movable member 650b in parallel to the left and right, the number of solenoids for driving various movable members can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  The board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 90, the game board 13 in this modification is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in that a moving member 650b is used instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. They differ in that they are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b has a substantially triangular shape, and is normally stationary at the intermediate position of each specific winning opening (when a jackpot game is not being executed). In this state (see FIG. 90), a space is created between the moving member 650b and each specific winning opening, which is equal to or more than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific region (the region below the first ball entrance 64) in the normal state is the flow path between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning opening 650La, or the moving member 650b and the right specific winning. It flows down the flow path between the port 650Ra and is guided to the out port 66.

  Next, a detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 (a) is a top view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91 (b) is a front view of the moving member 650b. FIG. 91 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCI-XCI shown in FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), the moving member 650b is configured such that a horizontally long and substantially rectangular flat plate-shaped protruding portion 650bb protrudes from the rear side of a substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown, the protruding portion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction, so that the protruding portion 650bb moves leftward in front view with respect to the protruding portion 650bb. The driving force is transmitted, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the left in front view. When the moving member motor is driven in the negative direction, a driving force in the right direction in front view is transmitted to the protruding portion 650bb, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the right direction in front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2 each having a width of one game ball or more are provided on the right side of the moving member 650b in front view and the left side in front view. I have. The game ball that has reached the moving member 650b from above flows down along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

  FIG. 91D is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in FIG. 91D, the protruding portion 650bb of the moving member 650b is included in the back side of the base plate 60 via the left and right movement holes 650ba opened in the base plate 60. The end of the protruding portion 650bb on the far side in front view is connected to the moving member motor as described above. When a driving force in the left-right direction is applied to the moving member 650b by the moving member motor, the protrusion 650bb moves in the left-right direction along the left-right moving hole 650ba, so that the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left-right direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow-down direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a flowing direction of a game ball in a state in which the moving member 650b has moved parallel to the left direction as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left direction when viewed from the front and is in a state adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball reaching the specific area from the left direction (That is, a game ball hit left) falls on the left slope of the moving member 650b as viewed from the front, and flows down the slope to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R, and moves in the direction of the out opening 66. Flow down. Thereby, in a state where the moving member 650b has moved in the left direction in parallel, the game ball can enter only the left specific winning opening 650La.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b has moved parallel to the right in front view. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the moving member 650b moves parallel to the right in front view and is in a state adjacent to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball reaching the specific area from the right. (That is, a game ball hit right) falls on the right slope in the front view of the moving member 650b and flows down along the slope to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (that is, the game ball hit left) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L and moves toward the out opening 66. Flow down. Thereby, in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction, the game ball can be made to enter only the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment, instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, the single moving member 650b is translated in the left-right direction in parallel, so that the specific winning opening ( One of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) is configured to be in a state where the game ball can enter the ball. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the state of the two specific winning openings (switch between a state where ball entry is possible and a state where ball entry is difficult) with one drive source (motor for moving member). Therefore, the number of drive sources can be reduced as compared with the above-described sixth embodiment, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, during execution of the jackpot game, the game balls are guided to the specific winning opening on the side close to the moving member 650b by the inclination provided on the left and right sides of the moving member 650b. Just by visually recognizing the arrangement in the left-right direction, the player can easily understand the firing direction in which the game ball can easily enter. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right in front view and is in a state close to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the player can easily enter the game ball into the right specific winning opening 650Ra by performing a right hit. Can be ball. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left in front view and is in a state close to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball can easily enter the left specific winning opening 650La by performing a left hit. Can be ball.

  In this modification, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a game ball can enter. The surfaces (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are arranged to face each other. Thus, as in the sixth embodiment, the area of each specific winning opening may be at least one game ball, and the area of the specific winning opening can be reduced. That is, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area that the two variable winning devices show on the board can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration can be increased.

  In the modification of the sixth embodiment, each specific winning opening is arranged in the left-right direction, and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the left-right direction between each specific winning opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, each specific winning opening may be arranged in the vertical direction, and the moving member 650b may be configured to be vertically movable from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. In this case, the inclination of the side of the moving member 650b opposite to the side on which the specific winning opening is arranged may be deleted. With this configuration, the area occupied by the variable winning devices and the moving member 650b on the board can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning opening is in the flowing direction of the game ball (vertical direction in front view). By arranging them so as to be orthogonal to each other, it has been configured to prevent (suppress) a game ball from entering a specific winning opening at a normal time (a state other than during the execution of the big hit game). , But is not limited to this. For example, an opening and closing door for opening and closing each specific winning opening may be provided separately from the movable member. Then, in the jackpot gaming state, only the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening / closing plate attached to the specific winning opening that facilitates the guiding of the game ball reaching the specific area by the movable member) may be opened. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a prize ball from being paid out even when the game ball does not enter the special prize port and is not in the jackpot game state at normal times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole. In this case, the movable member may be configured to be movable periodically or randomly regardless of the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve a gaming property of firing a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily guided by the movable member to the specific winning opening with the opening / closing door opened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the case of realizing this playability, the player understands to which specific winning opening the game ball can be easily guided by using the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment. Because it is easier, it is more effective. The period during which the movable member is moved periodically or randomly may be performed only during the execution of the jackpot game, or the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be continuously moved while the power is turned on. Is also good. In the case where the opening and closing door is provided for each specific winning opening in the modification of the sixth embodiment described above, the arrangement of the moving member 650b is set to an intermediate position between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Rb. And by tilting each opening / closing door in the direction of the moving member 650b, a side surface of the moving member 650b and the tilted opening / closing door form a flow path toward a specific winning opening. Each specific winning opening may be configured to be able to enter a ball. With this configuration, the width in which the game balls can be guided to the corresponding specific winning opening is widened in a state where the ball can enter each specific winning opening, thereby reducing the possibility of generating useless balls. can do. Therefore, the profit of the player can be increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, when a game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra, ten prize balls are paid out, while when the game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La, Although the configuration is such that seven prize balls are paid out, the amount of privilege given when a game ball enters each specific winning opening can be arbitrarily determined. In this case, the number of prize balls given when entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra does not necessarily need to be greater than the number of prize balls given when entering the left specific winning opening 650La. . For example, the number of award balls to be awarded may be matched, or the number of award balls to be awarded may be greater when entering the left specific winning opening 650La than when entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Good. Further, the privilege given when the ball enters each specific winning opening is not limited to the prize ball. For example, if a game ball enters one specific winning opening during execution of a jackpot game, only the prize ball is paid out, while if a game ball enters the other specific winning opening, a prize is won. Instead of or in addition to the ball being paid out, a configuration may be such that a specially changed state of the special symbol is given as a privilege after the end of the jackpot.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the configuration is such that two specific winning ports are provided in the specific area, and the specific winning ports that can enter the ball are switched according to the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, one or both of the two specific winning openings provided in the specific area may be used as the entrance (second entrance) serving as a trigger for a special symbol lottery. That is, at least one of the two specific winning openings may be constituted by a second opening having the same function as the first opening 64. In this case, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (moving member 650b) may be configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern when a win is made in a normal symbol lottery. In the case where the combination is changed to the combination of the specific winning opening and the second winning opening, the condition that each winning opening (the specific winning opening and the second winning opening) can enter the ball can be satisfied at the same time. Like the movable member in the sixth embodiment, it is preferable that the movable member for forming a state in which each winning opening can enter the ball can be operated independently. The through gate 67 is set so that the game ball can always pass through it, and the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed during the execution of the big hit game in the same manner as in the normal case. Therefore, during the round game of each round of the jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning opening is located at the protruding position), it becomes a hit by the lottery of the normal symbol, and the movable member corresponding to the second ball opening protrudes. The condition to move to the position may be satisfied. For this reason, if a movable member that can form a state in which only one entrance can enter the ball, such as the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment, is adopted, at least one of the prizes is won. A problem may occur that the state in which the ball can enter the mouth cannot be achieved even though the condition that the ball can enter the mouth is satisfied. Therefore, as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which separate movable members corresponding to each winning opening can be independently controlled to move, each winning opening can enter the ball. Even if the conditions are satisfied in duplicate, the movable members corresponding to each winning opening can be simultaneously moved. It is possible to suppress a problem that it is not possible to enter a state in which a ball can be entered, even though a condition that allows the ball to enter at least one of the winning ports is satisfied.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, two specific winning openings are arranged in the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) so as to face left and right, and head toward each specific winning opening. Although the configuration was such that the game ball that reached the specific area was guided to the corresponding specific winning opening by forming a slope, the arrangement of the specific winning opening and the configuration for causing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening are: However, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, with the same configuration as the variable prize winning device 65 in the first embodiment, two variable prize winning devices having different numbers of prize balls may be vertically arranged in a specific area. Then, the specific winning opening that is opened according to the jackpot type may be made different.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the specific winning opening that can enter the ball is made different according to the type of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the specific winning ports that can enter the ball are made different according to the number of jackpot rounds. Thereby, the degree of freedom of control can be further increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are configured to face each other. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening La are arranged side by side, and the left specific winning opening 650La is configured to face right when viewed from the front, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra is configured to face left when viewed from the front. It is not necessary to face each specific winning opening. While the movable member 650Lb is located at the protruding position, it is possible to enter the ball (easy entry), and while the movable member 650Rb is located at the protruding position, and when each movable member is at the immersion position (immersion position). A left specific winning opening 650La is provided at a position where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball) while being arranged, and the ball can be entered while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position (entering the ball). Easy) and at the position where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball) while the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position and while each movable member is arranged at the buried position (immersion position). Any structure may be used as long as the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided. As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the spherical surface of the left specific winning opening 650La and the spherical surface of the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be arranged in parallel. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific winning opening 650La formed of a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 is provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and on the lower right side of the movable member 650Rb. The right specific winning opening 650Ra constituted by a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 may be provided. In addition, with respect to the periphery of each specific winning opening, both the person guiding the game ball flowing down the movable member to the specific winning opening in a state where the corresponding movable member is arranged at the protruding position, the corresponding movable member is Outer edges 650La1 and 650Ra1 may be provided for preventing (suppressing) a game ball flowing down in a state where the game ball is placed at the immersion position (burial position) from reaching the specific winning opening. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially inverted “U” -shaped peripheral portion 650La1 is provided around the left specific winning opening 650La. The game ball flowing down at the normal time is prevented from reaching the left specific winning opening 650La by the upper side and the left side of the peripheral portion 650La1. Further, in a state where the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower left through the movable member 650Lb is formed from the upper right side in the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral portion 650La1 to the lower left side. The inclination to the side leads to the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially “U” -shaped peripheral portion 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball that has flowed down during normal times is prevented from reaching the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the upper side and the right side of the peripheral portion 650Ra1. Further, in a state where the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower right direction via the movable member 650Rb is viewed from the upper left in front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral portion 650Ra1. The inclination to the lower right side leads to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As described above, even if the right specific winning opening 650La and the left specific winning opening 650Ra are not configured to face each other, it is possible to realize the same gaming properties as in the sixth embodiment described above.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modified example, in each round of the jackpot, the corresponding movable member is moved to the protruding position, so that the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, and the right specific winning opening is determined. Although the state in which the ball can enter the 650Ra is formed, the invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a state in which a ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650La and a state in which a ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be switched according to the passage of a game ball. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a movable member that structurally switches the state (arrangement) every time the game ball passes is provided, or a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided, so that controllability can be obtained. May be realized.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described sixth embodiment, two specific prize holes (left region) in which the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the specific region (region below the first ball entrance 64) are different from each other. A specific winning opening 650La and a right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and the type of the specific winning opening that can be entered in each round of the big hit is varied according to the big hit type.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that after the big jackpot is completed, the certain game is changed. Two probable variable winning prize ports (left probable variable winning prize port 655La and right probable variable winning prize port 655Ra) are provided to trigger a state (probably changed state of special symbol and reduced time of ordinary design). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probability change winning ports is set to be capable of entering the ball for a predetermined period (for example, one second). That is, when one movable member is moved to the protruding position, a slope is formed which is directed downward toward one of the positive change winning ports. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95, in this first round, during a predetermined period (one second) during which one of the positive change winning prize holes can enter the ball, a game ball that has been right-hitted and has reached the specific area, One of the game balls left-hit and reaching the specific area can enter the probability change winning opening, and the other is constituted by a period during which it is difficult to enter the ball. For this reason, in the first round of the jackpot, a novel playability can be achieved in which the player predicts the launch direction in which the player can enter the probability change winning opening and launches the game ball.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in place of the left variable winning device 650L. The point where the positive variable winning device 655L is provided, the right variable winning device 655R is provided instead of the right variable winning device 650R, and the variable winning below the area where the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are provided. The only difference is that the device 65 is provided.

  The left certain winning prize device 655L and the right certain winning prize device 655R are provided with a left certain winning prize opening 655La and a right certain winning prize opening 655Ra having the same shape as the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, respectively. I have. For this reason, the game ball that has reached the specific area in the normal state (a state other than during the execution of the jackpot game) does not enter the left probable winning prize port 655La or the right probable winning prize port 655Ra and the out port 66 does not enter. Flow down in the direction of. In the state where the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the movable member 650Lb forms an inclination toward the left certainty winning opening 655La (a slope from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front). The game ball that has arrived is guided to the left probable winning prize port 655La. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 650Rb protrudes, the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination toward the right likelihood winning opening 655Ra (incline downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction). The game ball that has arrived at is guided to the right-variable winning winning port 655Ra. As described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position only for one second (a predetermined period) in one round, and therefore, while any of the movable members is disposed at the protruding position. Even if the game ball reaches the specific area, if the corresponding probable winning prize port cannot be reached within one second after being placed at the protruding position, the movable member may be immersed. As a result, the game ball flows down in the direction of the out port 66.

  The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 of the first embodiment and the like. That is, a specific winning opening 65a in which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid for opening and closing the lower opening of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The specific winning opening 65a in the seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which a game ball can enter in each round after the second round of the jackpot. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to the protruding position for one second in accordance with the jackpot type. On the other hand, in each of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are maintained in a state of being immersed, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is opened forward to the specific winning opening 65a. And an open state in which the game ball can enter. This open state continues until 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, or until 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. In the first round of the jackpot, a game ball enters one of the probability change winning prize mouths (left probability change prize mouth 655La or right probability change prize mouth 655Ra). In addition, if a game ball does not enter the probability change winning port even once during the execution of the jackpot game while the normal symbol time reduction state is given, 100 time reduction game states (special A low probability state of the symbol and a normal symbol time reduction state) are given. Therefore, the degree of advantage after the end of the jackpot varies depending on whether or not a game ball enters the probability change winning opening, so that the game ball enters the probability change entrance for the first round for the player. It can be noticed depending on whether or not. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the left-probable variable winning device 655L and the right-probable variable winning device 655R will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is an enlarged front view of a specific area portion of the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 94 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCIV-XCIV shown in FIG. 94 (a). As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the left-probability changing winning device 655L and the right-probability changing winning device 655R are connected on the back side of the base plate 60. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), a game ball provided in the left-probability winning prize port 655La is guided to the rear side of the base plate 60 and discharged therefrom. The left probable variable flow path 655Ld for performing the game and the right probable variable flow path 655Rd for guiding the game ball entering the right probable winning award 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharging the game ball are on the back side of the base plate 60. At. Further, at a position where the left probable variable flow path 655Ld and the right probable variable flow path 655Rd join, a discharge port 656 for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. Although not shown, the outlet 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (probable change switch) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. By detecting the passage of the probability change switch, it is determined that the game ball has entered any one of the probability change winning ports, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change game state.

  As described above, the probability change winning devices are merged inside, and the game ball entering a certain probability change winning hole is discharged through one discharge port 656, and further, the passage of the one discharge port is monitored. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the probability change winning ports, thereby minimizing the number of probability change switches. That is, in the case where a probable change switch is provided for each probable change winning device, at least two probable change switches must be provided. It can be accurately determined that the game ball has entered one of the two. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of the probability change switches. In addition, by joining the probability change winning devices internally, it is possible to handle as one winning device. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of winning devices that can enter the ball during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, as in the seventh embodiment, by using two positive change winning devices as one winning device, the number of winning devices in the game rules can be reduced, so that the game rules can be more easily satisfied. A pachinko machine 10 can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, in the seventh embodiment, in the case of the jackpot type in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position in the first round of the jackpot, the downflow direction of the game ball in the first round explain. For the sake of simplicity, in the following description, a movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position will be referred to as an “opening pattern” which means that it is easy to win the left positive variable winning opening 655La. Open pattern ”. On the other hand, a movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, which is an opening pattern in which the right probable winning opening 655Ra can be easily won, is referred to as a “right V opening pattern”.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the right V release pattern (the movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position) is determined and the player makes a left hit. is there. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), a left-hit game ball falls on the movable member 650Rb from the front left direction with respect to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb has a downward slope from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, the downward momentum (momentum in the lower left direction) of the game ball is not reduced. Therefore, during the one second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, it is possible to relatively easily make the ball enter the right certainty winning opening 655Ra.

  FIGS. 95 (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the downward flow of the game ball when the right V release pattern is determined and the player makes a right hit. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the right-hit game ball falls onto the movable member 650Rb from the right side in front view with respect to the specific area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), since the game ball has a momentum (momentum) directed to the left in front view, the moment until the momentum is reduced (the momentum becomes zero). , And rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the momentum of the rolling in the upper left direction disappears due to the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb (the momentum becomes zero), the game ball rolls to the lower right direction in front view along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. To start. However, it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the momentum of the game ball becomes 0, and thereafter, the momentum gradually accelerates from the state of 0 and reaches the right positive variable winning prize port 655Ra. Just no time left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), one second passes while the game ball rolls on the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right direction in front view, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. That is, since the inclination of the direction toward the right probable prize port 655Ra is lost, the game ball rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the out port 66. For this reason, if the player makes a right hit when the right V release pattern is determined, the movable member 650Rb reaches the right positive change winning prize port 655Ra within one second while the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position. It will be extremely difficult to do so.

  It should be noted that when the left V release pattern is determined, the operation is the same as the right V release pattern, except that the left and right operations are reversed from the right V release pattern. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted and briefly described, when a right hit is performed in a case where the left V opening pattern is determined, the game ball has a momentum from the right to the left in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the player advances in the state, the player enters the left probable winning opening 655La along the inclination of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum (winning). On the other hand, if a left hit is performed when the left V release pattern is determined, the game ball advances with a momentum from the left to the right in front view with respect to the specific area. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction on the slope formed by the movable member 650Lb for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down along the slope in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, as in the case where the right V release pattern is determined and the player strikes right (see FIGS. 95 (b) and (c)), the movable member 650Lb is immersed before reaching the left certainty winning opening 655La. Thus, the game ball flows down to the out port 66.

  Here, the gaming board 13 of the seventh embodiment has a period of about one second until the launched game ball reaches the specific area regardless of whether the player hits the ball left or right. It costs. Therefore, in the method of firing the game ball after confirming the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball is not reached before reaching the specific region or immediately after reaching the specific region. After one second, the movable member is returned to the immersion position. In other words, even if the game ball is fired after the type of the movable member is confirmed, it is impossible to make the game ball enter the probability change winning port. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, for a player who wants to enter a game ball into the probability change winning prize mouth, any of the movable members is moved to the projecting position before the movable member is moved to the projecting position. The type of the movable member is predicted, and the game ball can be fired in the predicted firing direction. Thus, if the movable member predicted by the player to be located at the protruding position and the movable member actually located at the protruding position match, the game ball can be inserted into the positive change winning prize port. On the other hand, when the movable member opposite to the prediction is arranged at the projecting position, it becomes difficult to cause the game ball to enter the certain variance winning opening. Therefore, in the first round of each big hit, the type of the movable member disposed at the protruding position (the firing direction in which the ball easily enters the probable entry ball opening) is more seriously predicted and the game ball is fired. Since a novel playability can be provided, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the big hit of the left V opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position) in the first round. The rate at which the type is determined is higher than the rate at which the big hit type of the right V open pattern (open pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position) is determined. On the other hand, the average round number of each jackpot type in which the left V opening pattern is set is smaller than the average round number of each jackpot type in which the right V opening pattern is set. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, by right-handing each time, the probability change game state is given after the end of the jackpot at a high rate (70% rate), but the jackpot of a relatively large number of rounds (10 or more rounds) When the type is determined, the probability change game state ends at a high rate. On the other hand, when a game method of predicting an opening pattern and changing a firing direction is performed each time, a transition to a certain-variable game state is determined, and a bigger number of rounds (10 rounds or 16 rounds) is played. May be very advantageous for the player, but depending on the accuracy of the prediction of the player, the rate of transition to the probable change game state is significantly reduced (for example, a rate of 50% or less). ).

  With this configuration, it is possible to switch the game method in the first round of the jackpot according to what element the player gives priority to the jackpot. More specifically, for the player who gives the highest priority to the rate at which the probable change game state is set (priority is given), a right hit is performed each time in the first round of the jackpot, and a high rate of about 70% Can select a game method to which a certain change state is given. On the other hand, for a player who wants to make the jackpot of a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (the number of rounds is also more advantageous, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is more advantageous), It is possible to predict whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot of a large number of rounds, and to select a game method in which the launch direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for a jackpot that is won in a normal state (a so-called first hit), a right-handed operation is performed while emphasizing the set ratio of the probability-change gaming state, while a jackpot that is won during a probability-change gaming state (a so-called retreat) The game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction for the hit, and the initial hit predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction. The player can select various game methods, such as a game method of right-handing with emphasis on the ratio of playing. Therefore, it is possible to select a favorite game property for each player and play the game, so that it is possible to realize a wide range of game properties suited to different tastes for each player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can be used by everyone can be realized, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when a big hit occurs, a display area HR8 and a display area HR9 each having a horizontally-long and substantially rectangular shape are formed in the upper left part and the upper right part in the main display area Dm. Inside the display area HR9, a character "big hit" indicating that a big hit game is currently being executed is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand that the big hit game is being executed.

  Further, inside the display area HR8, various information indicating the progress status of the jackpot (display indicating the current round number, the maximum round number, the total number of prize balls acquired in one jackpot, and the number of obtainable prize balls) are displayed. Display indicating the maximum number of prize balls) is displayed. During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained are kept secret from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, “ROUND: 01 / ???” is displayed as a display indicating the number of rounds, and “GET: 0000 / ???” is displayed as a display indicating the number of award balls. Is done. This is because if the maximum number of rounds or the maximum number of prize balls is displayed first, the type of jackpot is recognized by the player who has visually recognized the displayed content, and the type of movable movable member (probable change winning prize) This is because there is a possibility that the firing direction in which the ball can enter the mouth) may also be specified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, information that can identify the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls, is kept secret until at least one round is completed. This eliminates the need for the player to specify the type of the movable member that can be moved to the protruding position, so that the type of the movable member that can be moved to the protruding position (e.g. (The firing direction in which the ball can be made) can be selected. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) for prompting the player to select whether to perform left-handed or right-handed is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, a display area HR10 is formed substantially at the center of the main display area Dm, and the character “select!” Is displayed inside the display area HR10. In addition, below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (left half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR11 in which the character “Expectation Low” is displayed, and “the number of rounds” A display area 12 of a horizontally long and substantially elliptical shape on which a character “High” is displayed, a character “left” is displayed, and a leftward arrow image YG1 imitating a leftward arrow is displayed. On the other hand, below the display area HR9 of the main display area Dm (right half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR13 displaying the character “Expectation High” and “Round” are displayed. A horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR14 on which a character "number Low" is displayed, a character "right-handed" is displayed, and a rightward arrow image YG2 imitating a rightward arrow is displayed.

  According to these display contents, if left-handed, the expectation that the game ball will enter the probability change winning opening is low, but if the game ball enters, it may be a big hit with a large number of rounds Is high for the player. In addition, if you make a right-handed hit, although there is a high degree of expectation that game balls will enter the probability change winning opening, it is highly likely that a type of jackpot with a small number of rounds will be hit if game balls enter. Can be understood by the player. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each launch direction, it is possible to launch the game ball by predicting the launch direction in which it is possible to enter the probability change winning opening, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  Next, an opening pattern that can be set for each movable member in the first round of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change of the movable position of each movable member when the right V opening pattern is set, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the left V opening pattern set. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a temporal change of a movable position of each movable member in a case.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the right V release pattern is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the projecting position one second after the start of one round. The state where the movable member 650Rb protrudes continues for one second, and when one second elapses after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb is buried inside the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Rb is maintained in the buried state until the big hit ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the movable member 650Lb is kept buried consistently during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when one round is started, a selection effect (see FIG. 96) is started. More specifically, when the start timing of one round is reached and the main controller 110 outputs a number-of-rounds command indicating the start of the first round to the audio ramp controller 113, the main controller 113 issues a display control command. The apparatus 114 is instructed to start the execution of the selected effect. When the player who has visually recognized the selected effect makes a left hit, a game ball can enter the right probability change winning opening 655Ra via the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, when the player who has visually recognized the selected effect makes a right strike, the movable member 650Rb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the right sure change winning prize port 655Ra. Cannot enter 655Ra.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the left V release pattern is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the projecting position one second after the start of one round. The state where the movable member 650Lb protrudes continues for one second, and when one second elapses after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is buried inside the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Lb is kept in a buried state until the big hit ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a state of being continuously buried during the big hit. When the player who has visually recognized the selected effect displayed from the start of the first round makes a right-handed game, the player moves to the left positive change winning prize port 655La via the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the protruding position. The ball can enter. On the other hand, when the player who has visually recognized the selected effect makes a left hit, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the left certainty winning opening 655La. Cannot enter 655La.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 98A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11A) in the open pattern. The difference is that a table 202aa is added. Another difference is that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described sixth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The open pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines a variable operation to be set for the movable member in each open pattern (right V open pattern and left V open pattern). At the start of the first round of the big hit, the data for the open pattern corresponding to the current big hit type is read from the open pattern table 202aa and set as the variable operation of the movable member (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101). ).

  Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), “big hit A7” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see FIG. 98 (b)). 202b1). The “big hit A7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is the largest, 16 rounds, and the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit A7”. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot A7" is determined as the jackpot type is 5% (5/100).

  For the range of the first hit type counter C2 of “5 to 29”, “big hit B7” is defined in association with the value (see 202b2 in FIG. 98B). The "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and is the second largest after the "big hit A7", and the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit B7”, so In this case, the rate at which "big hit B7" is determined as the big hit type is 25% (25/100).

  In addition, "big hit C7" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69" (see 202b3 in FIG. 98 (b)). This “big hit C7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds, which is smaller than “big hit A7” or “big hit B7”, and the left V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with "big hit C7". In this case, the rate at which "big hit C7" is determined as the big hit type is 40% (40/100).

  In addition, "big hit D7" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89" (see 202b4 in FIG. 98 (b)). The "big hit D7" has five rounds and is a big hit type having the second smallest number of rounds among all the big hit types. “Big hit D7” is a big hit type in which a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit D7”, so In this case, the rate at which "big hit D7" is determined as the big hit type is 20% (20/100).

  In addition, “big hit E7” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 98B). This “big hit E7” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is the smallest, ie, two rounds, and a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit E7”, so In this case, the rate at which “big hit E7” is determined as the big hit type is 10% (10/100).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when “big hit A7” or “big hit B7” is set, the opening pattern of the right V is set, while “big hit C7” to “big hit E7”. In this case, the left V opening pattern is set. Since the rate at which either "big hit A7" (sorting 5%) or "big hit B7" (sorting 25%) is determined is 30%, the rate at which the right V opening pattern is set (30%) is , The left V opening pattern is set lower (70%). Therefore, for the player who gives the most importance (priority) to the rate at which the probable change game state is set, by right-handing each time in the first round of the jackpot, the probable change state is as high as about 70%. A game method to be provided can be selected. On the other hand, for a player who wants to make the jackpot of a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (the number of rounds is also more advantageous, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is more advantageous), It is possible to predict whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot of a large number of rounds, and to select a game method in which the launch direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for a jackpot that is won in a normal state (a so-called first hit), a right-handed operation is performed while emphasizing the set ratio of the probability-change gaming state, while a jackpot that is won during a probability-change gaming state (a so-called retreat) The game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction for the hit, and the initial hit predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction. The player can select various game methods, such as a game method of right-handing with emphasis on the ratio of playing. Therefore, it is possible to select a favorite game property for each player and play the game, so that it is possible to realize a wide range of game properties suited to different tastes for each player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can be used by everyone can be realized, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 98C, the RAM 203 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the above-described sixth embodiment (see FIG. 87B) in that a probable variable setting flag 203ba and a probable variable passage counter are provided. 203bb, a winning counter 203bc, a remaining ball timer flag 203bd, a remaining ball timer 203be, and a discharge counter 203bf are added.

  The probability change setting flag 203ba is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the probability change winning port during the jackpot game. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the above-described probable change switch provided at the outlet 656, the probable change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 102). Note that the probability change setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  When the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch before the power-off is cut off, and it is determined that the game ball has passed. , The probable change setting flag 203ba may be officially set to ON and the process may return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed the probability change switch before the power is turned off, based on whether a value of a probability variation passage counter 203bb described later is greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203ba in the state where the power is cut off, and reduce damage to the hole.

  The probability change passage counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch after one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) is completed. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the probability change winning port in the first round have been discharged based on the sum of the probability change passage counter 203bb and the discharge number counter 203bf described later. The probability variable passage counter 203bb is updated by adding a value one by one every time the probability variation switch is detected during a predetermined period (a so-called ball throwing period) after one round is completed (S1409 in FIG. 104). ). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the probability change winning opening matches the number of discharges, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1415 in FIG. 104). It is to be noted that the probability change passage counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the certain winning port 655La, 655Ra, or the specific winning port 65a in each round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the ball-in detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-described variable switch provided in the variable winning device, It is updated by being added one by one (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device (the sum of the value of the winning number counter 203bc and the variable passing counter 203bb) and the number of discharged (the number of discharged) After it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203bf) matches, the value is reset to “0”, which is the initial value (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of the winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203bd indicates a ball ejection period for discharging the remaining game balls when the game balls remain inside the variable prize device 65 or the probability change prize device at the time when the round ends. Is a flag indicating whether or not. When the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203be described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

  The remaining ball timer 203be sets the variable prize device 65 or the variable prize device (the left varieties prize device) at the point in time when one round has ended and the specific prize port 65a or the variable prize ports 655La and 655Ra are changed to a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. 655L, right probable prize device 655R) is a counter for judging whether or not the time necessary for discharging the remaining game balls has elapsed when the game balls remain inside. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the seventh embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), whether the number of winnings in the variable prize device 65 or the surely changing prize device matches the number of discharged coins is determined. Is determined (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65 or the certain winning device. In addition, it is possible to keep the game balls in the probability change winning device illegally, and to prevent the illegal action of flowing the game balls to the probability change switch at the timing of the first round of the jackpot.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, even if the game ball passes through the positive change switch, the positive change setting flag 203ba is turned ON. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device in each round of the jackpot. The number-of-discharges counter 203bf allows a game ball to pass through a ball discharge port for discharging a game ball from each variable prize device (variable prize device 65 or positive change prize device) (the ball discharge port provided at the ball discharge port). Each time the exit switch is turned on by the passing of a game ball), the value is incremented by one and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 104). After it is determined that the number of played balls matches the number of discharged balls, the number is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1415 in FIG. 104).

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). The difference is that a flag 223aa is added.

  The V-winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not it has already been detected that the game ball has passed the probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot. If the V-winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passage of the certainty switch has been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passage of the certainty switch has not been detected. The V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON in the first round of the jackpot, based on the first reception of the certain-change winning command output from the main control device 110 every time the passing of the certain-change switch is detected ( See S5503 in FIG. 108). The V-winning flag 223aa is set to OFF when it is determined that the V-winning flag 223aa is ON at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when the V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON, a V-winning success effect for notifying the player that a winning has been made to the probability-change winning opening is executed. By executing the V-winning success effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that his / her own selection (the firing direction) is appropriate and that the player will shift to the certain-variable game state after the end of the jackpot. People can be more satisfied.

<Control process of main controller in seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the jackpot control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit control process 7 (S931) is a process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 30) instead of the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment.

  Of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 in each of the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, respectively. , And S1009 to S1011. In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) according to the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the release according to the round and the jackpot type is performed. A jackpot operation setting process for setting an operation is executed (S1031), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), the game state after the big hit end is set. Then, a jackpot ending process is performed (S1032), and the process ends. The details of the jackpot ending process (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 100) according to the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the positive change winning are provided. A prize-winning process for performing a process corresponding to a win in the mouth is executed (S1033). The details of the winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the end of the winning process (S1033), an abnormal process is executed to determine whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a and the probable winning port has been normally ejected (S1034). To end. Details of the winning processing (S1033) and the abnormal processing (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, respectively.

  Next, the details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). The jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and the jackpot type as described above.

  In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No) ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the release pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the release pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is the jackpot A7 or the jackpot B7, the data for performing the variable operation in the right V release pattern (see FIG. 97A) is read, while the current jackpot type is read. Is any of the big hits C7 to E7, the data for performing the variable operation in the left V release pattern (see FIG. 97B) is read.

  When the process of S1103 ends, the start of the release pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the processing of S1105 executed after the processing of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating a newly started round number is set (S1105), and this processing ends. By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be variably controlled in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot ending process (S1032) will be described. The big hit end process (S1032) is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end, as described above. In the jackpot ending process (S1032), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203ba is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), During the jackpot, it means that no game ball has entered (winned) any of the game balls into the certainty winning prize mouth (left lucky winning prize opening 655La and right certainty prize winning opening 655Ra). By setting 100, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving gaming state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol) (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability change setting flag 203ba is ON (S1201: Yes), it means that a game ball has entered the probability change winning port during the current jackpot, By setting the flag 203e to ON, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probable change game state (the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the processing of S1204 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the processing of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probable change setting flag 203ba is set to off (S1205), and the process ends. By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 102), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability change setting flag 203ba.

  Next, details of the winning process (S1033) will be described with reference to FIG. The winning process (S1033) is a process for performing a process according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the probability change winning opening as described above. In the winning process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S1301). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the time when the specific winning opening 65a or the certain-variable winning opening becomes possible to enter the ball until the interval period ends. In the processing of S1301, if it is not the round validity period (S1301: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current time is the round validity period (S1301: Yes), then winning in any one of the specific winning ports (the specific winning port 65a or the probable change winning port) is detected. If it is determined that the winning in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probable winning opening) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning for the specific winning opening has been detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203bc is updated by adding 1 (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probable change switch (S1304). If it is determined that the game ball has passed (S1304: Yes), the probable change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1304: Yes). (S1305), a probability change winning command for notifying the sound ramp control device 113 that the game ball has passed the probability change switch is set (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1304 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch (S1304: No), each processing of S1305 and S1306 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1307.

  In the processing of S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203bc is equal to or greater than 10 (S1307). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is equal to or greater than 10 (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1308). If the time has elapsed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), there is no need to end the round, so this processing is ended as it is. In the process of S1308, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set opening pattern has come, while if the current time is the second round or later, If 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

  In the processing of S1309, the closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probable change winning opening) is set (S1309), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1310). Next, by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203bd to ON, a ball throwing period is set (S1311), and this processing ends.

  Next, details of the abnormality processing (S1034) will be described with reference to FIG. This abnormal process (S1034) is a process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probability-changing winning opening has been normally discharged, as described above. In this abnormal process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round valid period (S1401). If the current time is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then, whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch (the game ball is discharged from the outlet for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device). (S1402).

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203bf (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is off (S1404: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is ON (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently in the ball throwing period, and the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is set to 1 Is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the ball throwing period (0.8 seconds after the end of the round)) (S1406). When it is determined that the value of 203be is not the upper limit value (not the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the current is the ball throwing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) If it is determined that the ball elapse period is over after one round is completed (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the probable change switch (S1408). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1408: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the probable variable switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable passage counter 203bb (S1409), and the probable variable setting flag 203ba is set to ON. (S1410), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the current ball pitching period is the ball pitching period after the second and subsequent rounds have been completed (S1407: No), each of the steps S1408 to S1410 is performed. The process is skipped and the process ends.

  Further, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (it is the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: Yes), then, the discharge number (discharge number counter 203bf) The value) is determined to be equal to the winning number (the sum of the value of the winning number counter 203bc and the value of the probability change counter 203bb) (S1411).

  In the processing of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged papers and the number of winnings do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the processing shifts to S1413. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of passing the game ball through the probability change switch while the probability change winning port is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S1411: Yes), the processing of S1412 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1413. In the processing of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to off (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203bc, the number-of-discharge counter 203bf, and the value of the certainty passing counter 203bb are reset (S1415), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 104) causes clogging of the ball inside each variable prize device (variable prize device 65 and certain variance prize device), thereby causing each specific prize port (specific prize port 65a and It is possible to detect and notify at an early stage of the occurrence of a problem that a game ball that has entered a certain winning prize port cannot be normally discharged.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the command determination process 7 (S4021) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 7 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is executed in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ) Is a process for analyzing an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 41).

  Of the command determination processing 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, in each of steps S4901 to S4910 and S4918, the command determination processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is respectively performed (see FIG. 41). The same processes as those of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 are executed. In the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the unprocessed command does not include the winning information command (S4909: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to winning is received (S4921). Here, the command related to the hit is, specifically, an opening command, a number of rounds command, a closing command, a positive change winning command, an ending command, and the like.

  In the process of S4921, if it is determined that any command related to the hit has been received from the main control device 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of the unprocessed command related to the hit is analyzed, and the command (S4922), and terminates the present process. Details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4921 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the command related to the hit (S4921: No), the process proceeds to S4918.

  Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing (S4922). Of the hit-related command processing (S4922), the processing of S4911 to S4917 is the same as that of S4911 to S4917 executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Since each process is simply ported as it is, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 106) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include the round number command (S4913). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the closing command is included in the unprocessed commands (S4951). In the processing of S4951, if it is determined that the closing command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110 (S4951: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of one round of the jackpot. Therefore, a closing command process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round is executed (S4952), and this process ends. The details of the close command processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the close command has not been received (S4951: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 includes the positive change winning command. (S4953), and if it is determined that the probability change winning command is included (S4953: Yes), it means that it is the timing when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch. Is executed (S4954), and the process ends. The details of the probability change winning command processing (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S4953, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the probable change winning command (S4953: No), the process proceeds to S4916.

  Next, the details of the above-described close command processing (S4952) will be described with reference to FIG. The closing command process (S4952) is a process for setting an effect mode at the end of the round, as described above. In the close command processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the current round has ended in the first round of the jackpot (S5401). Then, the execution of the interval effect in a mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S5402), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the round ended this time is the first round (S5401: Yes), it is next determined whether the V-winning flag 223aa is on (S5403).

  In the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the V-winning flag 223aa is ON (S5403: No), a certain-variable winning prize port (either the left-positive variable winning prize port 655La or the right-positive variable winning prize port 655Ra) during one round. Since it means that the winning of the prize has been detected, the V-winning flag 223aa is set to OFF (S5404), and the process proceeds to S5402. On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the V-winning flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), one round of the jackpot without allowing the game ball to enter the probability-change winning opening during one round. Is completed, a V-winning failure effect for notifying the player that the game ball could not be won to the probability change winning port is set (S5405), and this processing ends. . By executing this V winning failure production, the game ball did not enter the probability change winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player, and the firing that the game ball actually becomes easy to win the probability change winning opening) (The direction was not matched) can be easily understood by the player. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player more seriously predict the firing direction so that the game ball will be awarded (enters the ball) at the next winning jackpot at the next jackpot. Therefore, the player's motivation for the next big hit can be improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, details of the above-described probable change winning command processing (S4954) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the probable change winning command processing (S4954). The probability change winning command processing (S4954) is a process for performing control according to the number of times the probability change switch has passed, as described above.

  In the probability change winning command processing (S4954), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501), and if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5501: No). This means that the probability change winning command of this time is a command output based on the passage of the first probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot, so that it is notified that the game ball has entered the probability change winning port. The execution of the V-prize success effect is set (S5502), the V-prize completed flag 223aa is set to ON (S5503), and the process ends. By executing the V-winning success effect, it is determined that the game ball has entered the probability change winning opening (the firing direction selected by the player and the firing direction in which the game ball can easily win the probability change winning opening). Can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, a greater satisfaction can be given to the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5501 that the V-winning flag 223aa is ON (S5501: Yes), it means that the V-winning success effect has already been executed, and thus the V-winning success effect is duplicated. In order to prevent the processing from being executed, the processing in steps S5502 and S5503 is skipped, and the processing ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the gaming ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the probability change game state is established after the end of the jackpot (special symbol change state and special symbol time reduction state). ) Are provided as two triggers for providing a certain probability change winning prize port (a left probability change winning prize port 655La and a right probability change prize winning port 655Ra). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probability change winning ports is set to be able to enter the ball. That is, when one movable member is moved to the protruding position, a slope is formed which is directed downward toward one of the positive change winning ports. In the first round of the jackpot, the period during which the movable member is located at the protruding position is as short as one second. The movable member is buried before the game ball enters the probability change winning port along with it, and the game ball cannot enter the probability change winning port. In the seventh embodiment, when left-handed is performed when the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb is longer than when right-handed is performed. If the player hits the ball, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the left probability change winning port 655La. On the other hand, if the player hits right, the game ball easily enters the left probability change winning port 655La. On the other hand, when right-handed is performed when the movable member 650Rb is located at the protruding position, the time required for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb is longer than when left-handed, so right-handed is performed. While it is difficult to allow game balls to enter the right probability change winning port 655Ra, it becomes easy to cause game balls to enter the left probability change winning port 655Ra when right-handed. Here, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to detect in advance the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position from the presentation mode or the like, so that the game ball enters the ball. It is possible to realize a novel playability that allows a player to predict a possible firing direction (a type of a movable member arranged at a projecting position). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the seventh embodiment, any one of the positive change winning ports can enter the ball in the first round of the jackpot (that is, any movable member can be changed to the protruding position), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the round in which any of the certain variance winning prize ports is set to be able to enter the ball may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the number of rounds in which the probability change winning port is set to a state in which the ball can be entered is not limited to one, and may be set two or more times in one big hit. In this case, if the game ball can be thrown into the probability change winning port in the first round in which the probability change winning port is set to be able to enter the ball, the probability change winning port can enter after the next round In a round set in the state, a configuration may be adopted in which a launch direction in which a game ball can enter is notified (navigated) to a player.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the period required for the game ball to reach the probability change winning port is made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball. That is, when the movable member 650Lb is located at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handing is more likely to have a left-positive change prize in a shorter period of time than the game ball that has reached the specific area by left-handing. The configuration was such that it could easily reach the mouth 655La. In addition, when the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by left-handing is more likely to have a right-to-left change prize than the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handing. Although the configuration is such that it is easy to reach the mouth 655Ra, the invention is not limited to this. The launch direction in which the period required to reach the certain variation winning port in the round in which the certain variation winning port can enter the ball may be fixed. That is, in all the jackpot types, the right-handed player may be configured to shorten the time required to reach the certain winning prize mouth, as opposed to the left-handed player. It may be configured such that the time required for hitting the ball to reach the probability change winning port becomes shorter.

  In the seventh embodiment, the period until reaching the corresponding one positive change winning port differs between right-handed and left-handed, depending on the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the left probability changing winning opening 655La is arranged at a position where a game ball can enter only when a left hit is performed, and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra is positioned only when the right hit is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the arrangement is made at a position where there is a possibility that the winning will occur, and the period until reaching each of the probability change winning prize openings varies depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, in the case of one jackpot type, the game ball fired by left-handed is more likely to be left-turned than the time required for the game ball fired by right-handed to reach the right-winning winning prize opening 655Ra. While the period until reaching the mouth 655La is configured to be shorter, in other jackpot types, the game ball fired by left-handing reaches the left-probable winning prize opening 655La than the period until it reaches Alternatively, the period until the game ball fired by the right strike reaches the right probable winning prize port 655Ra may be configured to be shorter. In this case, the winning opening that can be entered by right-handing and the winning opening that can be entered by left-handing do not necessarily have to be positive change winning openings. By doing so, it may be replaced with a special winning opening in which only payout of prize balls is performed. Also, according to the jackpot type, the period until reaching the winning opening when right-handed and the period until reaching the winning opening when left-handed are not different, The period until the operation may be constant regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, by arranging nails, windmills, etc., it is configured such that the time to reach the winning opening is shorter when aiming at the winning opening on one of right-handed and left-handing than on the other. You may.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, a description will be given of a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, two winning change winning devices (a left winning change winning device 655L and a right winning change winning device 655R) and two variable winning devices are provided as a winning device that can enter the ball during the execution of the jackpot game. The prize device 65 and the prize device are provided, and the type of the prize device that can enter the ball is changed according to the round of the jackpot. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the certain winning prize openings (the left winning prize winning opening 655La and the right guessing winning prize opening 655Ra) is set to be able to enter the ball, while in the second round of the jackpot, the specific winning prize is set. The configuration is such that the mouth 65a is set in a state where the ball can enter.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, only two probability change winning devices (left probability change winning device 655L, right probability change winning device 655R) are provided, and a plurality of flow paths (probability change switches are provided inside the probability change winning device). Channel and a channel not provided with a probability change switch), and then to any of the probability change prize openings (left probability change prize opening 655La, right probability change prize opening 655Ra) according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. The configuration is such that the flow path through which the entered game balls are distributed is variable. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball that has entered the probability change winning prize port is a flow path provided with the probability change switch among a plurality of flow paths provided inside the probability change winning apparatus. On the other hand, a game ball that has entered the probability change winning port after the second round of the jackpot is controlled so as to be distributed to a channel in which the probability change switch is not provided. With this configuration, a round (first round) in which the probability change game state is given after the jackpot is completed by entering the probability change winning port by only two probability change winning devices, and the game ball is fired to the specific area. By continuing to do so, a round (two or more rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained can be provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the seventh embodiment is different in the configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment in that the variable prize device 65 is deleted, the left-probability variable prize device 655L, In addition, the internal structure of the right-winning winning device 655R is changed, and the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the seventh embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133, a description will be given of a board configuration of a game board 13 according to a modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 133, the gaming board 13 of this modification is different from the gaming board 13 of the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is omitted. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each of the winning-winning apparatuses (the left-winning-winning apparatus 655L and the right-winning-winning apparatus 655R) is also partially changed from the seventh embodiment described above. I have. The other configuration of the board is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each of the winning-winning apparatuses according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a specific area in the game board 13 of the present modified example. As shown in FIG. 134, in the present modification, the left probable winning award 655La and the right probable winning award 655Ra are provided inside the left-probable winning award device 655L and the right-probable winning award device 655R and on the back side of the base plate 60. A plurality of flow paths through which the entered game balls flow are provided. More specifically, the downstream side of the left-probability change winning device 655L is branched into two flow paths (probably-variable guidance flow path 655Ld1 and normal guidance flow path 655Ld2). A probable ball inlet 656a provided with a switch is provided. If the game ball is guided to the certain-variable entrance ball opening 656a by flowing the game ball down the positive-change guiding flow path 655Ld1 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball always passes through the positive-change switch. The game state after the end is set to the probable change game state. It should be noted that a game ball that has entered the certain-variable-entrance ball opening 656a and passed the certain-variable switch is discharged to the outside as it is.

  On the other hand, a ball discharge port 656b1 for discharging game balls to the outside is provided downstream of the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2. Since the ball discharge port 656b1 is not provided with a probable change switch, even if the game ball passes through the ball discharge port 656b1, it does not affect the game state after the end of the big hit. In other words, irrespective of the number of passes of the ball discharge port 656b1 during execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball has passed at least once through the probability change switch, the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is determined as the game state If the state is set and the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch even once, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the execution of the big hit game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 134, at a position where the game ball is branched into the probability-variable guiding flow path 655Ld1 and the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2, the game ball is placed in one of the flow paths (the probability varying guiding flow path 655Ld1 and the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2). ) Is provided with a flow path distribution valve 655Lc. In the first round of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc is in a state of being tilted leftward in a front view (a state of forming a downward slant from upper left to lower right in front view) (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal guide flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the positive change guide flow path 655Ld1 is open. In this state, the game ball that has entered the positive probability change winning prize port 655La is distributed to the positive variable guide flow path 655Ld1 whose upstream side is open, and is guided to the positive probability change ball port 656a. For this reason, if the game ball can be made to enter the left probability change winning opening 655La in the first round of the jackpot, in addition to the prize ball given to the ball entering the left probability change winning opening 655La, the probability change switch is used. Since a game ball can be passed, a certain change game state is given as a game state after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the first round of the jackpot ends and the ball ejection period elapses, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc performs a tilting operation in the right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the upstream side of the probable variable induction flow path 655Ld1 is closed by the flow distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, the game ball that has entered the positive probability winning prize opening 655La is distributed to the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2 having an open upstream side, and guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 downstream of the normal guiding flow path 655Ld2. Is done. For this reason, after the second round of the jackpot, even if the game ball is allowed to enter the left-probable winning prize port 655La, the entered game ball cannot pass through the probable-change switch. Only prize balls for balls are awarded.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right-winning winning device 655R is only a symmetrical internal structure of the left-winning winning device 655L. By inclining the flow distribution valve 655Rc provided inside the positive variation winning device 655R to the right in front view, the upstream side of the positive variation induction flow path 655Rd1 is opened (the upstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probability change winning prize port 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot is distributed to the probability change guide channel 655Rd1 and enters the probability change entry ball port 656a. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the upstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Rd2 is opened by closing the flow path distribution valve 655Rc to the left as viewed from the front (the upstream side of the positive variable guidance flow path 655Rd1 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probable winning prize port 655Ra after the second round of the jackpot is distributed to the normal guidance flow path 655Rd2 and enters the ball discharge port 656b2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, an operation pattern (flow path switching pattern) of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc in the positive change winning device will be described. FIG. 135 compares the temporal change of the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb when the left V opening pattern is set for the movable members 650Lb and 655Rb, and the temporal change of the switching of the flow path in the positive change winning device. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in the first round of the jackpot, the respective flow distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are connected to the respective normal guiding flow paths (normal guiding flow paths) until one second elapses when the movable member 650Rb is projected to the projected position. 655Ld2, the normal guiding flow path 655Rd2). When one second has elapsed since the start of the first round of the jackpot and the movable member 650Rb has moved to the protruding position, each of the flow distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc is connected to each of the positive variable induction flow paths (the positive variable induction flow path 655Ld1, the positive variable flow path). It moves to an arrangement (see FIG. 134) in which game balls are distributed to the guide channel 655Rd1). The arrangement for distributing the game balls to the probable guide path is continued even after the first round is completed and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the immersion position, and 0.5 seconds from the end of the first round. With the passage of time, the flow distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are returned to the arrangement for distributing the game balls to the respective normal guide channels (the normal guide channel 655Ld2 and the normal guide channel 655Rd2). 0.5 second from the end of this one round is a so-called ball brushing period. That is, a sufficient period is set so that a game ball that has entered the probability-change winning port just before the end of one round reaches the probability-variation entering port 656a. By setting the ball-splashing period of 0.5 seconds, a situation may occur in which the probability change state is not given after the end of the jackpot despite entering the probability change winning port just before the end of one round. This can prevent the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall.

  After the end of the first round, the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc does not change until the jackpot ends. Therefore, a game ball that has entered the positive change winning opening (either the left positive changing winning opening 655La or the right positive changing winning opening 655Ra) after the second round of the jackpot is guided to one of the ball discharge openings 656b1 and 656b2. You. On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb can be moved to the protruding position even in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, the movable member that has been moved to the projecting position in the first round is also moved to the projecting position in the second and subsequent rounds. In other words, the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the probability change winning opening (the period from the launch of the game ball to the time the ball enters the probability change winning opening) is fixed at one jackpot. Thus, by simply checking the type of the movable member that has been moved to the protruding position in the first round, the player can easily recognize the firing direction in which the ball can easily enter the certain winning opening in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, for a player who wants to quickly digest the jackpot game, the game ball can be fired in the firing direction in which the period until the ball hits the probability change winning port is likely to be short. On the other hand, a player who wants to spend a longer time playing a jackpot game (and wants to enjoy it slowly) fires a game ball in the firing direction in which the time required to enter the probability change winning opening tends to be longer. Can be done. As a result, the player himself / herself can select a game method according to the taste of each player.

  In the big hit where the left V opening pattern is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the projecting position in each round of the big hit. That is, the switching pattern of the flow path (the operation pattern of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc) inside the positive change winning device is exactly the same as the big hit where the right V opening pattern is set.

  As described above, in this modified example, only two positive change prize devices are provided on the board, and inside the positive change prize device, it is determined whether the positive change switch can be passed or it is difficult to pass every round of a jackpot. It is configured to switch (change the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc, 655Rc). With such a configuration, the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment can be omitted, so that the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment and its modification, the selection effect is always executed from the start of one round of the jackpot until any of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is moved to the protruding position. But it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1% in the case of a jackpot), a notification effect for notifying the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probability change winning opening instead of the selection effect is executed. . With this configuration, the player can be pleased when the notification effect is executed.

  In the seventh embodiment and its modification, the two positive change winning prize ports are arranged to be opposed to each other in the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the entrances is replaced with an entrance (a second entrance) having the same function as the first entrance 64 (that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed when a game ball enters). The electric accessory 64a provided along with the first entrance 64 may be deleted. Then, in a case where a win is made in a normal symbol lottery, the movable member on the side that can enter the second ball entrance may be moved to the protruding position. With this configuration, in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, the game ball that has reached the specific area can be efficiently inserted into the second entrance, so that the game efficiency during the time reduction state is further improved. be able to. In this case, during the time-variable gaming state in which the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set and the time-saving gaming state, it is easy to enter the second entrance (the second entrance after the game ball is fired). (The period until the ball enters the ball is likely to be short) may be notified to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably cause the game ball to enter the second entrance during a period in which the movable member is arranged at the projecting position as a normal symbol hit.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning ports (a left specific winning port 650La and a right specific winning port 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning port is protruded. In this configuration, the game ball reaching the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming an inclination toward the specific winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b having a shape obtained by combining two movable members in the sixth embodiment is provided, and according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b, The game balls reaching the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) are allowed to enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the types of winning ports are made different. In the eighth embodiment, one specific winning opening 657a and one general winning opening 630 are provided in place of the two specific winning openings in the sixth embodiment. Then, the movable member 657b is completely disposed at the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination capable of guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a, while the movable member 657b is moved from the buried position (submerged position) to the projected position. At an intermediate position during the movement, a game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that a general winning opening 630 is provided instead of the left specific winning opening 650La, and a right specific winning opening is provided. A point that a specific winning opening 657a is provided instead of the mouth 650Ra, a movable member 657b is provided instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed. And that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the sixth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109 (b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109 (c) is a view of the movable member 657b as viewed from the front left side. It is a side view in the case. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment is a front-side inclined member 657bf that forms an inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction on the near side in front view. And a rear-side inclined member 657bb that forms a slope in a downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction is provided on the back side in front view. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to (c), the front inclined member 657bf and the rear inclined member 657bb are joined at a substantially central portion of each side surface to form one member.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and (c), two portions on the rear side of the rear inclined member 657bb project in a rod shape. Although not shown, a solenoid for a movable member for causing the movable member 657b to move in and out (variable operation) is connected to a tip (an end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb) of the protruding portion. ing. In each round of the jackpot, the movable member solenoid is driven to change the movable member 657b to the projecting position. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, in the eighth embodiment, the moving operation of the movable member 657b in each round is made different depending on the type of big hit, and the general winning opening 630 is performed during the execution of the big hit game. There is a jackpot type in which a hammering action in which a chance to win a prize is set is set, and a jackpot type in which a hammering action which is easy to be reduced is set. During the execution of the jackpot game, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases as the game ball enters the general winning opening 630, so that the chance of winning the general winning opening 630 tends to increase, so that the big hit of the hammering operation. A game can be played in expectation of the type being determined. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the operation of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110A is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable member 657b is disposed at an intermediate position that is temporarily disposed after performing the protruding operation and before being disposed at the protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b performs the protruding operation, and only the front inclined member 657bf protrudes toward the near side from the base plate 60 (only the rear inclined member 657bb is buried), the front side is inclined. Due to the inclination of the member 657bf formed from the upper right side to the lower left side, a state in which the game ball reaching the specific area is guided to the general winning opening 630 is temporarily formed. In each round of the jackpot, when a specified number (10) or more of the game balls are detected in the specific winning opening 657a, or when a specified time (30 seconds) elapses before the specified number of balls is entered. No matter how many game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the end condition of the round is not affected. In other words, as the game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the jackpot prize balls increase, so that the more the game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the more the player can be pleased. Therefore, while at the intermediate position (see FIG. 110 (a)) that can be arranged while performing the protruding operation, the player can positively fire the game ball toward the specific area. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 110 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the movable member 657b is placed at the projecting position, in addition to the front inclined member 657bf, the rear inclined member 657bb also projects toward the near side from the base plate 60. . As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls to the rear inclined member 657bb, and the specific winning port is formed by the inclination formed by the rear inclined member 657bb from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in front view. 657a. That is, the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position (see FIG. 110B), thereby forming a state where the movable member 657b easily enters the specific winning opening 657a.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the winning holes through which the game balls reaching the specific area are guided are made different depending on the arrangement (projection amount) of the movable member 657b. At an intermediate position where the movable member 657b can be disposed until the movable member 657b reaches the projecting position, a state where the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guiding state) is formed, and the movable member 657b is in the projecting position. , A state where the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a (second guidance state) is formed. As a result, as the game balls are guided to the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game state increases. In the meantime, the game ball can be actively fired toward the specific area. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, even if the arrangement of the movable member 657b does not completely coincide with the intermediate position shown in FIG. 110A, the movable member 657b is arranged within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position. If so, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf. More specifically, for example, about 70% of the entire movable member 657b has the front inclined member 657bf projected from the base plate 60, and the rear inclined member 657bb has approximately 30% projected from the base plate 60. Until the arrangement is performed, the game balls can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

  Next, a movable pattern of the protruding member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot. The movable pattern A is a movable pattern in which a chance to enter a game ball into the general winning opening 630 is larger than that in the movable pattern B (that is, the number of times of the first guiding state is increased). First, with reference to FIG. 111A, a change with time in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable pattern A is set will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts to move to the protruding position at the same time as the start of the jackpot round. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes two seconds for the movable member 657b embedded in the base plate 60 to project to the projecting position. Of the two seconds that can move to the protruding position, for about 0.7 seconds, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guidance state, see FIG. 110 (a)). Therefore, by continuously firing the game ball toward the specific area immediately after the start of the round, the game ball may enter the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state. In each round of the jackpot, although the upper limit (10) is set for the number of balls entered for the specific winning port 657a, the number of balls entered for the general winning port 630 is not restricted at all, and therefore, the game ball As the ball enters the general winning opening 630, the number of prize balls paid out increases. Therefore, the player can positively fire the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the state (the second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening 657a) arranged at the protruding position continues for 2.5 seconds. During the 2.5 seconds, each time the game ball reaches the specific area, it is guided to the specific winning opening 657a, so that a prize ball can be acquired every time the ball enters the specific winning opening 657a. In addition, since the game balls are configured to be able to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, by continuing to show the game balls from the start of the round, 4 to 5 balls can be fired in 2.5 seconds. A certain number of game balls can be made to enter the specific winning opening 657a.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), when 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the movable member 657b was placed at the projecting position (that is, 4.5 seconds after the start of the round), the movable member 657b is moved to the burial position. Move to (immersion position). The variable operation to the buried position is performed over 2 seconds similarly to the variable operation to the protruding position. That is, since the operation completely opposite to the variable operation to the protruding position is executed, the first guiding state is maintained for about 0.7 seconds during the variable operation to the buried position. Therefore, even during the variable operation to the buried position, it is possible to cause one or two or so game balls to enter the general winning opening 630 by continuously firing the game balls to the specific area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), it can be moved from the buried position to the protruding position over 2 seconds, the state of being placed at the protruding position is maintained for 2.5 seconds, and over 2 seconds from the protruding position. The operation of moving to the buried position is repeated twice at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A, the first guidance state is set at a maximum of six times. Note that the movable pattern A is forcibly ended at the time when ten game balls enter the specific winning opening 657a, even if all the variable operations shown in FIG. 111A have not been completed. Note that the period in which the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position is 7.5 seconds (2.5 seconds × 3 times) in total, so that by continuously firing game balls at 0.6 second intervals, 12 Up to about 13 game balls can be reached. Therefore, only by continuously firing the game balls, the specified number (10) of the game balls can be surely made to enter the specific winning opening 657a, and the first guidance state of up to six times can be set. Can be. Therefore, in addition to the prize balls for the specified number of balls entering the specific winning opening 657a, prize balls based on winning in the general winning opening 630 by being set up to six times in the first guidance state can be obtained. . Therefore, the number of prize balls exceeding the specified number of prize balls can be easily obtained in each round, so that the satisfaction of the player can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 111B is a diagram illustrating a temporal change in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the movable pattern B is set, the movable member 657b moves to the protruding position over two seconds immediately after the start of the round, and the state where the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position is 26 at a maximum. It continues for 2 seconds (until 28 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round), and when 26 seconds have elapsed, it is moved to the immersion position (immersion position) over 2 seconds. For this reason, when the movable pattern B is set, the first guiding state in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 630 is obtained only two times immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times the movable member 657b enters the first guidance state (a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630) according to the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b. Are configured differently. If the number of times the first guidance state is set is large, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the execution of the jackpot game is also increased. You can have greater joy. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying attention to the set movable pattern, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents of hit type selection table 202b. Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment except that the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Descriptions other than the hit type selection table 202b are omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b of the eighth embodiment defines five types of big hits, big hits A8 to E8.

  As shown in FIG. 112, “big hit A8” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see 202 b 1 in FIG. 112). The “big hit A8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probable changing game state (a probable changing state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) is given after the end of the big hit. Further, when the "big hit A8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guiding state is likely to increase) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit A8" has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big jackpot is advantageous (that is, a probable changing gaming state that is more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state is set). And more opportunities to enter the ball (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, "big hit A8" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A8” are “0 to 4”. Since there are five jackpots, the rate at which "big jackpot A8" is determined when a jackpot is won is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, “big hit B8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 29” (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). “Big hit B8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probable change game state is given after the big hit ends. Further, when the "big hit B8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is likely to increase) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit B8" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit A8", and the game state after the end of the big win is advantageous (that is, a probable change game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state is set). The opportunity to enter the general winning opening 630 increases (the number of award balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, “big hit B8” is a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player after “big hit A8”. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B8” are “5 to 29”. Since there are 25 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot B8" is determined when the jackpot is won is 25% (25/100).

  Further, “big hit C8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 54” (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). “Big hit C8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probable change game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit C8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit C8" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit A8", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous. The number of prize balls paid out in each round is relatively small.) Therefore, the "big hit C8" is a big hit type which is disadvantageous to the player on the prize sphere compared with the "big hit A8" or the "big hit B8". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit C8” is “30 to 54”. Since there are 25 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot C8" is determined when the jackpot is won is 25% (25/100).

  Further, “big hit D8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “55 to 69” (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). “Big hit D8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is seven and a probable change game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit D8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (a movable pattern with a small number of times of the first guidance state) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the jackpot D8 is advantageous in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, but the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot is reduced (each round of the jackpot) The number of prize balls paid out is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit D8" is a big hit type which is advantageous in the game state after the big hit but is most disadvantageous to the player in the prize sphere. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit D8” is “55 to 69”. Since there are 15 jackpots, the rate at which the "jackpot D8" is determined when the jackpot is won is 15% (15/100).

  Further, “big hit E8” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “70 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). “Big hit E8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is seven and 100 time-saving gaming states are given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit E8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, in the "big hit E8", the gaming state after the end of the big hit is disadvantageous, the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is also reduced (paid in each round of the big hit) The number of prize balls is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit E8" is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous to the player in the game state after the big hit and also in the prize sphere. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit E8” is “70 to 99”. Since there are 30 jackpots, the rate at which "big jackpot E8" is determined when a jackpot is won is 30% (30/100).

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot game is made different according to the jackpot type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of the jackpot type (either one of jackpots A and B) to be set in the movable pattern A in which many opportunities to enter the general winning opening 630 are given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and is the same as the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, this is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting a state of a specific winning opening.

  Of the jackpot control processes 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 are the jackpot control processes in the sixth embodiment, respectively. 6 (see FIG. 89), the same processes as S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the movable pattern (movable) corresponding to the jackpot type is determined. The start of one of the patterns A and B) is set (S1041), and the process shifts to S1006. More specifically, if the current jackpot is one of the jackpots A8 and B8, the movable pattern A is set as the movable pattern of the movable member 657b. The movable pattern B is set as the movable pattern of.

  In the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), the current jackpot type is the jackpot E8. It is determined whether or not there is a jackpot (S1042). If it is determined that the jackpot is E8 (S1042: Yes), the process proceeds to S1013 to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to the time-saving gaming state and end the jackpot. And migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1042 that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot E8 (any one of the jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the certain-variable gaming state. Then, the process shifts to S1014 to end the jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the front-side inclined member 657bf that forms a slope that descends from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. A movable member 657b having a shape in which the rear inclined member 657bb that forms the inclination of the movable member 657bb is combined in the front-rear direction is provided. The game balls that have reached the area below the ball opening 64) are allowed to enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b) and have different winning port types. More specifically, in an arrangement in which only the front-side inclined member 657bf protrudes forward from the base plate 60 and the rear-side inclined member 657bb is housed inside the base plate 60, the upper right front view is formed by the front-side inclined member 657bf. Due to the downward inclination from the direction to the lower left direction, a state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 arranged on the left side in the front view with respect to the movable member 657b. On the other hand, in a state where the movable member 657b is completely protruded (a state where the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position), the rear inclined member 657bb is inclined downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction in the front view. A state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the area is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the movable member 657b. The general winning opening 630 does not affect the end condition of the round no matter how many game balls enter during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the execution of the jackpot game. The more balls you get, the more prize balls you can get. Therefore, in an intermediate position (the first guiding state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf) until the movable member 657b reaches the protruding position, the game ball is positively played. Since the shooting can be performed to the specific area, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, as the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot, the movable pattern in which the number of times in which the first guidance state is set during one round is likely to be increased. One of two movable patterns, A and a movable pattern B in which the number of times the first guidance state is likely to be reduced, is set. More specifically, when one of the jackpots A8 and B8 is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A in each round of the jackpot, whereas when any of the jackpots C8 to E8 is reached, the movable member 657b is moved. It is configured to be movable by the movable pattern B. This allows the player to play the game with a stronger expectation of becoming one of the jackpots A8 and B8 in which the number of times of the first guidance state increases, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns, that is, the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B, are provided. However, the number of the movable patterns is not limited to two. Good or less. By reducing the number of types of movable patterns to one, there is no need to perform a control process of selecting a movable pattern according to the type of big hit at the start of a new round, so the processing load during execution of the big hit game is reduced. can do. Further, by increasing the number of types of movable patterns from two types (for example, five types) and further diversifying the number of times of the first guidance state, a game is performed with more attention to the set movable patterns. Can be made. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set on the movable member 657b is varied in each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the configuration may be such that the movable pattern is switched according to the number of rounds. Accordingly, the operation of the movable member 657b can be further diversified, so that each time a new round is started, a game can be performed by focusing on the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b. .

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A is set when any one of the big hits A8 and B8 is reached, and the movable pattern B is set when any one of the big hits C8 to E8. The present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the type of movable pattern and the type of jackpot can be arbitrarily determined. For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, a configuration in which the movable pattern A is set when the type of the jackpot is a small jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, a jackpot of seven rounds) may be adopted. By configuring in this way, if the type of jackpot is small with a small number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot is likely to increase, so the jackpot of the small number of rounds is determined Therefore, the discouragement of the player can be suppressed.

<Modification of the eighth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The modification of the eighth embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that a rotating member 658 is provided instead of the movable member 657b in the above-described eighth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 114 (a) to (c), the rotating member 658 is configured to be capable of rotating in a clockwise direction in a front view with the rotating shaft 658a as the rotating shaft. By rotating the upper end of the rotating member 658 to a state (see FIG. 114 (c)) again approaching the lower end of the specific winning opening 657a, a state where the ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a is formed. In other words, a state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the specific winning opening 657a by the inclination of the rotating member 658 that falls from the upper left to the lower right in front view. In each round of the jackpot, by controlling the rotating member 658 to rotate in a predetermined rotating pattern, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. Although the details will be described later, depending on the rotation position (rotation angle) until the rotation member 658 reaches the position (see FIG. 114 (c)) where the ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. The winning opening that can be balled is variable. That is, the same operation as that of the above-described eighth embodiment can be realized.

  The rotating member 658 is in a state of standing vertically in the normal state, as shown in FIG. In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area has a space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning opening 630 (the left side in the front view of the rotating member 658) or between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning opening 657a. (The right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front) and flows down to the out port 66.

  FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position that is temporarily arranged until the rotating member 658 rotates to a state where the game ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 657a. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), at the intermediate position, since the rotating member 658 forms a downward slope from the upper right side to the lower left side when viewed from the front, the game ball reaching the specific area moves to the general winning opening 630. It forms a state that is easily guided. When the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, the ball is easily entered into the specific winning opening 657a shown in FIG. 114 (c). In order to cancel the state in which the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise in front view using the rotating shaft 658a as a rotating shaft, as shown in FIG. 114 (a). It is returned to the state where it was set.

  As described above, in the modification of the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 658 that rotates is provided between the general winning opening 630 and the specific winning opening 657a. The rotating member 658 is arranged to form an inclination capable of guiding a game ball to the general winning opening 630 (see FIG. 114 (b)) according to the rotating position (rotating angle), and to the specific winning opening 657a. At least an arrangement (see FIG. 114 (c)) that forms an inclination capable of guiding a game ball can be adopted. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, the game is temporarily transferred to the general winning opening 630 at an intermediate position where the turning member 658 is rotating until the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. The ball is placed so that it can enter. Thereby, similarly to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit increases as the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the big hit game. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Note that the rotation member 658 in the modification of the eighth embodiment can be diverted to the above-described sixth embodiment and seventh embodiment. More specifically, a rotation member 658 is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left positive variable winning opening 655La in the seventh embodiment can enter the ball. In this case, the rotation member 658 may be rotated counterclockwise to form an inclination from the upper right side to the lower left side in front view. In the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment can enter the ball, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise so as to be viewed from the upper left in front view. What is necessary is just to form the inclination of the downward direction to the lower right side.

  In the eighth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a state where the gaming ball is arranged at the intermediate position. The present invention is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured such that a game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a movable range including an open position or a closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 630 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, a winning winning opening that triggers a probability change state after the end of the jackpot, or a winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot. (A so-called two-type V winning opening). Also, the privilege does not have to be given to the player (for example, an out mouth).

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b that is moved in a predetermined movable pattern (either the movable pattern A or B) during the execution of the jackpot game. The winning opening that can be won can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to vary the winning opening at which the game ball is guided according to the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific area, and to vary the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game. I was

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the type of the entrance that is easy to enter is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is movable when the winning is achieved in the normal symbol lottery. did. In this way, in a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high, a game can be played by paying attention to the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the configuration, in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110 is provided. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The point is that the executed control processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. In the description of the above-described eighth embodiment, the description of the board configuration of the game board 13 is omitted, and the configuration replaced with the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (general winning port 630, specific winning port 657a, movable member) Since only 657b) has been described, in the description of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment, differences from the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment will be described for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is different from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in that the electric board provided with the first ball entrance 64 is provided. The point that the role object 64a is deleted, the left variable prize device 650L and the right variable prize device 650R are deleted and the variable prize device 65 is provided. A second ball entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter, a motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and a front view of the second ball entrance 640 with respect to the flow path. The difference is that a general winning opening 63 provided on the left side and through which a game ball can enter is provided. The second entrance 640 is an entrance that triggers a lottery of a special symbol when a game ball enters. That is, it has the same performance as the first entrance 64. If a game ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is equal to the number of entrances to the first entrance 64. Up to a maximum of four separate reservations. In addition, when there is a retaining ball for entering the first entrance 64 and a retaining ball for entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, the retaining for entering the second entrance 640 is performed. The lottery of the special symbol based on the ball is executed with priority.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116, in the ninth embodiment, the second ball entry is provided in association with the second ball entry port 640, and the second ball entry is performed when a normal symbol lottery is won. The advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that can move into an open state where the game ball can enter the mouth 640. The advancing direction of the game ball at each movable position of the electric accessory 640a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 116 shows the flow-down path of the game ball when the game ball driven into the flow path provided in the right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80 reaches the electric accessory 640a by right-handing. It is a figure shown for every movable position of electric accessory 640a. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a closes the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position), and FIG. 116 (b) shows the state. 116 (c) shows a state in which the motorized accessory 640a is disposed at an intermediate position in the middle of moving to the open position for opening the second ball entrance 640, and FIG. This shows a state in which they are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position, the game ball fired rightward to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is closed. The space between the entrance 640 and the general winning opening 63 flows down. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), a plurality of nails, which are arranged above the general winning opening 63 and have a downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, are located at the upper right of the general winning opening 63. , And protrudes rightward from a plurality of nails forming a slant in a downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the possibility that the right-hitting game ball flows down toward the general winning opening 63 is extremely low.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), at an intermediate position where the electric accessory 640a is moving to the open position, a right-hit game ball is likely to collide with the tip of the electric accessory 640a. When the gaming ball collides with the tip of the electric accessory 640a, the colliding gaming ball is reflected to the left in front view, and is easily guided to the direction in which the general winning opening 63 is provided. This makes it easier to obtain a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10) based on the ball entering the general winning opening 63.

  In the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement does not completely match the arrangement shown in FIG. 116B, the ninth embodiment is within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position (for example, before and after the arrangement shown in FIG. 116B). If it is within about 10% of the movable range), the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 63.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the open position (a state where the second entrance 640 is opened), a right-hitting game ball is basically driven by an electric motor. It is guided to the second entrance 640 by the accessory 640a. In the state where the electric accessory 640a is completely opened, the electric accessory 640a, which is located at the upper right of the general winning opening 63, lowers from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left than the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. The height at which the nail at the upper end is arranged is higher among the plurality of nails forming the inclination of the direction. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second entrance 640 along the path formed by the electric accessory 640a and collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected leftward in a front view, a plurality of balls may be obtained. It is difficult to reach the general winning opening 63 through the upper part of the nail. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected to the left flows down through the space on the left side of the tip of the electric accessory 640a as shown in FIG. 116 (c). .

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 or the second game ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a. A state is formed, or a state in which it is difficult to enter any of the entrances is formed. Therefore, when a win is made in the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the game can be performed by paying attention to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a when the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a. Note that, in the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that more balls are awarded when entering the general winning opening 63 than when entering the second entrance port 640. Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at the intermediate position where the electric accessory 640a moves to the open position, the more advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability in which attention is paid to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11A) by the second configuration. The difference is that a hit type selection table 202ba is added.

  The second hit type selection table 202ba is a data table that is referred to for determining an opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a when a win is made in a normal symbol lottery. Details of the second hit type selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b).

  FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second hit type selection table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the second hit type selection table 202ba, the type of the open pattern set in the electric accessory 640a and the second open pattern determined for each of the ordinary symbol states are determined. The value of the hit type counter is defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the value of the second hit type counter is in the range of “0 to 94”, the electric accessory 640a is “ An opening pattern of “0.1 times × 5 times” is defined in association (see 202c1 in FIG. 117B). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is opened. Since 95 random numbers (counter values) are “0 to 94”, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is determined in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Is 95% (95/100). It is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the 0.1 second when the electric accessory 640a is opened. Therefore, even if the ball is opened five times, "0.1 It is almost impossible to make a game ball enter the second entrance 640 while the opening pattern of “× 5 times per second” is set.

  Also, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” is associated with the value of the second hit type counter in the range of “95 to 99”. (See 202c2 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which it is opened “2 seconds × 1 time”. Since there are five random numbers (counter values) of “95 to 99”, the rate at which the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” is determined in the normal symbol low probability state is 5 % (5/100). Since it is easy to allow a game ball to enter the second entrance 640 during two seconds, the “2 seconds × 1 time” release pattern is such that a game ball enters the second entrance 640. It is an open pattern that is easy to ball.

  As described above, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is low, and even if the symbol hits the ordinary symbol, most of the pattern becomes an open pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to make a game ball enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits right in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is moved in the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times”, the electric accessory 640a is continuously moved between the closed position and the open position for a short period. (See FIG. 116 (b)). Therefore, while the electric accessory 640a is performing the opening operation in the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”, the right winning is performed to the general winning opening 63 having a relatively large number of prize balls paid out by right-handing. With a high percentage. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand while the opening operation is performed in the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed based on the ball having entered the second entrance 640 in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, An extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 300 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is disadvantageous that the lottery of the special symbol is not executed for five minutes thereafter. Therefore, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the player hits right while the open pattern of “2 seconds × 1 time” (open pattern in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640) is performed, the game is played. Is disadvantageous for the elderly. For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, an opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”, in which it is almost impossible to enter the second entrance 640 in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, is determined. In such a case, while a notification that prompts the player to make a right-handed shot (a right-handed navigator effect) is performed, a release pattern of “2 seconds × 1 time” that facilitates entering the second entrance 640 is determined. Does not perform right-handed navigation. As a result, while giving the player the maximum chance to enter the ball into the general winning opening 63, the player becomes excessively disadvantageous in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (the lottery of the special symbol is performed for 5 minutes or more). No disadvantageous situation) can be prevented.

  In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the variable display are referred to as “first special symbol lottery” and “ The first special symbol fluctuating display is referred to as “the first special symbol fluctuating display,” and the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 and the fluctuating display are referred to as “the second special symbol flotation” and “No. 2 Special symbol change display ".

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the normal symbol time reduction state, the electric accessory 640a is set to “0.1 seconds × 5” for the range of the second hit type counter value of “0 to 29”. The release pattern to be released is associated and defined (see 202c3 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is opened. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) used are 30 from “0 to 29”, the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is determined in the normal symbol time saving state. The ratio is 30% (30/100).

  An opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” is associated with the value of the second hit type counter in the range of “30 to 99” (FIG. 117). (See 202c4 of (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which it is opened “2 seconds × 1 time”. Since the random number value (counter value) of 70 is “30 to 99”, the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1 time” in the normal symbol time saving state is determined at 70%. (70/100).

  In this way, in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol increases, and when the symbol hits the ordinary symbol, the opening pattern becomes “2 seconds × 1 time” at a rate of 70%. By continuing to make a right hit in the symbol time reduction state, it is possible to keep the game ball constantly entering the second entrance 640. Further, when the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected, the game balls can easily enter the general winning opening 63, so that more prize balls can be obtained. Furthermore, in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is shortened (equivalent to the variation time of the first special symbol), so that the lottery of the second special symbol is performed many times at short intervals. Can be performed. As a result, while the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is more advantageous to the player to perform a right-handed hit, so that while the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, the right-handed navigation effect is executed. Continue to be.

  In the time-saving game state, the player continues to make a right-handed hit, and the "2 seconds x 1" release pattern is continuously executed, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be continuously executed without reducing the number of balls held. it can. In addition, in the time saving state, if a large number of open patterns of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” are luckily selected, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the general winning opening 63 without reducing the number of time savings. . For this reason, an opening pattern in which the player is placed in the opening position for a short period of time during the time-saving gaming state (that is, an opening pattern in which the opportunity to enter the second entrance 640 is relatively small) is provided to the player. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game can be performed in expectation of being determined. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (c). FIG. 117 (c) illustrates the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration. As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) (see FIG. 87 (b)) in a special design. Instead of the reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided. The difference is that a 1 special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c2 are provided. Another difference is that the movable type storage area 203aa is deleted.

  The first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first entrance 64, and the second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained at the timing of entering the second entrance 640. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). I have. That is, it has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Are stored respectively. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1. The value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, A determination such as a lottery of a symbol is made. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entrance 640. The maximum number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the (start winning) is 4 It is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The initial value of the first special symbol retaining ball counter 203c1 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retaining balls in the variable display increases, the number of balls reaches the maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the retained ball number of the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes four. It is incremented by one (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 9 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol change process 9 (S141) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) instead of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the process is a process for setting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. is there.

  In the special symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 118) in the eighth embodiment (first embodiment) is performed. 23), the same processes as those in S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. In the special symbol change process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the second special symbol holding ball number The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0 (S222).

  In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol holding is performed. The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball counter 203c2 (S223), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set (S224). . The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S222: No). Next, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is larger than 0 is determined. Is determined (S227).

  In the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S227: No), Since neither the reserved ball of the first special symbol nor the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, which means that it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the special symbol, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball counter 203c1 (S228), and a special figure 1 holding ball number command indicating the updated value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is set (S228). S229). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is used in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball count command. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the processing of S225 (S230), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S208.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, details of the start winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 9 (S142) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is detected.

  In the start winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won (starts winning) the first entrance 64 (S421). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the processing of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) Of the variable display to be held (N1) is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S423).

  Then, in the processing of S421, if it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has not been won (S421: No), or even if there is a game ball winning the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S423 When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

  The special figure 1 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 as an external output process of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later (S901). Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the special figure 1 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S425, the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 updated in the processing of S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) and the stop are performed. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the processing is performed. The process moves to S427. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (in the second special symbol lottery). The corresponding variable display suspension count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol suspension ball count counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S428). S429).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball count command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  After the special figure 2 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S431, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the fluctuations updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process of S433 Move to. In the process of S432, similarly to the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S433, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is executed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S433), and this process ends. Details of the prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this pre-reading process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been detected in the current startup winning process 9 (see FIG. 119). Then, if it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball has reached the upper limit (ie, 4)? It is determined whether or not it is (S1502), and when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time of detecting the entering ball (start winning prize processing 9 (FIG. 119) Based on the various counter values stored in the process of S426 or S432 of the reference), whether the lottery in the special symbol is successful (whether a big hit or not), its stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S1503).

  If the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S1503, then the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and the process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / no-go, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the ordinary symbol variation process 9 (S143) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 9 (S143) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed in the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling a variable display of a normal symbol, an opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and the like.

  Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, the processes in S501 to S519 are respectively performed in the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those in S501 to S519 are executed. In the ordinary symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment of the present invention, when it is determined in the process of S519 that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a winning (S519: Yes), the second winning type is determined. With reference to the selection table 202ba, an opening pattern to be set for the electric accessory 640a is determined, and an electric accessory operation start process for starting an opening operation based on the determined opening pattern is executed (S531). This processing ends. Details of the electric accessory operation start process (S531) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the above-described electric accessory operation start process (S531). In the electric accessory operation start process (S531), first, the second hit type selection table 202ba (see FIG. 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and the current ordinary symbol state and the second The release pattern corresponding to the value of the double hit type counter is read (S1602). Here, the current state of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the ordinary symbol time saving state if the probability change flag 203e is on or the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, while the probability variation flag 203e is determined. Is off, and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it is determined that the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is present. As described above, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “0 to 94”, “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected as the release pattern, If the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “95 to 99”, “2 seconds × 1 time” is selected as the release pattern. In the normal symbol time saving state, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “0 to 29”, “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected as the release pattern, while the second hit type selection counter is selected. If the value of the type selection counter is in the range of “30 to 99”, “2 seconds × 1 time” is selected as the release pattern.

  When the processing of S1602 ends, next, the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a based on the opening pattern read in the processing of S1602 is set (S1603). Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (whether the probability change flag 203e is OFF and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0) (S1604). If there is (S1604: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the release pattern set to be started in the processing of S1603 is a release pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” (S1605). In the process of S1605, when it is determined that the release pattern set to start this time is the release pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” (S1605: Yes), the release of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is performed. An opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the start of the pattern is set (S1606), and this processing ends. By receiving the opening start command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a right-hand navigation effect that prompts the player to right-hand. Thereby, when an opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is set so that many opportunities to enter the general winning opening 63 are obtained, the player is given an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63. Can be given reliably. Therefore, in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol), it is possible to keep the player's motivation for the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the current time is in the normal symbol time saving state (S1604: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that the “2 seconds × 1 time” release pattern has been set, (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and the process ends.

<Control processing of voice lamp control device in ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. This command determination process 9 (S4031) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and executes the command determination in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the process (see FIG. 41), this is a process for analyzing an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command.

  Of the command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, in each processing of S4901 to S4918, the processing of S4901 to S4901 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. The same processing as each processing of S4918 is executed. In the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the winning information command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110. (S4909: No), then, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the release start command (S4931), and it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the release start command. If it has been performed (S4931: Yes), a right-handed navi effect in an effect mode that prompts the player to make a right-hand operation is set (S4932), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4931, if it is determined that the release start command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4931: No), the process proceeds to S4911.

  By setting the right-handed navigator effect by the processing of S4932, when the opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is obtained in which the opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 is increased, the general winning opening is set. It is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to enter the ball 63. Therefore, in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol), it is possible to keep the player's motivation for the game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory 640a that is moved to the open position when the normal symbol lottery wins is temporarily moved to the open position. When the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at an intermediate position where the game ball can be arranged, the board surface configuration is such that the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 provided on the left side of the second entrance 640. did. In this way, in a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high, a game can be played by paying attention to the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters. In the ninth embodiment, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged at the intermediate position (there is a large number of arrangements at the intermediate position), but is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 ( Although the opening pattern of the second entrance 640 is short (opening period is short), it is difficult to be arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times of arrangement at the intermediate position is small), but it is easy to enter the second entrance 640 (second). At least the opening pattern of the entrance 640 is long). By setting an open pattern that is easy to be placed at the intermediate position (there is a large number of times of being placed at the intermediate position), an opportunity to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering game balls into the general winning opening 63 is obtained. Therefore, an opening pattern that makes it difficult for a player to enter the second entrance 640 than an opening pattern that facilitates entering the second entrance 640 (that is, a disadvantageous opening in a general gaming machine) (Pattern), and a novel game property in which a game in a time-saving game state is performed in the expectation of being a pattern can be realized. Further, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal game state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the intermediate position). When it is determined that an open pattern is to be executed, a right-handed navigation effect (effect indicating that a game ball is fired toward the second entrance 640) is executed. With such a configuration, in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, it is possible to give an opportunity to win a prize ball by entering the general winning opening 63 every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the game becomes monotonous in the disadvantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the normal game state for the game.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the normal gaming state, only when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the intermediate position is large), the right-handed operation is performed. Although the configuration is such that navigation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a right-handed navigation effect may be executed regardless of the open pattern when a normal symbol is hit, or it may be difficult to arrange at the intermediate position (the number of times of arrangement at the intermediate position is small). A right-handed navigation effect may be executed only when an opening pattern that allows easy entry into the entrance 640 (the opening period of the second entrance 640 is long) is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chance of entering the second entrance 640 in the normal game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the normal game state from becoming monotonous.

  In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided (reflected) to the general winning opening 63 in a state where the gaming ball is arranged at the intermediate position. The state is not limited to the intermediate position, and the game ball may be configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 in the movable range including the open position or the closed position. In addition, it is not limited to the general winning opening 63 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (a so-called two-type V winning opening). Also, the privilege does not have to be given to the player (for example, an out mouth).

  In the ninth embodiment, the opening pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” is set while the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, and in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and hitting the ordinary symbol. The right-handed navigation effect is executed only when determined, but the execution timing of the right-handed navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, when a normal symbol hits during the time reduction state, and after the end of the time reduction state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends and an opening pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is started, the “0.1 seconds” Until the release pattern of “× 5 times per second” is completed, the right-handed navigation effect that has been executed during the time-saving state may be extended. Thus, the right-handed navigation effect is executed immediately after the player returns to the left-handed operation, and it is possible to suppress the player from being confused.

  In the ninth embodiment, the state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening 63 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640 a that opens and closes the second entrance 640, and the case where the second entrance 640 enters the second entrance 640. Although the configuration is such that the state is easily switched to the state where it is difficult to enter any of the entrances, the present configuration is not limited to the second entrance 640. For example, the specific winning opening may have the same configuration as the second winning opening 640 and the motorized accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the arrangement of the general winning opening 63 may be the same as in the ninth embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to increase the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board surface configuration (arrangement of nails, windmills, and the like) of the game board 13 is substantially symmetrical, and is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13. The game ball fired toward the flow path (the right-hit game ball) and the game ball fired toward the flow path provided on the left (the left-played game ball) The configuration was such that the period from when the ball was fired to when it reached the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) was substantially the same.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, in the game board 13, the game ball (the right-hit game ball) fired toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is on the left side. Is configured to have a longer period of time to reach a specific area than a game ball (a left-hit game ball) fired toward the flow path provided in. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the variable display device unit 80 has a smaller height than the game balls flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured such that a game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side has a higher percentage of entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  The difference of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in the variable display device unit in the game board 13. The difference is that a detouring object 700 is provided on the right side of 80 so that a play ball can enter the inside. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 125, this detouring object 700 sets the time required for a game ball hit right (launched on the right side of the game board 13) to reach the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided to make it longer. In other words, the detouring object 700 takes more time until the game ball fired by right-handing reaches the specific winning opening 65a than during the time until the game ball fired by left-handing reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The falling time of a right-hit game ball can be increased so that the time is longer. In the tenth embodiment, the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 second to 2 seconds, whereas the right-playing game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Is set to be 7 to 8 seconds.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the detouring object 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detouring object 700. As shown in FIG. 125, the detouring object 700 has an opening 710 at an upper part thereof. A game ball fired by right-handing can enter the inside of the bypass accessory 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 for discharging a game ball flowing down in the detour role 700 to the outside of the detour role 700 is provided below the detour role 700. Further, in order to prevent the sphere that has advanced into the detouring object 700 from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the detouring object 700 has a front edge, a rear side, and a left-right direction in a front view. In four directions. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, a PS material), the player can easily visually recognize a state in which the ball flows down.

  Further, among the peripheral portion 730, the plane on the back side in the front view can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60, It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap. Further, the front surface of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured so as to come into contact with each other without any gap when the front frame 14 is closed. , A gap can be prevented from being trapped in the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) that are inclined downward from the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere comes into contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view, the inner wall on the near side in front view, and (Distance between them). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 and each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the guide flow paths 740, 760, and 780 are inclined in a direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view. The guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined in a direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Then, the guiding flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detouring object 700. That is, a flow path inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front and a flow path inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front are alternately provided.

  The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guide channel 740, and flows downward along the slope formed by the guide channel 740 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guidance flow path 750 to the lower right direction in front view. When the flowing game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls to the guide channel 760, and flows down along the slope formed by the guide channel 760 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front.

  Thereafter, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Then, the game ball finally reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and drops from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the sphere that has entered the bypass accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the bypass accessory 700 via the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). It is possible to reduce the force of the ball flowing down (flowing speed). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time required for a game ball that has entered the detouring object 700 via the opening 710 to be discharged to the outside via the opening 720. Thus, when the ball is fired to the right side of the game board 13 as compared to the game ball being fired to the left side of the game board 13, the ball is moved to the lower portion of the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 or the variable winning prize). It is possible to lengthen the time to reach the area (where the device 65 is disposed) (7 seconds or more).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, the respective guide channels 740 to 790 are supported by the channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the lower surfaces of the guide channels 740 to 790 with respect to the rotation stop members 742 a to 792 a or the rotation stop members 742 b to 792 b provided below the guide channels 740 to 790. Stops on contact. This rotation operation will be described using the guide channel 740 as an example.

  As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This turning operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guidance flow path 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load by the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, so that the upper half of the guide channel 740 is moved downward. A force is generated in a direction to rotate the motor. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise in a front view, the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. By the rotation stop member 742b, it is possible to prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much clockwise, and the inclination of the guide channel 740 from being reversed.

  Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially columnar member, and is joined to the inner wall on the near side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral portion 730, respectively. That is, the position is not shifted by the impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 comes into contact. The structure of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b is the same as that of the rotation stop member 742b.

  On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, so that the lower half of the guide channel 740 is turned downward. A directional force occurs. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise in front view, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide flow path 740 from excessively turning counterclockwise. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large, so that the momentum of the game ball cannot be reduced. Therefore, the game ball fired by the right strike can reliably flow down to below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entry port 64 and the specific winning port 65a are disposed) in 7 seconds or more. . When the game ball flows down in a state where the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 is maximized, each guide channel is set so that it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640. A path length of 740 to 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare that a game ball flows down while all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintain the maximum inclination angle, the time required for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640 is reliably set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

  As described above, the inclination of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is changed based on the load by the weight of the game ball, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is varied. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time required for the game ball to pass through the bypass role 700. In the above description, the case where one ball travels on the guidance flow path 740 has been described. However, a state where a plurality of balls travels on the same guidance flow path during an actual game may occur. In this case, the turning operation of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, so that the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detouring object 700 can be varied.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners at the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners at the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each of the guide channels 740 to 790 rotates, the corner of the lower surface and the inner wall portion of the peripheral portion 730 can be made hard to contact. Therefore, since each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be arranged at a position closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each of the guide channels 740 to 790 and the peripheral portion 730. Can be prevented from being pinched or the game ball passing through the gap. In addition, each guide channel 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement with the largest inclination by its own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. For example, when the ball is not flowing down the guiding flow path 740, the ball rotates counterclockwise in front view using the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis due to the weight of the guiding flow path 740. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide channels 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotation operation until they contact the rotation stop members 752a to 792a by their own weights in a state where the game ball does not flow down. Thereby, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide channels 750 to 790 is performing the turning operation, or whether the game ball flows down after the turning operation of each of the guide channels 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the sphere can be varied accordingly.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each guide flow path 740-790 may not rotate by own weight, but may rotate only by passage of a game ball. Further, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 124, a number of nails are provided below the detouring accessory 700 so as to restrict the flowing direction of the game ball flowing out of the detouring accessory 700 via the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detouring accessory 700. Is arranged. With these nails, all game balls flowing out of the detouring object 700 can be dropped on the curved member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the first ball entrance 64). It can suppress that the game ball flows down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 124, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved surface member is opened when the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable prize device 65 in a front view, a relatively large space (having a width exceeding one game ball) for guiding game balls to the out port 66 below the variable prize device 65 is provided. (Flow channel) is provided. For this reason, when the specific prize hole 65a is opened, when a game ball is fired leftward, many game balls enter the specific prize hole 65a, but some of the game balls (for example, 10 The ratio of one ball per ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the bypass board 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side in the front view of the game board 13. Thus, the period until the right-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Basically, the right-handed player takes a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but the left-handed player can reach the specific winning opening 65a depending on the reflection direction of the game ball or the state of ejection. The possibility that the period until the arrival reaches a long time is not zero (for example, when the game ball fired in the left direction is temporarily stopped, or when the ball is clogged in the left channel of the variable display unit 80). etc). For this reason, a game ball flowing down (passing) through the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80 is compared with a game ball flowing down (passing) through the left flow path, during which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. (The time it takes for the game ball flowing down the left channel to reach the specific winning opening 65a is likely to be shorter).

  In the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of right-hitting game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the ratio of left-playing gaming balls to the specific winning opening 65a. Can be higher than the ratio of entering the ball. As a result, a player who wants to proceed with the jackpot game quickly (wishes to end the jackpot game early) has a small loss (about one ball out of every ten balls) during execution of the jackpot game. With the ball prepared, a game can be played by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, a game is performed by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing in preparation for a longer jackpot game period. Can be made. Therefore, a favorite game property can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game property according to the taste of each player can be realized. Each round of the jackpot is ended when 30 seconds elapse from the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds elapse. Even if the game balls start to be fired by right-handing after each round of the jackpot, 10 game balls are passed through the detour role object 700 before the elapse of 30 seconds, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the winning sphere is disadvantageous (the round ends before the specified number of game balls wins the specific winning opening 65a) when the right hit is performed.

  Next, a display mode during execution of the big hit game in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR15 and HR16 are formed on the upper left side in the front view and the upper right side in the front view in the main display area Dm. A display region HR17 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display regions HR15 and HR16 is formed below the display regions HR15 and HR16. In the display area HR15, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and a character "left-handed high-speed mode" and a character "big hit can be quickly digested" are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the player hits the left during the jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed). Can be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, in the display area HR16, an image imitating a rightward arrow is displayed, and the character "Right-handed and low-speed mode" and "The big hit can be slowly digested" are displayed. And characters are displayed. From these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the right hit is performed during the jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed over a relatively long time (the jackpot proceeds at a relatively low speed). Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that a big hit is being displayed are displayed in the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB imitating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the center portion of the display area HR17, and “ The display area HR19 with the character "big hit" is formed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the big hit game is being executed. A display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress status of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of paid out prize balls) is formed on the upper left side of the display area HR17. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters “ROUND: 01/16” (information indicating a comparison between the current round number and the maximum round number) and the characters “GET: 0000/1600” (prize balls until now) Is displayed, which indicates the comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR18 allow the player to easily understand the progress status of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the right-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-hit game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of right-hit game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the ratio of left-playing game balls to the specific winning opening. It is configured to be higher than the ratio of entering the ball 65a. With such a configuration, a player who wants to rapidly progress the jackpot game (want to obtain a large amount of prize balls in a shorter time) can receive a slight loss (one ball per 10 balls) during the execution of the jackpot game. The player can play the game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing while preparing for a waste ball of a degree). On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, the player can aim at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing in preparation for a longer jackpot game period. Can be performed. Therefore, a favorite game property can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game property according to the taste of each player can be realized.

  In the tenth embodiment, by providing the detouring object 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball fired by right-handing reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. Is configured to be longer than a period until the game ball fired by the player reaches the variable winning device 65. That is, by making the path length when the game ball fired by the right strike falls down longer than the path length when the game ball fired by the left strike falls, the right-handed player is left Although the configuration is such that the downflow time is longer than when the beating is performed, the invention is not limited to this. For example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, a configuration may be provided in which a well-known clown unit is provided instead of the detouring object 700. With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period from reaching the clune means to passing through the clune means, so that it is possible to lengthen the flow time of the game ball shot rightward. Further, for example, instead of the detouring role 700, a role to stop the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 The right side of the game board 13 is made of a material (for example, an elastic body such as rubber) having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is lower than that of the base plate 60. May be configured to be easily decelerated by the friction of. In addition, instead of the detour role 700, by disposing the nails in the left flow path and the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80 differently, the flow down the right flow path is more likely to cause the left flow A configuration may be adopted in which the period until reaching the lower area (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) in the game board 13 is longer than when the road flows down.

  In the tenth embodiment, during the big hit, in the third symbol display device 81, the game performance when performing a left-handed game and the game performance when performing a right-handed game are respectively displayed in a display area HR15 and a display area HR16. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, during a big hit, a configuration may be adopted in which only an image prompting left-handing is displayed, or only an image prompting right-handing is displayed. With a configuration in which only an image prompting left-handing is displayed, the big hit can be ended in a short time, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. Thus, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying only the image that prompts the player to make a right hit, the number of useless balls (game balls that enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 65a) can be reduced. The player's profit in the jackpot can be increased.

  When notifying the player of the launch direction during the jackpot, the launch direction to be notified may be changed according to the type of the jackpot, the type of the effect performed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability change jackpot, a variable display effect (an effect mode executed only when a probability change jackpot is performed) in which the main symbols (probability change symbols) with odd numbers are aligned is executed. It is configured to determine by lottery whether to perform a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed in the case of a normal jackpot) in which the main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are aligned. And when it is a regular jackpot or a probability variable jackpot, and when an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined, an effect of notifying whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot during the jackpot is performed. . In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability-change jackpot (for example, an effect of not knowing whether or not the jackpot is a probability-change jackpot until the last round of the jackpot, and an instant notification at the end of the first round) The player is allowed to select one of an effect mode that is performed and an effect mode that is not known where in each round of the jackpot is notified (that is, operating means such as buttons and levers that can be operated by the player). May be provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and the effect mode may be selected in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the jackpot (the normal symbol notification jackpot) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, a configuration suggesting right-handing is provided. It may be. With such a configuration, a longer period for allowing the player to select an effect mode can be secured for a longer time, so that the player can more reliably select a desired effect mode. On the other hand, when the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by the variable display effect in which the positively-variable symbols are aligned), a configuration may be adopted in which left-handing is notified during the jackpot. . With this configuration, the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, for example, when a normal jackpot or a probable jackpot is determined, and an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect for notifying whether or not the probable jackpot is performed in the first round of the jackpot is executed. The effect (operation effect) that prompts the operation of the operation means may be executed in the effect. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by a player is provided as an operation means, and an effect is performed to prompt the player to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period. Then, the display mode is configured to be variable (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated) according to the number of times the push button is pressed, and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge is changed). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is reported that a probability change is a big hit by accumulating to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, when a normal jackpot or a probable variable jackpot is determined and an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned by lottery is determined (when an operation effect is executed), the right-hand is notified in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period for performing the operation effect can be secured. Therefore, the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced. On the other hand, when a stochastic jackpot is determined and an effect in which the stochastic symbols are aligned is determined by a lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), the left hit in the first round is notified so that the jackpot is achieved. It is possible to shorten the period until the end. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, instead of selecting the production mode when notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of the music (production by voice) to be reproduced during the execution of the jackpot game is set. It may be configured to be selectable, and to notify at least right-handing during a period for selecting music (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (production by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to a plurality of (for example, ten) musics set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means such as a button which can be operated by the player instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content of the operation means. Is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each music are arranged in a vertical line, and one image (for example, the image displayed at the center) has a lit appearance, and the other images have a lit appearance. The configuration is as follows. Further, a configuration is provided in which three types of buttons are provided as operation means: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to determination operation (determination button). I do. Then, by detecting the press of the upper button during the music selection period, the image that had been lit up to just before the press was switched to the unlit appearance, and the image disposed one above was switched to the lit appearance. (The illuminated visual image moves upward by one). Similarly, when a press on the down button is detected, the illuminated visual image is moved downward by one. Further, by detecting pressing of the determination button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image which is turned on at the time of pressing and has the appearance is determined as the music to be reproduced during the current big hit. That is, the music is set to be reproduced from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. With such a configuration, the favorite music of the player can be reproduced during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

  Under such circumstances, if the left hit is reported in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, and the music selection period also becomes short. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music by operating the up button and the down button, and sets the reproduction with the enter button. On the other hand, the right-handing is notified during the first round (song selection period) of the jackpot (song selection in which the effect of selecting the music is determined to be executed) for which the song selection period is set, so that one round is set. Since the round period of the eyes can be set to a relatively long period, the player searches for the desired music from the music selection menu screen (operate the up button and the down button so that the corresponding image looks lit) A longer period for determining (pressing the determination button) can be secured. This allows the user to select the desired music without causing the player to be impatient, thereby improving the convenience of the player when selecting the music. In addition, a configuration in which a left hit is notified during the first round of a jackpot in which a song selection period is not set (a jackpot in which a normal jackpot effect is performed) prevents a game from being delayed and speedy. The jackpot game can be digested. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the presentation mode executed during the big hit.

  Further, in a case where an effect (operation effect) for prompting the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the case of a big hit, the player's past A configuration in which the firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is configured to be able to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has operated the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set. Then, in the case of starting a jackpot in which an operation effect is set, a game is played over a jackpot in which a predetermined number of past (for example, 5) operation effects are set based on the stored past operation history. When the player has not performed an operation, the left hit may be reported, whereas when the player has performed an operation within a predetermined number of jackpots, the right may be reported. In other words, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even when the operation effect is executed, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time by notifying the left hit to end the first round of the jackpot earlier. On the other hand, while achieving the playability that can be acquired, for the player who tends to perform the operation actively during the operation effect, the execution time of the operation effect is extended by notifying the right-handed, and the player in the operation effect A period for performing a sufficient operation on the operation means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming property according to a tendency of the player.

  In the tenth embodiment, the right-handed player has a prize spherical surface by adopting a board configuration in which the right-handed player has a higher ball entry rate to the specific winning opening 65a than the left-handed player. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for making right-handing advantageous with a prize sphere is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the game ball fired by a right strike and the game ball fired by a left strike at the same rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a, instead of the same ratio, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (that is, left-handed) (A position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter and the right-hit game ball can enter) may be provided with a general winning port having a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15). That is, in the state where the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball hit left is basically entered into the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls are unable to enter the specific winning opening 65a and are out. A configuration may be such that, while flowing down the mouth 66, a right-hit game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some game balls enter the general winning opening. With such a configuration, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is a prize ball due to a jackpot (that is, the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a). Is given in addition to the prize sphere, so that a right-handed hit during the jackpot can be advantageous in the prize sphere. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to obtain more prize balls to make a right-handed shot in preparation for a longer jackpot period. On the other hand, for players who want to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter time, make a left hit during the jackpot in preparation for being a little disadvantageous than a right hit on the prize sphere Can be.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the feature of simply hitting right and the feature of hitting left are displayed in the display areas HR15 and HR16 (see FIG. 126). ), But is not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether a right strike or a left strike is made at a predetermined position of the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80). Or the like may be provided, and the direction in which the player is shooting game balls may be determined from the detection result of the detection means. And it is good also as a structure which makes the effect during a big hit variable according to the determined firing direction. For example, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned off and the display area HR16 is turned on. On the other hand, when a left strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned off. It may be configured to have a light-off appearance. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of playability is achieved depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment, the game board 13 uses the game ball provided on the right side of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 as compared with the case where the game ball flows down. In order for the time to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) to be easier to reach when the player falls down, The path length of the flow path, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like were configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (that is, during the execution of the jackpot game), the game is played by right-handing than when the game ball is fired by left-handing. The game board 13 having a board surface configuration that makes it easier to win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the variable prize device 65, a right-possible variable prize device 659 is provided as a variable prize device that is opened and closed during a big hit. The right-winning prize port 659a of the right-winning prize winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and is the same as the left-winning prize-winning port 655La and the right-winning prize opening 655Ra in the above-described seventh embodiment. In addition, when the game ball enters during the big hit, a certain symbol change state is given after the big hit is completed. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when a game ball enters. In addition, the right probable winning prize mouth 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when the player hits the ball left and when the player hits the ball rightward. The number of game balls that reach the probability-changing winning device 659 while the right probability-changing winning port 659a can enter the ball increases, but the ratio of reaching game balls reaching the right probability-changing winning port 659a is It is configured to be low. On the other hand, when the right-handed player keeps hitting right in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the certainty winning device 659 while the right certainty winning port 659a can enter the ball is reduced, but the reached game balls are reached. Is configured to increase the ratio of entering the right probable winning prize port 659a. With these, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball, and therefore, for each player, the desired playability (the ball entry rate to the right-possible changing winning prize port 659a is low) Instead, it is possible to select one of a game property in which the number of game balls to be reached increases and a game property in which the number of balls reached becomes high instead of a small number of games.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. And that the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed to be the same as the various control processing in the seventh embodiment. . Other configurations, other processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the tenth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the tenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, in the game board 13 of the eleventh embodiment, a curved member 810 is provided instead of the curved member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 124) of the tenth embodiment. Are different. On a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810, as shown in FIG.

  The probability-change winning device 659 is provided with a horizontally-long rectangular right probability-changing winning port 659a at a substantially central portion thereof. This right-possible change winning prize port 659a is normally closed by the opening / closing door 659f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. It is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, a state in which it is possible to enter the right probability change winning port 659a and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball are switched in a specific switching pattern. Then, while the opening / closing door 659f1 is open (while the ball can enter the right-probable winning prize port 659a), the game ball enters the right-probable winning prize port 659a, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is changed. , The special symbol is set to the probable change state, and the normal symbol is set to the time saving state (at the end of the big hit, the probable change flag 203e is set to ON). On the other hand, if the game ball has never entered the right-winning winning prize port 659a in one jackpot, the game state after the end of the jackpot becomes a low probability state of a special symbol and a time reduction state of a normal symbol. Is set (100 is set as the value of the counter 203f during the working hours). In other words, it is more advantageous for a player to enter the game ball into the right probability change prize port 659a than to play the game ball into the right probability change prize port 659a during the jackpot. (The game state after the end of the jackpot is advantageous).

  As shown in FIG. 127, since the right probability change winning prize port 659 a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810, the game ball that has passed through the detour role object 700 and dropped on the curved member 810 is By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, it is possible to easily reach the right probability change winning prize port 659a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right probability variable winning opening 659a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved member 820 provided below the left channel in the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end in the condition of the curved member 810. . A plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface members 820 and 810 so as to form a downward slope from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810, as shown in FIG. With these configurations, when a game ball that has been hit left and passed through the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 has reached the upper surface of the curved member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 820 and Reach the right end. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right in frontal view flows downward and rightward in frontal view while interfering with the nail set between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved member 810. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved member 810 can easily reach the right probability change winning prize port 659a by rolling the upper surface of the curved member 810 rightward when viewed from the front. Can be. For this reason, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be made to reach the certain change winning device 659 both when the player hits right and when the player hits the left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be fired in a desired direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the structure of the probability change prize winning device 659 will be described in more detail. FIG. 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the probability changing prize winning device 659 in a state in which the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probability changing prize winning device 659 is closed (a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the right probability changing prize winning opening 659a). (B) is a probability change in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probability change prize winning device 659 is switched from a closed state to an open state (a game ball is switched from a state where it is difficult to enter the right probability prize opening port 659a to a state where it is possible to enter the ball). It is a front perspective view of the winning device 659.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (a), in a state where the right-winning prize opening 659a is closed, the left-end of the opening / closing door 659f1 for closing the right-positive winning prize opening 659a and the upper surface of the curved member 810 are the positive-change winning prize device 659. A portion on the left side (left floor surface 810b) is smoothly connected with almost no level difference. On the other hand, at the right end of the door 659f1, a convex portion 659g1 for suppressing a game ball rolling from the left in front view from passing through the upper surface of the door 659f1 and rolling rightward is provided. Is provided. Since the convex portion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the door 659f1, the game ball rolling on the door 659f1 from the left side of the door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 and rolls. Motion stops. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), since the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the game ball that is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 opens and closes. The upper surface of the door 659f1 flows downward toward the lower left in front view. Then, the left floor surface 810 b rolls leftward when viewed from the front, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. It should be noted that a game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the probability change prize winning device 659 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong downward flow due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, and therefore the opening and closing door 659f1. In the state where is closed, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and flow down to the direction of the outlet 66. In this way, by arranging the positive change prize winning device 659 in an inclined manner, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being stored in the upper portion of the door 659f1 during the period in which the door 659f1 is closed. Can flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right probability change prize port 659a switches to a state in which a ball can be entered, the opening / closing door 659f1 blocking the upper part of the right probability change prize port 659a becomes: The sliding door 659f1 is opened by sliding to the left in front view. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), while the opening / closing door 659f1 is being opened, the game ball rolling from the right side in the front view can enter the right certainty winning prize opening 659a, but it rolls from the left side in the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 659g1, and it is difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 659. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, when the door 659f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b have substantially the same height (substantially smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left side with respect to the probability-changing winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability-changing winning opening 659a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a description will be given of the downward flow direction of the game ball that has reached the certain-change-winning device 659 when the open / close door 659f1 of the certain-change-winning device 659 is closed and opened. First, FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the positive change winning device 659 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the door 659f1 is completely opened, the height of the upper end of the protrusion 659g1 provided at the right end of the door 659f1 is substantially the same as the height of the left floor surface 810b. Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left direction in the front view with respect to the certainty winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex portion 659g1. That is, without being hindered by the convex portion 659g1, it is possible to easily make a ball (winning) into the right certainty winning opening 659a. Also, game balls that have rolled from the right in the front view with respect to the certainty changing winning device 659 (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) may also prevent the ball from entering (winning) to the right certainty changing winning opening 659a. Since it does not exist, it is possible to easily enter the ball (winning) in the right probability change winning port 659a.

  FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the positive prize winning device 659 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), in the state where the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, the right probability change winning prize port 659a is closed by the opening and closing door 659f1, so that the game ball cannot enter the ball. In this state, the game ball that has rolled from the left in the front view with respect to the positive change winning device 659 exerts a downward-leftward gravity due to the upward-upward inclination formed by the opening / closing door 659f1. The rolling momentum is reduced. Further, at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, a convex portion 659g1 protruding above the other part of the opening / closing door 659f1 is provided. Even if it is possible to climb up, it is prevented by the convex portion 659g1 from reaching the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right side in the front view with respect to the positive change winning device 659 is in a state where sufficient momentum for overcoming the convex portion 659g1 is added by the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and pass through the door 659f1. Thus, the curved member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, an opening pattern of the opening / closing door 659f1 (right probability change winning prize port 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, a jackpot type (jackpot A11) in which the right probable prize port 659a is set to be able to enter a ball for a relatively long period, A jackpot type (jackpot B11) set to a possible state is provided. The longer the state in which the ball can be entered, the more chances for the game ball to enter the right-changing winning prize port 659a. State) is more likely to be set. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B11 (the gaming state after the jackpot is more likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the open pattern of the right-winning winning opening 659a set in the first round of the jackpot A11 is referred to as an open pattern capable of winning a V, and the right-positive change set in the first round of the big hit B11. The open pattern of the winning opening 659a is referred to as an open pattern in which it is difficult to win the V.

  FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change in the state of the right-possible variable winning prize port 659a when an open pattern in which a V prize is possible (open pattern set in the first round of the big hit A11) is set. . When the open pattern enabling the V prize is set, first, the right probability change prize port 659a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, after a lapse of 1.5 seconds, the right probability winning prize port 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), it takes 0.3 seconds from when the opening operation of the right probability variable winning prize port 659a is started to when the right probability variable winning prize port 659a is completely opened. For this reason, the state is completely opened when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds elapse (ie, 2.0 seconds elapse after the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right positive winning port 659a is started. . This closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds similarly to the opening operation (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). When the right probability change winning port 659a is completely closed, the state in which the right probability change winning port 659a is closed continues for 0.5 second. Then, when 0.5 seconds elapse (that is, when 2.8 seconds elapse from the start of the first round), the right probability change winning port 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, maintained in the opened state for 0.2 seconds, and closed for 0.3 seconds.

  After that, a completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and an opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right positive change winning port 659a is completely opened in 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is 0.2 seconds (A series of operations that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. With this repetitive operation, in the open pattern in which the V prize can be won, the open operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the last opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment, a detouring object 700 for extending the flow time of the game ball is provided in the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80. . An area below the game board 13 (an area where the first entrance port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the positive change winning device 659 are equally disposed) when the right-hit game ball passes through the detouring object 700. Is 7 seconds to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when right-handing is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the certain change winning device 659 in at least 7 seconds or more from the start of the round. Therefore, in the case of right-handed, the game ball reaches the certain-change winning device 659 around the start of the last open period in the open pattern in which the V prize can be won (after the lapse of 8 seconds from the start of the first round). Therefore, in the case of right-handing in the first round, there is a possibility that a game ball can be made to enter the right positive change winning port 659a only in the last opening period of the six opening periods. is there.

  On the other hand, if the left hit is continued in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the positive changing winning device 659) takes about 1 second to 2 seconds. The game balls reach the area where the game balls are evenly arranged. Therefore, if the player hits the left immediately at the start of the first round, the game balls can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. . That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right probable winning opening 659a. However, as described above, the game ball rolling from the left side toward the right odd winning prize opening 659a is one opening period (completely closed after the opening is started) compared to the game ball rolling from the right side. (0.8 seconds until the game is completed), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right probability change winning port 659a is shortened. Further, when the player hits the ball left, the number of game balls that cannot reach the certainty winning device 659 increases as compared with the case of hitting the ball right. That is, by passing through a plurality of nails erected between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, the game ball enters the out port 66 without reaching the curved surface member 810, There is a case where the ball enters the 1 entrance 64. Therefore, when an open pattern that allows the V prize is set, the number of game balls that reach during the opening of the right probability winning prize opening 659a is large by performing left-handing in the first round. It becomes a game property in which the ratio of balls is reduced and the number of useless balls is increased. On the other hand, when the right hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls reaching while the right probability change winning port 659a is open is small, but the rate of entering the ball is high. Becomes Therefore, the playability of the first round can be changed in accordance with the shooting direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be improved. It should be noted that the possibility of a game ball entering during one round is substantially the same (for example, a ratio of about 80%) in both the right-handed and the left-handed in the first round of the jackpot. Thus, the opening period, the board configuration, and the like are set.

  FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the state of the right probable winning opening 659a when an open pattern in which it is difficult to win a V (open pattern set in the first round of the big hit B11) is set. is there. When an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V is set, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the right probable winning opening 659a is opened simultaneously with the start of the first round, and closed immediately after being completely opened. You. Therefore, in both cases of left-handed and right-handed, it is extremely difficult to allow a game ball to enter the right-probable winning prize port 659a while the right-probable winning prize port 659a is open ( The probability that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). For this reason, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot type to be the jackpot A11 (an open pattern in which a V prize can be won is set).

  FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating the state of the open / close door 659f1 during one open period in more detail when the open pattern allowing the V prize is set. As shown in FIG. 131, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right probability change winning prize port 659a is closed by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that the game ball enters the right probability change winning prize port 659a. It is impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 131 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening and closing door 659f1, the opening and closing door 659f1 slides leftward when viewed from the front, and is stored inside the curved member 810. When 0.1 second has elapsed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right probability change winning prize port 659a whose upper part is not closed by the opening / closing door 659f1 is equal to or more than the width of one game ball (FIG. 131). (B)). As a result, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction can enter the right certainty winning port 659a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction is tilted upward in the upper right direction formed by a portion of the opening / closing door 659f1 that is not housed inside the curved member 810, and the convex portion 659g1 causes the game ball to roll right. This prevents entry into the certainty winning opening 659a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a as in the state where the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely closed. The state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right certainty winning prize port 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 second. Then, when 0.1 seconds elapse (that is, when 0.2 seconds elapse from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 659f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b). The game ball reaching the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 659g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 because the width between the right end and the right end of the game ball is less than one game ball. (See FIG. 131 (c)). Therefore, a game ball that has rolled from the left side in front view with respect to the probability-changing winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability-changing winning port 659a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right (a game ball fired by a right strike) and the game ball rolling from the left (a game ball fired by a left strike) both have a positive probability winning prize port 659a. It is possible to enter the ball. Thereafter, until the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the game balls rolled from both directions (both right and left sides) are in a state where they can enter the right certainty winning prize port 659a.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 seconds elapse after the opening operation is started, the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the protrusion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (the opening / closing door 659f1). 659f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 131 (d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. In the closing operation, an operation opposite to the opening operation is performed in the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds). For this reason, during the period from when the opening operation is started to when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed again, the game ball can enter the certain variance prize device 659a, the opening operation is started at the time of right-handing. It is 0.6 seconds from the time when 0.1 seconds elapse to 0.1 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, when left-handed, the time is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. That is, the rate of game balls reaching the probability-change-winning device 659 is higher when the player hits right than when the player hits left.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which a game ball can be played at the right-winning winning prize port 659a is determined based on whether the game ball arrived at the right-winning device 659 from the right side or the game ball arrived at the left side. It is configured to be variable depending on whether it is a sphere. Thus, when a game ball arrives from the right side with respect to the certainty-winning winning device 659, it can be more strongly expected that the player enters the right certainty-winning opening 659a. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, in the first round of the jackpot, more game balls are given to the positive change winning device 659 in the first round of the jackpot than in the case of right-handed. Is reached. Therefore, when the left hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball is difficult to enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a. When the player hits the game ball, the game ball can easily enter the left-probability winning prize port 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property in which there are few opportunities to enter the ball. Therefore, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the firing direction of the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game in the first round can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by providing the convex portion 659g1 at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, the period during which the game ball rolling from the left can enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a is turned from the right. Although the period in which the moving game ball can enter is shorter than the period in which the ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 659g1. Even if the convex portion 659g1 is deleted, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131 (b)) due to the upward-sloping inclination formed by the door 659f1. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right probability change winning prize port 659a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a description will be given of a display mode in the first round of the big hit A11 (a big hit in which a V winning open pattern is set) in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of the jackpot A11 is started, the characters “a mode in which the player hits the player several times with the left-hand button” is displayed on the display area HR15 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and “ A character that reads "The number of arrivals is large but it is difficult to enter V!" And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, when a left hit is performed, more game balls can reach the probability-changing winning device 659, but it becomes difficult for game balls to reach the right probability-changing winning port 659a (V winning. It becomes easy for the player to understand that the game becomes difficult.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR16, a character “Right-hit one-shot killing mode”, a character “The number of arrivals is small but it is easy to enter V!”, And a right-pointing arrow are illustrated. Is displayed. According to these display contents, when the player makes a right-handed game, the number of game balls reaching the probability-changing prize winning device 659 decreases, while the game balls easily enter the right probability-changing prize opening 659a (easy to win V). Can be easily understood by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR17 of the third symbol display device 81, an image imitating the positive change winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed. In addition, a state in which a decoration imitating the alphabet “V” is displayed on the front side of the right-probability changing winning device 659 in front view, and “Aim for V” is displayed on the upper left side of the display area HR17 in front view. The display area HR20 in which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed. According to these display contents, it is possible to obtain an advantageous result for the player by causing the game ball to enter the certain prize-winning device 659 provided with a decoration imitating the character "V" (special after the jackpot is over). It is possible to make the player easily understand that the symbol is in the changed state).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR17, arrows pointing in the direction of the probability change winning device 659 are respectively located on the left side and the upper right side in the front view of the image imitating the probability change winning device 659. An image is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side in the front view with respect to the image imitating the positive change winning device 659 is provided with the character "hit a few hits", and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side in the front view Is marked with the words "One-shot kill." According to these display contents, when the player makes a left hit according to the display content of the display area HR15 (a mode in which several hits are selected), a game ball is directed to the right assurance winning device 659 from the front left direction. It is possible for the player to easily understand that rolling occurs. In addition, when the player makes a right strike according to the display content of the display area HR16 (the one-shot hit mode is selected), the game ball rolls from the right upper direction when viewed from the front with respect to the right probability changing winning device 659. That can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which direction the player can confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right probable prize port 659a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, a bonus (prize ball) is given to a player by a game ball entering during execution of a jackpot game (during a special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right-variable winning device 659, are provided. The right-probable winning prize port 659a of the right-probable winning prize device 659 is set to an open state in which the ball can enter in the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, in addition to the prize ball, it is special after the end of the jackpot. A symbol change state is given. Therefore, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous to the player changes depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right-probable winning prize port 659a, and to the right-probable winning prize port 659a in the first round of the jackpot. The game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters.

  The right probability change prize mouth 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when the player hits left and when the player hits the right. If the player keeps hitting left in the first round, the right probability change prize mouth 659a is obtained. While the number of game balls reaching the right probability change winning device 659 while the ball 659a is capable of entering the ball is increased, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability change winning port 659a is reduced. . On the other hand, if the player keeps right-handing in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the right-probability change winning device 659 while the right-probability change winning port 659a can enter the ball decreases, but the reached game It is configured such that the ratio of the ball entering the right probability change winning port 659a increases. That is, the number of game balls reaching the right-winning winning prize device 659 during the predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round ends) (the number of opportunities to win the right-winning winning opening 659a) ( Element) is configured such that left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing. Further, the surface (element) of the ease of entering the ball (ball entry rate) with respect to the right-probability changing winning device 659 is configured such that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. With these, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball, and therefore, for each player, the desired playability (the ball entry rate to the right-possible changing winning prize port 659a is low) Instead, it is possible to select one of a game property in which the number of game balls to be reached increases and a game property in which the number of balls reached becomes high instead of a small number of games. As a result, it is possible to achieve a gaming property that matches the tastes of more players, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (the first round), the right-handed player has an advantage in terms of the ball entry rate as compared to the left-handed player (right The game ball that has reached the certainty winning device 659 can easily enter the right certainty winning opening 659a). On the other hand, when the player hits left, the number of reached balls becomes smaller than when the player hits right. The advantage is that the game balls are more advantageous (more game balls are more likely to reach the right-changing winning device 659). Thereby, by making a configuration in which the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side are different between right-handed and left-handed, the player can determine whether to perform right-handed or left-handed. , But the difference between right-handed and left-handed advantage is not limited to this. For example, at a position where the game ball can easily enter when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), the opening time is short (for example, up to 1 second), but the game ball is detected to be entered. A special winning opening is provided with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15 per ball) when the player hits the game ball, and the game ball easily enters when the player hits the ball right (the ball is difficult to enter when the player hits the ball left) A specific winning hole may be provided at the position (a) at which the opening time is long (for example, a maximum of 5 seconds), but a small number of prize balls are provided (for example, three per winning ball). The specific winning opening that is opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). With such a configuration, if the player continues to hit the left during the jackpot, the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening is likely to be reduced, but is provided when the player enters the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize a gaming property in which award balls increase. On the other hand, if the player keeps hitting right during the jackpot, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning opening, but the number of award balls given when entering the specific winning opening is reduced. Nature can be realized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select a desired game property and play the game. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where a game ball can easily enter when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), and a game ball can be entered when right-handed. The right-winning prize winning device 659 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball if the player hits the ball left). During the period when the right-winning winning prize device 659 is opened at one big hit, the variable winning prize device 65 is opened. May be configured to be shorter than the predetermined period. In other words, if the player continues to make a right hit at the jackpot of 1, the possibility that the ball will enter the right probability change winning prize port 659a and the probability change state is given after the big hit is increased, but the obtained prize balls are reduced, If left hitting continues, a large number of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large amount of winning balls can be obtained, but it becomes difficult to enter the right positive changing winning opening 659a. The game state after the jackpot may be disadvantageous. Also in the case of such a configuration, the superiority can be made different for each firing direction during the big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In this case, in this case, the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device in which only a prize ball is provided for entering) and the right-variable changing winning device 659 (in which a prize ball is provided for entering a ball and a positive changing state is provided) May be reversed. In addition, the setting of the surface (element) in which right-handing is more advantageous and the surface (element) in which left-handing is more advantageous are not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, during a normal game, there may be provided an element in which left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing and an element in which right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a left entrance where a game ball fired with a left hit can enter, and a right entrance where a game ball fired with a right strike can enter, When a game ball enters one of the entrances, a special symbol lottery is executed. And, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, by playing the game aiming at the right entrance with a right strike, it is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than with the left strike, but when left strike, the game efficiency is improved. Although it is disadvantageous than right-handed, a configuration that makes it easy to select a jackpot type (a type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed when a jackpot is won Good.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (the first round), when the player hits right, the game ball that has reached the right-winning prize device 659 is more right-turning than when the player hits the left. On the other hand, when the player hits the ball leftward, more game balls are more likely to reach the right-winning winning prize device 659 than when the player hits the ball rightward. Had a configuration. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the firing direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the corresponding effect according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left strike is detected, the display mode in the first round (see FIG. 132) is a display mode in which the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned off. In this case, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR16 may be turned on, and the display area HR15 may be set to have a visual display mode in which the display area HR15 is turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to more easily understand the playability selected by the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by opening and closing the opening and closing door 659f1 of the right-probability changing prize device 659 by sliding leftward in front view, a game that rolls from the right side with respect to the right-probability changing prize device 659. The ball is configured so that the period during which the ball can enter the ball is longer than the game ball rolling from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the door 659f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing door 659f1 may be configured to be opened from the near side in front view to the far side. Then, the length of the opening / closing door 659f1 on the right front side in the front view may be configured to be one game ball or more and shorter than the length on the left front side in the front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 659f1 is stored on the back side in front view, the right side of the opening / closing door 659f1 can enter the game ball earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. When the opening / closing door 659f1 projects forward and forward, the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 may be in a state where the game ball cannot enter the ball earlier. Also in the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, the game ball rolling from the right side with respect to the right likelihood change prize device 659 enters the ball more than the game ball rolling from the left side. It can be configured so that the possible period is long.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a game ball that has physically reached the left-handed position is more advantageous than a right-handed one due to the board configuration (that is, a game ball that has reached the right-probable-change prize device 659 enters the right-probable-change prize port 659a). And a surface where right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right probable prize-winning device 659 in one round). It is not limited. For example, control may be realized. More specifically, for example, a right probable winning prize port 659a is provided at a position where the game ball reaches the same ratio regardless of whether the player hits right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player has made a right-handed or left-handed hit. The configuration may be such that the opening pattern is different from that in the case in which it is performed. That is, when a right-handed hit is detected, the right-turned winning prize mouth 659a is opened in a pattern in which the opening time of each right opening is relatively small, but the opening period of each opening is relatively long. In such a case, the right probable winning prize port 659a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening the right probable prize port 659a is relatively large while the opening period of each opening is relatively short. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select the jackpot gaming properties by operating an operation means such as a button instead of the shooting direction of the game ball.

  In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set for one variable display. However, it is not always necessary to keep the continuous transformation effect within the variation time of the one variable display. A continuous transformation effect may be executed over time. That is, when a plurality of reserved balls are present at the start of the change, whether or not to set a continuous transformation effect based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball (whether or not each reserved ball is used, the type of change, etc.) When it is determined that the continuous make-up effect is to be set, a configuration may be used in which it is determined which continuous change effect is to be continued up to the change display corresponding to the reserved ball. Further, the configuration may be such that the production time of the continuous transformation effect is calculated from the pre-read result of each reserved ball, and the upper limit number of transformations is set according to the production time. With this configuration, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect can be made longer, so that the upper limit number of success notification modes can be increased. Therefore, more opportunities to display the success notification mode can be given to the player, and thus, when the continuous transformation effect is executed, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Further, by making a configuration in which a continuous transformation effect is continued over a plurality of variable displays, it is configured to make it more difficult for a player to predict how long the transformation success (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode) will continue. be able to. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  In addition, in the case where the continuous makeover effect is continued over the change time of a plurality of change displays, the progress status of the continuous makeover effect (the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, the remaining change number, the change time of the reserved ball, etc.) Accordingly, the number of fluctuations until the continuous transformation effect ends, the upper limit number of success notification modes, and the like may be increased or decreased. Regarding this, at the start of the change, the continuous change effect is executed over the display period of the change display of three times including the change (the change + two reserved balls), and the big change is notified by the third change display. A more specific description will be given, taking the case where it is determined as an example. For example, when the player presses the frame button 22 at almost no interval from the start of the operation valid period, most of the operation valid period is shortened, and the display of the upper limit number of success notification modes during the second variable display is performed. When the process has been completed, the continuous transformation effect may be completed in the second variation display. Then, in the third variation display, which should have continued the continuous make-up effect, an effect completely different from the continuous make-up effect may be executed. When the last operation validity period of the continuous makeover effect ends immediately after the start of the third change display, for example, the effect time of the third change display is left by increasing the upper limit number of the makeover. It is good also as composition which prevents that. As described above, by changing the production mode flexibly according to the progress of the continuous transformation production, the production mode can be further diversified.

  In the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during the execution of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a continuous transformation effect is executed during execution of a jackpot (for example, 1 to 5 rounds) may be adopted. In this case, for example, a continuous transformation effect is performed by determining whether the same normal symbol (a main symbol imitating an even number) is stopped and displayed to determine whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. (When it is difficult to identify), the configuration may be such that it is executed. Then, as the number of times of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) in the continuous transformation effect is larger, for example, the degree of expectation may be higher after the end of the jackpot (the current jackpot is the jackpot A). . With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming simply an operation for gaining a higher rank, and to further enjoy the game during the jackpot.

  Note that, in this case, the condition for terminating the operation validity period may be, for example, a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a instead of pressing the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in a continuous transformation effect only by firing a game ball to the specific winning opening 65a in order to obtain a prize ball during a jackpot. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the description has been given on the assumption that the character 811 is in a continuous transformation effect in which an effect of performing the transformation is performed one or more times. However, the technical idea described in each of the above embodiments is directed to the continuous transformation effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the application. For example, a configuration in which one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation, or departure, etc.) is notified in a single shot (single-shot effect) may be applied. That is, a configuration in which a subsequent display mode, a method of selecting an effect period, and the like may be changed depending on whether or not a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation validity period set in the single effect. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode, the method of selecting the effect period, and the like, depending on whether or not a press is detected. In a part or all of the operation valid period, the same notification mode is detected when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period and when the operation valid period ends without detecting the press. For example, the success notification mode) may be displayed at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the operation valid period). That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed, only the point of notifying that the pressing is detected is different, and the timing of determining the notification mode and the timing of displaying may be common. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it is not always necessary to notify that the pressing has been detected. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the frame button 22 that can be operated (pressed) by the player.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is executed as one type of the entertaining effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the change display of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed as a kind of entertainment effect during the execution of the jackpot, may be executed as a kind of so-called reservation notice effect, or may be executed during a so-called demonstration effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect time of the transition effect and the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol match. However, it is necessary to completely match the end timing. However, a degree of freedom may be provided. Specifically, for example, the effect time of the transition effect and the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol are within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). May be set. With this configuration, the calculation of the effect time such as the transition effect can be made to be about, so that the additional processing required for the operation can be reduced.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  All or some of the above embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (The total effective period is longer than the production period)
In one effect period, a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode, an upper limit number setting unit that sets an upper limit number of the specific display mode displayed in the specific effect, A specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on a predetermined setting condition being satisfied in the effect period; and a first condition being satisfied in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the first condition, and a second condition different from the first condition being satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. And a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode on the basis of the specific display mode. When displayed only by the first mode display means, the specific period having a length at which the effect period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number is displayed is set. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in one specific effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. The specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the fact that the predetermined setting condition is satisfied in the production period, and the first condition is satisfied in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. Thus, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. On the other hand, in the specific period, the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied. In the one production period, when the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means, the specific period of the length in which the production period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed. It is set by the specific period setting means.

  Thus, if the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means in one effect period, the effect period of the specific effect ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed. Therefore, a game can be played in the hope that a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, during the specific period, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the second condition is satisfied, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first mode display means displays the specific display mode based on the lapse of the specific time period, and the second mode display means displays the specific mode during the specific time period. A gaming machine A2 for terminating the specific period and displaying the specific display mode based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A1, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the lapse of the specific period, while the second mode is displayed during the specific period. Since the specific period is ended and the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the satisfaction of the condition, the specific display mode is displayed earlier as the second condition is satisfied. And the specific period can be ended early. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, the easier it is to increase the number of times of display of a specific display mode in one effect period. Therefore, for a player who wants to display more specific display modes, There is an effect that a game can be played with expectation that the second condition is satisfied early.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the game machine A1 or A2 is provided with operation means operable by a player, and the second mode display means detects the predetermined number of operations on the operation means in one of the specific periods, and performs the identification. A gaming machine A3 characterized by displaying the display mode of (1).

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations on the operating means operable by the player in one specific period are detected, the second mode display means Since the specific display mode is displayed, the player who wants to display more specific display modes can positively operate the operation means during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the specific effect can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means can set the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. The period and the display period of the specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, as the specific period ends earlier, the number of display times of the specific display mode can be increased, so that for a player who wants to display more specific display modes, the specific period is When set, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation that the second condition is satisfied earlier.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. The upper limit number setting means sets the upper limit number to one of a plurality of times including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number. The first number is set such that the ratio set by the upper limit number setting means is higher than the second number when the specific result is obtained by the determination means. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 to A4. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. One of the plurality of times including at least the first number and a second number different from the first number is set as the upper limit number by the upper limit number setting means. The first number is configured such that, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determining unit, the ratio set by the upper limit number setting unit is higher than the second number.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determining unit, the setting ratio of the first number as the upper limit number is increased, so that the player can infer the determination result by the determining unit from the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who desires to know the upper limit number of times accurately can play a game during a specific effect while strongly expecting that the second condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine A6, wherein the first number is greater than the second number.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, since the first number is greater than the second number, it is expected that at least the specific display mode greater than the second number is displayed. To allow the player to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the second condition is satisfied more times.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect execution means has the dynamic display execution means execute the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine A7 capable of executing the specific effect while the gaming machine A7 is in operation.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing unit while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored between the time when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed and the time when the identification information ends.

  In the gaming machine A7, after the end of the specific effect, a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the specific effect, and an effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, A gaming machine A8 comprising: a second effect time determination unit that determines the remaining time based on the dynamic display time.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A7, a second effect different from the specific effect is executed by the second effect executing means after the end of the specific effect. The effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is determined by the second effect time determination means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect ends, the second effect can be executed with the remaining dynamic display time, so that the player can perform the dynamic display of the identification information after the specific effect ends. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of boredom.

<Characteristic B group> (Control in which the period until the transformation becomes longer as the number of button PUSH is smaller during the transformation effect of 1)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period; and a predetermined effect during at least one previous display of the predetermined effect mode in the one effect period. A condition determining unit for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; and a display time setting unit for determining and setting a display time of the predetermined effect mode based on a determination result by the condition determining unit. The time setting means is such that the ratio of setting a long display time is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period is executed by the specific effect executing means. In one effect period, at least during the display of the previous predetermined effect condition, it is judged by the condition discriminating means whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The display time is determined and set by the display time setting means. The proportion of setting a long display time by the display time setting means is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means.

  Accordingly, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the display time of the predetermined effect is likely to be longer, and the number of the predetermined effect executed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, a player who wants to display the predetermined effect mode a larger number of times can be expected to satisfy the specific condition every time the predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine B1 includes operating means operable by a player, and the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when detecting an operation on the operating means. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the player operating the operating means, so that the display time of the predetermined effect mode is shortened. The player who wants to do so can be made to actively operate the operation means every time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the condition determining means determines a continuous number of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in one effect period, and the display period setting means includes: The gaming machine B3, wherein the larger the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of setting a long display time.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, in one effect period, the number of continuous predetermined effect modes in which the specific condition is not satisfied is determined by the condition determining means. The greater the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of the long display time set by the display period setting means.

  Thus, the longer the predetermined rendering mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied, the longer the display time is likely to be set, so that the number of the predetermined rendering modes that can be displayed in one rendering period is reduced. Therefore, the effect that the player who wants to display the predetermined effect mode more can be played in expectation that the specific condition is satisfied every time the predetermined effect mode is displayed. is there.

  A gaming machine B4 comprising an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times of displaying the predetermined effect mode in one effect period in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times of displaying the predetermined effect mode in one effect period is set by the upper limit number setting means. It is possible to make the user want to display more effect modes within the range. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, based on the display time being determined by the display time setting means, the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value. The display time determined by the display time setting means is set based on the end determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold value is determined by the end determination means. A gaming machine B5, comprising: avoiding means for avoiding a situation.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B4. Based on the display time being determined by the display time setting means, it is determined by the cycle determination means whether or not the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold, and the end determination means is provided. The setting of the display time determined by the display time setting means based on the determination that the predetermined presentation mode ends after the threshold value is avoided by the avoidance means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the production time of the specific production becomes too long.

  In the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, a setting determination for determining whether to set the display time shorter than the display time for which the setting is avoided. A gaming machine B6 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, a display time shorter than the set display time is set. Is determined by the setting determining means, so that there is an effect that a larger number of predetermined effect modes can be displayed as long as the effect time of the specific effect does not become too long.

  In the gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the display time of the shortest length that can be set based on the setting determination means determining that the display time of the short length is set. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, the shortest length that can be set by the display time setting means based on the setting determination means determining that the short display time is set. Since the display time is set, it is possible to more reliably suppress the effect time of the specific effect from being too long.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when the avoidance means avoids setting the display time, the game machine further includes end determination means for determining whether to end the specific effect. Machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, it is determined by the end determining means whether to end the specific effect. Therefore, when the display time exceeding the predetermined threshold is determined, the end of the specific effect may be determined by the end determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in the hope that a display time as short as possible is set.

<Character C group> (Control to increase the transformation success rate when the button PUSH is performed than when the effective period has elapsed without performing the PUSH)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect; a determination period number determining means for determining a set number of determination periods for performing a predetermined determination in an effect period of the specific effect; In the effect period, the discrimination period setting means for setting the discrimination period for the number of times determined by the discrimination period number of time determination means, and as the predetermined discrimination, whether a specific condition predetermined during the discrimination period is satisfied A first mode display determining module for determining whether to display a specific display mode based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining module; A second mode display determination for determining whether to display the specific display mode based on a lapse of the determination period without determining that the specific condition is satisfied by the means. And the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the first mode display determining unit is higher than the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determining unit. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a ratio setting means for setting a ratio.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. In the effect period of one specific effect, the number of set determination periods for performing the predetermined determination is determined by the determination period number determination means. In the effect period of one specific effect, the number of determination periods determined by the number-of-determination-periods determination unit is set by the determination period setting unit. As a predetermined determination, it is determined by the condition determining means whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the determination period, and a specific display is performed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. Whether the mode is to be displayed is determined by the first mode display determining means. Based on the lapse of the determination period without the determination that the specific condition has been satisfied by the condition determination means, the second mode display determination means determines whether to display the specific display mode. The ratio determined by the first mode display determining unit to display the specific display mode is set by the ratio setting unit to be higher than the ratio determined by the second mode display determining unit to display the specific display mode. Is done.

  Thereby, when the specific condition is satisfied during the determination period, the specific display mode is displayed at a higher ratio. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who wants to display a specific display mode to play a game in expectation that a specific condition is satisfied. Further, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to more strongly expect that the specific display mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the specific effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, when the operation on the operating means operable by the player is detected, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, so the determination period By operating the operating means during the period, the rate at which the specific display mode is displayed can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means.

  Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on satisfaction of a discriminating condition in the gaming machine C1 or C2, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. And a game execution means, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on execution of the determination by the determination means, and the ratio setting means includes: It is performed based on the specific determination result, rather than during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination unit. The gaming machine C3, wherein, during the execution of the specific effect, the rate of determining that the specific display mode is displayed is set higher.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is performed by the bonus game execution unit based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit based on the execution of the judgment by the judgment unit. The determination of the specific effect performed based on the specific determination result is performed rather than during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the determination result being different from the specific determination result by the determination unit. During execution, the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the ratio setting means is set higher.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained, a specific display mode is easily displayed. Therefore, when a specific display mode is displayed, a sense of expectation that a bonus game is performed for a player is performed. There is an effect that can be hugged.

  In the gaming machine C3, the ratio setting unit may display the specific display mode by the first mode determination unit during execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination. A first ratio is set as a ratio to be determined, and the specific display mode is changed by the second mode display determination unit during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the specific determination result. A second ratio lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio determined to be displayed, and the first mode is executed during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the deviation determination. A third ratio lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio determined by the display determination unit to display the specific display mode, and the identification performed based on the result of the deviation determination is performed. And setting a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio as a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determining means during execution of the first display. The gaming machine C4, wherein a difference between the ratio of the third ratio and the third ratio is larger than a difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, during execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination, the ratio determined by the first mode determination unit to display the specific display mode is the first ratio determined by the ratio setting unit. The percentage is set. During the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination, the second mode display determination unit determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed as a lower rate than the first rate. The ratio of 2 is set by the ratio setting means. A third rate lower than the first rate is determined as a rate determined by the first mode display determining means to display the specific display mode during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the departure determination. Is set by the ratio setting means. A fourth rate lower than the second rate is a rate at which the second mode display determining means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the off-state determination. Is set by the ratio setting means. The difference between the first ratio and the third ratio is set to be larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

  As a result, the degree of expectation of the bonus game is higher when the first mode display determining unit determines to display the specific display mode than when the second mode determining unit determines to display the specific display mode. Is high, the player can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with expectation that a specific display mode is displayed after a specific condition is satisfied during the determination period.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the determination period number determination means is executed based on the specific determination result, rather than the specific effect performed based on the off determination result. The gaming machine C5, wherein the specific effect makes it easier to set a large number of times as the number of times of the determination period.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the execution is performed based on the specific determination result, rather than the specific effect performed based on the off determination result. In the specific effect, the discrimination period number determination means makes it easier to set a larger number of times, so that the greater the number of discrimination periods, the higher the player's expectation of the privilege game can be.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific effect is determined based on a determination that the specific display mode is not to be displayed by either the first mode display determining means or the second mode display determining means. A game machine C6 comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the game.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it has been determined that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display determining unit or the second mode display determining unit. Based on the above, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means, so that a player who wants to enjoy the specific effect for a longer time can be made to more strongly expect the specific display mode to be displayed. . Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in a stronger hope that the specific condition is satisfied in the determination period.

  In the gaming machine C6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time of a dynamic display, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to execute the identification within a range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. And performing the effect. Based on a determination that the specific display mode is not to be displayed by either the first mode display determining means or the second mode display determining means, the remaining dynamic mode is determined. Based on the remaining time determining means for determining the display time, and based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, it is executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means. Gaming machine C7, characterized in that it comprises a presentation time determining means for determining an effect time of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display time setting means. . The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamic display time is determined by the remaining time determination unit based on the determination that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display determination unit or the second mode display determination unit. Based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the effect time of the effect to be executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means is determined by the effect time determining means.

  Thus, in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the remaining dynamic display time after the end of the specific effect, regardless of the end timing of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C7, the effect time determination means determines one effect time from a plurality of different effect times defined in advance so that the end timing of the effect does not exceed the dynamic display time. A gaming machine C8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the production time determining means can be used within a range in which the end timing of the production does not exceed the dynamic display time from among a plurality of predetermined production times. Since one effect time is determined, there is an effect that the processing load when determining the effect time can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (variable whether or not the transformation is possible and the production mode after the transformation effect according to the remaining fluctuation time and the number of transformations at the time of the button PUSH)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect at least including a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in a first effect period and a second effect performed after the first effect is completed. An upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect, and a specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A determination period setting unit that is set one or more times during execution; a first mode display unit that displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific determination period; A second aspect display means for ending the specific determination period and displaying the specific display mode based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and the specific display displayed during execution of the first first effect Aspect A mode display number counting means for counting the number of times of display, the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means during execution of the first effect, and at least one of a remaining effect period, A gaming machine D1 comprising: an effect time determining means for determining an effect time of two effects.

  According to the gaming machine D1, a specific effect at least including a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period, and a second effect executed after the first effect is completed. Is executed by the specific effect execution means. The upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. A specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set one or more times during execution of the first effect by the determination period setting means. The specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the elapse of the specific determination period. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the specific determination period, the specific determination period is ended by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. The number of times of display of a specific display mode displayed during the execution of the first effect is counted by the mode display number counting means. During the execution of the first effect, the effect time of the second effect is determined by the effect time determining means based on at least one of the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining effect period.

  Thereby, the effect time of the second effect varies according to the situation of the first effect, so that there is an effect that the variation of the specific effect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine D1, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the determination period setting means sets a period in which an operation on the operation means is valid as the specific determination period. A gaming machine D2, which is established when an operation on the operation means is detected.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, a period during which the operation on the operation unit is valid is set by the determination period setting unit as the specific determination period. The specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a player who wants to display the second effect of a longer effect time can positively operate the operation means.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display, the specific effect execution means, within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, Performing a specific effect, wherein the effect time determining means, based on at least one of the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time, the second effect of the second effect A gaming machine D3 for determining an effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. . Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on at least one of the number of displays counted by the mode number counting unit and the remaining dynamic display time, the rendering mode of the second rendering is determined by the rendering time determination unit.

  Thereby, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the dynamic display time, so that the interest of the player during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the effect time determining means may select, from among a plurality of different effect times defined as the effect time of the second effect, before the effect period of the specific effect ends. A gaming machine D4 for determining a longest production time within a range where the second production ends.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, from among a plurality of different production times defined as the production time of the second production, the production period of the specific production ends. Since the longest production time in the range where the second production ends before is determined by the production time determination means, the production time of the second production can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the specific effect is configured to include a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect, and is determined by the effect time determining means. A gaming machine D5 comprising: third production time determination means for determining a production time of the third production based on at least one of the produced production time and the remaining production period.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, the third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is included in the specific effect. The effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determining means based on at least one of the effect time determined by the effect time determining means and the remaining effect period.

  Thus, during the execution of the specific effect, the third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed, so that the effect mode can be diversified during the execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started, and the third effect time determination unit is configured to execute the third effect time determining means. The effect time of the third effect is determined based on a difference between the remaining effect period at the time when one effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started. An effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determining means based on a difference between the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed in accordance with the effect period of the specific effect.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, provided with an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode of the second effect based on the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means. .

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect mode determining means based on the number of displays counted by the mode number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have an impression in which the first effect and the second effect are related. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve a player's interest in the game in the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine D7, execution information used for executing the second effect is stored based on the storage mode for each effect mode of the second effect, and the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means; and the second one of the execution information selected by the selection means based on the effect time determined by the effect time determination means. Specifying means for specifying a range used for execution of the effect, and second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the execution information in the range specified by the specifying means. Gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D7. That is, execution information used to execute the second effect is stored in the storage unit for each effect mode of the second effect. Based on the presentation mode determined by the presentation mode determination unit, the corresponding execution information is selected from the storage unit by the selection unit. Based on the effect time determined by the effect time determining means, the specifying means specifies the range to be used for the execution of the second effect this time among the execution information selected by the selecting means. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing unit based on the execution information in the range specified by the specifying unit.

  Thereby, a plurality of second effects with different production times can be executed from each piece of execution information, so that the execution information is stored as compared with the case where the execution information is individually stored for each production time. This has the effect of reducing the storage area required for storage.

<Feature E group> (The suggestion mode of the degree of expectation varies depending on the tendency of the button PUSH)
In one effect period, based on a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times, and when a predetermined display condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. An effect mode determining means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode, and an effect mode setting for setting display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Means, a specific determining means for performing a specific determination in the effect period, and an effect mode having a high ratio determined by the effect mode determining means according to a result of the determination by the specific determining means. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a determination ratio varying unit that varies when the predetermined effect mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times is executed by the specific effect executing means in one effect period. Based on the fact that the predetermined display condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode. You. The display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is set by the effect mode setting means. In the first production period, the specific determination is performed by the specific determination unit, and the production mode having a high ratio determined by the production mode determination unit according to the determination result by the specific determination unit determines at least one predetermined production mode. When it is determined, it is varied by the determination ratio varying means.

  This makes it easier to determine a different rendering mode according to the result of the determination by the specific determination unit, so that the impression of the specific rendering can be made different according to the result of the specific determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is difficult for the player to get tired of.

  The gaming machine E1 includes condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed, and the specific determining means includes one of the following as the specific determination. Determining a determination result by the condition determination unit executed in at least one of the predetermined rendering modes set in the rendering period, wherein the determination ratio variable unit is configured to determine the specific determination unit in the one rendering period. For the predetermined production mode set by the production mode setting means after the predetermined production mode targeted by the determination by the above, the production mode in which the ratio determined by the production mode determination means is high is varied. A gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the condition determining unit determines whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. As the specific determination, the determination result of the condition determining means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period is determined by the specific determining means. In one effect period, for a predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting means after the predetermined effect mode targeted for determination by the specific determining means, an effect mode in which the ratio determined by the effect mode determining means is high. Is varied by the determination ratio varying means.

  Thereby, while the predetermined effect mode to be determined by the specific determination unit is displayed, the game can be performed while paying attention to the determination state by the specific determination unit, and the predetermined state set thereafter is set. In the effect mode, the player can play a game while paying attention to which effect mode is displayed. Therefore, the point to be noticed can be changed according to the timing at which the predetermined effect mode is set, so that there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the specific effect can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the specific determination means determines that the specific condition has been satisfied by the condition determination means among the at least one predetermined production mode set in one production period as the specific determination. The gaming machine E3, wherein the number of the predetermined effect mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, as a specific determination, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining unit among at least one predetermined rendering mode set in one rendering period. Since the number of times of the given predetermined presentation mode is determined by the specific determination unit, it is possible to vary the presentation mode that is easily set according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. The effect mode can be varied depending on whether or not the user operates the operation means. Therefore, the effect mode can be changed by the selection of the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is less tiring.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Executing the specific effect, based on the execution of the determination by the determination unit, wherein the determination ratio variable unit includes: If the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific effect is being executed based on the specific determination result being displayed, it is displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When determining the predetermined production mode, the ratio for determining the first mode is changed so as to be higher than other production modes, and the determination result by the specific determination unit is different from the first determination result. Becomes the second determination result, and, in the case where the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result being performed, determines the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times. In doing so, the ratio for determining the second aspect different from the first aspect is changed so as to be higher than the other presentation aspects, the determination result by the specific determination means becomes the first determination result, and In the case where the specific effect performed based on the result of the departure determination different from the specific determination result is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times, The ratio for determining the second aspect is changed so as to be higher than the other presentation aspects, and based on the fact that the determination result by the specific determination means is the second determination result and the departure determination result is obtained. Run When the specific effect is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times, the ratio for determining the first mode is changed so as to be higher than other effect modes. A gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the discrimination is performed by the discriminating unit based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating unit, the bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing unit. You. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means based on the execution of the judgment by the judgment means. When the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific effect is being executed based on the specific determination result, the predetermined number of times displayed at the predetermined number of times is determined. Is determined by the determination ratio varying means so that the ratio for determining the first mode is higher than that for the other mode. If the result of the determination by the specific determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result, and if the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the specific number of times Is determined by the determination ratio varying means so that the ratio of determining the two different platforms from the first configuration is higher than the other rendering configurations. Displayed at a specific number of times when the specific result executed by the specific determination unit based on the fact that the determination result is the first determination result and the deviation determination result is different from the specific determination result is being executed. When determining the predetermined effect mode to be performed, the determination ratio variable means changes the ratio for determining the second mode so as to be higher than the other effect modes. When the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the second determination result, and the specific effect performed based on the result of the departure determination is being performed, the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is determined. At the time of the determination, the determination ratio is changed by the determination ratio varying means such that the ratio for determining the first mode is higher than the other effect modes.

  This allows the player to estimate the degree of expectation to be a bonus game in accordance with the result of the determination by the specific determination means and the predetermined number of predetermined presentation effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine E1 includes condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. A gaming machine E6, wherein the determination is performed based on a determination result by the condition determination unit performed in at least one of the specific effects executed before the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the condition determining unit determines whether a predetermined specific condition has been satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. As the specific determination, the determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on the determination result by the condition determination unit executed in at least one specific effect performed before the current specific effect.

  This makes it possible to diversify the effect mode, because the effect mode in the current specific effect varies depending on the result of the determination made by the condition determining means in the specific effect executed previously.

  In the gaming machine E6, the specific determination means may include a number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed in at least one of the specific effects executed prior to the current specific effect, and the specific condition by the condition determining means. The game machine E7 is configured to execute the determination based on the number of the predetermined effect modes determined to have been established.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, the number of predetermined effect modes displayed in at least one specific effect executed prior to the current specific effect, and the specific condition determined by the condition determining means. The determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on the number of predetermined effect modes determined to have been established, so that a game can be performed by paying attention to the number of predetermined effect modes in which the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E7, there is provided identification means for identifying a player who is playing a game, and the specific determination means is displayed while the same player is identified by the identification means as playing a game. A game machine E8 for performing a determination based on the number of the predetermined production mode and the number of the predetermined production mode determined by the condition determination unit that the specific condition is satisfied. .

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E7. That is, the player playing the game is identified by the identification means. The number of predetermined effect modes displayed while the same player is playing the game while being identified by the identifying means, and the number of predetermined effect modes for which the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means Is determined by the specific determination unit based on the above.

  This makes it possible to vary the tendency of the effect mode to be easily set according to the game result for each player, so that an effect corresponding to the player can be provided.

<Feature F group> (Adjust the connection between the first half of the production and the second half of the production)
A specific effect executing means for executing, within one effect period, a specific effect at least composed of a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect, and during execution of the first effect, A first condition for ending the first effect based on a condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied and a condition for determining whether the condition has been satisfied; Ending means, and setting a length of a period between the end of the first effect by the first effect ending means and the start of the second effect based on at least a remaining length of the effect period. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a period setting unit that performs the first stage, and an effect start unit that starts the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine F1, a specific effect constituted by at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed within one effect period by the specific effect executing means. During the execution of the first effect, the end condition determining means determines whether or not a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. Based on the determination that the end condition has been satisfied, the first effect is determined. The first effect is ended by the ending means. The length of the period from the end of the first effect by the first effect ending means to the start of the second effect is set by the period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. The second effect is started by the effect start unit based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting unit.

  Thereby, the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect can be changed according to the remaining effect time, so that the effect that the specific effect can be suitably executed can be achieved. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect as the length of the second time until the end of the first effect period. A gaming machine F2 for setting the length of time when the effect ends.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is determined by the length of the period until the end of one effect period. Since the length at which the two effects end is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the specific effect can be more suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, as the second effect, there is provided type selecting means for selecting one effect type from a plurality of effect types having different effect times, and the period setting means is selected by the type selecting means. A gaming machine F3 for setting the length of a period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect, based on the effect time of the effect type.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selecting means from a plurality of effect types having at least different effect periods. Based on the effect time of the effect type selected by the type selection means, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is set by the period setting means.

  Thereby, since the start timing of the second effect can be set according to the effect time of the second effect, there is an effect that the second effect can be more appropriately executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, in the first effect, the upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied; A number counting means for counting the number of times the specific condition is satisfied, wherein the end condition is that the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or more than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being at least established.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, in the first effect, the upper limit of the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is set by the upper limit number setting means. The number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the first first effect is counted by the number counting means. At least the termination condition is satisfied when the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit set by the upper-limit setting means.

  Thereby, even if the end timing of the first effect is changed according to the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means, there is an effect that the start of the second effect can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine F4, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period for validating an operation on the operation means one or more times during the execution of the first effect, First mode display means for displaying a specific display mode based on the elapse of the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, and one operation validity set by the operation validity period setting means A second mode display unit for ending the operation validity period and displaying the specific display mode based on detecting an operation on the operation unit during a period, wherein the specific condition includes the specific condition. A gaming machine F5, which is established when the display mode of (1) is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, the operation validity period for validating the operation of the operation means operable by the player is set by the operation validity period setting means one or more times during the execution of the first effect. Based on the elapse of the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on detection of an operation on the operation means during one operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, the operation validity period is ended by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. . The specific condition is satisfied when a specific display mode is displayed.

  With this, the end timing of the operation effective period is changed according to the timing at which the player performs an operation on the operation means, so that even if the end timing of the first effect is changed, the start of the second effect is appropriately set. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, third effect execution means for executing a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect in the period of the length set by the period setting means, Effect data storage means for storing effect data for executing the third effect; and the effect data storage means storing one of the effect data from the effect data storage means based on the length of the period being set by the period setting means. And a data readout unit for reading out the third effect from among the one effect data read by the data readout unit in a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting unit. A gaming machine F6 comprising: data range setting means for setting as data to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect is executed by the third effect executing means in the period of the length set by the period setting means. Effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. Based on the setting of the length of the period by the period setting means, one effect data is read from the effect data storage means by the data reading means. Among the one effect data read by the data reading means, data in a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set as data for executing the third effect by the data range setting means. Is done.

  Thereby, when the third effect is performed, data with different effect periods can be set based on one effect data, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in data for executing the third effect. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine F6, at least a part of the effect data is constituted by data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting unit is configured to execute the processing of the period set by the period setting unit. A gaming machine F7, wherein a range of data for executing the third effect is set such that a display time of the specific still image varies according to a length.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F6. That is, at least a part of the effect data is constituted by data for displaying a specific still image. The data range for executing the third effect is set by the data range setting unit so that the display time of the specific still image is changed according to the length of the period set by the period setting unit.

  Thereby, even if the rendering time of the third rendering is changed, only the display time of the specific still image is changed, so that it is possible to suppress an unpleasant feeling of the display content for the player. .

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a display unit capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and a display unit that is executed by the dynamic display execution unit Dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect execution means determines the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determining means. A gaming machine F8 for executing the specific effect within the determined dynamic display time based on the fact.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time determination means determines the dynamic display time of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the determined dynamic display time.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed within the dynamic display time.

<Characteristic G group> (adjust the mode after the production with an indefinite production time ends)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect in one effect period; and an end condition predetermined before the effect period elapses during execution of the first effect. Ending condition judging means for judging whether or not the effect has been established, an effect ending means for ending the first effect based on the judgment that the ending condition has been established by the ending condition judging means, And an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode from the end of the first effect to the end of the effect period based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. Gaming machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the specific effect including at least the predetermined first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during one effect period. During the execution of the first effect, the end condition determining means determines whether a predetermined end condition has been satisfied before the effect period has elapsed. The first effect is ended by the effect ending means based on the end condition determining means determining that the ending condition is satisfied. The effect mode from the end of the first effect by the effect ending means to the end of the effect period is set by the effect mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period.

  This makes it possible to set an effect mode in accordance with the length of the remaining effect time, so that there is an effect that a specific effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine G1, the production mode set by the mode setting unit includes, as the production mode, at least a type selection unit for selecting one type from a plurality of types of the production modes having different production times. Machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, as the production mode set by the mode setting unit, at least one of the plurality of production mode types having different production modes is selected by the type selection unit. Since the selection is made, there is an effect that it is possible to set the effect mode of the effect time corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period.

  In the gaming machine G2, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selecting means and the length of the remaining effect period, the effect is set by the effect mode setting means after the first effect is completed. A gaming machine G3 comprising a period setting means for setting a period until the effect mode is started.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selection means and the remaining effect period Nagasato, the effect after the first effect is completed. Since the period until the production mode set by the mode setting unit is started is set by the period setting unit, there is an effect that the interval between the first production mode and the production mode can be suitably set. .

  In the gaming machine G3, the period setting unit sets the period so that a timing at which the production mode set by the production mode setting unit ends and a timing at which the production period ends are within a predetermined period. A gaming machine G4 to be set.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the timing at which the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting means ends and the timing at which the rendering period ends are within a predetermined period. Since the period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect mode can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting means is configured to determine a difference between a length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect ends and an effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selecting device. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the period is set as the period.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3 or G4, the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selecting means are determined. Since the difference period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect period and the end timing of the effect mode can be matched.

  In the gaming machine G1, storage means for storing effect data used for executing the effect mode is provided, and the effect mode setting means corresponds to the length of the remaining effect period in one effect data. A gaming machine G6 characterized by selecting and setting a range of data to be processed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, the effect data used to execute the effect mode is stored in the storage means. In the one effect data, a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

  This makes it possible to set a plurality of presentation modes with different presentation times from one presentation data, and thus has the effect of reducing the amount of data for displaying the presentation modes.

  The gaming machine G6, further comprising: data selection means for selecting one of the effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means from a plurality of the effect data stored in the storage means; Means for selecting and setting a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period from one effect data selected by the data selecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G6. That is, one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means is selected by the data selecting means from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage means. Among the one effect data selected by the data selecting means, a data range corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation mode.

  In the gaming machine G7, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a bonus game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Means, wherein the data selection means selects one of the effect data from the storage means based on at least a result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G7. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. . At least one effect data from the storage means is selected by the data selection means based on at least the result of the determination by the determination means.

  This allows the player to predict whether or not the game will be a bonus game based on the effect mode, so that the player can pay attention to the effect mode and play the game.

<Characteristic H group> (The period until the right-hit ball reaches the attacker is made longer than when the left-hit ball is hit)
A first flow path through which a game ball fired in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, and the first flow path A ball which is provided at a position where at least a game ball which has flowed down and a game ball which has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined value is determined based on that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The second flow path fires in the second direction more than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that a period until a given game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning prize port is a prize, the state shifts to a winning state in which the large prize port is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is won to the special winning opening during the winning state, so that the player performs the game with the winning state as one pleasure. Can be made.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to fire the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that would be.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, game balls fired in the first direction flow down the first flow path, and game balls fired in the second direction different from the first direction flow through the second flow path. Flow down. Ball entry means is provided at a position where at least game balls flowing down the first flow path and game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The second period is set such that the period until the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A flow path is configured.

  This allows the player who wants the game ball to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible to fire the game ball aiming at the first flow path, while taking a relatively long time to play the game ball. Can be fired at the second flow path for a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, since the player can select a desired firing direction for each player and play the game, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine H1, the ball entry means may be located at a position where a ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path is higher than a ratio of game balls flowing down the first flow path. A gaming machine H2, wherein the gaming machine H2 is disposed in the game machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the rate at which game balls flowing down the second flow path enter is higher than the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path enter. Since the ball entry means is arranged at a higher position, when flowing down the first flow path, the period until reaching the ball entry means is shortened, but it is difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when flowing down the second flow path, the ball easily enters the ball entry means, but the period until reaching the ball entry means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself / herself can select a firing direction that matches the taste of each player.

  A gaming machine H3, characterized in that the gaming machine H1 or H2 is provided with a speed-reducing means for reducing the flow speed of a game ball flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball fired in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to change between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a variable number of times the variable means performs the predetermined number of times from the second position based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. A gaming machine H4, comprising: a variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is changed to a first position.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a specific determination result by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine H4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and during execution of the variable game, the variable means A first variable for changing the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number or more of game balls having entered the ball input means after being changed from the position to the first position; Control means, and during execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position. A second variable control means for changing the position to two positions, wherein during the specific period, the game ball is started to be fired in the second direction, and then the game ball is fired in the second direction at the specific firing interval. Said specific number of game balls Gaming machine H5, characterized in that than period until after flowing down the second flow path is at least long.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at the firing interval equal to or longer than the specific firing interval. During execution of the variable game, based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means The first position is changed to the second position by the variable control means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Is done. At least a specific period from the start of the game ball launch in the second direction to the specific number of game balls fired in the second direction at a specific launch interval until the game balls finish flowing down the second flow path Is configured to be longer.

  Thus, when a game ball is fired in the second direction during execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that a person loses.

  In the gaming machine H4, the variable game execution means sets a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game. Controlling the variable means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation to be changed to the second position after a lapse of one or more of the specific variable patterns. During the execution period of the first variable operation, the game ball fired in the first direction can reach after the specific variable pattern is started, and the second variable operation is started after the specific variable pattern is started. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that gaming balls fired in two directions are difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game, the first means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period elapses after the changing means is changed to the first position. The variable game execution means is controlled so as to change the variable means in a specific variable pattern including the variable operation a predetermined number of times. The execution period of one or a plurality of first variable operations in the specific variable pattern is such that game balls fired in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can be reached, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball fired in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

  Accordingly, when the game ball is fired in the second direction, the chance that the game ball enters the ball entry means becomes smaller than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. It has the effect of making you think.

  In the gaming machine H6, as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, a first game state is set when a game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one of the variable games. A game state setting means for setting a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game. Machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H6, the game state after the completion of the execution of the variable game is the game when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one variable game. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, the second state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means when the game ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the player can play the game during execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the first flow path causes the dropped game ball to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and the second flow path causes the dropped game ball to flow in the third direction. The variable means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down the upper surface thereof while being changed to the second position, and The fourth direction side is inclined and disposed so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position. In a state in which the game ball can enter from above and the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part is in a state of being closed by the variable means, and the variable means is From the fourth direction side to the third direction side Gaming machine H8, characterized in that from the second position by sliding in the direction in which varying the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H6 and H7. That is, while the game balls flowing down the first flow path reach the ball entry means from the third direction, the game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. And reach. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface thereof, and the variable means is inclined so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. It is arranged. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above. Further, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, a state in which the upper part of the ball entry means is closed by the variable means. By sliding in the direction from the fourth direction to the third direction, the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

  In this way, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it is difficult for the game ball arrived from the third direction to enter the ball entry means, while the game ball arrived from the fourth direction is entered. Easier to do. Therefore, during the execution of the variable game, it is more likely that a game ball reaching the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when it is fired in the second direction than when it is fired in the first direction. There is an effect that it can be raised.

<Feature I Group> (Right-handing during a jackpot is more advantageous than left-handing in one aspect, but less advantageous than left-handing in another aspect)
A launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition; and a determination by the determination means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, and a first element relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game are included in the execution period of the bonus game. A first element favoring means that makes it more advantageous for a player to keep the game ball being fired in the first direction than to keep the game ball being fired in the second direction during a specific period; and A second element different from the element is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. And two-element advantageous means. Game machine I1 to butterflies.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning prize port is a prize, the state shifts to a winning state in which the large prize port is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to a player such as a prize ball is given by causing a game ball to be awarded to a special winning opening during a winning state. The state can be played with one pleasure.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to fire the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, and furthermore, the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of the predetermined privilege that can be acquired) is predetermined, there is a possibility that the hit state may be like an operation of simply firing a game ball in a predetermined direction. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the firing means is configured to be able to fire at least game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is performed by the bonus game execution unit based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The first factor relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. Is favored by the first element favoring means. The second factor relating to the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction than the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. Is favored by the second element favoring means.

  This allows the player who wants to take advantage of the first element to fire the game ball in the first direction during the execution of the privilege game, while the player wants to take advantage of the second element. A game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide gaming properties that match the taste of each player.

  In the gaming machine I1, a ball-entering means provided at a position where at least a game ball fired in the first direction and a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, and And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means at a position higher than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and a variable means that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the privilege game. And a control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The variable means is changed to a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it becomes more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During execution of the bonus game, the variable means changes the predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position by the variable control means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, and thus has the effect of further improving the interest during the execution of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine I2, the first element favoring means may determine that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The game machine I3 is characterized in that the ratio of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, it is more preferable that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the ratio of entering the ball entry means is increased by the first element advantage-improving means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the privilege game with a high game rate of entering the ball entry means is provided. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively fired in the first direction.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element favoring means is configured to continuously emit the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, rather than continuously firing the game ball in the first direction. A game machine I4 wherein the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2 or I3, it is more likely that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Since the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased by the second element advantage-making means, the player who wants to have more game balls reach the ball entry means must be positively in the second direction. There is an effect that a game ball can be fired.

  In the gaming machine I4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during a specific time period, and the second element advantage means includes a game ball fired in the first direction after the specific time period is started, the predetermined number of times of the first time. It is to suppress reaching the ball entry means until the execution period of the variable operation ends, at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times, the specific period is A gaming machine I5, which is a period during which a game ball fired in the second direction is reachable from the start.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4. That is, the first variable operation in which the variable means is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means has been changed to the first position is executed by the variable control means a first number of times during the specific period. Is done. It is determined by the second element advantage means that the game ball fired in the first direction from the start of the specific period reaches the ball entry means before the execution period of the predetermined number of first variable operations ends. Is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is configured as a period in which the game ball fired in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

  This allows the game ball to be launched in the second direction to reach the ball entry means during execution of the first variable operation a greater number of times than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to enter the ball into the ball entry means can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine I5, the second element advantage-making means is configured such that a period until a game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball-in means is a position where the game ball fired in the second direction is A gaming machine I6 characterized by suppressing a falling speed of a gaming ball fired in the first direction so as to be longer than a period until the ball reaches the entry ball means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I5, the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball-entering means is a period in which the game ball fired in the second direction enters the ball. Since the flowing speed of the game ball fired in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage means so as to be longer than the period until the game ball reaches the means, the game ball fired in the first direction is It is possible to more reliably prevent the vehicle from reaching the ball entry means before the predetermined number of first variable operations is completed. Therefore, firing the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chance of more reliably entering the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine I5 or I6, in the first variable operation, a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is predetermined. The variable means is varied so as to be in a second period, and the first element advantageous means is provided so that a game ball fired in the second direction is transferred to the ball entering means during the second period. And that the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period more easily enters the ball entry means than when it reaches A gaming machine I7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I5 or I6. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is set such that a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is a predetermined second period. Is varied. A game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period, compared to a case where the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period. This makes it easier for the first element advantage means to enter the ball.

  Thereby, when the game ball is fired in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, also in the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball entry means, firing the game ball in the first direction can extend the period during which the player can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball reaching the ball entry means enters the ball entry means when the game ball is fired in the first direction, as compared with the case where the game ball is fired in the second direction. effective.

  In the gaming machine I7, a game ball fired in the first direction can flow down, and a first flow path that allows the flown down game ball to reach the ball-in means from a third direction, and in the second direction A second flow path that allows the launched game balls to flow down, and allows the flowed down game balls to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, wherein the variable means comprises: While being changed to the second position, the upper surface of the game ball is configured to be able to flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. Wherein the ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball from above in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, and the variable means is provided at the second position. In the state where it is variable, the upper part is The first element advantageous means slides the variable means in a direction from the third direction to the fourth direction, thereby causing the variable means to move toward the fourth direction. A gaming machine I8 characterized by being changed from two positions to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I7. That is, the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction by the first flow path. The game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means by the second flow path from a fourth direction different from the third direction. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, a game ball can be played on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball-in means from above, while in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the ball-in means Above is closed by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in a direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantageous means.

  Thereby, the game ball which is fired in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period, is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball from above earlier than the fourth direction side, so that it is fired in the first direction and from the third direction side during the second period. A game ball that has reached the ball entry means can be easily entered. Therefore, the game ball fired in the first direction can more reliably increase the ball entry rate when reaching the ball entry means than the game ball fired in the second direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a game state after the execution of the privilege game, if a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one of the privilege games, Game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game. A gaming machine I8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I8, the gaming ball is set to the ball entry means during the execution of one bonus game, as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game, a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game during execution of the bonus game by paying attention to whether or not to play the game.

<Character J group> (variable attackers in which game balls reaching the same area are likely to win)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which the game ball fired by the firing means can reach, and a first incoming ball provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball. Means, a second ball entry means, a first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball entering, and a game ball reaching the specific area entering the first ball entry means A first position at which it becomes possible and difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second position at which it becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry means and it is possible to enter the second ball entry means. And a variable means that can be changed at least to the first position and the first position based on establishment of a first condition. It is varied to the gaming machine characterized by comprising a variable control means for variably to the second position based on the establishment of the different second condition and the first condition J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the specific area is provided at a position where the game ball fired by the firing means capable of firing the game ball can reach. The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are provided at positions where game balls reaching the specific area can enter. The first privilege is given by the first privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first privilege is granted based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second privilege different from the privilege is given. The variable means makes it possible for the game ball that has reached the specific area to enter the first ball entry means and to enter the second ball entry means with difficulty, and to enter the first ball entry means with difficulty. And a second position at which the ball can enter the second ball entry means. The variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, while the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. Is changed to

  Thereby, according to the variable position of the variable means, it is possible to vary the ball entry means that allows the game ball reaching the specific area to enter the ball, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other on a board, and the variable means is provided with the first ball entry means. And the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance on the board. The variable means is disposed between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with a case where the variable means is separately provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, and a third position where it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit. The variable control means is configured to change the variable means from the third position to the first position based on satisfaction of the first condition. A gaming machine J3 that changes from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of two conditions.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, at least the variable means is configured to be variable between the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter the first and second ball entry means. The variable means is changed by the variable control means from the third position to the first position based on the satisfaction of the first condition, while the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position by the satisfaction of the second condition. It is varied by the variable control means.

  Accordingly, in a state where neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to enter the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit, so that either the first condition or the second condition is used. There is an effect that a game can be played in the expectation that will be established.

  In the gaming machine J3, the first ball entry means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second ball entry means is provided with the first ball entry means with respect to the specific area. The first position is a position at which the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction, and the first position is the first position. The second position is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is the first direction. The gaming machine J4 is a position that is likely to be in a direction different from both the direction of the second direction and the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3. That is, while the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, the second ball entry means is provided in the second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area. Is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be the first direction, while when the variable means is arranged at the second position, the game that has reached the specific area The traveling direction of the ball tends to be the second direction. On the other hand, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be different from any of the first direction and the second direction.

  Thereby, in the first direction and the second direction, the possibility that the game ball that has reached the specific area in the state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied progresses is low, and the first direction and the second direction are different from the first area and the first direction. The configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration from the specific area to the second ball entry means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that a game ball that has progressed from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the first direction is difficult to enter, and the second ball entry means Is a game machine J5 characterized in that a game ball that has advanced from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the second direction is difficult to enter.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that gaming balls that have advanced from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the first direction are unlikely to enter the ball. Since the second ball entry means is configured such that game balls that have advanced from the specific area in a traveling direction other than the second direction are unlikely to enter the ball, the game is played in a state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied. There is an effect that a ball can be prevented from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the variable means includes a first variable member capable of moving in and out on the board, and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first position is such that the first variable member protrudes toward the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second position is the second position; The first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to protrude toward the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the third position is the first variable member and the second variable member. The two variable members are disposed so as to be buried in the board, and the first variable member can guide the game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding from the board. And the second variable member is provided on the board surface. Gaming machine J6, characterized in that to one in which a game ball which has reached the specific area by projecting constituting the flow path inducible into the second ball entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine J, 6 has the following effects in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J1 to J5. That is, the first variable member capable of appearing and retracting on the board and the second variable member different from the first variable member constitute the variable means. In the first position, the first variable member protrudes toward the near side with respect to the board surface when viewed from the front, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. In the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged to protrude forward from the board surface in front view. In the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are arranged to be buried in the board. The first variable member protrudes from the board to form a flow path that can guide the game ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entry means. When the second variable member protrudes from the board surface, a flow path is formed that can guide the game ball reaching the specific area to the second ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball entry means that can enter the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

  In the gaming machine J6, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface, and the first ball entry means is The game ball arrived from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and the game ball arrived from the other direction is difficult to enter the ball, (2) The ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. A gaming machine J7, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J6. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view. The first ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction toward the second ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit in a state where the variable unit is arranged at the third position.

  In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable means changing the third position from the third position based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine J8, comprising: a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed to a first position or the second position a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J6 or J7. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position by a predetermined number of times based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determination means, and thus has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine J8, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game. A type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a game and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times; The gaming machine J9, wherein the first privilege is configured as a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine J9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J8. That is, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game, One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a second variable game that is changed to a second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege includes a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  Thereby, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the second variable game is executed. Therefore, the game is performed by paying attention to the type of the variable game determined by the type determining means. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed a first number of times from the third position to the first position, and in the second variable game, the variable means The gaming machine J10, wherein the number of times is changed from the third position to the second position by a second number smaller than the first number.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position by the first number of times, while in the second variable game, the variable means is changed. Since the means is changed from the third position to the second position by the second number of times smaller than the first number of times, when the first variable game is executed, the first privilege more advantageous than the second privilege is given. In addition, the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position increases. Therefore, there is an effect that the superiority of the first variable game can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in a front view left and right direction on a board, and the variable The means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the first position is such that the variable means is the first ball entry means. The second position is a position where the variable means is close to the second ball entry means, and the third position is a position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine J11, which is located between the game machines.

  According to the gaming machine J11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines J1 to J5. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface. The variable means is configured to be able to change between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means in the left-right direction in front view. When the variable means is located at the first position, the variable means approaches the first ball entry means, while when the variable means is located at the second position, the variable means approaches the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the third position, the variable means is arranged between the first position and the second position.

  Thus, since the position can be switched by a relatively simple operation of moving the variable means to the left and right, there is an effect that the variable operation of the variable means can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine J11, the variable means forms a slope in which a left side surface is inclined downward from the upper right direction in front view to a lower left direction, and a right side surface is inclined in a direction downward from the upper left direction in front view to a lower right direction. The first ball entry means is such that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter, and a game ball arriving from another direction is difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means, and a game ball arriving from another direction. Is configured to be difficult to enter the ball, the first position is a game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means, the side of the second ball entry means Which can flow down from the direction so as to reach the first ball entry means. The second position is such that the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction toward the first ball entry means to the second ball entry means. A gaming machine J12, which is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine J12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J11. That is, the left side surface of the variable means forms a slope in the downward direction from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left direction, and the → side surface of the variable means forms a slope in the lower right direction from the upper left direction in front view. . The first ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction toward the second ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured such that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction toward the second ball entry means to reach the first ball entry means. It becomes possible. When the variable means is disposed at the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction toward the first ball input means to reach the second ball input means. It becomes possible.

  This allows the game ball to enter both the first ball entry device and the second ball entry device simply by causing the game ball to flow down along the inclination of the side surface of the variable device. Can be further simplified.

  In the gaming machine J12, the third position is a distance equal to or greater than the width of one game ball between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means, and the right end of the variable means, A gaming machine J13, wherein a distance equal to or greater than the width of one game ball is provided between the game machine J13 and the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J12, when the variable means is disposed at the third position, the width of one game ball is provided between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means. Since the above distance is vacant and the distance equal to or more than the width of one game ball is provided between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entry means, in the state where the variable means is arranged at the third position. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

<Characteristic K group> (variable in the launch direction until the game ball reaching the specific area enters the attacker)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a game ball fired in the first direction by the launching means; and launching in the second direction A specific area provided at a position where the entered game ball can reach, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, and a game to the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the ball, a first position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position is different from the first position and the ball entry means A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the ball can enter the ball, a third position at which the ball cannot be easily entered into the ball entry means, and based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied, A variable means for varying a predetermined period from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period; The variable means is varied by any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least a variable operation and a second variable operation in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position for the predetermined period. And a variable control means for performing control in such a manner that, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball which is fired in the first direction and reaches the variable means is the second ball. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that a period of time required to enter the ball entry means is shorter than that of a game ball which is fired in two directions and reaches the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means and a game ball fired in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, and a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. . A first position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position different from the first position and at which the ball can enter the ball entry means, and it becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means At least the variable means is configured to be variable at the third position. A first variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and a variable means is changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period. The variable control means controls the variable means to change in any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least the second variable operation. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, a game ball which is fired in the first direction and reaches the variable means enters a ball more than a game ball which is fired in the second direction and reaches the variable means. It is configured such that the period until entering the means is easily shortened.

  Thereby, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a game method for firing a game ball in the first direction to a player who wants to enter the game ball in the ball entry means in a short period of time is provided. While it is possible to select the game method, it is possible to make a player who does not want to immediately enter the game ball into the ball entry means to select a game method of firing the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, during the predetermined period, it is difficult for the game ball fired in the second direction to reach the variable means varying to the first position and enter the ball entering means. A gaming machine K2 characterized by a period of a certain length.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the game ball fired in the second direction reaches the variable means, which has been changed to the first position, and enters the ball entry means for a predetermined period. If the variable means is changed to the first position, unless the ball is fired in the first direction, the game ball is transferred to the ball entry means because the variable length is changed to the first position. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to predict the timing of changing to the first position and to realize the playability of firing the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, a game ball fired in the second direction and reaching the variable means is fired in the first direction and The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is easier to be shorter than the game ball that has reached the variable means, and the game ball fired in the second direction is at the first position during the predetermined period. The gaming machine K3, wherein the length of time is such that it is difficult to reach the variable means that is variable and to enter the ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K2. That is, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball fired in the second direction and reached the variable means is more than the game ball fired in the first direction and reached the variable means. The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is easily shortened. The predetermined period is configured to be a period in which it becomes difficult for the game ball fired in the second direction to reach the variable means that has been changed to the first position and to enter the ball entry means. .

  As a result, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to quickly determine the firing direction in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determining condition in any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, and the variable control means performing a determination based on a specific determination result obtained by the determining means; And a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit. , The variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means is executed by the variable game execution means, so that the game can be performed by paying attention to the result of the judgment by the judgment means. .

  In the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one of the variable games, a first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A state is set, and when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game, the first game state is set as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A game machine K5 further comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game ends. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the execution of the variable game is stopped. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after completion, attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means. Game during execution of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the variable game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during execution of the variable game is a first variable game. And the variable means is provided with a variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game controlled by the second variable operation at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game. The first variable game is determined at a first rate by the variable game type determining means, while the second variable game whose variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is higher than the first rate by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined by the ratio of 2, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction to enter the ball entry means when the variable game is executed. . That is, it is possible to provide a game property that predicts a launch direction in which the variable game type determination means determines the type of the game, which is easy to enter the ball entry means, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine K6, a variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and variable ball-in means And a second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable game execution means, wherein the variable game execution means sets the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game. The variable state is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and the variable pitching means is changed to the first state during the predetermined period in the second state. A gaming machine K7 wherein the variable control means controls the variable means to perform a variable operation in one variable operation or the second variable operation.

  According to the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K6. That is, the variable ball-in means is configured to be variable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is provided by the second privilege providing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball-in means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times in accordance with the type of the variable game. At the same time, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means such that the variable means performs the variable operation in the first variable operation or the second variable operation in a predetermined period of the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state Therefore, even if it is not possible to enter the game ball into the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, an opportunity is provided to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress discouragement of a player who has not been able to enter the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine K7, the first variable game has a larger number of times that the variable ball-in means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game than the second variable game. A gaming machine K8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, when the first variable game is set, the variable ball-in means changes from the second state to the first state during one variable game rather than the second variable game. Since the number of times the game is played increases, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of becoming the first variable game.

<Characteristic L group> (During the V round, an effect of estimating the direction in which the V prize is likely to be won and firing a game ball)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a game ball fired in the first direction by the launching means; and launching in the second direction A specific area provided at a position where the hit game ball can reach, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, and a variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern. And a game ball that is fired in the second direction and reaches the specific area based on a predetermined first condition being satisfied as a variable pattern set for the variable means. A first variable pattern is determined such that a game ball that has been fired in the first direction and has reached the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a second condition that is different from the first condition. Based on the conclusion, the first A second variable pattern is determined in which game balls that are fired in the second direction and reach the specific area are easier to enter the ball entry means than game balls that have been fired to the specific area. A variable pattern determination unit, and a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first condition or the second condition. A gaming machine L1 comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means and a game ball fired in the second direction can reach. Ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached the specific area can enter. The variable means is configured to be variably operable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition, the variable pattern determination means sets the first ball in the second direction to be more than the game ball that has reached the specific area. While the first variable pattern in which the game ball fired in the direction and reaches the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means is determined, the second condition different from the first condition is established. The second variable pattern in which the game balls fired in the second direction and reach the specific area are easier to enter the ball entry means than the game balls fired in the first direction and reach the specific area is variable. It is determined by the pattern determining means. Based on the first condition or the second condition being satisfied, the specific effect of the effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  This makes it difficult to determine whether the variable means is changed in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern from the presentation mode. It is possible to realize a game property of firing a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern is such that a game ball fired in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied can enter the ball entry means, and A game ball fired in the second direction during a specific period becomes difficult to enter the ball-entering means, and the second variable pattern includes a game ball of the specific period after the second condition is satisfied. It is difficult for game balls fired in the first direction to enter the ball entry means, and game balls fired in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means. The gaming machine L2, wherein the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at least during the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, when the first variable pattern is set, a game ball fired in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied becomes a holiday of entering the ball entry means, and a specific period of the specific period. During this time, a game ball fired in the second direction becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, the game ball fired in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied becomes difficult to enter the ball-entering unit, and the game ball during the specific period is The game balls fired in two directions can enter the ball entry means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the specific period.

  As a result, it is possible to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to be easily entered, and to realize the gaming property of firing the game ball during the specific period in the predicted direction, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine L3, comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or 2, the variable pattern determining unit determines the specific pattern based on the determination by the determining unit that is performed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Since the variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means in the determined variable pattern is executed by the variable game execution means, each time the judgment by the judgment means is executed, the game is expected to have a specific judgment result. Has the effect that it can be performed.

  In the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one of the variable games, a first game advantageous to the player is set as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A state is set, and when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game, the first game state is set as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A game machine L4 further comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game ends. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the execution of the variable game is stopped. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the completion, the game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game. A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not to play. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the variable game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game is a first variable game. And a variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. While one variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first ratio, the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is higher than the first ratio by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined by the second ratio, when the variable game is executed, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction to enter the ball entry means. it can. That is, it is possible to provide a game property that predicts a launch direction in which the variable game type determination means determines the type of the game, which is easy to enter the ball entry means, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine L5, a variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-in means And a second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable game execution means, wherein the variable game execution means sets the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game. A variable operation for changing from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and a variable operation in which the variable means is changed by the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means. And a game machine L6 for executing an operation.

  According to the gaming machine L6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L5. That is, the variable ball-in means is configured to be variable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is provided by the second privilege providing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball-in means. A variable operation for changing the variable ball-in means from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game during the execution of the variable game, and a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means Is performed by the variable game execution means.

  Thereby, even if it is not possible to enter the game ball into the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discouragement of a player who could not enter the ball.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit. And information indicating which one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect has been avoided by the avoidance means. A game machine L7, comprising: a notification effect executing means for executing an information effect.

  According to the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution unit is avoided by the avoidance unit. Based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect has been avoided by the avoiding means, a notification effect for notifying information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the notification effect executing means.

  With this, it is possible to specify the firing direction that makes it easier to enter the ball entry means by executing the notification effect, so that it is possible to play the game in expectation of the notification effect being executed. effective.

<Feature M group> (Attackers that are easy to win vary depending on the movable position from the start to the end of the movement of the attacker)
A first ball entry means into which game balls can enter, a second ball entry means, a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means, and a game at the first ball entry means A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, and a predetermined means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Variable control means for performing control so as to be variable during a period, wherein the second ball entry means is configured to change the variable position means in accordance with a variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine M1 wherein the ease of entering a game ball that has reached the variable means is variable.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the variable means is variable between a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means and a second position at which game balls cannot enter the first ball entry means. It is configured to be possible. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The ease with which the game ball reaching the variable means enters the second ball entry means varies according to the variable position during which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

  Thereby, depending on the variable position of the variable means, it is variable whether it is easy to enter the first ball entry means or to easily enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, pay attention to the variable position of the variable means. To play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1, the second ball entry means is a game that reaches the variable means in a state in which the variable means varies a specific range from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that a ball can enter.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the game ball reaching the variable means in a state in which the variable means varies the specific range from the second position to the first position. Becomes possible to enter the second ball entry means, so that the game can be played by devising the game ball to reach the variable means while the variable means is changing the specific range. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured to be a range that does not include at least the first position. When the variable position of the variable means is out of the specific range, the second ball entry means sets the variable means A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the game ball that has reached (1) becomes difficult to enter.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured to include at least the first position, and when the variable position of the variable unit is outside the specific range, the variable unit Is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, so that the timing at which game balls are fired can be further devised.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the variable means A first inclined member that is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and forms a slope that allows a game ball to flow down in a direction in which the first ball entry means is provided; A second inclined member that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball entry means is provided, and wherein the first position is The game ball that has reached the variable means is a position where it is easy for the game ball to flow down the first inclined member, and the game ball that has reached the variable means is difficult to flow down the second inclined member. It is difficult to flow down the first inclined member and the second inclined member. Gaming machine M4, which is a position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. A first inclined member that is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and forms a slope that allows a game ball to flow down in a direction in which the first ball entry means is provided; At least the variable means is constituted by a second inclined member that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the two ball entry means are provided. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, the game ball that has reached the variable means is more likely to flow down the first inclined member, and is less likely to flow down the second inclined member, while the variable means is in the second position. When it is arranged at the position, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first inclined member and the second inclined member.

  This allows the game balls to flow down to the respective ball entry means by the inclination formed by the respective inclined members, so that complicated control or the like for guiding the game balls to the respective ball entry means is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be able to move in and out of the board, and the first position is the first inclined member and the near side of the first inclined member in front view. And the second inclined member provided at the second position is arranged so as to protrude toward the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the second position is the first inclined member and the second inclined member. A game machine M5 characterized in that both are arranged buried in the board.

  According to the gaming machine M5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M4. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to move up and down on the board. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, both the first inclined member and the second inclined member provided on the near side of the front side with respect to the first inclined member with respect to the board surface are on the near side of the front side with respect to the board surface. It becomes a protruding arrangement.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to change the ball entry means that can enter the ball by simple control of causing the variable means to move in and out.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means may be a first variable pattern in which the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position is likely to increase. A variable pattern determining unit that determines one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position is more likely to be smaller than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine M6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position is large as a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means. The variable pattern determination means selects one variable from among a plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern that is easy to be changed and a second variable pattern that is more likely to be changed from the second position to the first position more frequently than the first variable pattern. Since the pattern is determined, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

  In the gaming machine M6, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the specific condition being determined during one execution period based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine M7, comprising: a variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is established the number of times.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M6, based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means that is performed based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, during one execution period, Since the variable game in which the specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means, the game can be performed every time the judgment by the judgment means is executed, expecting a specific judgment result. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M7, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the specific condition is satisfied, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, A variable game type determining unit that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining unit when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M7, the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is satisfied, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable gaming executing means. One of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which a second variable pattern is determined by a variable pattern determination unit when a specific condition is satisfied is determined by a variable game type determination unit. Is determined, the number of times that the second ball entry means becomes easy to enter the ball varies according to the type of the variable game, so that there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine M8, the first variable game is such that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one of the variable games is more likely to be satisfied than in the second variable game.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, in the first variable game, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one variable game is easily reduced as compared with the second variable game. In such a case, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being discouraged by the small number of times the specific condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic N group> (During an electric support, an open pattern that is difficult to win a power chute is more likely to obtain more award balls than an open pattern that easily wins a power chew.)
Entering means into which a game ball can enter, privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means, and a game ball into the entering means A variable position that can be changed to a first position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry device than the first position, and a predetermined first condition that is satisfied. A variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a predetermined variable pattern; a first variable pattern as the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means; And a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that facilitates a game ball to enter the ball entry means. Said variable means in a pattern While being controlled, the second condition that is advantageous for player, the gaming machine is characterized in that the easily obtained than while it is being controlled by said second variable pattern N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. The variable means is changed to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and to a second position at which game balls cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means changes in a predetermined variable pattern based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition. A plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern controlled by the variable control means. One variable pattern is determined from the variable patterns by the variable pattern determination means. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition that is advantageous to the player is more easily satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

  Thereby, the variable pattern expected by the player can be made different depending on whether priority is given to ease of establishment of the second condition or priority to ease of entering the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is increased from the start to the end of one variable pattern, compared to the second variable pattern. Wherein the second variable pattern is a total of a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period from the start to the end of one variable pattern, compared to the first variable pattern. The gaming machine N2 is configured to be longer.

  According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position during the period from the start to the end of one variable pattern is larger than that of the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern is longer than the first variable pattern.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it can be easily distinguished whether the pattern is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern depending on the number of times of being changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, a game ball can enter, and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. The second ball entry means provided at a position where the changed game ball is easily guided by the variable means, and the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine N3, comprising: a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2. That is, a game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable device is easily guided by the variable device while the variable device is variably operating a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. The second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, a second privilege greater than the predetermined privilege is provided by the second benefit provision means.

  By setting the first variable pattern, it is possible to obtain more opportunities to acquire the second privilege, so that the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the first variable pattern is set. Can be.

  In the gaming machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball, and the variable means variably operates the predetermined range. When it is, it is easy to reflect the flowing game ball to the specific area, the specific area, the at least the variable means in the first position, or in the state where the second position is arranged in the second position A gaming machine N4, which is an area where a game ball flowing down to a variable means is difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N3. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball. When the variable means is variably operating in a predetermined range, it is easy to reflect a flowing game ball to a specific area. The specific area is configured such that at least the game ball that has flowed down to the variable means in a state where the variable means is located at the first position or the second position is difficult to reach.

  This allows the game ball to be devised to reach the variable means while the predetermined range is being variably operated, thereby allowing the player to play the game, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, a first discriminator capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and a first discriminator determined by the first discriminator. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, and a second determination based on the establishment of at least a predetermined determination condition different from the ball entering the ball entry means. A second determination unit capable of performing a determination, wherein the variable control unit determines that the first condition is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, and the variable pattern determination is performed. A gaming machine N5 for controlling the variable means to change according to the variable pattern determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4. That is, a first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the game ball having entered the ball entry unit, and a game is determined based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit. Privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the ball entry into the ball entry unit. The first condition is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained by the second determination means, and the variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means is changed by the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means.

  As a result, the first discrimination is performed by entering the ball into the ball entry means, so that the game ball is transferred to the ball entry means while the variable means is being changed in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. There is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the ball enters.

  In the gaming machine N5, as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a first privilege game in which a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to a first gaming state; And a second bonus game in which the gaming state after the execution of the game is completed is set to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. A bonus game type determining means, wherein the first gaming state is less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N5. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first bonus game in which the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the first gaming state, and after the execution of the bonus game is completed. And a second bonus game in which the second gaming state is set to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The first gaming state is configured to be less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than the second gaming state.

  Thus, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means.

  In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times that the variable unit is changed to the first position is increased from the start to the end of one variable pattern as compared with the second variable pattern. Wherein the second variable pattern is a total of a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period from the start to the end of one variable pattern, compared to the first variable pattern. Is configured to be longer, and the first game state is the second variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means when the second determination result is the second determination result by the second determination means. The gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the determined ratio is higher than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N6. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position during the period from the start to the end of one variable pattern is larger than that of the second variable pattern. In the first game state, the determination ratio of the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means when the second determination result is the second determination result by the second determination means is higher than in the second game state.

  Thus, in the first game state, the first discrimination can be efficiently executed by the game balls entering the ball entry means relatively frequently. In addition, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first game state, the second condition is easily satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable pattern.

  In the gaming machine N7, a game ball can enter, and the game reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a ball is easily guided by the variable means, and a second ball which is larger than the predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting the privilege, and a first discrimination by the first discriminating means when the game ball fired in the first direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter. And the first direction based on the result of the second determination in the second game state and the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means. Fire a game ball in a second direction different from And a suggestion effect execution means for executing a second direction suggestion effect indicating that the game ball is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball. A gaming machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N7. That is, a game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable device is easily guided by the variable device while the variable device is variably operating a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. The second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, a second privilege greater than a predetermined privilege is provided by the second privilege provision means. At a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball, a specific ball entry means for performing a first discrimination by the first discrimination means when the game ball enters the ball is provided. In the second game state, a second determination result is obtained, and based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means, it is suggested that the game ball is fired in a second direction different from the first direction. Is performed by the suggestion effect execution means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter.

  Thereby, when the first variable pattern is determined, there is an effect that an opportunity to acquire the second privilege can be reliably given to the player.

<Feature O group> (Generates navigation in the direction of electric support when disadvantageous electric support opening pattern)
A launching means capable of firing a game ball, a ball-in means provided in a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction by the firing means can enter, and a game ball enters the ball-in means Privilege providing means for providing a predetermined privilege based on the above, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Variable means that can be changed to a second position, variable control means that controls the variable means to change in a predetermined variable pattern based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and variable control means thereof A plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern controlled by the variable means. One of the variable patterns A variable pattern determining unit for determining a variable pattern, and a suggestion effect indicating launching of a game ball in the specific direction can be executed while at least the variable unit is controlled by the first variable pattern by the variable control unit. Gaming machine O1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine O1, a ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction by a launch means capable of firing a game ball can enter the ball. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the ball-receiving means. The variable means is configured to be variable to a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which game balls cannot enter the ball entry means than the first position. I have. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means such that the variable means varies in a predetermined variable pattern based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable combination pattern in which game balls enter the ball-entering means more easily than the first variable pattern, as the variable patterns controlled by the variable control means. One variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means from the variable patterns. While at least the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern by the variable control means, a suggestion effect indicating launching of a game ball in a specific direction is executed by the effect execution means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can be given the maximum opportunity to enter the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine O1, second ball entry means provided at a position where game balls fired in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter, and game balls enter the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege based on the ball, a first gaming state in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a first gaming state Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the second game state in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the effect execution means is configured such that the second game state is The gaming machine O2, wherein the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means in a set state.

  According to the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter the ball. The second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which the specific condition is easily established and a second gaming state in which the specific condition is more difficult to be established than the first gaming state. One game state is set by the game state setting means. The suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the fact that the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means in a state where the second game state is set.

  Thereby, since the firing direction of the game ball can be made different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of distinguishing the firing direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine O2, a discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means or the second ball-in means, and a discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming machine O3 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O2, a specific determination result is obtained by the determination performed by the determination unit that is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit. Since the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the fact that the above has been established, it is possible to expect that a specific determination result is expected each time the determination is performed by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine O3, the gaming state setting means sets one gaming state by establishing that the predetermined condition is satisfied when an end condition of execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means is satisfied. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O3, the fact that the condition for ending the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is satisfied is determined as a predetermined setting condition, and the game state setting means sets the one gaming state. Is set, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the game state set after the end of the privilege game.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes a predetermined variable range during the change from the second position to the first position, the variable means may be more than the predetermined privilege. A gaming machine O5 characterized by forming a state in which three benefits are easily provided.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes the predetermined variable range during the change from the second position to the first position, the predetermined Since a state in which the third points more than the special privilege are easily given is formed, it is possible to play the game by devising the game ball to reach the variable means while changing the predetermined variable range. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O5, a position where a game ball can enter and where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is changing the predetermined movable range. And a third privilege granting means for granting the third privilege based on a game ball having entered the third ball entering means. Gaming machine O6.

  According to the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O5. That is, the third variable means capable of entering the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means varies the predetermined movable range. . The third privilege is given by the third privilege granting means based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball, and the variable means varies the predetermined movable range. In this case, it is easy to reflect the flowing game ball to the specific area, and the specific area is in a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. A game machine O7, wherein the game ball O7 is an area where the game balls flowing down to the variable means are difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine O7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O6. That is, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball reaching a specific area on the board can enter the ball. When the predetermined movable range is variably operated, the flowing game balls are easily reflected to the specific area by the variable means. The specific area is a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position and the game ball flowing down to the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The game ball that has flowed down becomes difficult to reach.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the path of the game ball, and thus has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area reachable by the gaming ball fired by the launching means, and a game reaching the specific area. A first privilege is provided at a position where a ball can enter, a second ball entry means, and a first privilege is given based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. A first privilege granting means, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, A game ball that has reached the region can enter the first ball entry means, and a first position where it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and it becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry means, A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position at which the second ball entry means can enter the ball; Variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position based on establishment of a first condition and changing the variable means to the second position based on establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. Prepare.
The gaming machine of Technical Thought 2 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, wherein the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other on the board. The variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the variable unit includes the first position, the second position, the first ball entry unit, and the second entry unit. A third position at which it is difficult to enter a ball in any one of the ball means; and at least a variable position control means, wherein the variable control means sets the variable means based on the establishment of the first condition. The third position is changed to the first position, and the third position is changed to the second position based on the satisfaction of the second condition.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the first ball entry means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area, and The ball means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the first position is such that a traveling direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is The second position is a position at which the advancing direction of the game ball reaching the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is a position at which the game ball reaches the specific area. This is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be different from any of the first direction and the second direction.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the variable means includes a first variable member capable of moving in and out on a board, and the first variable member. And a different second variable member, wherein the first position is such that the first variable member protrudes to the near side with respect to the board surface in front view, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. The second position is an arrangement in which the first variable member is buried in the board surface and the second variable member protrudes forward from the board surface in front view. The first variable member constitutes a flow path that can guide a game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding from a board surface, and the second variable member The game ball reaching the specific area by projecting from the board It constitutes a flow path inducible to the second ball entrance means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area in which the game ball fired by the firing means can reach, and a game ball reaching the specific area enter the ball. A first ball entry means provided at a possible position, a second ball entry means, and a first privilege for providing a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. Granting means, second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and the specific area has been reached. A first position at which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and which is difficult to enter the second ball entry means; and a first position at which it is difficult to enter the first ball entry means; and (2) a variable position that can be changed at least to a second position where the ball can be entered into the ball entry means; It is varied to the first position based on the establishment of 1 conditions, and a variable control means for variably to the second position based on the establishment of the different second condition from the first condition.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are separated from each other by a predetermined distance on the board surface. The variable means is disposed between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.
Thereby, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with a case where the variable means is separately provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, and the first input. And a third position in which it is difficult to enter the ball into both the ball means and the second ball entry means. The variable control means sets the variable means to the first position. The third position is varied from the third position to the first position based on the satisfaction of a condition, and is varied from the third position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the second condition.
Accordingly, in a state where neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to enter the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit, so that either the first condition or the second condition is used. There is an effect that a game can be played in the expectation that will be established.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area. Wherein the second ball entry means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the first position has reached the specific area. The second ball is a position at which the traveling direction of the game ball is likely to be the first direction, and the second position is a position at which the traveling direction of the game ball reaching the specific region is easily the second direction, The third position is a position at which the advancing direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be different from the first direction and the second direction.
Thereby, in the first direction and the second direction, the possibility that the game ball reaching the specific area progresses in a state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied is reduced. The configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration from the specific area to the second ball entry means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the variable means includes a first variable member capable of performing a retracting operation on the board. , The first variable member and a second variable member different from the first variable member, wherein the first position is such that the first variable member protrudes toward the near side with respect to the board surface when viewed from the front, and The second position is such that the first variable member is buried in the board surface and the second variable member protrudes forward from the board surface in front view. The first variable member constitutes a flow path that can guide a game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding with respect to a board surface. The second variable member protrudes with respect to the board surface so that the specific area Reaching the game ball and constitutes a possible flow path directed to the second ball entrance means.
Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball entry means that can enter the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
111 Payout control device (first privilege granting means, second privilege granting means)
650La Left specific winning opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Ra right specific winning opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Lb, 650Rb movable member (variable means, first variable member, second variable member)
658 rotating member (variable means)
S1021 Variable control means

Claims (5)

Firing means capable of firing game balls,
A specific area to which a game ball fired by the firing means can reach;
A first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball reaching the specific area can enter the ball, a second ball entry means,
A first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means,
A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry device;
A first position at which the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the first ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and difficult to enter the first ball entry means And a second position at which the ball can enter the second ball entry means, and at least a variable position,
Variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position based on establishment of a first condition, and changing the variable means to the second position based on establishment of a second condition different from the first condition; A gaming machine comprising: The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance on the board,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be at least variable between the first position, the second position, and a third position where it is difficult to enter the first and second ball entry means. That has been
The variable control means changes the variable means from the third position to the first position based on the first condition being satisfied, and changes the third position from the third position based on the second condition being satisfied. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is changed to two positions. The first ball entry means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area,
The second ball entry means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area,
The first position is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction,
The second position is a position at which the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction,
The said 3rd position is a position where the advancing direction of the game ball which reached the said specific area | region tends to become a different direction from either of the said 1st direction and the said 2nd direction. Gaming machine. The variable means comprises a first variable member capable of moving in and out on the board, and a second variable member different from the first variable member,
The first position is such that the first variable member protrudes forward with respect to the board surface in a front view, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface,
The second position is such that the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member projects toward the near side of the board surface in front view,
The first variable member constitutes a flow path capable of guiding a game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding from a board surface,
The said 2nd variable member comprises the flow path which can guide the game ball which reached the said specific area | region by projecting with respect to a board surface to the said 2nd ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 4.

Images